






TTT* *4 

























• ^ 






i, V T* A 



^oV* 




%<** .vSHfc *^ ■•- 



^ * spiffing '„ v: 




■^ 












^°* 




.<? -^ 








THE 



AMERICAN SYSTEM 



OF 



ENGLISH SYNTAX, 



DEVELOPING 



THE CONSTRUCTIVE PRINCIPLES 



OF 



THE ENGLISH PHRENOD OR LANGUAGE, 



AND IMPRESSING THEM ON THE MEMORY BY PICTORIAL, AND SCENICAL 

DEMONSTRATION, THUS ENABLING THE ADULT AT HOME, AND THE 

CHILD AT SCHOOL, TO ACQUIRE, IN A FEW MONTHS, A BETTER 

KNOWLEDGE OF SYNTAX BY THE AMERICAN SYSTEM 

THAN THEY CAN EVER ACQUIRE BY THE 

BRITISH. 



3s it more difficult to teach truth than error? and is it more useful to learn 
error than truth? 



BY JAMES 'BROWN. 

•l 

PHILADELPHIA: 

PUBLISHED BY J. BLACKMARR. 



hk x 



1837. 



*$s 



Entered according to act of Congress, in the year 1837, by JAMES 
BROWN, in the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Eastern 
District of Pennsylvania. 



c/^.2/ 



BROWN & SINQUET, PRINTERS. 



TO 



oiisatviB& So w^&ais$> m> ®* 



VICE ESiOlTOST 



OF THE 

Sltttbcrsttg of 3Pentisglftanfa- 

Sir: 

It is beyond doubt that English Grammar has been in an un- 
settled state from its commencement to the present period. And al- 
though it is not my design to enumerate the various injurious effects of 
this fugitive state of so important a branch of education, yet it may not 
be improper to remark that one of these results is the frequent change 
which teachers feel justified in making upon a mere possibility of pro- 
curing an improved Grammar. Our schools are almost quarterly dis- 
turbed by the introduction of a new system of prating about nouns, and 
verbs. The people of our common country have long felt the bad ef- 
fects of this perpetuity in the change of a book which attempts the 
developement of a popular science. Nor can they be ignorant of the 
fact that the unsoundness of the British system of English philology, is 
the primary cause of this alternate adoption, and rejection which have for 
years distracted parents, children, and teachers upon the subject of the 
true structure of their vernacular tongue. I have long been satisfied 
that nothing but a sovereign remedy for the disease of this old British 
theory can arrest the constant change which the numerous attempts 
to improve this system enable teachers to make : and I have long 



IV DEDICATION. 

been satisfied that this remedy is a full removal of this British work of 
defect, error, absurdity and contradiction, from our schools, from our 
libraries, and from our affections, by a substitution of a system which can 
be inducted into its place under the sanction of philological truth, and 
under the guardianship of one whose soundness of judgment, depth of 
erudition, and love of country, will induce the learned to examine, 
and others to confide. That pride of opinion, attachment of habit, 
and belief in the adequateness of the British system, will yield at once, 
is an event bordering too much upon a miracle, to be expected in these 
days. On the contrary, should these stern attributes not array them- 
selves against this undertaking, their neutrality would commence a new 
epoch in human nature, and in human events. 

Nothing so effectually prevents improvement as a belief of present 
perfection. It is observed by Mr. Murray that little improvement in 
English Grammar can be expected at so late a period of the science. 
While, sir, I have ever felt perfectly willing that Mr. Murray should 
enjoy his own opinions on the subject of English panology, I have ne- 
ver been inclined so far to participate in his enjoyment as to subscribe 
to their doctrines. The court of chance, condition, or fate, has decid- 
ed that I should meet Mr. Murray in o^en combat, and withstand him 
page for page. Whether this verdict is to be viewed as the penalty of 
the crime of venturing to differ in opinion from the distinguished 
champion of the British principles of English philology, or whether it 
should be considered an appointment to bring the enslaved child from 
literary bondage, must be solved by time itself which leaves no blank 
in the history of man. Be that as it may, I have yielded to the man- 
date of this tribunal from which it seemed to me, no appeal would lie. 
I had commenced my exposition of the unsoundness of the British 
System, before the private virtues, public worth, and rare learning of 
Mr. Murray, were connected with the memory of the dead. His exit, 
like that of every great, and good man, has hallowed the works of his 
hands — it has raised his erudition into a monument of fame, which 
will never crumble beneath the pen of the critic, nor suffer from the 
lapse of time, Nor shall my hand be raised to pluck one particle of 



DEDICATION. V 

granite from the imperishable pile. But while I wish this memento to 
the fame of a distinguished scholar, to endure without change, I re- 
joice in the rescue of that philological corpse which lay be- 
neath the monumental mass of this 'great man's literary glory. Sir, 
do I seem affected ? It is natural that I should feel — the dead body 
which I have for years toiled to remove from beneath this tower, was a 
near, and dear relative of my vernacular tongue! Having at length 
made the rescue, I have presented, under your protection, the lifeless 
mass to my country for reanimation ; — her touch can make the dead 
corpse live. And I entreat her not to withhold it — let him that is now 
dead, sit up, and begin to speak — let him teach the tender vines which 
now hang in graceful festoons upon the branches of the tree of science, 
to wind their course up to its celestial summit. Y< s, if into our 
republican Eden, this tree has been transplanted, let us not slumber 
while banqueting upon the rich gums which exude from its trunk — 
rather, let us beautify its boughs with American flowers, enrich the 
soil where it stands, and sweeten the fruit which it yields. 

May your life be as long as your feelings are generous ; may your 
future days be as happy as you w past ones have been useful, and may 
your setting sun be as resplendent, and serene as your earthly career 
has been honorable, and exemplary. 

With feelings of gratitude for the honor of being permitted to sub- 
scribe myself your most obedient, and humble servant, 

THE AUTHOR. 



APPROVERS OF THE SYSTEM. 



Philadelphia. 

Dr. S. B. Wylie, Professor of Languages in Pennsylvania University 

Rev. S. W. Crawford, Principal of the Academy connected with the 
University. 

C. J. Ingersoll, Roberts Vaux, Wm. Meredith, D. P. Brown, Dr. W 
C Brinckle, Dr. A. Comstock, Thomas A. Taylor, Mr. Slack, Mr. Good- 
fellow, David Maclure, Thomas M. Raser, E. Fouse, S. H. Wilson, 
Mr. Trego, Mr. Depuy, Mr. Ashton, Mr. Anderson, John Saunderson, 
J. M. Duncan, John Erhart, Dr. F. Plummer, &c. &c. 

Pittsburg. — R. N. Smith, John N. M'Nivins, Thomas H. Harris. . 

Harrisburg. — James Maginnis, S. Douglass, A. T. Dean, A. L. 
Keagy, J. D. Rupp. 



New York. 



De Witt Clinton, E. Nott, President of Union College ; Professor 
Yates, Union College ; Rev. Samuel B. Blatchford, Rev. John Chester, 
Rev. C. G. Somers, Rev. D. H. Barnes, Rev. C. Schaeffer, Rev. Solomon 
Brown, Rev. D. Parker, C. M. Thayer, Charles Spaulding, L. S. 
Lownsbury. 

Utica. — Charles Barlett, William Barbour, Eu ridge Whiffen, G. 
Comstock, Wm. Williams, L. Bayley, E. Ames, (teachers.) 

Ithaca — Wm. Irving, George C. Freer, M. Baird, G. D. Beers, Isaac 
Day, A G. Dunning, K. Hulin, Mr. Davis. 

Homer. — Samuel B. Woolworth. 

Cazenovia. — Daniel M'Ewen, Daniel E. Burhans. 









Maryland. 

Rev. John Findlav, James Gould, Mr. Stewart, S. Jones, Mr. Pack- 
ard, J. Dyke, Mr. Mitts, Wm. Wickes, E. Bennett, J. V. Berry, D. H. 
Bingham, David C. Rosco, C. Coleman, J. Brown. 

Mount St. Mary's Seminary. — Rev. James Lynch, J. Butler, John 
H. M'Caffery, James Curny, Mathew Taylor, Barnard O. Cavanagh, 
John M'Clasky, Edward Sourin, Edward Collins, Thomas Butler, (all 
professors.) 

District of Columbia. 
Rev. Thomas Wheat, Benjamin Hallowell, John R. Pierpoint, Mr. 



Kentucky. 
»lton, R. Fie: 

( Recommendations, at the close of the book*) 



S. J. Anderson, James Holton, R. Fleming, James Fleming, B. F 
Reeves. 






PREFACE. 



Even a superficial observer of human affairs must be satisfied that 
the ease, accuracy, despatch, and safety with which the transactions of 
life are conducted, depend much upon the degree of skill which men pos- 
sess in the use of language. Who has not found that many of the difficul- 
ties which distract society by setting member against member, arise 
from a want of that skill in language, which is necessary to define the 
conditions of those translations that lie treasured up in words ? It 
becomes every man, and woman, therefore, to understand, critically, 
the language of their own country — and as an incentive to that careful 
attention which is necessary to such an understanding, let each one 
reflect upon the advantages of being able to use this instrument with 
ease, propriety, and despatch. 

In the business of life, language is invaluable; how important, then, 
is a correct knowledge of it. In social intercourse, language is dear to all ; 
how desirable, then, is that skill which enables one to use it with all 
the ease with which he can move the fingers of his hands. In the 
higher walks of life, language holds an elevated rank ; how important, 
then, to the lady, and gentleman, is a refined acquaintance with it. 
And to parents, who should ever superintend the education of their 
children, a philosophic knowledge of language is a blessing indeed. 

Nor is it of little importance to this nation, that her youth should be 
early, and thoroughly instructed in the principles of the English tongue. 
Too little stress is laid upon the education of her children. Youth is 
the progressive state of both mind, and body ; and if either is neglected 
here, it never attains that height in excellence to which our species are 
capable of ascending. The proper nourishment for both, while in this 
state, is generous, and constant action; and in exact proportion to the 
use of this, will be the strength of the body, and the capability of the soul. 



VI11 PREFACE. 

Children, as such, are passed by as of no real value to a nation 
— the fact, that from these young saplings are soon to be selected the 
pillars of the country, is rarely considered in its proper light, even by 
the American community. 

Youth is the season designed by nature for the formation of the 
mind — the expansion of the soul. But man, mistaken man, has con- 
tradicted this, and thus brought himself to a state so feeble that he can 
hardly secure his rights, or enjoy his freedom ! It is not pretended 
that American children are deprived of schools ; but it is verily be- 
lieved, that they nearly waste their precious childhood by a false system 
of teaching. Is it too late for reform ? If not, let it be commenced in 
the primary schools — let the language be understood by the teachers, 
and by them thoroughly taught to their pupils. Let the institutions in 
which youth complete their education, give attention to their own 
tongue: too much time is devoted to other languages. American 
statesmen must be acquainted with their own language, or this republic 
is of short duration. Even the constitution of the United States can- 
not be understood by two impartial statesmen in the same way* 

To the man of circumscribed views, innovation seems to imply a 
contempt for all former systems, and a total want of respect for their 
authors. But, he who has seen the clouds of literary night dissipate 
before the sun of improvement, the region of science grow lighter, and 
lighter, and the horizon of truth extend from time to time, by repeated 
changes, will soon overcome his attachment to absurd forms, and 
gladly promote that species of innovation which tends to build system 
upon truth, and philosophy. 

The author of this work respects the various systems of English 
Grammar : he regards them as so many stepping stones by which the 
science has been brought to its present height of excellence. He re- 
spects their authors as men, and especially as the founders of so grand 
a commencement. He respects the memory of Mr. Murray, for the 
good he has done in the Republic of letters. So far from holding his 
shade in contempt, or his work in derision, he would fire his system 
with the sparks struck from the collision of its conflicting principles; 



he would deposite its ashes in a golden urn, and preserve them as a me- 
mento of its worth. 

The American Grammar, he is not insensible will oppose the vrisdom 
of the learned, and the practice of years. But, it should be remember- 
ed that systems, the growth of ages, have been overturned, and that 
principles, gray with centuries, have been found a delusive chimera. All 
that relates to man, is matter of progression: we see the commence- 
ment of Christianity in mere rituals, and symbols : we find its perfec- 
tion in Calvary's Crimsoned Top. 

Are you ready to reject this work because you have been brought up 
at the feet of Murray ? remember him who was brought up at those of 
Gamaliel; listen to the cry of the Christians, and be reminded of Paul's 
journey to Damascus : education had drawn a film over his eyes ; and 
a miracle was necessary to restore his sight. 

From the dictatorial attitude of the English literati, this production 
may seem an infringement on the rights which they have so long 
claimed, and which this country has too long granted. It is remarked 
by European writers, that English literature should be a model for the 
literati in America, until this country produces a Newton, an Addison, 
&c. We confess a deep regard for the shades of these illustrious men : 
but we should sooner build sepulchres to England's ancient prophets, 
than believe in her living ones. Where can stronger claims be laid 
to philological legislation, than in a country, distinguished for freedom, 
and power of speech ? 

In the British system of Grammar, the sense is either lost by the 
use of improper terms, or enveloped in arbitrary rules, definitions, and 
exceptions. Indeed, the whole system resembles a machine, hastily 
contrived, possessing no grand movements ; too complicated, too 
feeble in most of its parts, and, in general, acting upon wrong princi- 
ples. The author of this work, therefore, after mature examination of 
the European, has ventured to introduce new materials, and new 
principles ; and to complete the remedy, he has extended his system to 
the relation of one assemblage of words to another assemblage. This 
work, therefore, is not only made a means for teaching the mere child- 



like relation of one word to another word, but an instrument for pre- 
senting that manly mental, subtle coincidence, vibrating between the 
relative groups of the words which compose the sentence. This part 
of the American System is called graduation, and treats of words in 
their collective action, their collective bearing, and in their collective im- 
port — and, while it may be clearly comprehended even by the minds 
of children; it is not unworthy the close attention of men, of scholars, 
of philosophers. Graduation consists in dividing a sentence into sec- 
tions, or groups, ascertaining their true constructive relation, learning 
their exact significant characters, and referring the inferior sections to 
their respective superiors. This Exercise urges the pupil to trace out 
the precise connection of the sections, by following the filaments which 
produce it; and thus fits him to discern the exact meaning of any 
writer whose language he may read. It prepares the pupil lo read 
with an understanding which renders study easy, delightful, and profit- 
able to him. Graduation gives the pupil such a knowledge of language 
as qualifies him to acquire the other branches of education with an ex- 
pedition, ease, and satisfaction, which render study advantageous, and 
pleasing. Made familiar with this process, the pupil's mind kindles in- 
to fervour ; and he pursues his study as much for the pleasure of the 
exercise as for the advantage of knowledge. And whether his eye is 
turned to the sign of the type, or his ear directed to the language of the 
tongue, he seizes the period with animation, moves along the construc- 
tive fibres which extend from section to section, works his passage 
through the entire sentence, and comes out with every thing which 
philosophy can glean, or acuteness discern. 

The author of this work is far from desiring to exhibit a mere inde- 
pendence of mind in the rejection of the British system of English 
Philology. Nor does he mention the excellence of the American Syntax 
to institute an invidious comparison between the two — he does it to pre- 
vent an identity with those essays which have appeared within a few 
years, under the pretensions of improving the method of presenting the 
erroneous principles upon which the system of Murray has been found- 
ed. It differs much from all others. 



The American Syntax is a laconic system of English Philology, 
founded upon principles entirely new, and highly important. It settles 
all points contested among teachers — resolves all the difficulties of the 
pupil, and relieves the mind of all its grammatical scruples. It sets 
aside all other systems — exposes their defects, demonstrates the little 
use of attending to them, and presents to the pupil, the unerring and 
only way to the structure of the English language. It urges the 
youthful mind to invention and thought — it undeceives the most ac- 
complished Grammai ian, and instructs the most profound Philologist : 
and it is, in a variety of ways and cases, the clergyman's guide in 
scriptural exposition; the lawyer's interpreter in juridical discussion; 
and the magistrate's confirmation in legal decision. 

Language is an emanation from God. It is the medium of com- 
munication from one finite mind to another, and a means of inter- 
course between man and his Maker. In construction it is ingenious ; 
in purpose, noble; and in application to thought, wonderful. Asa 
gift, it claims our gratitude ; as a science, it demands our highest at- 
tention ; and as a means of mental intercourse, it excites our admiration 
and astonishment. 

Language is the mind's hand ; and, like that of the body, is employed 
by many who are ignorant of its beautiful symmetry. But they that 
use it without understanding its principles, lose as much as those who 
strengthen their bodies with food which they do not relish. In tracing this 
hand through all its changes, and modifications, in understanding their 
causes, and effects, and in seeing it follow the discursive parts of the 
mind, fasten upon its curiously formed notions, and reach them to 
others, we are led to look for its Origin. 

It has long been a contested point whether language is a divine re- 
velation, or a human production. But when we trace it from cause to 
effect, we see more than human agency. Man consists of two parts, 
a body, and a mind; this is journeying through life in that. Thus, the 
mind becomes a passenger ; the body his chariot ; ideas his baggage ; 
the earth his inn ; hope his food ; and another world his destination. 
And such is the relation between the passengers while on the way 



XII PREFACE. 

that they are compelled to interchange their ideas. For this purpose, 
either God has furnished them with language, a ready means for this 
exchange, or the passengers themselves have made this instrument. 
When we reflect upon the passenger's connection with his chariot ; when 
we see him drawing to himself, through organic avenues, the various 
objects which constantly surround it, we feel that this work is above 
man — but, when we behold him analysing these objects, forming 
correct notions of their component parts, and, with vocal organs at- 
tached to his vehicle, converting the air into sounds for the communi- 
cation of those notions, we are ready to exclaim — the Former of the 
passenger is the Author of his language ! 



INTRODUCTION. 



Notwithstanding few subjects have received more atten- 
tion than "English Grammar," a system has not yet been 
formed, which suits the peculiar genius of the English 
Language. Why have all attempts failed ? Is the subject 
too intricate, too profound, for the distinguished scholars 
who have spent their days, and exhausted their learning 
upon it 1 Or has the time since this subject was first agi- 
tated been too short for the accomplishment of the object in 
view 1 The author of this work is compelled to believe 
that neither the shortness of the time, nor the intricacy of 
the subject, can be urged as the reason why the world has 
not yet received a correct, clear and full system of English 
Grammar. The cause, of which our present destitution of 
an English Grammar, is the effect, may be found in the 
error which all have committed upon the very threshold 
of their system. The import, the meaning of words, has 
been made, in all systems of English Grammar, the only 
principle of classification. Hence, as nouns, verbs, pro* 
nouns, prepositions, conjunctions, adjectives, and adverbs, 
may signify the same ideas, the pupil, teacher, gramma- 
rian, and philosopher have been unable to find that clear 
line of distinction which all grammarians have attempted 
to draw between the different families of words. For in- 
stance — of, my, John's, own, have, and owns, all denote the 
idea of possession. 

1. This is the hat of John. Of, a preposition. 

2. This is John's hat. John's,^ noun. 

3. This is my own hat. My, a pronoun ; own, an adjec- 
tive. 

4. They have three hats. Have, a verb. 

5. He owns three hats. Owns, a verb. 

II. The words, resembles, resemblance, similar, similarity, 
like, likeness, analogous, analogy, all denote the same idea ; 
namely, the relation, or quality of resemblance. 

1. He resembles me. Resembles, a verb. 

2. There is a resemblance between us. Resemblance, a 
noun. 



XIV INTRODUCTION. 

five. ThlS 1$ a Simil<Xr circumstan ce. Similar, an adjec- 

^wJanouS. a * -M * bGtWeen these b00ks - *■*■ 
I- Ju he f, two books are «»c mine. £*fe> an adjective 

noun '* W * betWeen them is obvious. SS TO a 
7. The cases are analogous. Analogous, an adiective 

noun hG anal0gV b6tWeen the cases > i* <*™ So?y, a 
III. It is said that a verb expresses action, beins- or so™ 

NoT E .-Here „o< denotes a state of death or non-existence. 

sued „ r tese s^Brdftssass: & 



INTRODUCTION. XV 

tern of English Grammar. Now, what construction, me- 
chanism, is to the frame-work of this tree, grammar is to 
the frame-work of a language, or a sentence. And, as the 
construction, the anatomy of the tree, is not the fruit which 
its component parts yield, so the grammar of a language, 
is not the ideas which its words express. As grammar 
bears the same relation to language, which mechanism 
does to the tree, the proper course in forming a system of 
grammar, or construction, is to divide the words of a sen- 
tence, not according to their dictionary signification, but 
according to their constructive principles. Would it not 
be absurd in forming a book from which to learn the con- 
struction of this tree, to make the classification of the dif- 
ferent parts according to the kind of fruit, which each part 
yields] This course would abandon the anatomy, the 
mechanism, of the tree, and bring into the same class, 
parts sustaining very different constructive characters. 
Would it be at all important, in presenting the mere frame- 
work of this tree, to ascertain how many kinds of fruit 
the whole tree yields'? The British grammarians, in at- 
tempting to form a system from which the construction, 
the grammar, of our language, may be acquired, have 
founded their whole theory, and practice, upon the dic- 
tionary signification of the words in a sentence. Or, to 
pursue the figure, they have founded their theory, and 
practice, not upon the constructive principles of this tree, 
but upon the particular kind of fruit, which its different 
parts yield ! Their first step has been, as is obvious from 
their principles, to ascertain how many kinds of fruit the 
whole tree produces. These, they have ascertained to be 
ten — hence they have thrown the sixty thousand parts into 
ten classes, or families, each part being classed, as they 
tell us, according to the kind of fruit, which it yields'? The 
parts are — 

1. Apple-part, 

2. Peach-part, 

3. Plumb-part, 

4. Cherry-part, 

5. Grape-part, 

6. Pear-part, 

7. Citron-part, 

8. Lemon-part, 

9. Currant-part, 
10. Walnut-part. 

The first objection to this course is that, the theory 
abandons construction which is the very science it sets 
out to teach ! The second, is that the practice abandons 



XVI INTRODUCTION. 

the theory itself! for, in practice, the parts of the tree are 
not classed according to the kinds of fruit which they pro- 
duce. For instance, the branches which produce apples, 
are not referred to the apple-part class, while those which 
do not produce this kind of fruit, are referred to this 
class ! 

Definitions. 

1. An Apple-part is a part which yields apples. 

1. An article is a word prefixed to substantives to point 
them out, and show how far their signification extends ; as, 
a woman, an eagle, the garden. 

A, an, and the do not yield apples — yet these parts of 
speech, are referred to the apple-part class. That is, a, an 
and the do not point out, do not show how far the signifi- 
cation of their nouns, extends — yet a, an and the are 
ranked as articles. Does a point out what woman is 
meant 1 Does an show what eagle is intended 1 Or does 
the ascertain the identity of any garden? To show 
what woman is meant this, that, old, young, coloured, or 
white might be used; as, this woman, that woman, old 
woman, young woman, coloured woman, white woman. 

These words, however, which, to a greater, or less ex- 
tent, do point out, are wrested from the class of articles, 
and forced into the class of adjectives. That is, these 
branches which actually produce apples, are compelled to 
leave their natural family, and take up their abode with 
strangers. 

To show what eagle is meant, bald might be used — and to 
point out what garden, Washington might be employed; 
as, Washington garden, bald eagle. 

Now, bald, and Washington do show how far the signi- 
fication of their nouns extends. These defining words, 
however, are not referred to the article class ; but, contrary 
to the theory (which is that the parts of the tree are to be 
classed according to the kind of fruit which they bear) 
they are forced into other families. 

In reply to these strictures upon this discrepancy in the 
grammatical disposition of a, an, and the, it may be said 
that it is not intended by the British grammarians that a, 
an, and the point out without the aid of other words. — 
Their definition of an article, however, does not call on 
other words to aid a, an, and the, in the work of measur- 
ing the noun's extent of signification. But let the objec- 
tion to these reflections stand — and what follows? why, 
that all words which can point out the noun's significa- 



INTRODUCTION. XVh 

tion, either alone, or by the aid of other words, are arti- 
cles. And what adjective is there, which, by the aid of 
other words, cannot do this more minutely than a, an, or 
the ? 

Good boys that are properly educated, will become good 
men. 

In this example, good, aided by the clause, that are pro- 
perly educated, shows to what boys the signification of the 
word, boys, reaches. 

II. PEACH-PART. 

A Peach-part is a part which yields fruit ! 

A substantive, or noun is the name of any thing that ex- 
ists, or of which we have any notion ; as, London, man, 
virtue, vice. 

As the definition of the peach-part, is universal in its 
application, or including power, so is that of a noun. As 
every part of the tree yields fruit, the definition of the 
peach-part embraces the whole tree. — A peach-part is a 
part which yields fruit. 

Now, as every part of the tree yields fruit, so does every 
word in the language, express some idea. This is in ac- 
cordance with Mr. Murray's own definition of words, 
which says that — "Words are articulate sounds, used by 
common consent as the signs of our ideas." 

How can a word be the sign of an idea, and not be the 
name of an idea ] For example— The book is under the 
table. 

As under is the sign or name of a place (of which we 
certainly can have a notion) this preposition is a noun. — 
But it may be said that under expresses a relation. Be it 
so — For, if under expresses a relation, it must be the name 
of a relation — Because it is not possible for a word to 
express an idea unless it is the name of an idea— It is the 
namitive power of a word, which enables it to express or 
signify an idea. Hence, if a word has no namitive power, 
it "can express no idea, and in truth is no word at all. The 
substitution of idea for thing, would not change the im- 
port of the British definition of a noun — A noun is^ the 
name of any idea which we have of any thing that exists ; 
as, John and Foster write letters tvith accuracy. 

Now, if the British definition of a noun, is sound, all the 
words in the above sentence, are nouns, for each is the 
name of something. As and is the first word in the order 
of the sentence, which is not called a noun, it may be well 
to commence with this word. And first, why is not and a 
b2 



XV1U INTRODUCTION. 

noun ? Is not this conjunction the sign or name of an idea ! 
If not, why does the use of or change the sense 1 John or 
Foster writes with accuracy. And, if neither and nor or 
is a sign, a name of any idea, why does the omission of 
both these conjunctions change the sense of the sentence 1 
John Foster writes letters with accuracy. 

But it may be said that and does not mean a thing. This 
we grant, and while we concede this, we take occasion to 
remind the objector that accuracy does not mean a thing; 
that virtue does not mean a thing; and that vice does not 
mean a thing ! ! Nor indeed is there any word in the lan- 
guage which means a thing. Words express the ideas which 
men form of things. Let us hear Mr. Murray on this 
point — 

" Words are articulate sounds, used by common consent 
as the signs of our ideas." 

- This definition of a noun, to be strictly literal, should 
read thus— a noun is the name of any idea which we have 
of any thing that exists, as, London, man, virtue, vice. The 
word thing, as here used, includes something more than 
pens, books, knives, &c. &c. ; it must embrace whatever 
exists, whether it is a being, fact, circumstance, action, 
mode, relation, time, place, &c. 

" John and Foster write with accuracy." The next word 
in this sentence, which is wrested in practice from the 
hands of the theory of the system, is write* Write is the 
name, or sign of an action ; or it is the name of an idea 
which men have formed of the act of making letters with 
a pen or pencil. Why then is not write a noun ? Does 
not the definition say that any word which is the name or 
sign of any thing that exists, or of which we have a no- 
tion, is a noun ? And is not write the name or sign of 
something of which we have a notion] One of two things 
is certain, namely, either write is the name of the act of 
forming letters with a pen, or pencil, or this action has no 
name. But is this action a nameless action ] Do not men 
know what to call it] Do they not even at this advanced 
stage of things, know by what word, by what sign, by 
what name to designate this action which they so fre- 
quently perform ] 

" With." If with is not the sign, the name, of an idea, 
why is it employed in the expression of our ideas ? And, 
if with has no definite meaning of its own, why is it that 
the substitution of without, produces so great a change in 
the sense of the sentence] "John and Foster write letters 
without accuracy." 

Now, with is the sign that the quality of which accu- 



INTRODUCTION. XIX 

racy is the sign, belongs to the letters. But without is 
the sign, the name of the fact that this quality does not 
belong to them. Or in other words, with is the name or 
sign of the idea of the presence of that quality which is 
denoted by accuracy. But without is the name of the idea 
of the absence of this quality. Take the word nothing in 
the following case ; He went, but he saw nothing. 

Is nothing the name of a thing 1 Just as much as with- 
out [is, and no more. Nothing is the name or sign of the 
idea which we form of the absence of something — and 
without is the name or sign of the idea which we form of 
the absence of something. If " nothing" is a noun, why, 
then, not without ? 

III. PLUM-PART. 

A Plum-part is a part yielding plums. 

A verb is a word which signifies being, action, or suffer- 
ing ; as, " I am, I rule, I am ruled." 

Now we find thousands of words which signify being, 
action or suffering, that are not called verbs. That is, 
there are thousands of the branches of this tree, actually 
bearing plums, that are not referred to the plum-part fam- 
ily. For instance— The existence of man is short; but 
the being of God is eternal : man runs a short race here — 
he is seized with pains — he expires in the pangs of disease. 

Do not the words existence, and being, express being] 
Why then are they not verbs ? 

Does not race express action] Why then is not this 
common noun a verb ? 

Do not the words, pains and pangs, signify suffering 1 
Why then should not these common nouns be yielded up 
to the definition of the verb which imperiously demands 
them as its own 1 

Nor is this all, for there are many parts of this tree, 
which do not bear plums, that are actually referred to the 
plum-part class; as, John resembles his mother, The papers 
are extinct, Man can be just, John has one acre of ground 
which he ought to cultivate. 

Resembles, are, can, has, and ought do not express such 
ideas as the definition of the verb requires ; hence these 
words are not verbs by the authority of the law which is 
the definition. Again then we meet with the double ab- 
surdity of withholding branches that yield plums, from 
the plum-part class, and of referring other branches which 
do not bear this kind of fruit, to this class. 



XX INTRODUCTION. 

IV. CHERRY-PART. 

A Cherry-part is a part which yields cherries. 

An adjective is a word added to a noun to express its 
quality ; as, He is a good boy, They are fine children. 

In considering this definition, it seems important to make 
a remark or two upon the word, add. 

To add, says the dictionary, "is to join something to 
that which was before" This is not only the language of 
the dictionary, but that of sound sense also, as well as of 
universal usage. We cannot even think of adding any 
thing unless there is something already placed, to which 
we may add. No man talks about building an additional 
house unless he has one already up. Under this view of 
the subject, let us inquire which are the added words in 
the following assemblages — 

1. "He is a good boy." 

2. " They are fine children." 

In the vocal, as well as in the written formation of the 
above sentences, is, a, good, and boy would be added words 
— because, they must be introduced in addition to he, the 
first word spoken or written. 

In the second sentence also the words when spoken or 
written in the formation of the sentence, must be divided 
into added and unadded. They is the unadded word, 
while are, fine and children are the added ones. But as the 
words of a printed sentence, are all presented at the same 
point of time, a printed sentence can have no adjective ! 
What, can one of two houses which have been erected at 
the" same time be denominated an additional house 1 It 
cannot be ; the distinction is without sense. 

The word, added, not only indicates a state ; but it im- 
plies the manner in which the state is produced. When 
the state of connection is produced in any manner differ- 
ent from that which the word, add, indicates, the state is 
expressed, not by add, but by some other word ; as, junc- 
tion, conjunction, connection, connection, &c. 

Hence, when the right hand is put upon the left, the right 
hand is the added one. And this state of connection may 
be denominated adjection. But, when both hands start 
from given points, and approximate till they come in con- 
tact, the state of connection thus produced, cannot be de- 
nominated adjection. 

" Small apple." 

The only proof that small is an adjective, is derived from 



INTRODUCTION. XXI 

juxtaposition, nearness. And is not the word, apple, as 
near to the word small, as small is to apple ? If then jux- 
taposition constitutes small an adjective, both words are 
adjectives. As both words are presented at the same 
time, and one is as near to the other as the other is to it, 
what is it which can render one an added word more than 
the other? Is it replied that small is more an adjective 
than apple because small expresses a quality] The an- 
swer is that small does not fall within the first part of the 
definition of an adjective ; for small is not an added word 
— hence, unless the mere fact of expressing quality, ren- 
ders a word an adjective, how can small be an adjective ] 
And, if a word is an adjective merely from the fact of ex- 
pressing quality, then the italic nouns in the following in- 
stances, are all adjectives — He is a man of virtue, This is 
a man of great strength, The roundness of the ball, The 
smoothness of the paper. 

Does not the noun, virtue, express a quality of the man? 
Does not strength also denote a quality of the man] Does 
not roundness denote a quality of the ball 1 And does not 
smoothness signify a quality of the paper ] What, then, 
becomes of that definition of an adjective, which is founded 
upon the expression of a quality ! 

Watts, who has written much upon the subject of quali- 
ties, says — " Motion, shape, quantity, weight, &c. &c. are 
properties or modes of bodies, and that wit, folly, love, 
doubting, judging, $c.$c. are modes, or qualities of the mind." 

Again says Watts — " The term, mode, extends to all at- 
tributes whatever, including the most essential, and in- 
ward properties, and reaches even to actions themselves 
as well as to the manner of action ." 

A quality is defined by Watts, and others in the follow- 
ing manner — "A mode, or quality is that property which 
cannot exist in, and of itself, but is always esteemed as 
belonging to, and as subsisting by the help of some sub- 
stance which, for this reason, is called its subject." Thus 
the words solidity, brightness, similarity, roundness, soft* 
ness, accuracy, action, thinking, thought, to think, motion, 
&c. all denote qualities of some subject, upon which they 
depend for their existence. 

But, let it be conceded that small, in the phrase, small 
apple, comes within the first part of the definition of an 
adjective. That is, grant that small is an added word, 
and what follows 1 why, that all words which are added to 
nouns to express qualities, are adjectives. Now, all verbs 
are as much added to nouns as small, or any other adjec- 
tive—All verbs too express quality—therefore all verbs are 



\\. INTRODUCTION, 

." this defi - '— 

g of the i s, "The ^ ssoflor of 

:uro with tta -sos. liko 

attribute 
g 

B sun."— 

.••>.■■.• s " v s— 

\li- 
S '" 
3 ass 
Phih 

- t perfect 
V is Murray himself less clear in his w 

5 £ JUS 

sses ran; and, in his B] 

; us that 1 - 

* the attri- 
bute and the 

WW MM 

and fcis 

ses 
v> utdparticu :hor. In 

jecti - ass vM qual:: 

rize bci 
■ 

iission are qoal ss 
tttt animals in 
hors - > boarse .s not an 

miu nd! 

Ravins? included all qualities in the of an ad- 

:^r course would s :^e as follows— 

.litv of W«f, actio** or sh ferine. But it 

sin subject of 

ness, and inutil:: old Br: 

immar. Tins s .in the 



A GLOSSARY 



TECHNICAL TERMS. 



CHAPTER I. 



A. 

A met, both, two. Pronounced, ambe. 

Ambirelation, a reference to both kinds of Cormi, a 
double, or plural reference. A Seramus is of the am- 
bulation when it relates both to the Secormog, and Inse- 
cormos. (See Seramus s Secormos, and Insecorn* 

A'j'i >stitution of one word for another; 

as, / for my real nan putting of one section 

into the place of another to procure :esired con- 

struction; as, (in the beginning) [was the word]. Here the 
branch section is put before* the trunk section, and this 
exchange of position is called sectional attornment. 

B. 

Bisect, to divide a section of a sentence into two parts: 
as, [The fruit (of this tree) if rifte.] Here the trunk sec- 
tion of the sentence is bisected by the intervention of the 
branch section, " of this tree." 

Bisected, divided into different parts by the interven- 
tion of some inferior section. 

C. 

Clados, from the Greek, klados, a branch of a tree, — 
hence in this work Clados is applied to those sections of 
a sentence, which bear a branch relation to other sections ; 
as, (In the beginning) [was the word.] (See Truncus.) 
Plural, Cladi, pronounced, Kla-de. 

Co, a contraction of con, in company, or considered in 
the group, taken collectively, not individually, not singly. 

CoNJBcnvE, alluding to the act of putting things together. 



XXiV GLOSSARY. 

Conjective reading, a process by which an inferior word, 
or section is affixed to its own superior word, or section, 
by uttering these two only ; as, I saw John on last Sab- 
bath at church. 

Conjective reading of "at church/' I saw John at church. 

Conjection, that local connexion which is produced by 
conjective reading. 

To Conject, to put the inferior section or word to its 
own superior section, or word, without any regard to any 
other sections, or words ; as, " the fire is quite hot." 

Conjected— Fire is, 

Quite hot, 
Hot fire. 
The fire. 

Conjective letters, those letters which are used in 
some of the prepared Exercises of this work, to show 
what two sections should be conjected ; as, I saw him a 
on last Sabbath a at church. 

Consignification, from con, together, and signification, 
that import, or significant character which words have in 
their syntaxed state, in addition to their usual Dictionary 
meaning. The fourth part of Syntax. 

Co-ramus, a Ramus which belongs to assemblages of 
words, or which belongs to words that are taken together; 
as, and, if, therefore, &c. (See Co. and Ramus.) 

Cordiction, (from cor, the heart, and dico, to say,) that 
which renders ah assemblage of words, a sentence; as, / 
am, very well. 

Hitherto insuperable difficulties have been found in at- 
tempting to deiine a sentence. These, it is apprehended, 
have arisen from not ascertaining the sentence character- 
istics, or particular properties which distinguish a sen- 
tence from every other assemblage of words. The author 
of this work believes that he has ascertained the true 
characteristics of a sentence; and, because he has not 
been able to find a suitable word already made, for 
their class, or common name, he has formed the word, 
Cordiction, for this purpose. Cordiction, from its deriva- 
tion, means the heart, the essence of the speech, or dic- 
tion. 

These characteristics are affirmation, interrogation, 
command, petition, and intimation. One of these sen- 
tence rendering attributes, is the vital part of every sen- 
tence ; and, as cordiction means the heart of the sentence, 
this word may properly become the common name of these 
five sentential characteristics. 



GLOSSARY. XXV 

Cordictive words, the two words which form the affir- 
mative, interrogative, imperative, petitionative, or the in- 
timative character ; as, / am very well. 

The Cordictive words are the seat of the cordiction, as 
the heart is the seat of life ; as, Moses smote the rock. 
_ Cormos, from the Greek, kormos, the trunk, the founda- 
tion part in the frame work of a tree ; hence in this work 
Cormos is applied to those words which are the founda- 
tion in the frame work of a sentence or section; as, Moses 
smote the rock. [See Ramus.] 

Plural, Cor mi — pronounced, cor-me. 

D. 

Du, a contraction of duo, two. 

Duramus, an insentensic Ramus which has the power 
or capacity, to accompany two, or both kinds of Cormi; 
as, good men do good deeds. (See Sentensic, and Insen- 
tensic Cormos?) 

E. 

Ellipsis, an omission of one, or more words in a sen- 
tence, or of one or more sections in a sentence ; as, he 
went ( , .yesterday.) "By grace are ye saved ( , , ) 
through faith." 

Note. — On is understood before yesterday ; and which comeih after 
saved. 

Ex, out of some place, birth or office. 

Exformative Position, that place on the paper in refer- 
ence to the secormos, which is not favourable to the exer- 
cise of sentensic power, and which is occupied by that 
seramus, or by those serami which do not help form the 
sentence character ; as, he shall have been punished. (See 
Secormos, and Seramus, and Formative Position.) 

G. 

Graduation, that regular divisive progression through a 
sentence, which breaks it into different sections, or that 
systematic progression in the solution of either words, or 
sections, which puts a word, or section through all its 
categories ; as, class, order, genus, species, family, and va- 
riety. 

Grammar, from the Greek, Gramma, a letter. This 
word is improperly applied to the constructive principles 
of a language. (See Syntax.) 

I. 

Implenary, not full enough to be analysed. (See Ple- 
nary, and Elliptical.) 



XXVI GSOSSARY. 

Inse, a contraction of insentensic with which it is synon- 
ymous. (See Insentensic.) 

Inseclados, a clados, or branch section which has not a 
cordiction, or sentensic character in itself; as, He went 
(to Boston.) {To Boston.) 

Plural, Insecladi — pronounced, Inse-cla-de. 

Insentensic, without sentensic influence, without sen- 
tensic character, having no part in the formation of the 
cordiction of the assemblage of words; as, They went 
unto the mount of Olives. Unto, the, mount, of, Olives. 

Insentensic cormos, one which renders no aid in form- 
ing the sentensic principles of theseramus into a sentence 
character ; as, " I went to him in haste, for he cried out 
for anguish, (him, haste, anguish.) 

I and he, form the cordictive principle of went, and 
cried into the two affirmations without any aid from him, 
haste, or anguish — / went, he cried. 

By contraction, insecorm,os. 

Insecormos, an insentensic cormos. (See Insentensic 
Cormos.) Plural, Insecormi — pronounced, In-se-cor-me. 

Insentensic ramus, one which has not the principle of 
a sentence character ; as, to, in, for, out. 

By contraction, inseramus. 

Inseramus, a Ramus word which has no sentensic princi- 
ple ; as, to, in, good, the, a, right, &c. - (See Sentensic and 
Seramus.) Plural, inserami — pronounced, In-$e-ra~me. 

M. 

Mono, one, alone, to this only, only to one kind. 

Monoramus, an Inseramus which has the capacity to 
accompany but one kind of Cormos, namely, the Insen- 
tensic ; as, to them. Not to they. (See Duramus.) 

Plural, Monorami — pronounced, Mon-o-ra-me. 

Monorelation, a relation confined to one other word, 
or a relation confined to one other section; as, He is tvell, 
[I saw him] (at church.) (See Plusr elation.) 

O. 

Orb, a circle. 

Orthography (from orthos, right, and grapho, to write), 
the proper formation of words from letters. (See Poieo- 
logfr) 

P. 

Plenary, full enough to be analysed. (See Implenary.) 
Plus, plural, more. 

Plus-relation, a plural relation, or a relation which ex- 
tends to more than one other word, or section ; as, Moses 



GLOSSARY. XXVil 

smote the rock, [" The word was] in the beginning" {and 
the word was) (with God). (See Monor elation.) 

Poieology, from the Greek, poieo, to make, form, or cre- 
ate, and logos, a word ; the proper formation of words 
from sounds, and letters. Pronounced, poi-e-ol-ogy. 

Note. — The old term, orthography, is just as applicable to the proper 
writing of sentences as to the proper writing of words. 

Prior, before, previous. 

R. 

Ramus, (a branch) a word having a branch or dependent 
relation upon some other word; as, good men act justly. 

(See Cormos). Plural, Rami — pronounced, ra-me. 

Rank, the approximate constructive relation which a 
Ramus bears to a cormos. 

S. 

Se, a contraction of sentensic, with which it is synony- 
mous. (See Sentensic.) 

Secormos, that cormos which draws out the sentensic 
principle, found in the first seramus into a full sentence 
character; as, Moses smote the Rock. (See Insecormos). 
Plural, Secormi — pronounced, Se-cor-me. 

Seclados, a branch section which has a sentence cha- 
racter in itself; as, He is the boy {whom I taught). (See 
Inseclados). Plural, Secladi — pronounced, Se-cla-de. 

Section, that portion of a sentence, which can be ana- 
lysed by itself; as, {In the beginning) [was the word ;] {and 
the. word was) {with God ;) {and the word was God.) 

Sentensic, having sentence forming power, alluding to 
the material out of which a sentence character is formed, 
having a sentence character. (See lnsentensic.) 

Sentensic cormos, one that forms the sentensic prin- 
ciples which the seramus contains, into a full sentence 
character ; as, " / went to him in haste, for he cried out 
for anguish." (/. he.) 

Sentensic ramus, one which contains in itself the first 
principles of a sentence character ; as, went, cried, &c. 

Sub, inferior, or under, farther removed in the package 
of the sentence, from the foundation word than some 
others. 

Subramus, a Ramus which in the frame work or pack- 
age of the sentence, is inferior to some other Ramus which 
sustains it; as, good men act justly — Remarkably fine fruit 
— This boy's pen. Plural, Subr ami— pronounced, Sub- 
ra-me. 



XXV111 GLOSSARY. 

Syncratic properties, those properties, or marks which 
regulate the putting of words together, or those proper- 
ties of words, which guide one in Syncratology ; such as 
number, gender, tense, &c. In mechanics, syncratic marks 
are those which shew what two parts of the table, bed- 
stead, &c. go together ; as, I. I. V. V. 

Syncratology, (from the Greek, sun, together, or with, 
kratos, power, and logos, a word,) the conjunctive powers, 
and characters of words. The idea of together or con- 
junctive is from sun ; that of power, and character, from 
kratos; and that of word, from logos. 

Etymology, as used by the British grammarians, is a 
misnomer. Etymology, from etumon, and logos, means a 
true original word— it does not mean the classification, 
nor the conjunctive, the syntactical powers, and charac- 
ters of words. This word means the general doctrine of 
the derivation of words from other words which are their 
true originals. 

Syntithology, (from the Greek, sun, together, or with, 
tithemi, to put, and logos, a word,) the putting of words 
together. Pronounced, Syn-te-thol-ogy. 

This word is offered as a substitute for the word, Syn- 
tax?, as applied by the British grammarians. 

Syntax, (from the Greek, sun, with, or together, and 
tasso, to put,) the putting of things together in a proper 
manner. 

To Syntax, to put sounds or letters into words, words 
into sections, and sections into sentences in a proper man- 
ner- 

Syntaxed, properly put together. 

Note. — Syntax is too general in its import to be restricted to the 
putting of words together. The letters of a word are put together ; as, 
Grammar. Hence there is as much Syntax in Orthography, as in any 
other part of Grammar. Indeed, there is no process in forming sen- 
tences, in which there is not a putting of parts together ; hence the 
entire science is of a Syntactical, or conjunctive nature ; therefore it 
should be denominated Syntax. 

Syntax, a book treating on Syntax. 

Syntaxist, one well versed in the Syntax, or construc- 
ive principles of a language. 

Tense, (from the Latin, tempus, time,) the form, or the 
capacity of a Seramus to denote time ; as, is, was, write, 
wrote, shall, will. 

Tensify, a convenient word in teaching, employed to 
denote the process of varying the Serami to exhibit their 
different tense forms ; as, write, wrote, written. 



GLOSSARY, XXIX 



Tensification, the act or process of tensifying. 

Truncus, the base, the foundation in the framework of 
a sentence ; as, [Devout men carried Stephen] to his burial. 

(See Clados, Cormos, and Ramus.) Plural, Trunci — 
pronounced, Trun-ce. 

U. 

Uni, one — pronounced, une. 

Unirelation, a relation to but one kind of Cormos, 
viz. the Secormos. Pronounced u-ne-r elation. 

Abbreviations. Every ramus may be contracted to its 
own prefix by which it may be represented. 



CHAPTER II. 



The old terms are introduced in this work under that 
page which presents the subdivision of the two parts of 
speech, viz. Cormos, and Ramus, to enable the pupil to see 
what name in the new system, answers to any particular 
one in the old. But it is hoped for the good of youth, for 
the good of truth, for the fitness of things, and for the ho- 
nour of the human mind, that every teacher in whose 
school this work may be used, will endeavour to render 
the new nomenclature popular, and the old unpopular, 
among his scholars. 



Adjective, something added to that which was before. 
This word is not properly used by the British gramma- 
rians as a technical term. (See Introduction, page 20.) 

Article, (from articulus, a joint) a joint. This word in 
the old grammars is applied to a, an, and the, but with 
what propriety, or to what advantage it is difficult to see. 

Adverb, (from ad and verb,) an added word, for verb 
means word ! Hence any word which is added to another 
is an adverb. As a technical term adverb is useless, for it 
has no discriminative power. 

C 

Conjunction, (from con, and jungo,) a connection, not a 
connector. 

N. 
Noun, (from nomen, a name,) this word means a sign of 
an idea, and is as broad in its application as the word 

c2 



XXX GLOSSARY. 

word itself, for all words are the signs of ideas. (See page 
17, Introduction.) 

I. 

Interjection, an unmeaning combination of sounds, 
employed in the old grammars as the class name of a few- 
words which the British grammarians tell us come be- 
tween other words, but which indeed generally come before 
them; as, "Ah, me, miserable," — What, who comes there? 
— "Heavens, is it you?" 



Participle, as used in the old Grammar, is an unmean- 
ing combination of sounds. 

Preposition, from pre before, and pono to place. This 
word means placed before, and is not calculated to express 
the character of any class of words, which derives its 
character from being placed before or behind any other 
word ! 



Verb, from the Latin word, Verbum, a word — The word, 
verb, is synonymous with word; and of course, is no more 
applicable to any one class of words than the word, word, 
itself! 



LANGUAGE. 

Language is a frame work of signs, constructed, and 
employed by man for the expression of his ideas. 

SYNTAX, OR GRAMMAR. 

Syntax is the principles on which the different parts of 
a language, are put together. 

ENGLISH SYNTAX. 

English Syntax is the principles on which the different 
parts of the English language, are put together. 

DIVISION. 

Syntax is divided into four parts ; viz. Poieology, or 
Orthography, Syncratology, or Etymology, Syntitholo* 

GY, and CONSIGNIFICATION. 

I. POIEOLOGY. 

Poieology }s that part of Syntax, which teaches the 
proper formation, or creation of words from sounds, and 
letters. 

II. SYNCRATOLOGY. 

Syncratology is that part of Syntax, which teaches the 
conjunctive powers, and characters of individual words. 

III. SYNTITHOLOGY. 

Syntithology is that part of Syntax, which teaches how 
to put words together in the formation of sentences. 

IV. CONSIGNIFICATION. 

Consignification is that particular import which sec- 
tions acquire from their Syntactical state ; as, (John,) [are 
you well ?] [They cry out] (for anguish.) 

Note. — The word, John, in an unsyntactical state, means nothing" 
but a human being ; but, when this word has a syntax with the other 
section it superadds to its unsyntactical import, the idea of an auditor. 

In the Truncus of the first sentence, there is, besides the unsyntac 
tical meaning of each word, an interrogative import — and, as this inter- 
rogative character is the result of the conjunctive state of the words, it 
is called the Consignification of Ihe section. 



XXX11 LANGUACE. 

The Truncus of the seeond sentence, has an affirmative import; and, 
as the affirmation is produced by syntaxing the words, it is denomina- 
ted the Consignijication of the section. 

The Clados, in the second sentence, imports cause. This import 
could not be produced by for alone — nor could it be produced by an- 
guish alone, for anguish, in its unsyntactical state, implies the effect of 
some cause. Anguish is here made to mean a cause, first, by associa- 
ting for with it; and secondly, by uniting the section which for and 
anguish constitute, to the other section in the sentence — [They cry out] 
(for anguish.) 

The different imports given to sections by their conjection, are an in- 
teresting theme to one who desires to become thoroughly acquainted 
with the syntactical principles of the English Language. But to him 
who has no desire to become deeply skilled in this science these im- 
ports are mere colours to the blind man. To comprehend the precise 
consignifications of sections, and the exact manner in which they ac- 
quire them, demands a practice induced by a philological affection 
which nothing but this part of Syntax can beget, strengthen, and puri- 
fy. This part, however, interesting, and important as it is, cannot be 
presented in this work. (See the Appeal, page 87.) 



OBSERVATIONS 

TO JOHN, THE PUPIL, PREFATORY TO THE INTRODUCTION 

or the THEOREM. 

John, if you desire to learn Syntax, you will not ac- 
complish the object of your wish unless you pay close, 
md constant attention, not only to the exercises, but to 
the nature of the science itself. You should be punctual 
n your attendance — nothing is a greater obstacle to pro- 
gress under class, or school instruction, than occasional 
ion-attendance. Even private lessons are a deficient sub- 
stitute for those which you have lost the opportunity of re- 
ceiving in your class. 

In the first place, John, it is necessary that you should 
learn how to learn. In order that you may make pro- 
gress in the acquisition of knowledge, there are cer- 
tain acts which you must not do as well as certain ones 
which you must do. — You must not keep your hands and 
feet in constant motion. I have never known a person 
who has placed himself under my instruction, to prosper 
in his undertaking while he has pursued the shameful 
practice of disturbing himself, and others by almost con- 



33 

stantly moving his hands and feet ! If you find a member 
of your class inclined to play with his knife, watch-chain, 
to wring, and pull his fingers, or child-like, to amuse him- 
self with the pointer of the Theorem, you may inform him 
that he wastes his time, and annoys you. Nor need you 
have stronger hopes of him who is moving from seat to 
seat in time of teaching, than of one who places himself in 
an easy chair that he may rock himself into grammar and 
his teacher out of patience I And, if he who depends upon 
those restless members of the class, that officiously whis- 
per or hiss out their pestiferous notions as guides to others, 
makes any other progress than that of the parrot, you 
may say that all signs have failed indeed. 

John, the faculty of acquiring knowledge from printed 
language, is invaluable : both art, and science are within 
the reach of him who has acquired the capacity of fixing 
his attention upon a book, and drawing from its pages its 
full contents. The best means for acquiring this skill in 
language, is to accustom your self to learn, not by listening, 
but by reading. Whenever you have an opportunity of 
reading works on art, or science, which present their sub- 
jects to the eye by cuts, figures, line, &c. embrace it. At- 
tention to this kind ot books, is almost the only means of 
making you independent of living teachers. Read, then, 
the description of your Theorem with attention—do not 
permit any one to explain to you any principles in Syntax, 
which you can possibly acquire from the print. 

John, the practice of teaching viva voce, or by lectures 
may be carried too far — for the habit of acquiring knowl- 
edge from the voice does not favour the cultivation of a 
skill to acquire it from books. It is so very important that 
pupils should habituate themselves to the acquiring of 
ideas from print that the art of teaching properly, lies in 
a great degree, in giving them command over printed 
speech. It is upon printed signs that they are to depend 
in the absence of living teachers. Memorizing lessons, 
and attending lectures, are, when carried as far as they 
are at the present day, pernicious to the cause of science, 
and unfavorable to the growth of the human mind. Make 
youth masters of printed language, and you put them on 
all the roads to knowledge. 

John, this System of English Syntax addresses itself to 
the judgment — hence it will be even injurious to you to 
commit, and repeat your lessons— when you are in the act 
of memorizing, you give too much attention to the mere 
words to be benefitted by the sense. You should read 
each lesson with great care — and you should then give 
your ideas in your own language. 



34 
PART I. 

ILLUSTK ATION I. 

A SENTENCE. 

A sentence is an assemblage of two or more words, con- 
taining a cordiction ;* as, He went. 

John, that you may understand syntax with ease, and 
accuracy, you must give more than ordinary attention to 
the subject of a sentence. Hence it may be well for you 
to bestow much thought upon the following observations. 

The process of forming things, John, both in nature, and 
art, seems to be conducted by combining or putting to- 
gether parts to make a whole. We find this method ex- 
emplified in the formation of a tree, an animal, a chair, a 
table, &c. 

Every animal has many parts — these, nature has metho- 
dically fixed together, and thus constituted something 
which is denominated an animal 

Every table has many parts — t.hpse, art has so framed 
together, that they constitute a thing which is called a 
table. But, as parts may be framed together without 
making a table, so may words be put together without 
forming a sentence. Or in other words — as every combi- 
nation, or framework of parts, does not constitute a chair, 
a table, an animal, &c. so every assemblage of words,"does 
not form a sentence; as, "unto the mount." 

The parts may not form a table, first, because they may 
not have the properties which parts should have for the 
formation of this piece of mechanism. And secondly, 
they may not constitute a table, because they have not 
been put together in a table-like manner: they may be 
framed together in such a way as renders them no dis- 
tinct thing, and entitles them to no other designation than 
an assemblage of parts, so arrayed, and framed together, 
as to defeat the object of their individual form, size, and 
length. Now, as the formation of a table may be defeated 
by a want of the table character either in construction, 
or in the parts themselves, so may the formation of a 
sentence be defeated by a want of a sentensic or sentential 
power in the words ; as, " unto the mount." 

The parts of a circle would not form a table, for they 
have not the table attributes : there is no part of a circle 
that has the properties of the leaf of a table ; no parts 

* Affirmation, interrogation, command, petition, and intimation. 



35 

which have all the different sh apes, and the other proper- 
ties which belong to the legs, and the other parts of a table. 
Now, as the parts of a circle are incompetent to form a 
table because of their want of the table properties, so are 
the members of the following assemblage of words incapa- 
ble of constituting a sentence because of their destitution 
of sentensic principle, and sentence forming power; as, 
" unto the mount." 

Do you ask, John, what the sentensic principle of a 
word, is 1 The sentensic principle of a word, is an at- 
tribute, a kind of material out of which a sentence char- 
acter is formed. And the sentence forming power is the 
capacity of a word to bring out the sentensic principle 
into a full sentence character ; as, " he went." 

" Went" possesses the sentensic principle, or sentensic 
material which " he" forms, or manufactures into a perfect 
sentence character. A sentence is an assemblage of two 
or more words, containing a cordiction, a sentence char- 
acter. 

Do you ask what is a cordiction 1 A cordiction is the 
heart of the sentence — a cordiction is that without which, 
| no assemblage of words can be a sentence. A cordiction 
is to an assemblage of words what roundness is to that 
line which forms a circle. — Without the roundness the line 
would form no circle; and without the cordiction the 
assemblage of words can form no sentence. What the trunk 
is to the tree, the cordiction is to the assemblage of words, 
which forms a sentence ; for, as without the trunk, the 
branches lose their tree character, so without the cordic- 
tion, the words lose their sentence character. 

It is a curious fact, that words, by means of their dic- 
tionary significations, are competent to express all our 
ideas but five. Now, these five ideas which the diction- 
ary import of words, is unable even to touch, are the 
Jive cordictions. And it is curious also to find that men 
1 have supplied this deficiency in dictionary meaning, by 
giving to a certain class of words an extra significant, or 
expressing power. This extra endowment consists in a 
capacity to express an affirmation, an interrogation, a 
command, a petition, and an intimation. We examine our 
dictionary in vain to find a word whose affirmative power 
is its dictionary signification. Every word which has 
an affirmative, or any other cordictive power, has also a 
dictionary signification ; as, " Moses smote the rock — John 
wrote this letter." The dictionary does not define the 
words smote, and wrote as meaning an affirmation, but as 
denoting certain actions. Hence the affirmative idea 
which is expressed in the above instances, is the result of 



36 



the extra significant capacity with which men have endued 
these, and similar words to enable them to denote an affir- 
mation, an interrogation, a command, a petition, and an 
intimation. 

The following cut presents the five cordictions* 



1. Affirmation. 



2. Interrogation. 



3 Command. 



4. Petition. 



5. Intimation. 




It is nine. 



Is it nine ? 



Go ihoa. 



Forgtve our sins 



tvhen we repent. 



This cut comprises five figures which are designed to 
present to your mind through the medium of your eye 
the five cordictions, one of which will be found in every 
assemblage of words, that is a sentence. The watch af- 



37 

firms that it is just nine o'clock. In this frame-work of 
parts, then, you have a sentence because you have a cor- 
diction. Observe — a thimble, a knife, a pin, an apple or 
any other thing having a cor diction, is a sentence J 




Hence the figure marked A, B, is a sentence. Why is 
this figure a sentence, John ? Because it has a cordiction. 
In what does this cordiction consist] In an affirmation — 
it is 3. 

NOT A SENTENCE— 

Unto the Mount of Olives. 




But the figure standing under the head, not a sentence^ 
is not a sentence. Why not] Because it contains no 
cordiction. 



THE FOLLOWING CUT PRESENTS THE FIVE CORDIC- 

TIONS. 



1. Affirmation. 



2. Interrogation, 



3 Command. 



4. Petition. 



5. Intimation. 




It is ntne. 



Is it nine ? 



Go thou. 



Forgive our sins 



when we repenk 



How many cordictions are there, John ? 

What cordiction does the watch represent? — "Affirma- 
tion" 

What one does the crown? What ore the petitioner? 
What one the rainbow ? And what one the interrogative 
sign? 



39 

Why is a rainbow employed as the hieroglyphic sign of 
intimation 1 

Because this production of nature, when seen in the 
heavens, intimates fair, or foul weather according to the 
time in which it appears. " If at night, sailors take delight 
— but, if in the morning, they take warning." 

The rainbow too is denominated the bow of promise — 
hence it has something to do in the communication of 
thoughts, ideas or sentiments. But the rainbow, John, as 
a sign of the kind of weather is never certain — what it 
points out may happen, and it may not. And from this 
uncertainty it seems to be as expressive a hieroglyphic of 
an intimation as can easily be found. 

John, what is an intimation] An intimation is some- 
thing advanced in an unpositive way ; as, " When James 
steals my watch, he will be a bad boy indeed." 

John, unpositive is not a dictionary word — hence it may 
be well to give you some explanation of it here. 

A person is positive in his expression when he says in 
what he has uttered, that it is so, or it is not so; it was so, 
or it was not so ; it will be, or it will not be. But he is 
unpositive in his expression of any fact when he does not 
say in the words which he utters whether what he has ad- 
vanced did happen, has happened, or will happen, or not; 
as, I sent a carriage that (he might return.) 

But when I say, "He might return," I do more than sim- 
ply advance, or express a fact — I say also that the fact ex- 
pressed is so, is true. 

Do you ask, John, by what means is a man positive in 
the expression of his ideas'? The means are various, too 
much so to admit of explanation here. 

But various as are the means by which a speaker is 
positive in expressing his thoughts, they are not more 
various, nor ingenious than are the means which he em- 
ploys to render himself unpositive in the same act. 

Do you ask whether the phrases, ripe fruit, cold water, 
red cloth, &c. are intimations ] 

They are not, for an intimation must advance some fact. 
But these phrases advance no fact. 

But you may say that the phrase, " ripe fruit," intimates 
that the fruit is ripe. This phrase may induce one to infer 
this — but it does not express this idea at all. The fact in- 
timated must be expressed, (not inferred), and left in an 
uncertain state in regard to the speaker. 

An intimation is something expressed in an unpositive 
way; as, when (John steals my watch) he will be a bad boy 
indeed ; I went that (he might return.} 



40 

The sections in italics in the following sentences are not 
intimations, but affirmations — 

1. Perhaps John will come to schooL 

2. It may rain to-day. 

3. He may possibly return to this city. 

4. It is uncertain whether John will come. 

5. Per adventure we shall all be ruined in this enterprise* 
Now y all these sections are affirmations— and the thing 

which they affirm is the very contingency which, upon a 
slight look, seems to render them mere intimations. When 
one says, " Perhaps John will come to-day," he affirms that 
there is a probability. 

But, John, let us return to the watch. The hand does 
not intimate that it is nine. It expresses the fact in a posi- 
tive manner. You look upon the watch, and you are in- 
ormed that it is nine o'clock. What declares the hour to 
you ? the watch. This watch, then, is a sentence because 
i t contains a cordiction, which is an affirmation. 

Do you reply that this time-keeping sentence does not 
tell the true time- 7 John, the question is not whether this 
instrument declares the true time, — the question is, does it 
affirm any thing at alL If it does it is a sentence. If it 
affirms that it is nine o'clock when it is three, it affirms 
What is not true. But as it is not the truth, or falsity of 
the thing affirmed/which renders the instrument, or frame- 
work of words, making the affirmation, a sentence, the 
watch on the Theorem is as much a sentence at twelve as 
at nine. " Man is an angel" is as much a sentence as is, 
'Man is a human being" Not, however, because both 
assemblages of words speak the truth ; but because both 
contain cordiction. 

You will observe too that as the cordiction, the affirma- 
tion, is formed by two parts only ; namely, the hands, so 
in the verbal sentence he and went form the sentence char- 
acter — "He went unto the mount of Olives," 

* Not a Sentence." 

" Unto the Mount of OUves." 

As the assemblages of branches'under this head upon the 
Theorem, is not a tree, so the assemblage of words, "unto 
the Mount of Olives" is not a sentence. The assemblage 
of branches is without a trunk — and the assemblage of 
words is without a cordiction. What a trunk, then, would 
be to this group of branches, a cordiction would be to this 
assemblage of words. For, as a trunk would render the 
group of branches a tree, so would a cordiction render 



ft 

fhe assemblage of words a sentence. The trunk is re- 
stored to the branches in the figure, marked A, under the 
head, ILLUSTRATION VII. And the cordiction of this 
assemblage of words is restored in the following presen- 
tation — He ivent unto the mount of Olives. 

Do you ask, John, whether this whole assemblage of 
words, he went unto the mount of Olives, is a sentence] 

The whole assemblage is called a sentence, yet the cor- 
diction lies in he and ivent, conjunctively. 

John, do you see the winged figures, placed at the begin- 
ning, and end of your map \ This figure is called an Orb, 
not because every part of the figure is Orbic ; not because 
every part of the figure aids in the formation of the circle 
which it contains ; but because an orb is the only whole 
or entire thing which the figure presents. So " he went 
unto the mount of Olives" is all called a sentence, not be- 
cause each word has sentensic power ; not because each 
word aids in forming the sentence character, or affirma- 
tion ; but because a sentence is the only distinct entire 
thing which the whole assemblage of words presents. 

John, will you examine with a little minuteness these 
winged figures .1 How many parts are orbic 1 two — A and B. 

A and B constitute the circle by means of their orbic 
attribute. Now, as H, F, D, N, L, J, help complete the 
frame- work of this figure without contributing to its orbic 
character, so do the words, unto, the, mount, of, and Olives 
help complete the frame-work of the above period with- 
out aiding he and went in the formation of the sentence 
character. And, as H, F, D, N, L, J, can be taken from A 
and B without destroying this figure as an orb, so unto, the, 
mount, of, and Olives, can be omitted without destroying 
this assemblage of words as a sentence — he went. But, if 
we remove A and B from H, F, D, N, L, J, we de- 
stroy this figure as an orb -and, if we remove he and went 
from unto the mount of Olives, we destroy this assemblage 
of words as a sentence — "unto the mount of Olives." 

You see, then, John, that as A and B are the orbic parts 
of the figure under consideration, he and went are the 
sentensic words in this assemblage of words. You see 
also, that as H, F, D, N, L, J, are the inorbic parts of this 
orb, or winged figure, so unto, the, mount, of, and Olives 
are the insentensic words of the sentence before us. 

John, can A form an orb without B 1 no. Nor can B 
form one without A. From this fact you understand that 
he cannot form a sentence without went, and that went can 
not form one without he. 

You are to learn something more from this fact. You 



42 

are informed by the inability of A and B to form an orb 
separately, that not only he cannot form a sentence, but 
that no other word taken alone, can — you are taught that 
as it is by the joint action of A and B that an orb is made, 
»o it is by the joint action of some two words in the same 
assemblage that a sentence is formed. 

ILLUSTRATION IL 

SPECIMEN I. 

A B, a sentence because they, namely, the two parts 
marked A, and B, contain a cordiction which is an affirma- 
tion. (See cut, page 37.) 

Go through the whole grove according to this specimen. 

ILLUSTRATION III. 

SPECIMEN II. 

B, not a sentence because it contains no cordiction. 
Go through the whole grove in this way. 

QUESTIONS ON THE THEOREM. 

Is D a sentence] No. Why not] because it contains 
no cordiction. 

Is E a sentence 1 No : it is not a sentence because it 
has no cordiction. 

Is C a sentence 1 No : it is not a sentence because it 
has no cordiction. 

Is A B, under Illustration IL, a sentence] Yes. Why] 
because the cut contains a cordiction. (7 he teacher should 
continue tliis kind of examination through all the grove.) 

QUESTIONS. 

1. What does the word, Cordiction, mean] 
Affirmation, interrogation, command, petition, and inti- 
mation. 

2. Whence the propriety of calling these distinctive at- 
tributes, Cordiction ? 

From the fact that these five attributes are the vital 
parts of speech, or diction. 

3. Can an assemblage of words be a sentence, which 
has not one of these vital properties] No. Why] Be- 
cause affirmation, interrogation, and intimation of some- 
thing, or command, and petition to some being, are the 
only purposes which men have in forming sentences. The 
assemblage of words, therefore, which has not one of these 
sentence purposes, is not a sentence. 



42 

4. Is the following assemblage of words a sentence? — 
"Unto the mount of Olives." 

No. Why not? Because it has no cordiction. That 
is, it does not contain affirmation, interrogation, command, 
petition, or intimation. 

5. Is the following assemblage a sentence! — They went. 
Yes. Why ? Because it contains a cordiction. What 

is the cordiction which it contains ? Affirmation. 

6. What is the cordiction of the following sentence? — 
Are you ivell? 

The cordiction, or heart of this assemblage of words, is 
interrogation. 

SPECIMEN. 

"Of Olives" not a sentence, because it contains no cor- 
diction. 

"He is in Philadelphia" a sentence, because it contains 
a cordiction which is an affirmation. 

"Give us this day our daily bread" a sentence, because 
it contains a cordiction which is a petition. 

SENTENSIC EXERCISES. 

1. Law, in its most comprehensive sense, is a rule of ac- 
tion. 

2. Law, in its most confined sense, is a rule of human 
action. 

3. Man is a dependent being. 

4. On the laws of nature, and revelation, depend all hu- 
man laws. 

5. The law of nations is that collection of principles, 
which regulates the intercourse between national commu- 
nities. 

6. The work improperly done. 

7. Is the work properly done ? 

8. If John returns to-day. (Intimation.) 

9. Were any philosophers more eminent than Socrates 
and Plato? 

10. Forgive our sins. 

11. Pardon our iniquities. 

12. The mind of man not without some food to nourish 
the activity of its thoughts. 

13. My good boy. 

ILLUSTRATION IV. 
GRADUATION OF A SENTENCE. 

The graduation of a sentence, is the cutting of it up into 
sections. 



44 

A section is any portion of a sentence, the word or* 
words of which can be analysed by themselves ; as, (John,) 
[come thou here], 

SPECIMEN III. 




B, a section because its parts make a whole branch. 

The cut under this head is a kind of tree divided off, 
or cut up into sections. Every whole, or entire part of 
this tree is a section in itself; as, B, C, A B, D, E. Now, 
as the two parts of B form an entire limb, or branch of 
the tree, so the two words, " of Olives,'''' constitute an en- 
tire section of the sentence. 

[He went] (unto the mount) (of Olives.) 

Now, as no part of C forms a part of branch B, so no 
word in either of the other two sections of the above sen- 
tence, forms a part of the section, " of Olives." The prin- 
cipal design, John, in calling your attention to this cut is 
that you may see through it the manner in which a sen- 
tence is divided into sections, and also the exact character 
of a section. Examine this figure, then, with great care, 
and with much interest — keep your attention upon this 
figure till you fix in your wind the manner in which a 
sentence is chopped up into sections, and the exact char- 
acter of a section. Can you answer these questions? 

1. How does a sentence appear when cut into sections'? 

2. What makes a thing a section 1 

3. Into how many sections is an apple divided, which is 
cut into four parts 1 

4. How many sections are in the figure under considera- 
tion 1 

Specimen. — D, a section because it constitutes a whole 
branch. 

A B, a section because they constitute a whole part, a 
whole truncus. (Go through the grove in this way.) 

Now, John, you may attempt to cut up the following 
sentences into sections — 



45 



1. "He went unto the mount of Olives." (Three sec- 
tions.) 

2. " John wrote for his brother, for six days, for thirty 
dollars." 



ILLUSTRATION V. 
SECTIONIZING RULES. 

1. An assemblage of two or more words, having an 
independent word for its base, constitutes a distinct sec- 
tion ; as, [ There was a marriage] (in Carta) (of Galilee.) 

2. The single independent word that expresses a cir- 
cumstance constitutes a distinct section ; as, (Ah,) (John.) 
have you come again ! 

SPECIMEN IV. 

A B C, a section. Rule I. 
B, a section. Rule II. 




Now, John, the figure A, B, C, is designed to illustrate 
the first rule. The figure is an assemblage of three parts, 
which has an independent part for its base. A is the inde- 
pendent part : this has power to stand without depending 
upon B or C. 

Now, in the same way in which A is the foundation, or 
base in the frame-work of the figure, A, B, C, marriageis 
the foundation in the frame- work of the section, "There 
was a marriage." Marriage is the independent word — 
marriage is not only able to stand of itself, but to sustain 
all the other words in the sention. 

The character marked B, is intended to give you an 
idea of the second rule. " The single independent word 



46 

which expresses a circumstance, constitutes a distinct 
section." 

John, I am to explain to you in the first place in what 
way this cut is taken in order to render it indepen- 
dent, or foundational. To enable me to do this in a few 
words, I must ask you to return to the figure under Illus- 
tration IV. Look now at section, or branch, B. This 
clados, or branch is divided into two parts. The part on 
which B is placed, is the foundation of the section which 
is constituted by the two parts. You may be ready to re- 
ply that while this B part of the clados, is the foundation 
in relation to the top, the other part, it is not so in re- 
spect to the truncus, A, B. You have perhaps observed 
the place marked $ in the truncus ; and the suitableness of 
this place for the reception of the B part of the clados, has 
suggested to you that this part of the clados is a dependent 
part in the whole frame-work of the tree. 

But, John, you cannot take this part of the clados, or 
branch ; and frame it into the truncus without including 
the top, or dependent part also. Both parts constitute a 
branch, and as such, they depend upon the truncus, A B. 
But these two parts of themselves constitute a whole thing; 
namely, a limb, a branch, a clados. And the question is, 
not whether this whole clados is the foundation, or inde- 
pendent part in the frame- work of the entire tree, but 
whether that part of the whole clados, which has the let- 
ter upon it, is the foundation, or independent part in the 
frame- work of this entire branch. 

As a section, the two parts making the clados, are depen- 
dent. But as words, or individual parts of a whole, the 
lower part is independent, or foundational; and the upper, 
or top part dependent, or unfoundational Again — What 
A B is to the whole tree, the lower part of this clados is to 
the whole clados. A B is the foundation in the frame- 
work of the entire tree ; hence the B part is the founda- 
tion in the frame-work of the entire clados, or branch. 
Let us now come back to B under Illustration V. 

In this figure, as in the other clados B, you will find the 
seeming paradox of dependence, and independence. This 
figure is intended to be the foundation part of a clados, or 
branch — hence it indicates independence in frame- work in 
respect of the branch of which it may be made the basis. 
You see, John, that this part is constructed, and laid as the 
foundation into which more parts can be framed. This, 
part, then, in respect to these other parts which may be in-* 
grafted into it, is foundational, independent. Hence in re-* 
lation to these parts it is said to be a single independent, 
or foundation word, or part. But in relation to some trun-« 



47 

cus into which it seems shaped to be ingrafted, it, with all 
the parts which may be appended to it, is said to be a da- 
dos, a branch — dependent, unfoundationaL 

Let me next call your attention, John, to the second im- 
portant part of this rule, "The single independent word 
which expresses a circumstance, constitutes a distinct sec- 
tion," as, (Ah) (John,) have you come again V 9 

" Which expresses a circumstance." 

There are two circumstances which the word described 
in this rule may express ; namely, that of exclamation, and 
that of audience. To mark the circumstance of exclama- 
tion, the exclamation point is used, which you may see 
upon the cut. To indicate the circumstance of audience, 
a person with a horn in tne act of listening, is incorpo- 
rated with the cut. In this figure, then, John, you find 
these four points which deserve your fixed attention— first, 
that one word may constitute a whole section. Secondly, 
that this word is independent in reference to its own sec- 
tion, tne section of which it is the foundation. Thirdly, 
that this word as a section is dependent, or unfounda- 
tional; or that the section which this word constitutes, 
holds a branch relation to some other section in the frame- 
work of the sentence. And fourthly, that this word must 
denote either an exclamation, or an auditor. But, John, 
you must not take it for granted that every word which 
expresses some sudden emotion, constitutes a section. For 
instance— Lo, in the following quotation, does not of itself 
constitute a distinct section— 

" Lo the poor Indian." 

" Lo" is not a foundation word — this will be seen by 
rendering the section plenary—" Lo thou the poor Indian." 
That is, " see thou the poor Indian;" or "behold thou the 
poor Indian." 

QUESTIONS. 

1. John, do you understand me] 

2. What, do you not yet comprehend ? 

3. James, will you come to me, my boy] 

Remark. James is made a section by the principle ex- 
pressed in the second rule. " My boy," is made a section 
by the principle expressed in the first rule. " James" is a 
single independent word. But, in " my boy" we have two 
words. 

EXERCISES. 

Specimen. — Law in its most comprehensive sense is a 



48 

rule of action. " Law is a rule," a section. Rule 1. (Read 
the Rule.") 

"in its most comprehensive sense" a section. Rule 1. 
(Read the Rule.) 

" of action" a section. Rule 1. 

O liberty, thou wast once delightful to every Swiss. 

" thou wast once delightful,"* t a section. Rule L 

" O," a section. Rule 2. 

" liberty" a section. Rule 2. 

"to every Swiss" a section. Rule 1. 

1. Hearken , unto me, my people. {Three sec- 
tions.) 

2. O, Jerusalem, awake thou, and stand , up. (4 S.) 

3. Give , ear unto me, O, my nation. (4 S.) 

4. My Lords, I am opposed to this bill. (3 S.) 

5. Behold thou, the Lord's hand is not shortened he 
can still save , . (3 S.) 

6. They were known to return. (1 S.) 

7. They were known on their return. (2 S.) 

8. They write , accurately. (1 S.) 

9. They write , with accuracy. (2 S.) 

10. They came at that time. (2 S.) 

11. That , which we, for our unworthiness, are 
afraid to crave, our prayer is that God, for the worthiness 
of his Son, would vouchsafe to grant. (6 £.) 

Note. — They who may think that the graduation of a Sentence is 
nothing but the clause doctrine which the British English Grammar 
suggests, may correct their error by attempting to make out the six 
sections in the eleventh example. 

ILLUSTRAITON VI. 
CLASSIFICATION OF SECTIONS. 

RULES. 

1. That section which is so disposed of in the verbal 
frame-work as to become the foundation of the sentence, 
is the truncus ; as, [ There was a marriage] (in Cana) (of 
Galilee.) 

2. That section which is so disposed of in the sentence 
as to have a frame-work dependence upon another section, 
is a clados ; as, [There was a marriage] (in Cana) (of Ga- 
lilee.) (Ah,) (John,) have you come again ] 

*The principal section is to be taken first in all cases-rthe others 
in their printed order. 



SPECIMEN V, 




T, R, U, N, C, U, S, the truncus, because they consti- 
tute the basis of the tree. Rule I. 

C, L, A, D, O, S, a clados, because they constitute a 
mere branch of a tree. Rule it 

B, a clados, because it constitutes a mere branch of a 
tree. Rule II. 

Under Illustration VI, you find two rules which are fol- 
lowed by a specimen of their application. And below the 
specimen, you have on the map three cuts, two of which 
are designed to show in what way sections are divided 
according to their frame-work relation. Upon one of the 
two is the word, truncus : upon the other is the word, 
clados. The first rule under this head, is a sort of defini- 
tion — it tells you that the truncus is the basis in the frame- 
work of a sentence ; as, [Jesus saw a man] (that was blind) 
(from his birth.) Truncus — [" Jesus saw a man"] 

Your second rule is also a sort of definition, for it informs 
you that a clados is a section having a frame-work de- 
pendence upon another section; as, [Jesus saw a man] 
(who was blind) (from his birth.) 



Cladi 



. ( who was blind 
\ from his birth, 



\ 



" Cladi" John, is the plural of clados, as branches is the 
plural of branch. 

The first clados subjoins to the truncus the circumstance 
of his blindness. The second clados subjoins to the first 
clados the circumstance of the time during which the cir- 
cumstance of his blindness had continued — (who was blind) 
(from his birth.) To render this correct syntax, John, 
" had been" should be substituted for was. However, you 



50 

are not concerned now with errors in Syntithology, but 
with the principles in Syncratology. 

Let me here put you somewhat on your guard respect- 
ing rules, and definitions. You must understand them or 
lose the benefit of them. And to understand them you 
must in reading them pause at each word in each section, 
and at each section, in each sentence. Let me then call 
your attention to these rules again : 

1. That section which is so disposed of in the verbal 
frame- work as to become the foundation of the sentence, 
is the truncus ; as, Joseph went to the city ; James to the 
country. [Joseph went,] 

2. That section which is so disposed of in the sentence 
as to have a frame-work dependence upon another section, 
is a clados ; as, Joseph went (to the city ;) (James went) (to 
the country ) 

John, you should give close attention to the phrase " so 
disposed, o/." The truncus may by a different disposition 
in the frame- work, become a clados ; and a clados may in 
the same way become the truncus ; as, [James went] (to 
the city) (Joseph , ) (to the country.) 

Few sentences, however, can undergo that revolution in 
the manner of their frame- work, which is necessary to 
turn the truncus into a clados, and a clados into the trun- 
cus, without a very obvious change in the sense itself. 
And when the change in structure gives a new sense, the 
old sentence is entirely merged in the new — 

[/ say the truth] (in Christ ;) (/ lie not ;) (my conscience 
also bearing ( , me) witness) (in the Holy Ghost.) 

[/ lie not ;] (I say the truth) (in Christ ;) (my conscience 
also bearing ( * me) witness) (in the Holy Ghost.) 

In the following the truncus, cannot become a mere 
clados— 

"(To him) (that worketh) [is the reward not reckoned] (of 
grace) (but , , , ) (of debt") 

Specimen. — (John,) [come thou] (to me.) 

[Come thou,] the truncus because it is so disposed of in 
the verbal frame- work as to become the foundation of the 
sentence. 

(John,) a clados, because it is so disposed of in the sen- 
tence as to have a frame-work dependence upon another 
section. 

(To me,) a clados, because it is so disposed of in the sen- 
ence as to have a frame-work dependence upon another 
section. 

Sections, from their constructive rank in the frame- 
work of a sentence, are divided into two classes; viz. — 
Truncus and Clados. 



51 

1. A Truncus is the basis, the foundation section, in 
the frame-work of a sentence; as, [There was a marriage'] 
(in Cana) (of Galilee.) 

Rkmark. — The Truncus bears the same sustaining relation to the 
Cladi, in the frame-work of a sentence, which the trunk bears to the 
branches in the frame-work of a tree. 

2. A Clados is a branch section, ingrafted into, or upon 
another section; as, [There was a marriage] (in Cana) 
(of Galilee.) 

Remark. — The Cladi bear the same sustained relation to the Trun- 
cus, in the frame-work of the sentence, which the branches bear to the 
trunk, in the frame-work of a tree. 

How a Truncus may be distinguished from a Clados. 

No sentence has more than one Clados, of which potential preces- 
sion can be predicated — and there are very many sentences in which 
no Clados can occupy the first place; as, But one thing is needful ; 
(and Mary hath chosen that good part) (which shall not be taken away) 
(from her.) 

As there is but one Clados which can occupy the first place in any 
sentence ; and as the Truncus always can, it follows that the Trun- 
cus is one of the two sections which commence the sentence ; 
as, (In the beginning) [was the word ;] and the word was with God, and 
the word was God. 

(In the beginning,) and [was the word] are the only sections with 
whieh the verse can be commenced; hence it follows that one of these 
is the Truncus section. And as an Inseclados is never a foundation in 
the frame- work ; and as in the beginning is an Inseclados, it is clear 
that was the word is the Truncus. 

EXERCISES. 

Specimen. — Canst thou draw out Leviathan with a 
hook) 

Canst thou draw out Leviathan, The Truncus. Rule I. 
(Read the Rule.) 

with a hook, a Clados. Rule 2. 

Hearken , unto me, my people, (ye.) 

Hearken ye, the Truncus. Rule 1. 

unto me, a Clados. Rule 2. 

0. a Clados. Rule 2. 

my nation, a Clados. Rule 2. 

1. He was led up of the Spirit. (2 S.) 

2. And the house was filled with the odour of the oint- 
ment. (3 S.) 

3. And she wiped his feet with her hair. (2 S.) 



4. By grace are ye saved ( , , ) through faith, 

1 " e (4 #.) 

5. I can write better , with a pen than , 
, , , with a pencil. (4 S.) 

6. And they cried out with a loud voice. (2 S.) 

7. He lived in London , a year. (3 S.) 

8. On Friday last, we launched the ship. (2 S.) 

9. He went from his teachers to his books. (3 S.) 

10. Hejwrote these letters on last evening, in my pres- 
ence, on that table, with his pencil. (5 S.) 

N. B. (Should more exercises be deemed necessary 
they may be found under page 47.) 

ILLUSTRATION VII. 

RELATIONS OF SECTIONS. 

SPECIMEN VI. 




B, a clados, monorelation because it is connected to one 
section only. 

E, a clados, plusrelation because it is connected to more 
than one section. 

The relations of the cladi, are mono, and plus. — And the 
figure under Illustration VII. on the Theorem, is de- 
signed to show what these relations are. The pupil has 
learned that a clados is a branch, and that cladi, (pro- 
nounced cla-de) is the plural of clados. 

From the cut under jthe above head, it may be seen 
that these two relations, namely, mono, and plus, are de- 
pendent relations — or in other words, that they are rela- 
tions which the cladi derive from the truncus from their 
frame- work dependence upon it, or that they are relations 



53 

which the inferior clados derives from the superior cladi 
from its constructive dependence upon them. 

John, examine the frame- work connection of clados C 
with clados B. Do you not see that clados C is sustained 
by clados B ! and is it not obvious that clados C has a de- 
pendent frame- work relation upon clados B? Have you 
examined the place of engraftment, John ! That is, have 
you examined the sinus, the opening, in clados B, which 
receives the tenon part of clados C \ This sinus, John, 
is denominated the place of sectional contact, because it is 
here that the two sections meet in frame-work relation. 

Now, John, read with care what follows on this subject 
— you have learned from the preceding observations 
whence this dependent relation is derived, and from the 
subsequent ones you may learn how it is that this relation 
comes to be in its very nature, mono in one instance, and 
plus in another. But be careful in the first place to un- 
derstand the exact import of mono, and plus. Mono means 
one, single ; Plus means more than one. 

1. Clados C is a section of the mono relation, because 
it has a frame- work dependence upon but one other sec- 
tion. 

2. Branch E is a clados of the plus relation because it 
has a frame-work dependence upon more than one other 
section. 

QUESTIONS. 

1. Why are these relations confined to the cladi of a 
sentence ] Because they are dependent relations. 

2. Why does not the truncus have a relation! Thetrun- 
cus does have a relation. 

3. What is it ! The relation of the truncus is derived 
from its sustaining connection with the cladi. There are, 
then, two species of frame-work relation among sections; 
namely, sustaining, and dependent. The sustaining rela- 
tion belongs to those sections which sustain others — but 
the dependent relation to those which are sustained by 
others. Hence, John, you see that while the truncus can 
have the sustaining relation only, a clados may have the 
sustaining, and dependent also. 

Is the truncus, A, in the cut before you, sustained, sup- 
ported by any of the branches] 

Surely not. 

The truncus, then, bears no dependent relation to any 
other part in the whole frame-work of the figure. 

Clados, B however, has a dependent relation to the 
truncus, and a sustaining relation to clados C. In clados 
B, therefore, ycu find both species of relations. Clados C 
e2 



54 

is sustained by clados B — hence in respect to ciados B, 
clados C is dependent, and this constructive dependence 
constitutes its dependent relation. And as clados C does 
not sustain any section, clados C has the dependent spe- 
cies of relation only. Now, John, the dependent relation 
only, is recognised in the solution, or graduation of sec- 
tions — and this species is divided into mono, and plus. 

QUESTIONS. 

1. How many species of relations have sections'? 

2. What are their names] 

3. Does the truncus have both species 7 

4. Why? because the truncus, &c. 

5. Do any of the cladi have both species of relations'? 

6. Do any of the cladi not have both species'? 

7. Can you show me a clados on the Theorem, which 
has both species of relations ! 

Clados B has both. 

8. Why 7 because it depends upon — and sus- 
tains clados 

9. Is clados B dependent in relation up the truncus ] 

10. From what section does clados B derive its depen- 
dent relation ] 

11. From what section does clados B derive its sustain- 
ing relation 1 

12. John, how is the dependent species of relation, divi- 
ded 1 into m. and p. 

13. Wherein do these two relations differ] 

f 14. When a clados is engrafted into but one section, of 
which relation is it ] 

15. If a clados is engrafted into two, three, four or more 
sections, of which relation is it? 

John, mention by letter all the cladi in your cut, which 
are of the mono relation. Now name all those which are 
of the plus relation. 

N. B. Now, John, keep the frame-iv or k of this cut in your 
mind— that is, keep the peculiar construction of it there — 
reflect upon the principles which this peculiar construction 
is intended to illustrate, till the whole subject becomes 
painted in lively, and deep colors upon your judgment. 

ILLUSTRATION VIII. 

SECTIONAL CONJECTION, AND THE RELATIONS OF 
THE CLADI. 

RULES IN SECTIONAL CONJECTION. 

1. Every clados of the monorelation must be conjected 



55 

to that section which sustains it in the frame-work of the 
sentence. 

2. Every clados of the plusrelation must be conjected 
to those sections which sustain it in the frame-work of the 
sentence. 

SPECIMEN VII. 




A B, the truncus, because they constitute the basis of 
the tree. 

B, a clados, monorelation, sustained by its superior sec- 
tion. Conjective Reading — A B B. Rule I. 

E, a clados, plusrelation, sustained by its superior sec- 
tions. Conjective Reading — A B D E. Rule II. 

Under this head, John, you find two rules which are 
founded upon the relations of the cladi. To these rules, 
and to the specimens under them, you should give consid- 
erable attention. 

The act of putting sections together according to their 
sense, and frame- work relation, is denominated sectional 
c objection. And the cut under the specimen to which I 
have asked your attention, is designed, in part, to aid you 
in acquiring a thorough knowledge of this operation. The 
first thing to which I will call your attention, John, is the 
difference between this cut and that under the 7th Illus- 
tration. Examine both with care. In the one case the 
operation of connection is performed by actual contact, in 
the other by constructive adaptation. 

Clados B, under Illustration VIIL, does not come in 
actual contact with the truncus A B. That is, this clados 
is not actually engrafted, framed, inserted into the truncus 
in the same way in which clados B, under Illustration VII, 
is framed into its truncus. In the one case clados B is 
engrafted into the truncus by the hand itself; in the other, 
this clados is carried to the truncus, and engrafted into it 
by sig?is. The sinus, marked S, has a sigiiiftcajit attrac- 



56 

tion for the tenon part of clados B — and clados B, through 
the adaptation of tenon to sinus S, has an affinity for, or 
inclination to, the truncus A B. It is signified by the 
adaptation of part to part that clados B, and truncus A B, 
go together, and the relation of engraftment thus pro- 
duced is called the significant contact, or the significant 
frame-work relation. 

This adaptation which conjects one section to another 
is called the sense which vibrates between the two sections, 
and which exerts a sort of centripetal influence over both 
sections in bringing them into a state of significant or 
mental connection or conjunction. But still, John, the sense 
which directs you in finding the superior section, is 
no part of grammar—" grammar " is a word which is 
applied, not to the means of producing or directing the 
conjunction between any two sections, but to the conjunc- 
tion itself. 

John, it is said in your specimen upon the Theorem, 
that B is a clados, mono relation, sustained by its supe- 
rior section. After this you see the following, " Corrective 
Reading.''' And after this phrase, you see the letters, " A 
BB." 

John, the phrase, "Conjcctive Reading," is the pupil's 
advertisement, or notice by which he informs his teacher 
that he is about to engraft one section into another, to 
show what section, in his opinion sustains that which hap- 
pens to be under consideration. And to render it certain 
that the teacher may understand the pupil, the pupil first 
reads what in his judgement is the sustaining section — 
this being announced, the pupil reads in direct connection 
the inferior — this process of engraftment is denominated 
" Connective Reading." The letters A, and B are the means 
by which the superior section is singled out, and announced 
— these letters are the hilts or handles hold on which the 
mind's hand takes in order to hold up to the teacher's 
view that particular section which the pupil thinks is the 
one that sustains clados B. 

The announcement of these sections in the following 
order, is the process for showing that clados B is sustained 
by the truncus A B— A B B. 

Let us now examine clados E. Do you see clados E on 
the Theorem] Of what relation is this clados \ Clados E 
is obviously sustained in part by clados D, for the upper 
end of clados E seems adapted to sinus V in D. And the 
other end of clados E, seems fitted to sinus O in the trun- 
cus. It follows, then, that clados E is of the plus relation. 
To see the exact manner in which clados E is significantly 






57 

set, or fixed into its superior sections, examine dados K 
as found in the cut presented in the preceeding compart- 
ment of the Theorem. 

QUESTIONS. 

1. What is the superior section of clados B? 

2. What is the superior section of clados D ? 

3. What is the superior section of clados C 1 

4. What are the superior sections of clados E ? 

5. What letter marks the sinus for section C 1 

6. What section is inferior to clados C 1 None. 

7. What section is inferior to clados B ? 

8. What section is inferior to clados D 1 

9. What section is superior to clados D 1 

Now, John, continue to examine this figure in every 
point of view in which I have attempted to present it to 
your mind, till you make the principles which its peculiar 
construction is designed to present, perfectly familiar. Ex- 
amine the preceding questions again, and again — and 
with all, make the form presented in your specimens on 
the* Theorem a subject of close attention. Turn to the 
same cut in another compartment, and there practice upon 
the different sections, according to the specimen presented 
in this compartment. Having become familiar with the 
form presented in the specimen under the head of " Sec- 
tional Confection" take the following 

PREPARED EXERCISES. 

Specimen. " In the beginning was the word ; and the 
word was with God; and the word was God." 

Was the word. 

The truncus. 

in the beginning, 

A clados, monorelation, sustained by its superior sec- 
tion. Conjective Reading — The word was in the begin- 
ning. 

and the word was, 

A clados, plusrelation, sustained by its superior sec- 
tions. Conjective Reading — [The word was] (in the be- 
ginning ;) (and the word was.) Rule 2. 
with God, 

A clados, monorelation, sustained by its superior sec- 
tion. Conjective Reading — (and the word was) (with God.) 
Rulel. 



And the word was God, 

A clados, plusrelation, sustained by its superior sections. 
Conjective Reading — (and the word was) (with God ;) {and 
the word was God). Rule 2. 

SCHEME. 

1. In the following prepared exercises, every line con- I 
stitutes a section. 

2. The first line in every sentence is the Truncus. 

3. The Conjective Reading is indicated by correspond- ! 
ing letters ; as, a, a, which are placed at the close of the 
superior section, and at the commencement of the infe- 
rior ; as, 

The word was a 
a in the beginning. 
Conjected thus, — The word was a a in the beginning. 

4. The plus relation of a section is indicated by placing 
the same letters before the inferior, which accompany its 
several superiors, as, 

The word was a 

a in the beginning ; 

a a and the word was. 
Conjected thus : The word was a a in the beginning ; a 
a and the word was. 

1. The eyes a are b* 
a of a fool 

b in the ends c 
c of the earth. 

2. The most powerful motives call a b 
a on us 

b for those efforts c 

c which our common country demands d 

d of all her children. 

3. Nature has so exquisitely modelled the human fea- 
tures a 

a , , , that b 

b they are capable c 

c of the expression d 

d of the most secret emotions e 

e of the soul. 

4. The rapid extension a b may be considered a direct 
proof, d. 

a of the Christian religion 

b through the principal nations c 

c of the world, 

♦The inferior section should be introduced where the conjective let- 
ter stands in the superior. 



59 

d of the reality e 

e of the miracles / 

/ of our Saviour 

d d and ,,,,,,, g 

g of the miraculous powers h 

h with which i 

i the apostles themselves were endowed. 

ILLUSTRATION IX. 
DIVISION OF THE CLADI. 

RULES FOR DISTINGUISHING THE SECLADOS FROM THE INSE- 
CLADOS. 

The cladi from their sentential character, or from a 
want of this character, are divided into Sentensic, and hv- 
sentensic. 

1. A Sentensic clados is one which, while it aids in com- 
pleting the framework of a sentence, has a sentensic char- 
acter; as, [He went;] (but he did not remain.) 

2. An insentensic clados is one which, while it aids in 
completing the framework of a sentence, has, in itself, no 
sentensic character ; as, [He went] (to Boston ;) (but he 
did not remain there.) 

Note. — By contracting sentensic to se, the Cladi may be denomi- 
nated Selcados, and Inseclados. 

RULES. 

1. Every Clados with which not can be incorporated, is 
a Selacdos ; as, [John went] (for his book) (which he ob- 
tained.) 

Note. — If not is put into the Clados, which he obtained, it will attach 
itself to obtained, and thus become a member of this section — which 
he obtained not. 

2. Every Clados with which not cannot be incorporated, 
is an Inseclados ; as, [John went] (for his book.) 

Note. — Not cannot be incorporated with the Clados, for his book, 
fur as soon as it is put into the sentence, it incorporates itself with th« 
Truncus by attaching itself to went ; as, John went not for his book. 



60 
SPECIMEN VIII. 




A, a seclados because it contains a cordiction which is 
an interrogation. Rule I. 

B, an inseclados because it contains no cordiction. 
Rule II. (Go through the whole grove in this way.) 

An Insentensic clados is a branch which has no cor- 
diction, no sentence character. And as clados B has no 
cordictive sign, this branch is an Insentensic clados. 

For brevity, John, the Sentensic clados is called, se-cla- 
dos — and the insentensic, inse-clados. In this contrivance 
for despatch, sentensic, is cut down to se, and insentensic 
to inse. 

The sinus against which not is presented, is intended to 
show the fact that every se-clados is capable of receiving 
the word, not. The sentensic principle always opens a 
place in the section for the reception of the word, not. 
But when the section is destitute of the sentensic principle, 
there is no place found in its frame-work for the admis- 
sion of not. 



EXERCISES. 



Specimen. 
tained." 



["John went] (for his book) which he ob- 



The Truncus. 



" John went" 



u for his book" 
An Inseclados, monerelation, sustained by its superior 
section — Objective Reading— " John went for his book ." 
Rule I. 

"which he obtained" 
A Seclados, monorelation, sustained by its superior 
section — Conjective Reading — for his book which he ob- 
tained" Rule L 

1. He that makes his fire of hay, hath much smoke, but 
little heat. 

He hath much smoke a 
a that makes his fire b 
b of hay c 
a but , , little heat. 

2. Joseph forgave his brethren because he was a merci- 
ful man. 

Joseph forgave his brethren a 
a because he was a merciful man. 

3. Rejoice in the Lord, O ye righteous, for praise is 
comely to the upright. 

Rejoice , a 
a in the Lord 
aO 
a ye b 

b , , righteous; 
a for praise is comely c 
c to the upright. 

4. Shall mortal man be more just than God ? 

Shall mortal man be more just a 
a than God , 1 

5. A certain man planted a vineyard ; and set a hedge 
about it ; and digged a place for the wine vat ; and built 
a tower ; and let it out to husbandmen ; and went into 
a far country. 

A certain man planted a vineyard a 
a and , set a hedge b 
b about it 

b and , digged a place c 
c for the wine vat 
c and , built a tower d 
d and , let it out e 
e to husbandmen 
e and , went / 
/ into a far country. 
Should more exercises be deemed necessary, they may 
be found under pages 47, 51, 57. 



62 

ILLUSTRATION X. 
STATE AND COURSE OF SECTIONS. 
SPECIMEN IX. 
A B C, a plenary unbroken truncus, direct course. 




SPECIMEN X. 




ABC D E, a plenary broken truncus, direct course. 

a b c, a plenary broken seclados, direct course, mono- 
relation, sustained by its superior section. Conjective 
Reading ABCDE abc. 



63 

a b c d, an implenary inseclados, direct course, monore- 
Jation, sustained by its superior section, Conjective Read- 
ing — A BCDEabcd. (Go through the whole Grove in 
this way.) 

The states of a section are denominated plenary, and 
implenary. The plenary is represented byfthe. cut under the 
preceding page, specimen ix. This truncus is in pos- 
session of all its parts ; namely, A, B, C. 

The implenary state of a section is represented by the 
middle truncus, under the head of " specimen x." 

John, by comparing the second with the first truncus 
under this head you will find that C in the second 
one is absent. The absence of this part renders the sec- 
tion implenary. The letters are A, B, C, D, E. Now, as 
the C part of the second truncus is not expressed, not pre- 
sented; and as the omission of this part renders the section 
implenary, you see at once, John, what is meant by the 
phrase, implenary state. 

The fullness, or the want of fullness in a section, is de- 
nominated state. And there are two other conditions of 
sections, which are called state ; namely, divided, and un- 
vided, interrupted, and uninterrupted. One of these con- 
ditions is called the unbroken state, and is illustrated by 
the truncus ABC. The other is styled the broken 
state, and is illustrated by the first truncus under speci- 
men X. 

Course of Sections. 

The course of a section respects that direction which is 
given to it by the particular position of the words, or parts 
which constitute it. The courses of sections are three ; 
namely, Direct, Oblique, and Circumflex. 

1. The direct course is found in those sections which be- 
gin, and end in the same line — and is represented by the 
truncus A, B, C. 

2. The Oblique course is found in those sections which 
begin in one line, but end in another — and is represented 
by the last truncus, marked A, B, C, D, E. 

3. The circumflex course is found in those sections 
which take, from the position of their words or parts, a 
direction somewhat like a circumflex — and is represented 
in the word, " B D." 

U 



64 
. 1 

A B D* E F G H 

2 

IJKLMNOPCI 

3 

RSTUVWXYZ. 



AB. BEG. BET. BUD. 

2 

B. B*G. BT. BD. 

Upon this page you have the alphabet. Under the 
alphabet, you see the word, ab, beg, bet, and bud — Now 
each of these words is a section drawn out of the alpha- 
bet in the same way in which the truncus A, B, C, D, E is 
taken from the seclados a b c. In drawing section, ab, 
from the alphabet, you begin with A, and move on to B — 
hence you get a section which' is unbroken in its state, and, 
direct in its course. "AB" is an unbroken section be- 
cause the two parts which constitute it, are not divided, 
or separated by the intervention of any other part or let- 
ter. " AB" is also a plenary section because all its parts, 

* As, when, whenever, after \ and before often indicate the circumflex 
course. 



65 

or letters are inserted, or expressed. — Look at B » G under 
"BE G," and you will find an impienary section. B, with 
the comma before it is section A B, in its impienary state. 
" A B" is a plenary, unbroken section, direct course. 
"BE G" is a plenary broken section, direct course. 

1. Why plenary 7 because all the letters which belong 
to the section, are inserted, expressed. 

2. Why broken 1 because the B and E, and the E and 
G are divided by the intervention of D in the first in- 
stance, and of F in the second. 

3. why direct ? because all the parts, or letters of the 
section, are on one line. 

" BET" is a plenary, broken section, olique course. 

Why oblique 1 because the section turns from the line 
on which it begins, to find one of its parts ; namely, T. 

" BUD " is a plenary broken section, circumflex 
course. 

Why circumflex ? because the parts or letters of this 
section, are placed in a sort of circumflex form ; as, 
B D 
U 

Now, John, let me tell you what a section of the alpha- 
bet is — 

1. A section of the Alphabet is any letter which of it- 
self, denotes a distinct thing or sound ; as, I, E, O. 

2. A section of the alphabet is any combination of let- 
ters which have an individual relation ; as, ab, beg, bet, 

BUD, SYNTAX, BOOK. 

MO is a section — MN is not. SU is a section— SX is 
not. WI is a section — WS is not. O is a section — M is 
not. 

Let me now call your attention to the cuts under 
specimen IX, and X. 

All the parts which have an individual relation with each 
other, belong to one section — A, B, C have this relation — 
therefore these parts belong to the same section. A, B, C, 
D, E have an individual frame-work relation — hence these 
parts belong to the same section. 

John, do you see the three parts which divide, or break 
the truncus into several parts 1 the parts to which I allude 
are marked with small roman letters ; a, b, c. Do you see 
them 1 

Well, John, why do not the large A, and the small a, 
belong to the same section ! because hese two parts have 
no individual frame- work relation one with the other. 

Why do a, b, and c belong to one section? because 
these parts have the individual frame-work relation which 
the parts of the same section must have. 

John, is a b c a broken, or an unbroken section 1 
r2 



m 

What breaks it] B and C in the trunciisl 

Is A B C D E in a broken, or an unbroken state T 

What throws it into an Unbroken state 1 a in the clados 
divides A and B in the truncus — and b in the clados divides 
B and C in the truncus— and c in the clados divides C and 
D in the truncus. 

Is clados a b c a seclados, or an inseclados. Why 1 
because it has a cordiction, a sentensic principle. 

Which of the five cordictions has this seclados? the 
crown, the command. Is the seclados a b c direct, ob- 
lique, or circumflex in its course ] direct. Is this seclados 
plenary, or implenary in its state ! plenary. 

John, is clados a b , cZ, a seclados, or an inseclados 1 an 
inseclados. Why 1 because it does not contain a cordic- 
tion. That is, it has not one of the cordictive signs. 

What is the state of this inseclados with respect to full- 
ness 1 implenary. What part is gone 1 part c. 

What is the state of this inseclados with respect to con- 
tiguity or Separation of its parts! unbroken. 

Now, John, give close attention to what I am about to say: 

Take your pointer, and show me the very place on 
the Theorem, which respects the state. / do not under- 
stand you so clearly as to be able to do what you require. 
John, this proves that you are like human beings in gen- 
eral — you, like them, dislike to think closely. Had you 
thought, as you might have done, on the preceding part of 
this chapter, you would now comprehend plain expres- 
sions in relation to the state of sections. 

John, do you see the blank between b and cZ! I do. Put 
your pointer there. This blank, John, has respect to the 
state of the section. What state does this blank denote 1 
the implenary state. 

Now, John, point to some place, or to some part which 
denotes the broken state of a section. Does not the same 
blank which marks the implenary state, indicate the 
broken state? not at all, John! Why, d has no direct in- 
dividual relation with b. 'd has not been broken off from 
b, John. The part with which d holds an individual frame- 
work connection, is c which is absent. Now, John, put 
your pointer at the roots of the truncus, A, B, C, D, E. 
Now, put your pointer between A and B. Have you done 
it 1 What falls between these two parts 7 " a, the first part 
of the seclados." Well John, this place between A and B, 
in which a stands, denotes the broken state. Remove a 
from between A and B, and A and B would not be broken, 
would not be separated. Hence if you remove clados, a, 
b, c, from the truncus A, B, C, D, E, this truncus would 
be unbroken in its state. 
Now, John, put your pointer to every place from A to 



67 

fi, which indicates a broken state. And as you locate your 
pointer, say broken state. 

Now, John, do you point, and let all the others say "bro- 
ken state." 

Put your pointer between b and d — and let all the class 
say " implenary state." 

Take the first truncus under the head, "state and course 
of sections." Put your pointer into the narrow blank or 
sinus just under the cordiction of the section — and you, 
with all the others of the class, say, while the pointer re- 
mains there, " unbroken state." Move your pointer to the 
other sinus ; and say, " unbroken state." 

Now, John, point out the sections which answer the fol- 
lowing descriptions. 

1. A truncus, plenary state, and unbroken state. 

2. A truncus plenary state, and broken state. 

3. A truncus implenary state, and broken state. 

4. A clados, plenary state, and broken state. 

5. A clados, implenary state, and unbroken state. 

Course of Sections. 

Turn your eye to the third truncus standing under 
specimen X. Put your pointer upon the top of part C. 
Move your pointer obliquely to part D. Now, any point 
from C to D is the place which indicates the oblique course. 
Take the first truncus which is marked with the letters 
A, B, C, D, E. Now, any point from A to B, from B to C, 
from C to D, and from D to E directly upward, is the place 
to which you may point for the direct course. Do you 
tell me, John, that I referred you a few minutes ago to 
this very place as indicative of the broken state of a sec- 
tion 1 John, it is not the place, the blank, the space, be- 
tween A and B, which indicates a broken state, — the part 
of the seclados which occupies this place, indicates the bro- 
ken state. — Point out the sections according to the respec- 
tive description of each. 

1. A plenary broken truncus, oblique course. 

2. An implenary broken truncus, direct course. 

3. A plenary broken truncus, direct course. 

4. A plenary unbroken truncus, direct course. 

5. An implenary broken seclados, direct course. 

6. A plenary broken seclados, oblique course. 

7. An implenary inseclados, direct course. 

THE STATE, AND COURSE OF SECTIONS. 

The states of a section are plenary, implenary, broken, 
and broker. 



68 

1. The Plenary State is that which arises from that de- 
gree of fulness, which admits of solution without supply- 
ing words; as, [Give thou an apple] (to me.) 

g, The hnplenary State is that which arises from a want 
of one, or more words; as, [Give , ( , me) an 
apple.] 

\\. The broken state is that which arises from a division 
of one section by the intervention of some other section; 
as, [Law (in its general sense) is a rule] (of action. [Law 
( ) is a rule.} 

4. The unbroken state is that which arises from a con- 
tinuity of all the parts of the section; as, [Law is a rule] 
(of action.) 

Norn. — i onto Trunei as well as some Seeladi arc indivisible. And 
the lusecladi are almost all indivisible. 

II. 

The course of a section respects that direction which is 
given to it by the position of the words which constitute it. 
The courses are three; namely. Direct t Oblique, and OV- 
cumflex, 

1." The direct course is that which begins, and ends in 
the same line; as, [There was a man] (in Ce&area,) (whose 
name was Cornelius.) 

*2. The oblique course is that which begins in one line, 
and ends in another; as, [There was a man] {in 
( 'esarea) (whose name was Cornelius.) 

;>. The circumflex course is that which, from the pecu- 
liar position of the words in the section, is somewhat like 
a circumflex ; as, [And when (much people were gathered 
together,) he spake] (unto them) (by parables.) 

[And he spake when.] 

NYrr — As % (when it denotes time) irlcii, whenever^ bforr, and after 
i idicatc the cvrcvmflex course, [n the above case yen Sti rt from and; 
whence you proceed to fa and spake which you earn- to the place 
whence you started, where you put them between onrf, and mien. In 
the circumflex course re, lofon, or after is in all eases the last word in 
lh section. 

Specimen of sectional graduation under Syncratology, 

co. d po rt of syntax, 
[ M And when (much people were gathered together,) he 
spake] (unto lhem)(by parables.") 

" And he spake when," 



69 

A plenary broken truncus, the circumflex course. 

"much people were gathered together" 

A plenary unbroken seclados, direct course, monore- 
lation, sustained by its superior section. Conjective Read- 
ing. [And he spake when] (much people were gathered to- 
gether.) 

"unto them," 

A plenary inseclados, direct course, monorelation, sus- 
tained by its superior section. Conjective Reading. [And 
he spake (unto them) when] 

Note. — Observe that wlien takes a post position in this Conjective 
Reading-. 

" by parables" 

A plenary inseclados, direct course, monorelation, sus- 
tained by its superior section. Conjective Reading. [And 
he spake (by parables) when] 

PREPARED EXERCISES. 

Let the pupil supply every implied word as he reads his 
section. 

[Give , ( , me) such , ] (as I purchased ;) 
(and , , as much , ) (as I purchased ;) and I 
shall be satisfied.) 

[Do , the job] (in such a manner) (as will please 
him ;) (and he will give ( , you) as many dollars) (as 
will pay you well) (for your trouble.) 

[Such , (as I have,) I will give] (unto thee.) 

[No such thing was ever declared] (as he seems to re- 
collect.) 

( , Much) (as man desires) [a little will answer.] 

[As (Jesus passed by) he saw a man] (that was blind) 
(from his birth.) 

[As long (as I am) (in the world,) I am the light] (of the 
world.) 

He was good] (as well as , , rich.) 

They came] (as pupils) (to my school.) 
I must not use another's book when] (I have one) (of 
my own.) 

They accommodate one another daily.] 

: Give , ( , James) another apple.] 

The interest (of another , ) is not as dear] (to me) 
(as my own , , .) 

[I claim this one] (for my own , )— (but another , 
claims it) (as another's , .) 



70 

[This day suits my interest ;] (another , may suit 
another's , better) (than this , , , .) 
[Any interest (except my own , ) is another's , .] 
(For additional exercises, turn to page 47, and 51. 



PART II. 

ILLUSTRATION I. 

CHAPTER I. 

PARTS OF SPEECH. 

There are two parts of speech ; viz. Cormos and Ra- 
mus. 

Note. — This division of words is founded upon the trunk, and the 
branch relation of the words in the frame-work of a Section, or a Sen- 
tence. 

I. CORMOS. 

The Coi'mos is a foundation word in the frame-work of 
a Section, or a Sentence ; as, [He went] (unto the mount) 
(of Olives.) 

Remark. — What the trunk is to its branches in the frame-work of 
a tree, the Cormos is to the Rami in the frame-work of a Section. 

II. RAMUS. 

The Ramus is a word which has a constructive depen- 
dence upon another word; as, [He then went] {unto the 
Mount) {of Olives.) 

Remark. — What the branches arc to the trunk, in the frame-work 
of a tree, the Rami are to the Cormos in the frame-work of a Section. 
As some branches hold a direct relation to the trunk, so some Rami 
hold a direct relation to the Cormos; as, [He then icent] (unto the 
Mount) (of Olives.) 

And as some branches hold an indirect, or remote connexion to the 
trunk, but a direct or close one to another branch, so some Rami hold 
an indirect, or remote connexion to the Cormos, but a direct or close 
one to another Ramus ; as He then went. 

1. A Cormos is the foundation part in the frame-work 
of a section; as, T, C in the figure, on page 72. 

2. A ramus is a part of a section, which has a dependent 
or branch relation to some other part in the frame- work of 
the section ; as, R, L &c. in the figure, on page 72. 



71 

John, " Cormos" is synonymous with trunk. — The 
Greeks said the Kormos of a tree ; we say the trunk of a 
tree. " Ramus" is synonymous with branch. The Ro- 
mans said the " ramus" of a tree ; we say the " branch" of 
a tree. 

CHAPTER II. 

" Word Conjection." 

The cut on which is written, TRUNCUS, is a section. 
This section is divided into seven parts, viz. T, R, U, N, 
C, U, and S. All these parts are individually connected 
one with another — hence they all belong to the same sec- 
tion. Now, John, you must consider the branch upon 
which is written the word CLADOS, a branch of this 
truncus. It may be seen that this branch has been en- 
grafted into its trunk. Now, in order to show the relation 
which the caudex, or stem section bears to the branch, 
the stem section is called Truncus. But observe this, John, 
the word, truncus, is not so much the nameof this section 
as it is of its sustaining relation to the other sec- 
tion. A man may be called Foster to distinguish him 
from others. But if you desire to express his relation 
to certain other persons, you would call him uncle, bro- 
ther, father. To this assemblage of parts various names 
might be applied for the sake of mere distinction. These 
seven parts united in the same assemblage by the bonds 
or ties of frame-work principles, might be called a verb, a 
noun, an article, an interjection, a participle, a ting, a dood, 
or a tood ! But the object here is, not mere distinction- 
the object is to point out. the frame-work relation of this 
article, this dood or this tood, to the part which, in frame- 
work, stands connected with it. And to show this relation 
this assemblage of seven parts, is called truncus. The 
word, truncus, is not applied to this collection of seven 
parts to show what this assemblage is in relation to it- 
self—but to indicate what this assemblage is in resepect to 
something else with which it stands connected. The word, 
assemblage, would perhaps, indicate what this figure is in 
respect to itself. This assemblage is not a truncus in re- 
lation to itself, but in relation to some other thing. Foster 
is not a father in relation to himself— in relation to him- 
self, he is a man — but in relation to his children he is a fa- 
ther. 

" 1 runcus," then, is a name which points out the r ela- 
tion of this frame-work of seven parts. And while trun- 



72 




73 

cus is the name of the relation which this assemblage of 
seven parts, bears to the assemblage of six parts, which 
is placed on the right, CLADOS is the name of the rela- 
tion which this assemblage of six parts, bears to the as- 
semblage of seven parts, which is placed on the left. 

Having considered, and named the relations which the 
two assemblages bear one to the other, I will next examine 
the relation which the component parts of each assemblage, 
bear to each other. And first, what the left-hand assem- 
blage is to the right-hand one, T is to R. For, as the left 
hand assemblage is the basis, the foundation on which the 
right hand one must depend for mechanical, or frame- work 
support, so T is the basis, the foundation on which R is 
actually built. And as the word, truncus, is used as the 
name of the basis relation, the foundation relation of this 
whole assemblage to the other whole assemblage, the 
word, cormos, is employed as the name of the basis rela- 
tion which this individual, or single part bears, either di- 
rectly or indirectly, to all the other parts in the truncus 
assemblage. And, John, it is a curious fact that while T 
bears the same basis relation to R, which the TRUNCUS 
bears to the entire CLADOS, R bears the same depen- 
dent, or branch relation to T, which the whole CLADOS 
bears to the entire TRUNCUS. R is built upon T as the 
branch is built upon the trunk. And as " Ramus" means 
a branch, R's frame- work relation to T, is expressed by 
calling R a ramus. 

RULES. 

1. Every ramus of the first rank must be connected to 
the cormos or cormi which sustain it in the frame- work of 
the section. 

2. Every ramus of the second rank must be conjected 
to the ramus of the first, which sustains it in the frame- 
work of the section. 

3. Every ramus of the third rank must be conjected to 
the ramus of the second, which sustains it in the frame- 
work of the section. 

4. Every ramus of the fourth rank must be conjected to 
the ramus of the third, which sustains it in the frame- work 
of the section. 

5. Every ramus of the fifth rank must be conjected 
to the ramus of the fourth, which sustains it in the frame- 
work of the section. 

6. Every ramus of the sixth rank must be conjected to 
the ramus of the fifth, which sustains it in the frame- work 
of the section. 

G 



n 

7. Every ramus belonging to a collection of words, is 
of the first rank, and must be conjected to the assemblage 
which sustains it in the frame- work of the section ; as, he 
went because (he was called.) 

The above Rules, John, you should understand well. 
And in order that you may so understand them, I will 
make a remark or two concerning their universality, and 
their solid basis. Nature and art have divided the things, 
the formation of which they respectively control, into two 
great families upon the principle of the constructive, the 
frame-work relation of their component parts. One of 
these great families is composed, or made up exclusively 
of trunk parts, — the basis parts. The other family is made 
up entirely of branch parts, — dependent parts. Now all 
the branch, ramus parts of any whole, entire thing, or be- 
ing, have, from the very circumstance of a frame-work 
dependence, a kind of constructive, a mechanical affection 
for the superior parts to which they respectively belong. 
For instance — the button of the coat adheres to the coat ; 
the ear remains attached to the head ; the finger to the 
hand, and so on. Hence this universal rule — 

Every ramus must have a frame-work dependence upon 
that particular part in relation to which it is a ramus. — 
Hence a part of a tree, which is a ramus of the trunk, 
must have a frame-work dependence upon the trunk. — 
But a part of a tree, which is a ramus of another ramus, 
must have a frame-work dependence upon the other ramus 
in relation to which it is a ramus. 

The universal rule is that every inferior part inclines to 
its own superior. Hence the ear does not leave the head 
for the foot ; the finger does not reject the hand, and cleave 
to the head, nor to the foot — nor does the finger nail leave 
the finger for the thumb. And it is in conformity to this 
universal principle that U is sustained, not by N, but 
byR. 

John, the component parts of a thing have a direct, 
and an indirect frame- work dependent relation. For in- 
stance. Cormos T has a direct sustaining relation to 
ramus R. And this cormos ( T) has an indirect sustain- 
ing frame-work ralation to ramus U — and a still more 
remote sustaining relation to ramus N — and a remoter 
one still to ramus C — and one still more remote, or in- 
direct to ramus U. And although TVs sustaining rela- 
tion to U, is quite remote or indirect, its sustaining rela- 
tion to S, is even more remote yet. T bears a direct cor- 
mos relation to R — and R bears a direct ramus relation to 
U. Now, John, in order to express the direct, and remote 
cormos relation of T, the ramus parts are thrown into dif- 



75 

ferent ranks upon the principle of their near, or remote 
frame-work dependence upon the cormos T. 

T, a cormos. 

R, a ramus, first rank. 

U, a ramus, second rank. 

N, a ramus, third rank. 

C, a ramus, fourth rank. 

U, a ramus, fifth rank. 

S, a ramus, sixth rank. 

SPECIMEN IN WORD CONJECTION. 

T, a cormos. A cormos is a foundation part, or word in 
the frame- work of a section. 

R, a ramus, first rank, belonging to T. Conjective 
Reading — TV. Rule. Every ramus of the first rank must 
be conjected to the cormos, or cormi which sustain it in 
the frame-work of the section. 

U, a ramus, second rank, belonging to R. Conjective 
Reading — Ru. Rule. Every ramus of the second rank 
(second remove from the cormos) must be conjected to 
the ramus of the first, which sustains it in the frame-work 
of the section. 

N, a ramus, third rank, belonging to U. Conjective 
Reading — XJn. Rule 3. 

C, a ramus, fourth rank or remove, belonging to N. 
Conjective Reading— Nc. Rule 4. 

U, a ramus, fifth rank, belonging to C. Conjective 
Reading — Cu. Rule 5. 

S, a ramus, sixth rank, belonging to U. Conjective 
Reading — Us. Rule 6. 

Now, John, let us see if you can apply this principle o* 
frame- work relation to assemblages of words. 

Do you see these assemblages of words on the map, un- 
der the head of " illustration?" 

Illustration, 

1 

Cold weather. 

2 1 
Too cold weather. 

3 2 1 
Much too cold weather. 

4 3 2 1 
Very much too cold weather. 



76 

1. What T is to R, weather is to cold. 

2. What R is to T, cold is to weather. 

3. What R is to U, cold is to too. 

4. What U is to R, too is to cold. 

5. What U is to N, too is to much. 

6. What N is to U, much is to too. 

7. What C is to the second U, much is to very. 

8. What the second U is to C, very is to much. 

Word Connection— " Cold weather.'''' 

Cold, a ramus, first rank, belonging to weather. Con- 
jective Reading — cold weather. Rule 1. 

Weather, a cormos. A cormos is a foundation word in 
the frame-work of a section. 

Continue through the examples under the head of illus- 
tration, according to the specimen given above. Then 
go through with the truncus — after which give the word 
conjection of the clados on page 72. 




John, do you see this tree with a belt or girdle about its 
branches, and trunk ? This figure is intended to illustrate 
Rule 7. The girdle is a ramus belonging to an assem- 
blage of words. The brace is another mode of illustrat- 
ing the same thing. 



77 

Sections are divided into three classes; namely, truncus, 
seclados, and inseclado3 with the semisection, as may- 





be seen in these cuts. And the map is divided or con- 
structed in such a way as furnishes a theorem, or represen- 
tative of each of these sections. The entire range at the 
base of the map furnishes the theorem for the truncus, 
and for the seclados : and the portion from that part of 
the entire range, which commences with ramus A hav- 
ing the sun, constitutes the theorem for the inseclados. 
And the portion from that part of ramus A having the 
mutilated crown, the defeated petition and command, con- 
stitutes the theorem for the semisection. 



TRUNCUS THEOREM. 

In this theorem, John, you see a part marked M, N, 
upon which are the words let, made, felt, §c. This part 
is a ramus of the first rank, plus relation, belonging to F, 
and X. — This ramus is a component part of a frame-work ; 
and this frame- work like every other, must have a cormos, 
a foundation. And in order to see that the ramus under 
consideration is of the first rank, you must ascertain that 
it belongs to some cormos in the machine. To find the 
cormi in this frame-work of signs, you must examine till 
you find those parts which are the basis. These, of course, 
may be known from the fact that they have no tenons. 
The foundation parts are not framed into other parts — 
other parts are framed into them — hence the foundation 
parts have no use for tenons. The ramus parts being 
framed into other parts, have a necessity for tenons. 
Hence every part on the Theorem, which has no tenon 
is a cormos ; and each part which has a tenon is a ramus. 
Now, John, if you find the ramus under consideration to 
be inserted into a cormos, it is of course, of the first rank. 
To ascertain this, examine the tenon of the ramus, learn 
ts size and form — then examine the mortises of the dif- 

G2 



n 

ferent cor mi, and thus enable yourself to decide the rank 
of this ramus. Again — the ramus parts hold what is de- 
nominated a mono, or plus relation. That is, they are either 
inserted into but one other part, or into more than one. 
And those which are significantly inserted into but one 
other part, are of the monorelation. And those which are 
inserted into two, or more parts, are of the plus relation. 
Now, John, if you examine, you will find that the ratnus 
marked M, N, has two tenons— tenon M is inserted into 
cormos F ; and tenon N into cormos X. At the bottom of 
cormos F, you see a mortise for tenon M — and at the top 
of cormos X, you see a mortise for tenon N. This ramus, 
then, is of the plus relation. 

Inseclados Theorem. 

Now, John, I will invite your attention to ramus A, B, 
C, D, E, and cormos F. These parts constitute the Inse- 
clados theorem. This section, however, is not confined 
to the Inseclados, for it may constitute a part of the trun- 
cus theorem. And when it is taken as a part of the trun- 
cus, or as a part of the seclados theorem, its parts are 
marked S, Ss, T, Tt, U, Uu, V, Vv, W, X. 

First, speak the parts which constitute the Inseclados, 
thus— A, B, C, D, E, F. 

This is called the reading of the section. 

" A, B, C, D, E, F," a plenary inseclados. 

Word Connection. 

A, a ramus, first rank, monorelation, belonging to F. 
Conjective reading— AF. Rule 1. Every ramus of the 
first rank must be connected to the cormos which sustains 
it in the frame-work of the section. 

B, a ramus, fourth rank, monorelation, belonging to C. 
Conjective Reading — BC. Rule 4. 

C, a ramus, third rank, monorelation, belonging to D. 
Conjective Reading — CD. Rule 3. 

D, a ramus, second rank, monorelation, belonging to E. 
Conjective Reading — DE. Rule 2. 

E, a ramus, first rank, monorelation, belonging to F. 
Conjective Reading — EF. Rule 1. 

F, a cormos. A cormos is a foundation word or part in 
the frame- work of the section. 

John, do you see that B, C, and D have two tenons 
each? The larger tenon of B, is marked Bb; the lar- 
ger one of C is marked Cc ; and the larger one of D, is 
marked Dd. Now, if you will examine you will find that 
the larger tenons agree with the mortise in cormos F, 
with which the tenon of E agrees. The objects which 



79 

the contriver of the theorem, intends to accomplish by 
the two sets of tenons, are two. But it is not neces- 
sary for me to mention more than one at this time. One 
object is to show you what is meant by " construction." 
There are different constructions — and it is one thing to 
learn this fact from w T ords, and another from the eye. By 
means of the double tenons, the parts of this section, 
may be framed together in two ways— hence I shall be 
able not only to talk about different constructions, but to 
show them also. Now, John, when I say B, I mean the 
small tenon— hence part B is to be constructed into 
part C. But, if I use Bb in reading, enumerating the parts 
of this section, the small tenon is dismissed, and this 
part is framed into cormos F instead of ramus C. And 
so on. You see, then, John, that the word construction, 
means something — and you see too that when I speak of 
different constructions, I speak of what actually exists. I 
shall now present this section in both constructions. — 

14 3 2 1 
A B C D E F. 

1 1 111 

A, Bb, Cc, Dd, E F. 

Now, John, I wish you to £ive the "word confection" 
of this section as announced or advertised in these two 
ways. 

John, the section on the Map, is denominated the theo- 
rem — it is so called because it is your 'pattern in ivord con- 
nection. Hence you must learn to conjee t the parts of your 
theorem or pattern before you attempt to conject the 
words of a section. And if you think you can conject the 
parts of your theorem with ease, I will attempt to show 
you in what way you may be greatly aided by your theo- 
rem in conjeeting words. John, you have a pointer in 
your hand — now with this pointer place each word in any 
section on its true representative in the theorem. For in- 
stance — •' Behind that tree" is a section of three words. 
Each of these words has its true representative in the In-^ 
seclados theorem — hence to place each word on its appro-* 
priate part of the theorem, you must point out the part of the 
theorem while you speak the word of the section, which 
you think belongs to that part. When you speak behind, 
point to A — when you speak that, to E — and when you 
speak tree, point to cormos F. Do you ask, John, why I 
put tree upon cormos F ! I answer because cormos F is 
the true representative of the word tree, as used in the 
section, " Behind that tree." As F is the foundation in 
the frame- work of the theorem, so tree is the foundation 
in the frame-work of the section. F is not a representa- 



tive of the word tree in signification, but in construction, 
in frame-work rank. It is not signification, John, which 
you are studying — it is Syntax, construction. And do 
you ask why 1 put that on ramus E ! because ramus E is 
the exact frame-work representative of I hat. What ra- 
mus E is to cormos F, the word thai, is to cormos tree* 
Ramus E is of the first rank, and of the monorelation, 
belonging in frame-work dependence to cormos P. — And 
ramus that, is of the first rank, monorelation, and belongs 
in frame-work to cormos tree, 

ik Behind" is placed upon ramus A, because ramus A is, 
in the frame-work of the theorem, what behind is in the 
frame work of the verbal section. Ramus A is first rank, 
and monorelation ; and belongs of course to cormos F. 
Ramus A is the first word in the frame-work of the theo- 
rem. Ami ramus, behind, is first rank, monorelation, 
and belongs to cormos, tree. And ramus A is the first part 
in the theorem', — ramus, behind, is the first word in the 
verbal section. 

Now, John, I shall in the following exercises place the 
theorem letters over the words in each section; not, how- 
ever, to preclude the necessity of locating the words upon 
their respective parts of the theorem, but to aid you in do- 
ing it. 

John, it seems to me that you feel a curiosity to learn 
something about the various marks, and devices upon ra- 
mus A. These marks are (he dictionary imports, signifi- 
cations of the words whose frame-work relation ramus A 
is designed io represent. For instance — the small round 
white place hack of the human head, is the meaning of 
the first word in the following section — Behind that tree. 
But this white place, John, is the meaning of ramus A, not 
the grammar, not the syntax, not the frame-work relation 
of this ramus, it" you wish to find the meanings, the dic- 
tionary significations of ramus A, look up the circular 
white spois contiguous to the different figures upon this 
ramus. But it" you desire to find the syntax, the frame- 
work character oi this ramus, look at its tenon which 
•leads directly into the mortise oi' cormos F. 'That which 
you are studying, John, is not the signification, but the 
frame-work character of ramus A. You may, whenever 
you can, use one character as a guide to the other — but, 
this should be done without confounding one with the 
other — these two characters are just as distinct one from 
the other as are the circular spots about the head, from 
the tenon which by adaptation in size, and form to the 
mortise in cormos r, is inserted into cormos F. These 
two characters are just as distinct also as are the ramus 



81 

relation of ramus A to cormos F, and the peculiar import 
of these spots. 

Prepared Exercises in Word Conjection. 

A Bb D E F 

1. Behind, that, very fine tree. 

or 

A Bb C Dd F 

1. Behind, that, very fine tree. 

ABODE F 

2. In very much too cold weather. 

A Bb C Dd F 

3. In that, very new house. 

A Bb Cc Dd F 

4. In, that, very, new house. 

A B Cc E F 

5. Of coal black, broad cloth. 

A C Dd E F 

6. To that man's new hat. 

A B Cc D E F 

6. Into that man's quite new hat. 

A B C D E F 

7. With this boy's mother's father's son. 

A B Cc Dd E F 

8. With very old, pure, Holland Gin. 

A CDC DDEF 

9. With fiery red, East India, fine silk hats. 

A B Cc D E F 

10. For Mr. Cook's, very hard apples. 

ABb F B C D E 

11. On a wall sixteen hands too high. 

A Bb B C D E F 

12. On, a, sixteen hands too high wall. 

TRUNCUS THEOREM. 

John, I will now say something to you concerning ra- 
mus A in the truncus. Do you see this figure ] it has a 
brace to enable it to take the other cuts or parts in the 
bunch, in a collective state. You see, John, that what the 
tenon of ramus B immediately after this collective or brace 



82 

ramus, is to ramus B, the brace on ramus A is to ramus 
A. Ramus B, by virtue of its tenon, holds a frame-work 
relation to ramus C. And ramus A by virtue of its brace 
holds a frame-work relation to the entire section which 
follows it. A refers to, and includes the whole, the entire 
bunch of grapes — but B refers to an individual grape in 
the bunch. The relation of ramus A is collective — that of 
ramus B is individual. The difference between these two 
rami in one respect is intended to be illustrated by the 
two girdles belonging to the figure of a tree on page 76. 
The large girdle is intended to portray the relation of ra- 
mus A in the truncus — the small girdle is designed to re- 
present the relation which ramus B in the truncus bears 
to ramus C. Al] ramus words bear an individual, or a 
collective relation to other words — and these two belts or 
girdles are intended to show, and impress this fact. A 
ramus must bear either an individual, or a collective rela- 
tion to its superior word, or words. And when the ramus 
bears a collective relation, it is never found irt an insecla- 
dos. It is conjected according to the following specimen — I 

A, a ramus, first rank, monorelation, belonging to its 
own section. Connective Reading — A BCDFGIJLM 
P Q, R S T, &c. Rule 7. 

MANNER OF DRILLING THE PUPIL UPON THE THEOREM. 

A B CDFGIJKkMPRSTUVWXYZ. 

A, a ramus, first rank, monorelation, belonging to its 

own section. Conjective Reading— A, B, C, Z>, F, 
G, 7, J, &c. Rule 7. (Read the Rule.) 

B, a ramus, third rank, monorelation, belonging to C. 

Conjective Reading — B C. Ruled. 

C, a ramus, second rank, monorelation, belonging to D. 

Conjeective Reading — C D. Rule 2. 

D, a ramus, first rank, monorelation, belonging to F. 

Conjective Reading — D F. Rule 1. 

F, a cormos. A cormos is a foundation word in the 
frame-work of a section. 

G, a ramus, second rank, monorelation, belonging to I. 

Conjective Reading — G I. Rule 2. 

/, a ramus, first rank, plusrelation, belonging to F, and 
X. Conjective Reading — Fl X. Rule 1. 

JT, a ramus, second rank, monorelation, belonging to 
Kk. Conjective Reading — J Kk. Rule 2. 

Kk, a ramus, first rank, monorelation, belonging to cor- 
mos F. Conjective Reading — Kk F. Rule 1. 

M, a ramus, first rank, monorelation, belonging to cor- 
mos F. Conjective Reading — PM, Rule 1, 



83 

P, a ramus, first rank, plusrelation, belonging to F, and 

X. Conjective Reading — FP X. Rule 1. 
R, a ramus, first rank, plusrelation, belonging to cor- 

mos F, and cormos X. Conjective Reading — F R 

X. Rule 1. 
S, a ramus, second rank, monorelation, belonging to 

J?, P, M, or I. Conjective Reading— R S. Rule 2. 
T, a ramus, fourth rank, monorelation, belonging to U. 

Conjective Reading T U. Rule 4. 
U, a ramus, third rank, monorelation, belonging to V. 

Conjective Reading — U V. Rule 3. 
P, a ramus, second rank, monorelation, belonging to W. 

Conjective Reading— V if. Rule 2. 
IV, a ramus, first rank, monorelation, belonging to X. 

Conjective Reading — W X. Rule 1. 
X, a cormos. A cormos is a foundation word in the 
frame-work of a section. 

y, a ramus, third rank, monorelation, belonging to Z. 

Conjective Reading — Y Z. Rule 3. 
Z, a ramus, second rank, monorelation, belonging to R, 

P, M, or /. Conjective Reading— P Z. Rule 2. 

I shall now, John, give you these parts with the rank of 
each, marked according to its near, or remote relation to 
a cormos. The ranks are denoted by the figures over the 
different letters thus— 1. 
A. 
The monorelation is presented, thus — 1. 

A. 
The plusrelation, thus— >- 
A. 

First Presentation. , 

14 3 2 2~3 2h--,-4 

ABCEFGIJL N P R T. 

Second Presentation. 

11 11 2 1111111 

A Bb Cc D F G H Jj Kk M O Q Tt. 

EXPLANATION. 

1. The first ramus (that with the brace) is always of the 
same rank, and relation. Hence it is marked in the same 
way in both presentations. 

2. The second ramus may hold different degrees of ap- 
proximate relation to a cormos — hence it is marked first 



84 

rank in the second presentation, and fourth in the first pre- 
sentation. 

If this part is considered in relation to C, the third ra- 
mus, it is of the fourth rank, and should be distinguished 
by the letter B, which occupies the smaller tenon — for this 
tenon is adapted to the mortise of the next ramus. But, 
if this part is considered in relation to cormos F, it is of 
the first rank, and should be designated by letters Bb, 
which occupy the larger tenon, because this tenon is adapt- 
ed to the sinus, or mortise in cormos F. Hence in locat- 
ing the words of your section upon their respective parts 
of the theorem, you must know the exact frame-work re- 
lation of each word. 

If the frame- work relation of your word, is represented 
by the frame- work relation of the second part to the third, 
you will point to the tenon marked B ; as, " These boys 

B 
are much too rude." 

But if the frame- work relation of your word, is repre- 
sented by the constructive relation of this part to cormos 
F, you will point to the larger tenon, for this tenon is the 
index to this part's constructive relation to cormos F ; as, 

Bb 
He gave much money. 

3. That marked H, I, that marked M, N, that marked O, 
P, and that marked Q,, R, may be both mono and plus in 
relation. The technical letters by which these parts are 
designated, are so placed, that while one letter includes 
both tenons, the other embraces but one. These letters 
are divided into uni and ambi. H, M, O, and Q. are uni. I, 
N, P, and R, are ambi. H is uni, because it is so placed 
as to embrace but one tenon. I is ambi because it is so 
located as to include both tenons. H includes but one, be- 
cause it has no including influence over the upper tenon 
which conducts the ramus off to cormos X. I embraces 
both tenons, because it is so placed, that it not only in- 
cludes the lower tenon of the ramus, but connects the 
upper tenon with the ramus also. 

EXERCISES 

On the truncus theorem. 

. 1. Example. 

A Bb C D F I Jj L N O R Ss Tt U V W X Yy Z. 

2. Example. 

ABCEFGHIKk, MPaSTUuVvWXY 
Zz. 



3. Example. 

ABCcDEPGHIJJjKkL K MNP 
<0 R Q, S Ss T TtUUuVVvWX Y Yy Z Zz, 

4. Example. 

AEFIPSWI 

5. Example. 
FGIX. 

6. Example, 
E F G R Kk Tt Yy. 

7. Example. 
J X. 

8. Example. 
L. 

9. Example. 
8 Ss Zz. 

1Q. Example. 
F I X Yy. 

Exercises on the inseclados theorem* 

1. Example. 

ABCDEF, 

2. Example. 
A Bb Cc Dd E F. 

3. Example. 
A B Cc D E F. 

4. Example. 
A Bb C Dd E F. 

5. Example. 
A B Bb C Cc D Dd E F. 

Exercises on the semisection theorem. 
Remarks. 

The entire Theorem is divided into four sectional theo- 
rems ; namely, truncus, seclados^ inseclados, and smieec* 
H 



86 

Hon. The seclados differs from the truncus in frame-worfe 
rank only—for they are alike in sentensic character. But 
the inseclados differs from the truncus both in sentensic 
character, and frame-work rank. And the semisection 
differs from the truncus, the seclados, and inseclados inas- 
much as it is but half a section in sentensic character, and 
also, but half a section in construction or frame-work. In 
what way the semisection is but half a section in senten- 
sic character, I shall not now attempt to explain. And 1 
should be glad, John, to be excused from attempting to 
show you in what way the semisection is but half a sec- 
tion in construction, in frame- work, for T do not think that 
you will give that degree of attention, which is necessary 
to understand what I ought to say upon the subject. 

The four sectional theorems commence with A — hence 
the truncus, the seclados, the inseclados, and the semisec- 
tion all begin on the map, with A. 

The semisection always begins with to, either expressed, 
or implied. Ramus A on which to is written always be- 
gins the semisection. 

A is inserted into C, and C into cormos R. The frame- 
work relation, then, runs thus — A C R. Among these 
three parts, John, you have a foundation, namely, cor- 
mos R for ramus C ; and you have a superior ramus 
in C for ramus A. Now, John, suppose that you take 
ramus A P and V — these three parts would not constitute 
even a half section for they can not be framed together. 
But A C and R can be framed together — these parts are 
now significantly framed together. But although they 
are framed together, they do not form a whole thing, an 
entire frame-work in mechanism, Syntax. One of the 
tenons on ramus C is not yet provided with a mortise. 
And as this mortise is found in cormos X, cormos X is 
united to the semisection. And as ramus W holds an in- 
dividual constructive relation with cormos X, ramus 
W is also connected with the semisection. All the parts 
which have an individual frame-work relation, whether 
that relation is direct, or indirect, belong to one section, 
family. 

Hence you see, John, that A C Q, R, &c. in the semi- 
section, and Y Z X I F A, &c.' &c. in the truncus belong 
to one section, to one family, to one constructive group. 

The semisection is also connected with the inseclados 
which you may see by following the frame- work relation 
between the parts, through the medium of mortise, and 
tenon. 



87 

Exercises on the semisection theorem, 

1. Example. 

ACJNaH 

2. Example. 
A C P R T V. 

3. Example. 
ABDGJNPUVR. 

Exercises in which the semisection theorem is united with 
the inseclados theorem. 

1. Example. 
ABCBEFABEHLORSJV. 

2. Example. 
ABDGJMPUVWSOLHR. 

Exercises in which the semisection theorem is united with 
the truncus, and seclados theorem. 

1. Example. 

A B C D F I G W XYZABERTV. 

2. Example. 
F I W X A B E W S. 

3. Example. 
FHGHRABMLOSW. 

QUESTIONS. 

L Into how many theorems is the map divided! four; 
truncus, seclados, inseclados, and the semisection. 

2. What letter designates the part which begins each sec- 
tional theorem 1 A. 

3. Can the semisection theorem be united with the trun- 
cus theorem 1 yes. 

4. Can the semisection theorem be connected with the 
inseclados theorem ! yes. 

5. Does the truncus theorem differ from the seclados theo- 
rem } the truncus theorem is the seclados theorem, 



PREPARED EXERCISES, 
in Word Connection on the Theorem. 

Cc D F I W X A F I 

[A certain man planted a vineyard ;] (and , set 

WX AFAF IWXADdE 

a hedge) (about it;) (and , digged a place) (for the wine 

F AFIWX AFIXYA 

vat ;) (and , built a tower ;) (and , let it out) (to 

E F AFH ADdE F 

husband men ;) (and , went) (into a far country.) 

Directions. — Put each verbal section in a sentence, upon 
its own theorem section, and each word in a section upon 
its own theorem word in the theorem section. 

When the section is implenary be guided in your pro- 
cess by the following specimen — " He" understood, a cor- 
mos. A cormos is a foundation word in the frame-work 
of a section. 

N. B. Give all the rules as you proceed. 

FFHKAFHA F AFF 

[He (that is not) (with me) is] (against me ;) (and he (that 

I X Y A F I X 

gathereth , not) (with me) scattereth , .) 

ECcD FHMSAEFF 

[ When (the unclean spirit has gone out) (of a man) he 

H A E F F I X A F 

zoalketh] (through dry places) (he seeking rest ;) (and (he 

I XFHFHM AEF 

finding none) he saith) (I will return) (unto my house) 

E F H K 

(whence I came out.) 

AYFI FIXYyAF 

[And When (he cometh) he Rndeth it swept ;1 (and , 
I X Yy 

, , garnished.) 

AAFA F IKXAF 

[ " And (if I (by Beelzebub) cast out devils) (by whom) 

HDFNXY A HFN 

do your sons cast them out?] [Therefore shall they be 

W X 
your judges."] 



89 

APHACR AFAP 

{And he began 'to speak , \| (unto them) (by parables.) 

Note. — In this sentence there is a truncus, a semisection, and an in- 
seclados. And of course the first word in each is marked A. This 
manner of designation has been explained already. But the fact that 
the semisection in the preceding sentence, constitutes a portion of the 
truncus, may be referred to without disadvantage. Every semisection 
must constitute a part of the truncus, asecZaJos, or an inseclados; and 
it is distinguished by half parentheses / \ 

F I Tt U Uu X A C Q, R 

[It requires a very learned man 'to teach this schooD] 

ABbC D FHJ LMO A 

[And a very learned man, can very easily be found] (in 

Bb C Dd F F G H J 

this singularly literary city,) (who certainly will quite 

L M A Bb F 

readily engage) (in the business.) 

A F I X Y A E F 

[" And I punished them oft] (in every synagogue.") 

F I W X 

[Moses smote the rock."] 

FHJj AEFAB A EFAE 

[It is easier] (for a camel 'to go^) (through the eye) (of a 

F A FHADdEFAB A 

needle) (than , , ) (for a rich man 'to enter"*) (into 

E F A F 

the kingdom) (of heaven.) 

FH AEF A F I X 

[I went] (for my book) (for I wanted it.) 

FHACQR AFHN X A E 

[ I went 'to get my book"*] (for T had wanted it) (for a 

F A F 

number) (of days.) 

D FHMOSAD F 

[The books have been sent for] (for that gentleman 

I X A C D E F 

wishes them) (for his brother's sister's son.) 

OBSERVATIONS. 

Before giving more exercises, it may be well to remark 
that the semisection is sometimes taken as one word — and 

H2 



that when taken thus, it is always a cormos. Now, to im- 
press this fact, John, upon your mind at once, the semi- 
section on the theorem, is placed upon cormos F. And to 
inform you that the semisection when taken as a cormos, 
is viewed by the mind as one word, the mind's hand is re- 
presented as seizing its parts and compressing them into 
one significant mass. 

A B H Jj A E P 

1. [F* (To walfc is good] (for our health.) 

FI AB AFHJj AE F 

2. [I love X (to walfo] (for it is good) (for our health.) 

F H A B 

3. [John intends ^to return^] 

F H A A B 

4. [John intends] (for 'jF to returnX) 

Solution. — 3. [John intends to return.] 
John, a cormos. A cormos is a foundation &c. 
intends, a ramus, first rank, monorelation, &c. 
to, a ramus, second rank, monorelation, &c. 
return, a ramus, first rank, monorelation, belonging to* 
John. 

A A B 

4. ["John intends] (for < F to return\") 

John, a cormos. A cormos is a foundation &c. 
intends, a ramus, first rank, monorelation, &c. 

A A B 

(for (F to return\) 

for, a ramus, first rank, monorelation, belonging to the 
semisection, to return. 

" Fto return" a cormos. A cormos is a foundation &c 

to return. 

to, a ramus, second rank, monorelation, belonging to 
return. 

return, a ramus, first rank, monorelation, belonging to 
John. Conjective Reading — John returns. 

A B H Jj A E F 

5. [F{To walto is good] (for our health.) 

Solution. — " To walk is good." 

*F shows that the entire eemi-section is placed upon cormot F as? 
one part of speech. 



9i 

F To walk, a cormos. A cormos is a foundation &c, 

H 

is, a ramus, first rank, monorelation, belonging to the 
semisection cormos, to walk. Con. R. To walk is. 

Jj 
good, a ramus, first rank, monorelation, belonging to the 
semisection cormos. Con. R. To walk is good. 

A to ivalk. 

to, a ramus, second rank, monorelation, belonging to walk. 

Con. R. to walk. 

B 

walk, a ramus, first rank, monorelation, belonging to us 
understood. Con. R. us to walk. Rendered plenary 
thus — For us to walk is good for our health. 

F I X A B 

6. [I saw him ( , walk.">] 

FH G N X A C Q, R 

7. [We have certainly heard her ( , sing this song 

U W 

much better. N ] 

REMARK. 

To, in the semisection is understood when hear, bid, let* 
make, see, feel, dare or help, falls into the truncus, or into 
the seclados. (See these words on ramus N, in the trun- 
cus theorem.) 

F H M Jj A C Q R U 

[8. He should be particular fto make the knife unusually 

W 

sharp."*] 

F H AC a R M P 

9. [He attempted (fto accomplish his object, very much 

U W A F 

too soonV] (for success.) 

FHJ KkAE F ABE 

10. [I was much pleased ( , last evening) r to have seen 

R A E F A F 

him>] ( , last sabbath) (at church.) 

FH JL M ABDFP 

11. [I am very highly favoured ^to have been noticed so 

UW AB Cc EFAFH 

very publicly"*] (by so distinguished a man) (as you , .) 



92 

Rank and Relation of the Rami. 

The rank of a Ramus respects its near, or remote rela- 
tion to the Cormos. There are six ranks which, in the 
following Exercises, are distinguished by 1, 2, 3,4, 5, 6. 

The relation of a Ramus respects the number of words 
to which the Ramus belongs. There are two relations, 
viz. Mono, and Plus. The^Mono is represented in this 

1 
way, good. The Plus, in this,g-oocZ. 

QUESTIONS. 

1. What is Word connection] (See conject. Glossary.) 

2. What is the difference between plenary and imple- 
nary ? (See page 26.) 

3. How many parts of speech are there ! (See page 70.) 

4. What is a truncus ? (P. 48.) 

5. What is a ramus ? (P. 70.) 

6. What does the rank of a ramus respect! 

7. Plow many ranks are there 3 (P. 92.) 

8. What does the relation of a ramus respect ? (P. 92.) 

9. How many relations are there? (P.92.) 

10. What does mono mean 1 One. 

11. What does plus mean? More than one. 

12. To how many words is the ramus of the monorela- 
tion conjected 3 To one only. 

13. Whence is derived the plusrelation 1 From the 
number of words to which the ramus belongs. 

14. To how many words can the ramus of the plusre- 
lation belong ? To two only. 

15. Can a ramus of the second rank be of the plusre- 
lation I It cannot. The plusrelation is confined to rami 
of the first rank. 

16. In what way is the monorelation presented? By 
the erect posture of the figure over the word. 

17. How is the plusrelation presented ? By the hori- 
zontal posture of the figure. 

18. When the ramus is of the third rank, what rule is 
applied ? 

19. When a ramus belongs to an assemblage of words, 
what rule applies ? 

20. Can you repeat the rami that belong to assem- 
blages of words ! (P. 98.) , 

RULES. 

1. Every Ramus of the first rank must be conjected to 
the Cormos or Cormi which sustain it in the framework 
of the section. 



93 

2. Every Ramus of the second rank must be conjected 
to the Ramus of the first, which sustains it in the frame- 
work of the section. 

3. Every Ramus of the third rank must be conjected to 
the Ramus of the second, which sustains it in the frame- 
work of the section. 

4. Every Ramus of the fourth rank must be conjected 
to the Ramus of the third, which sustains it in the frame- 
work of the section. 

5. Every Ramus of the fifth rank must be conjected to 
the Ramus of the fourth, which sustains it in the frame- 
work of the section. 

7. Every Ramus belonging to a collection of words, is 
of the first rank, and must be conjected to the assemblage 
of words, which sustains it in the frame-work of the sec- 
tion; as, he went because (he was called.) 

Note. — The plusrelation is confined to rami of the first rank. 

SPECIMEN. 

1 14 3 2 1 

The fire is very much too hot. 

The, a Ramus, first rank, monorelation, sustained by fire. Conjee- 
tive Reading- — the fire. Rule 1. 

fire, a Cormos. 

is, a Ramus, first rank, monorelation, sustained by fire. Conjec- 
tive Reading- — fire is. Rule 1. 

very, a Ramus, fourth rank, sustained by much, Conjective Read- 
ing- — very much. Rule 4. 

much, a Ramus, third rank, sustained by too. Conjective Reading — 
much too. Rule 3. 

too, a Ramus, second rank, sustained by hot. Conjective Reading 
—too hot. Rule 2. 

hot, a Ramus, first rank, monorelation, sustained by fire. Conjec- 
tive Reading-, hot fire. Rule 1. 

Directions. — The numbers indicating the ranks, and relations of the 
words m the following Exercises, do not render the Theorem useless in 
giving the Word Conjection. The learner should place each word upon 
its constructive theorem representative. And he should be required, 
for his own advantage in a variety of respects, and for the teacher's 
convenience in giving instruction, to prepare the Exercises upon paper, 
or upon a slate in the following manner — 

E2H1D1 F A1F A 1 F 

{Titer e was a marriage] (in Carta) (of Galilee.) 

EXERCISES. 
2 11 1 1 

[There was a marriage] (in Cana) (of Galilee.) 



94 

2 1 
Coal black cloth. 

2 1 

Strikingly green trees. 

1 13 2 1 

This fact is very well known. 

2 1 
Greyish blue cloth. 

ill 111 

Those, fine, beautiful, young, green, straight trees. 

4 3 2 1 

How very fast James walks. 

13 2 1 

I am most completely disappointed. 

4 3 2 1 
Very much too cold weather. 

1 14 3 2 1 

The weather is very much too warm. 

~ 1 2 1 

He is a very learned man. 

1 Wl 1 

John will be a good scholar. 

1 1 

Cold, dark nights. 

2 1 

Marble ware house. 

2 1 

Cloud capt towers. 

1 14 3 2 1 

The tea is six pounds too heavy. 

1 14 3 2 1 

That wall is sixteen feet too high. 

1 12 4 3 2 1 

The tea is full six pounds too heavy. 

1 14 3 2 1 

The tea is very much too heavy. 

1 12 4 3 2 1 

That wall is nearly sixteen hands too high. 

1 14 3 2 1 

The army is ten thousand men strong. 



95 

1 14 3 2 1 

The distance is very much too long. 

12^ 

They can not write letters. 

Every ramus of the second rank must belong to one of 
the first ; hence, where there are two of the first, the sense 
must decide to which of the two the ramus of the second 
belongs. In the above example, there are two of the first, 
can and write. And the question is, to which of these two, 
not belongs. It is the province of not to deny the power 
or ability to do the act of writing. And to lead the mind 
of the reader to this sense of the expression, not has a 
figure over it corresponding in size to that over can. Not 
and never almost always belong to the ramus which falls 
on the left hand. 

2 111 1 1 2 -. 

[John then went] (for his book ;) (but he did not get it.) 

I have not written letters. 

1 2 _ 1 

He would not learn his lesson. 

H- 1 

He planted a vineyard. 

^1 1 2 ~ 

[He is a lad] (whom you may not know.) 

I 12^1 

Idle children will not learn their books. 

II 12 13 2 

This large book has been written long since. 

i 1 2 2 m l 

These boys have not been writing their copies. 

i 2 1 

We have been laughing. 

i 2 1 

You have been walking. 

i 8 2 31 

We shall have been walking. 
Coal black cloth. 
Strikingly green trees. 
The fact is very well known. 
Greyish blue cloth. 






96 



l 12 2m 1 

These boys have not been writing their copies. 

i 2 1 

We have been laughing. 

12 1 

You have been walking. 

i 2 1 

We shall have been walking. 

] 2 1 

[They rode almost] (to Ovid.) 

Unprepared Exercises in Word Conjection. 

The distance is very much too long. 

His father was very much pleased. 

Very much too cold weather. 

Coal black cloth. 

Strikingly green trees. 

This fact is very well known. 

Greyish blue cloth. 



Peter 


made 


Samuel's 


shoes. 


Samuel 


cut 


Peter's 


hand. 


Lucy 


knits 


men's 


mittens 


Sally 


makes 


ladies' 


clothes. 


Julia 


studies 


Murray's 


works. 


Harriet 


read 


Homer's 


Iliad. 


Men 


built 


Solomon's 


temple. 



Moses smote the rock. 
Charles was taught. 
Letters are written. 
James taught Charles. 



Charles has written letters. 
Nancy is laughing. 
John laughs. 
Does David walk? 



SPECIMEN UNDER RULE 7. 

" And her spirit came again ; 

and she arose straitway ; 

and he commanded them to give meat to her." 

And, a ramus, first rank, monorelation, sustained by its 
own section. Conjective Reading — And her | 
spirit came again. Rule 7. 

her, a ramus, first rank, monorelation, sustained by spirit. 



$>7 

Conjective Reading — htr spirit. Rule 1. 

spirit, a cormos. 

came, a ramus, first rank, monorelation, sustained by spirit 
Connective Reading— spirit came. Rule L 

again, a ramus, second rank, sustained by came. Conjec- 
tive Reading — came again. Rule 2. 

and, a ramus, first rank, monorelation, sustained by its 
own section. Conjective Reading— and she 
arose straightway. Rule 7. 

she, a cormos. 

arose, a ramus, first rank, monorelation, sustained by 
she. Conjective Reading — she arose. Rule i. 

straightway, a ramus, second rank, sustained by arose. 
Conjective Reading — arose straightway. R. 2. 

and, a ramus, first rank, monorelation, sustained by its 
own section. Conjective reading — and he com- 
manded them to give meat Rule 7, 

he, a cormos. 

commanded, a ramus, first rank, plusrelation, sustained by 
he and them. Conjective Reading — he com- 
manded them. Rule L 

them, a cormos. 

to, a ramus, second rank, sustained by give. Conjective 
Reading — to give. Rule 2. 

give, a ramus, first rank, plusrelation, sustained by them 
and meat. Conjective Reading — them give 
meat. Rule 1. 

meat, a cormos. 

to, a ramus, first rank, monorelation, sustained by her 
Conjective Reading — to her. Rule 1. 

her, a cormos. 

Note 1 . — It frequently happens that one, or more words of the as- 
semblage to which and, or, nor, neither, as well as, and some others, 
belong", are understood ; as, A certain man planted a vineyard, and set 
a. hedge. In such cases the implied words must always be supplied ; 
as, and he set a hedge. 

He saw John, and Joseph. That is, He saw John; and he saw 
Joseph. 

They heard of James, and of his brother. That is, They heard of 
James ; and they heard of his brother. 

Note 2. — The word's which are put together in the same line, are 
frequently taken together as one part of speech. {See page 98.) 

Note 3. — When and can be substituted for -as well as, the^e three 
words are taken as one part of spceeh. 

When lut is found in a section which follows not only, these two 
words are taken as one part of speech. 



A list of the rami 

And 

And therefore 

And yet 

And though 

And although 

Although 

And so 

As 

As also 

As well as {and) 

Also 

Again 

Because 

Beside 

Besides 

Being 

But 

But that 

But though 

But although 

But however 

Both (and) 

Either (or) 

Except 

Excepting 

Even 

Even so 

Else 

For (because) 

Further 

Hence (therefore) 

However (but) 

Howsoever 



98 

which come under rule 7* 

Howbeit 
If 

Inasmuch 

Lest 

Lest that 

Likewise 

Moreover 

Nay 

Nathless 

Not only (but) 

Nevertheless 

Notwithstanding 

No 

Now 

Neither (nor) 

Or 

Or even 

Otherwise (or) 

Provided (?/) 

Provided that 

Save 

Since (as) 

Than 

Then (therefore) 

Thence (therefore) 

Therefore 

Though 

Unless 

Wherefore 

Whereas 

Whether 

Yet (nevertheless) 



EXERCISES. 

A certain man planted a vineyard; 

and he set a hedge ; 

and he digged a place ; 

and he built a tower; 

and he let it out ; 

and he went 

into a far country. 

And he went out thence ; 

and , came 

into his own country ; 

and his disciples followed him. 

For additional exercises, see page 69, 111, 114, 117, 



$9 

PART II. 

CHAPTER III. 

John, it may be well to remark here that Part I, as pre- 
sented under page 34, and Part II, as introduced under 
page 70, have no reference to the general division of the 
subject of syntax as presented under page 31. These di- 
visions, as introduced under page 34, and 70, respect the 
order of treating the subject of syncratology, the second 
part of syntax. 

In Part I, I have treated on that part of syncratology, 
which respects assemblages of words. I have there con- 
sidered the sentensic assemblage, and the sectional assem- 
blage. In the second part, I have treated on that part of 
syncratology, which respects words as individual, or com- 
ponent parts of sectional assemblages. In the first part I 
have attempted to shew the constructive rank which sec- 
tional assemblages hold in the frame-work of a sentence. 
And to mark the different ranks, I have called the section 
which holds the first rank in the sentensic frame-work, 
the truncus, and that which holds the second, third, &c, a 
clados — [" There was a marriage] (in Cana) {of Galilee") 

TRUNcus-^[77iere was a marriage] 
Cladi ^ (o/ GaUUe% } 

I have not thought proper to follow up the reality with 
technical distinctions- of the different ranks which the cladi 
may derive from their near, or remote constructive rela- 
tion to the Truncus. This, however, may be done upon 
the same principle upon which the different ranks that 
the rami derive from their approximate relation to thecor- 
mos, are distinguished. Hence, "m Cana" is a clados of the 
first rank, monorelation, belonging to the Truncus. Con- 
jective Reading. There was a marriage " in Cana" And 
" of Galilee" is a clados of the second rank, monorelation, 
belonging to " in Cana." Conjective reading — in Cana of 
Galilee. 

As in Part I, I have attempted to show the different ranks 
which sections hold in the frame- work of a sentence, so in 
Part II, Chapter 1. 1 have undertaken to show the different 
ranks which words hold in the frame-work of a section. 
And, as I have marked the different ranks which sections 
hold in the frame- work of a sentence by truncus t and cla* 



100 

dos, so I have marked the different ranks which words 
hold in the frame- work of a section by cormos, and ramus. 
That word which holds the basis, or first rank in the ver- 
bal net- work is denominated a cormos ; as, [There was 
a marriage] (in Cana) (of Galilee.) 

That which holds the second, third, &c. is called a ra- 
mus ; as, [ There was a marriage] {in Cana) {of Gallilee.) 

Now, John, in the third Chapter, in Part II. I am to 
treat not upon the frame-work relation of words, but upon 
their sentensic character, and upon their want of this cha- 
racter. 

The character in which the words of a section, are now 
to be presented, is positive, and negative. Those which 
have the sentensic character, are positive; as, [There was 
a marriage] (in Cana) (of Galilee) Marriage was. 

Those which have not the sentensic character, are nega- 
tive ; as, [ There was a marriage] {in Cana) (of Galilee.) 
There a in Cana of Galilee. 

As words, then, are divided into cormos and ramus up- 
on their constructive rank in the formation of a sectional 
frame- work, so they are divided into sentensic, and ins en- 
tensic upon their sentensic influence in the formation of a 
sentence character. And, as I invited your attention to the 
component parts of a pictorial section of a tree, which ac- 
tually hold a cormos, and ramus relation to one another, 
in order to illustrate the constructive rank upon which the 
words of a section, are divided into cormos and ramus, so 
in order to illustrate the sentensic influence which the 
words of a section, exert in the formation of a sentence 
character, f shall ir^itc your attention to the component 
parts of a pictorial frame- work, called the orb, which parts 
exert the same influence in the formation of the orbic cha- 
racter^ the orb ; which the words of a section do in the 
formation of the sentence character of the section. 

THE ORB. 




The component parts of this figure, like the words of a 



101 

section, hold a cormos, and a ramus relation one to 

another. Hence, it may not be amiss to say in the first 

instance, that a part having a tenon, is a ramus ; as, B, D, 

A. 

And that a part having no tenon, is a cormos ; as, F, X. 

Upon ramus I, you see an orb, or circle, from which the 
whole figure takes its name, and from the formation of 
which all the parts of the figure, derive their distinctive 
characters, and receive their distinctive names. Those 
parts which aid in the formation of the little orb upon 
ramus I, are orbic ; as, F, I. 

But those parts which do not contribute any thing, any 
labor or material to the production of this orb, are inorbic; 
as, A, B, D, A, X. 

Cormos, F, and Ramus, I, by their joint action or con- 
tribution, produce this orb, this circle. Ramus, I, furnishes 
the material, and cormos, F, works it out, draws it out by 
means of its orb-making spring, into the full orb which you 
see upon ramus, I. 

The natural state of the orbic material out of which cor- 
mos, F, has formed this orb upon ramus, I, may be seen 
in that furnished by ramus, M, below— 




The ground upon which I wish to present this subject, 
is that the very matter out of which the little orb upon ra- 
mus, I, has been formed, was originally in the same state 
in which the semi-circle is that you see upon ramus, M ; 
and that cormos, F, through the means of its orb-forming 
spring, has brought this matter out of this original condi- 
tion into a full orb. :; . ■"■ 

And now, John, give your pointed, your undivided atten^ 
tion to the following remark— let me have all your atten- 
tion ; and I will make your mind stronger, your ideas 
clearer, and your knowledge greater. The remark is 
this:- I2 



m 

There are two words in every truncus, and two In 
every seclados, which bear the same creative, productive 
relation to the cor diction i the sentence character of the 
section, which cormos, F, and ramus, I, bear to the little orb 
upon ramus I. Observe— John, 1 say the two words bear the 
same productive, or producing relation to the sentence char- 
acter which the two parts, F and I, bear to this little orb. One 
of these words, then, must furnish the matter, the raw ma- 
terial ; and the other must work it up, must manufacture 
it into cordictions, sentence characters, into affirmations, 
into interrogations, into commands, into petitions, and into 
intimations. Hence it is, that every truncus, and every se- 
clados, is a sentence, a sentensic section; as, [A certain man 
planted a vineyard ;] (and he set a hedge) (about it.) [Man 
planted] — (he set.) 

But as these two creative, producing words are not found 
in an inseclados, an inseclados is never a sentence, never 
a sentensic section; as, {about it.) 

And now, John, I must crave the same degree of atten- 
tion to the following remarks, which I hope, you have be- 
stowed on the preceding one : 

As the two sentence producing words in the truncus, 
and seclados, bear the same positive relation (they do 
something) to the sentence character of the sections, which 
the two orb producing parts bear to the little orb upon 
ramus, /, so the other words of the truncus, and seclados 
bear the same negative relation (they do nothing) to the 
sentence character, which the non-producing parts of 
the figure under page 100, bear to the little orb upon ramus, 
1. For, as without these two words, no sentence character 
can be formed; as, [" A certain , , a vineyard;] 
(and , , a hedge ;'*) so without the two orb pro- 
ducing parts in the figure, no orb is formed ; as is seen in 
this cut. 





But, as you may omit, or discard all the negative parts in 



103 
the figure without destroying the orb; as seen in this cut- 




so you may omit, or reject all the negative words in the 
truncus, and seclados without destroying the cordiction> 
the sentensic character; as, [" , , man planted , 
, ] ( , he set , ,".) 

Here, John, it may be well to postpone the running of 
the parallel which I have instituted between the parts of 
the figure denominated the Orb, and the words of a sec- 
tion, to give you an opportunity to exercise your mind in 
applying the principles on which the parts of the Orb are di- 
vided into o?*bic, and inorbic, to practice upon the Theorem. 
When I resume this parallel I shall show you that as the 
parts of the Orb are philosophically divided into oi'bic, 
and inorbic according to their positive or negative char- 
acter, or according to the aid, or to the ivant of aid which 
they render in the'production of the little orb on ramus, 1, 
so the words of a section are properly divided into senten- 
sic, and insentensic, according to their positive or negative 
influence, or according to the aid, or to the want of aid 
which they contribute to the producing of the sentence 
character of a section of words. 

I shall now invite your attention to the Theorem, a large 
map which is constructed upon the same principles on 
which the Orb under page 100 is formed. Upon ramus, H, 
on the Theorem, you see the little orb or circle which you 
have found upon ramus, I, in the figure under page 100. 

Now, the same positive and negative, or the same orbic 
and inorbic character which the parts of the figure under 
page 100, derive from their relation to the production of the 
little orb or circle on ramus, I, the parts of the Theorem 
acquire from their producing or non-producing relation to 
the orb on ramus, H. Hence the parts of the Theorem 
are divided into orbic and inorbic. 

1. Those parts which furnish the material out of which 



104 

cormos F, by means of its springs, forms an orb or a cir- 
cle, are denominated Orbic ; as, H, M, O, Q, $c. 

2. Those parts which furnish no materials out of which 
cormos F constructs orbs, are denominated Inorbic ; as, A, 
B, C, D, G, <$c. in the truncus theorem. 

Now, as one of the cormos class has something to do in 
producing an orb, or circle, and as others of this class have 
nothing to do in producing an orb, or circle, the members 
of this class will also be divided into — 

\. Orbic cormos, and 2. Inorbic cormos. 

1. That cormos which by means of its springs, forms the 
orbic matter, furnished by the orbic rami, into perfect orbs, 
is called orbic ; as, F in the truncus theorem. 

2. The cormi which afford no aid in producing an orb 
out of the orbic matter, furnished by the orbic rami, are 
denominated inorbic cormi ; as, X in the truncus. I will 
now show in what way cormos F in the truncus is orbic 
while cormos X is inorbic. 

To enable me to be successful in this attempt, you must 
notice one thing in which cormos X differs very much 
from cormos F. One has springs ; the other has not. One 
is a spring cormos ; the other is a non-spring cormos. The 
spring cormos is an orbic cormos ; the non-spring cormos 
is an inorbic cormos. 

John, do you understand me ] I do not. " / do not see 
that one cormos is m,ore orbic than the other — and, indeed, 
I cannot see that either has any attribute, any property, 
bearing, or relation tvhich can be called orbic, round .'" 

John, do you see an orb, in the centre of ramus H, in 
the truncus 1 I do. John, near the top of ramus M, O, and 
Q,, you may see the material out of which the orb in 
the centre of ramus H, has been formed. Have you ex- 
amined the shaft appended to the semi, or half orb on 
ramus 01 Now, if the springs on cormos F should be at- 
tached to this shaft, cormos~ F would by means of its 
springs bring this half orb, on ramus O, into a whole one. 
Cormos F has brought one half orb into a whole orb. Or, 
in other words, cormos F has brought a piece of orbic 
matter, similar to that on ramus O, into a perfect orb — 
This is seen upon ramus H. 

Do you see now, John, why F in the truncus is called 
an orbic cormos^? " O, yes— I see it very clearly" — " F is 
called orbic because it makes orbs /" 

Do you see why cormos X is called inorbic? " it is so 
called because it exerts no influence in forming the orb on 
ramus, H" 

You see now, John, that cormos X, is inorbic — and you 
see also why it is so. 



105 

In the next place, John, I will show you in what way the 
rami on the Theorem are or bic, and inorbic. Some of them 
furnish the orbic matter, or material out of which the or- 
bic, or orb-making cormos constructs orbs. And these of 
course are called orbic rami. See H, M, O, Q, &c. 

Others contribute nothing in any way whatever to the 
production of the orb, and of course, they are denominated 
inorbic rami. See J, B, C, D, in the truncus, 

RULES. 

1. That cormos which draws out the first principle of 
an orb, into a full orb, is an orbic cormos, as, F in the 
truncus theorem. (See Fin the cut, page 100.) 

2. That cormos which contributes nothing to the pro- 
duction of an orb, is an inorbic cormos ; as X in the trun- 
cus theorem and F in the inseclados theorem. (See X 
and Fin the cut under page 100.) 

3. That ramus which furnishes the first principles (the 
materials) out of which the orbic cormos can construct 
an orb, is an orbic ramus ; as, H, M, O, Q,, in the truncus 
theorem. (See ramus / in the cut page 100.) 

4. That ramus which does not furnish any materials or 
first principles out of which the orbic cormos can construct 
an orb, is an inorbic ramus ; as, A, B, D and A in the 
cut under page 100. 

SPECIMEN. 

A B C D E F, an inseclados. 

A, an inorbio ramus, fir3t rank, monorclation, belonging 
to F Rule 4. 

B, an inorbic ramus, fourth rank, monorclation, belong- 
ing to C. Rule 4. 

C, an inorbic ramus, third rank, monorclation, belong- 
ing to D. Rule 4. 

/>, an inorbic ramus, second rank, monorelation, belong- 
ing to E. Rule 4. 

E, an inorbic ramus, first rank, monorelation, belong- 
ing to F. Rule 4. 

F, an inorbic cormos. Rule 2. 

N. B, For Exercises see page 81, 83, 84, 85, 87, 



106 

PART II. 

CHAPTER IV. 

SUBDIVISION OF THE ORBIC RAMI. 

The orbic rami are divided into uni, and ambi. 

1. That orbic ramus which holds a frame-work relation 
with the orbic cormos only, is uni ; as, H. 

2. That orbic ramus which holds a frame-work relation, 
a frame-work reference to both kinds of cormi, is ambi ; 
as, I. 

SUBDIVISION OF THE INORBIC RAMI. 

The great class of inorbic rami, is subdivided into four 
classes, namely, mono, duo, co, and sub. 

1. The monoramus is an inorbic ramus which is con- 
fined in its constructive capacity to a frame-work relation 
with the inorbic kind of cormi ; as, A. 

2. The duramus is an inorbic ramus which, in its con- 
structive capacity, is applicable to both kinds of cormi ; 
as, E. 

John, I shall attempt to explain to you in what way ra- 
mus E differs from ramus A. Fix your eyes upon both 
of these parts, John. They are A and E in the inseclados. 

Now, John, do you see from the size of the tenon of ra- 
mus A, that ramus A can be inserted into but one of the 
cormos parts? " I do — the tenon is much too large for any 
mortise in the orbic cormos while it seems well suited in 
size, and shape to a mortise in the inorbic cormos." 

You see, then, John, why ramus A is called mono ? 

Examine the tenon of ramus E. Is it not adapted both 
in size, and form, to a mortise of the inorbic cor- 
mos 1 " Yes" — and it is also equally well adapted to a 
mortise of the orbic cormos." Ramus E, then, may be ap- 
plied to two kinds of cormi, namely, orbic, and inorbic. 
Hence you see in what ramus A differs from ramus E. — 
Ramus A has a single frame- work capacity ; ramus E a. 
double frame- work capacity. And to denote the single ca- 
pacity of ramus A, mono is used — and to denote the double 
capacity of ramus E, duo is employed. Mono, one — duo, 
two. 

I have attempted to describe the Mono-ramus, and the 
Duoramus. {Duramus.) 



107 

3. Cor arms. A coramus is an inorbic ramus which 
holds a frame-work relation to a company, a collection of 
parts ; as, A with the brace. (See the girdle which embra- 
ces the collection of branches, under page 76.) 

A is called a Co-ramus. That is, a collective ramus — and 
it is so denominated because it takes hold, by means of its 
long arms, on a collection of other parts. Now, the con- 
jective power of ramus A is the brace — this brace is the 
arms of the ramus, which enable it to embrace, encircle, 
include the whole mass, group, or assemblage which 
follows it. As the small tenon of B enables B to unite it- 
self in frame-work to C, so does the brace of ramus A, en- 
able ramus A to unite itself in frame-work to the whole 
collection or mass which follows ramus A. 

4. Subramus. A subramus is an inorbic ramus which 
has a single frame-work dependence upon another ramus ; 
as, B. 



5. That inorbic ramus which belongs to the inorbic kind 
of cormi only, is a monoramus ; as, A in the inseclados. 

6. That inorbic ramus which has the twofold construc- 
tive capacity to be applied to both kinds of cormi, is a du- 
ramus ; as, E in the inseclados — D in the truncus. 

7. That inorbic ramus which has the capacity to be ap- 
plied only to an assemblage, or company of parts, is a co- 
ramus ; as, A in the truncus. 

8. That inorbic ramus which in the frame- work of the 
section is so disposed of as to depend constructively upon 
another ramus, is a subramus ; as, B in the inseclados. 

9. That orbic ramus which holds a frame-work relation 
with the orbic cormos only is uni ; as, H. 

10. That orbic ramus which holds a frame- work relation 
with both kinds of cormi is ambi ; as, 7. 

SPECIMEN OF THEOREM PARSING. 

ABCEFGHJLMORSTUVWX Yy,the 
truncus. 

A, a coramus, belonging to its own section. Rule 7. 
By a subramus, belonging to C. Rule 8. 
C, a subramus, belonging to E. Rule 8. 1 

E, a subramus, belonging to H. Rule 8. 

F, an orbic cormos. Rule 1. 

G, a subramus, belonging to H. Rule 8. 

H, an orbic uniramus, belonging to F. Rule 9. 
J", a subramus, belonging to L. Rule 8. 
Z/, a subramus, belonging to M. Rule 8, 



108 

M, an orbic uniramus, belonging to F. Rule 9. 
O, an orbic uniramus, belonging to F. Rule 9. 
R, an orbic ambiramus, belonging to cormos F and cor- 
mos X Rule 10. 
S 9 a subramus, belonging to jR, O, M, or H. Rule 8. 
T, a subramus, belonging to U. Rule 8. 
U, a subramus, belonging to V. Rule 8. 
Vi a subramus, belonging to W. Rule 8. 
fT, a duramus, belonging to cormos X JRw/e 6. 
-X", an inorbic cormos. Rule 2. 
Yy, a duramus, belonging to JPor X Rule 6. 

N. B. For Exercises see page 81, 83, 84, 85, 87. 



PART III. 

CHAPTER L 
Ramus A in the truncus. 

A word consists of matter, form, and signification, 
Every word must have these three things. The matter 
may be ink, mettle or sound. The form is that particular 
shape or modification which a word receives from the for- 
mation of it — or the form is that particular shape into 
which the matter is put in making the word. And the 
signification is the power, capacity or faculty which a 
word has to take hold on ideas that are in one mind, and 
hold them up to another mind. The matter of a word is 
represented by the ink of ramus A — the form by the shape 
of ramus A — and the signification, by the pincers or nip- 
pers, which run back of the tree, and take hold of the A. 

Upon ramus H you see the significant faculty of a 
word — the significant power is the nippers, and the pic- 
ture of a basket is the idea hold on which this power takes, 
and holds it up to the view of him or them to whom ramus 
H is supposed to be addressed. 

What are the things w T hich constitute a word 1 matter, 
form., and signification. The signification is the soul, the 
spirit of which the matter and form are the mere body, 
the carcass. You may be disposed to ask in what way 
does this soul enter into the body, or carcass ] Custom 
creates it, and pours it into its little temple much as a per- 
son pours any liquid into a phial. 

But, John, besides matter, form and signification, a word 






109 

has the capacity to be united to another word, as you 
may see by the tenons of the rami, and mortises of the 
cormi. The capacity of B just after ramus A, to be united 
to another word, is B's tenon. The corrective capacity of 
B partakes, to a certain extent, of the form of B — for the 
tenons are adapted in shape and size to the mortise in C 
and F. And the capacity of F to be united with B par- 
takes of F's form to a certain extent ; for the shape and 
size of F's mortise are adapted to the shape and size of 
one of B's tenons. — Now, the conjective power of ramus 
A is the brace — this brace is the arms of the ramus, which 
enable this ramus to embrace, encircle, or include the 
whole mass, group, or assemblage which follows this ra- 
mus. As the small tenon of B enables B to unite itse]f in 
frame-work to C, so does the brace of ramus A, enable ra- 
mus A to unite itself in frame-work to the whole truncus 
which follows. I have thus endeavored to show you all 
the parts, and powers of a word. I shall now proceed to 
show what words are represented by ramus A. But, first 
let me inform you that A is called a Co-ramus. That is, a 
Collective ramus— and it is so denominated because it takes 
hold, by means of its long arms, on a collection of other 
parts or words. A is the constructive, the frame-work, 
the [syntax representative of and, because as ramus A 
embraces the whole assemblage of parts, so does ramus 
and cleave, or adhere to a whole assemblage of words. 
v Or, as ramus A cleaves to parts in a collective way, or 
manner, so does ramus and adhere to words in the mass. 
In and you find the brace which you see on ramus A ; 
and by virtue of this brace, and takes hold, not on 
an individual grape, but on the entire bunch. Let me now 
; inform you, John, that A in the inseclados is denominated 
a Monoramus. It is so called because from the nature of 
the means by which it unites itself to other words, it must 
cleave to a single word* and not to an assemblage. Ex- 
amine its tenon, John. Do you not see that while the brace 
l on ramus A in the truncus, is calculated to enable this ra- 
1 mus to fix itself to a collection of parts, the large tenon 
( of ramus A in this inseclados, is calculated to enable this 
ramus to attach itself to individuals only. If you, then, 
can see the difference in frame-work relation between ra- 
: mus A in the truncus, and ramus A in the inseclados, you 
can see the difference in syntax or grammar between ra- 
mus and, and ramus under. (See the Appeal on the prepo- 
sition and conjunction, page 280, 291.) 

Now, John, remember that ramus A in the truncus is a 
Co-ramus, and that ramus A in the inseclados is a Mono- 
ramus. Remember too that co means in the mass, bunch 

K 



110 

or group, together — and that mono means singly, alone, 
individually. 

I have said that A in the truncus, is the constructive re- 
presentative of and — and I have attempted to show you 
in what way* And I will now inform you that A in the 
truncus, is the significant representative of and as well as 
the constructive. In the second compartment, John, you 
will find the sign of addition. — What this cross is in 
arithmetick, and is in language. Now, John, I do not 
wish you to understand that I explain the import of and 
because it is a part of the syntax or grammar of the 
word, but because the meaning will enable you to give 
this ramus a definite place on ramus A, which will enable 
you to recollect that and is a coramus, with perfect ease. 
The grammar, and signification of and, are as distinct as 
the cross and the brace on ramus A. — And, in construc- 
tion, in syntax, is the brace : but and, in signification, in 
meaning, is the cross. 

I shall here give the words which are constructively re- 
presented by ramus A in the truncus. 

And, although, as, as-well-as, again, besides, beside, 
being, but, both, either, except, excepting, then, else, 
for, further, hence, however, howsoever, howbeit, if, in- 
asmuch, lest, likewise, moreover, nay, nathless, not-only, 
nevertheless, notwithstanding, no, now, neither, or, other- 
wise, provided, save, since, still, than, then, thence, there- 
fore, though, unless, whereas, whether, yet. 

I shall now attempt to enable you to remember these 
words by giving them their respective places according to 
their respective imports. The first section on ramus A in 
the truncus, presents the import of the co-rami which de- 
note an unsuccessful attempt — or a want of success on the 
part of whatever acts as an obstacle in the way of another. 
The bird at which the arrow has been thrown is yet alive, 
and on the wing — this condition of the bird indicates a 
want of success on the part of him who threw the arrow. 
The bird wishes to live, the arrow presents an obstacle to 
the continuance of life — but the flying posture of the bird, 
shows that the arrow has been unsuccessful in the attempt 
to take the life of this bird. John, do you not hear the 
bird saying — I am alive, notwithstanding your arrow has 
been shot at me ! The co-rami which indicate a want of 
success are under the following hieroglyphic — 



Ill 

I. RAMUS A — SECTION a. 




L 



But, howbeit, though, although, however, howsoever, if, 
nevertheless, notwithstanding, nathless, yet, still. 

Notee I. These twelve wor<|s are significantly represented by this 

figure. 

Note II. The want of success in the attempt to take the life of 
the bird, suggests the general import of each of these words — and the 
brace indicates the collective, the co relation which each bears to the 
assemblage with which it is used. 

Examples. 

1. "You have attempted to kill me with your arrow — 
but I am still flying." 

2. " You have thrown an instrument of death at me, 
howbeit, I am still alive." (Howbeit is synonymous with 
nevertheless.) 

3. " I am still alive though you have done your best to 
kill me." 

4. " I am flying although you have attempted to stop 
me." 

5. "You have thrown your arrow at me — however, I 
am not dead" 

6. " You seek my life ; howsoever you cannot take it." 

7. " You have not killed me if you have shot your ar- 
row." (if is here, although.) 

8. " You wish to stop my flying ; nevertheless, you have 
not succeeded." 

9. " I shall continue my flight notwithstanding all your 
arrows." 

10. "Your arrow has pursued me to deprive me of life 
and wing, nathless, I still have both." (Nathless is synon- 
ymous with notwithstanding.) 

11. " You wish to kill me ; yet you cannot." 
12- "It rains still there are no clouds." 



112 

IL RAMUS A — SECTION K 



And, not only, again, likewise, moreover, nay, no, also, 
beside, besides. 

The cross is the general significant representative of 
these cor ami. 

The brace is the particular constructive representative 
of them. 

These ten corami indicate addition in some way or 
other. 

1 j And — this word is nearly synonymous with add, as 
may be seen in the following example; as, John, and 
James went. That is, John went, and James went. That 
is, add or subjoin to "John went," that James went. 

2. Not only. John is not only able ; but he is willing. 
Here not and only constitute but one part of speech—- 

and this one part belongs to the section, "but he is willing." 
If we omit "not only" the section, " but he is willing," 
must be omitted; as, "John is able." The assemblage, 
then, to which "not only" belongs is that which not only 
introduces; namely, " but he is willing." You will perhaps 
understand this coramus somewhat better by locating it 
on the finger in section m, page 118. 

" Not only" is the finger, first, because the finger like not 
only, stands in one section, or compartment, and points to 
another — [John is not only able,] (but he is willing.) 

In the second place the co-ramus not-only is represented 
by the finger, because as the finger points to that compart- 
ment in which but is made, so not only points to the sec- 
tion which begins with but. But denotes opposition in 
sense, in idea some way or other. The import of but, then, 
is found in contrasting the white and black in the compart- 
ment to which the finger points. Remember this, John, 
the co-ramus, not only, is made on the finger which points 
to bufs section. Remember also that "not only" is not a co- 
ramus where but does not follow in another section. Do 
you see the little brace, John, which falls within the large 
one ] " Yes." — Learn from this that among the words 
which make up the assemblage to which a co-ramus may 
belong, there may be another co-ramus. 

3. As-well-as, John is able as-well-as willing. That is, 
John is able as-well-as he is willing. As-well-as is a co-ra- 



113 

mus where and can be substituted for it ; as, John is able 
and he is willing. 

4. Like-wise. John is able — like-wise he is willing. Or 
John is able — he is likewise willing. 

5. Moreover. I invited him — moreover, I persuaded 
him ; still he did not come. 

6. Nay. I invited him ; nay, I persuaded him — still he 
did not attend. 

7. No. They could not bind him — no, not with chains. 
(Here no has the sense of nay, importing more.) 

8. Also. I invited him — I also persuaded him. 

9. Again. Again, I shall be to him a father, and he shall 
be to me a son. Here again denotes that what follows it 
is in addition to something already submitted. 

10. Will you walk to town with me, Joseph ? No. Why ? 
because it rains — besides I do not wish to go. 

Will you purchase this hat of me 7 No. 

Why not 1 You ask too much for it — beside, I have no 
use for it. Here beside and besides introduce additional 
reasons. 

III. RAMUS A— SECTION C. 



Except, excepting, (save, beside, besides.) 

The sign of subtraction generally used in arithmetic, 
is found in this! compartment. Now, what this sign is 
in numbers, the following corami are in words — except, 
excepting. 

1. I cannot go except my brother returns. 

2. " Ye shall all likewise perish except ye repent." That 
is, draw out, subtract, or take away that * ye repent, and 
ye shall all perish. 

(We have seen save, beside, and besides used as corami, 
indicating subtraction, but not with much propriety.) 

IV. RAMUS A — SECTION d. 



O 




But, else, otherwise, whereas, still, yet, 



In this figure there is the idea of contrast which is the 
general import of the corami under it. 
L John is good — but I am bad. 
K2 



114 

EXAMPLES. 

'2. It certainly rains ; else whence these drops of falling 
water. Thai is, if the fact is contrary, or opposed to this, 
whence. &c, 

3. It certainly rains; otherwise these falling drops would 
not appear. 

4. 1 told him to come yesterday: whereas he has not 
yet come. 

5. I told him to come yesterday; yet he has not come at 
all. 

6. I told him to come ? still he remains. 

V. RAMI'S A — SECTION & 



I 



Both. 

In this compartment the word both is placed when 
it is a co-ramus. Both has reference to two — hence the 
two blocks between which the hand is placed. Both, 
when a co-ramus is generally followed by another section 
which begins with and — hence the sign of addition is pre- 
sented in 

KAMI'S A — SECTION/. 




And. 

The hand is made to point to and's compartment because 
I wish you to look for a section which begins with and ; 
for if you can find a section following that to which both 
belongs, commencing with and. you know that both may 
a coramus. Remember now* that both is made on the 
twe /.and: and that while the two blocks 

give you the meaning of both, the finger directs you to the 
next section that you may ascertain whether both is a co- 
ramus or not. 

[He is both virtuous] [and he is brave.) 

John, this rule for ascertaing whether both is a coramus 
will not guide you in all instances — but still it will bring 
your mind to the subject; and serve as a general direction. 
In the following both is not a coramus — 



115 

Both men have come; and they will remain here. 
Where you can substitute the for both without offending 
the ear, both is not a coramus ; as, the men came. 

VI. RAMUS A — SECTION g. 





Either, or. 

As this one tenon will fit either mortise, you can clearly 
see that either as a coramus, must be located on one of 
these mortises. The tenon is adapted to the upper, or 
the lower mortise. Here, then, you may locate or as well 
as either. [Either Joseph , , ,] (or James must go,) 
(or we can not procure the papers.) 

Note. Either may be a sub, and a duo as you may see upon ra- 
mus B and Bb. (See Theorem.) 

1. A sub; as, either man's hat will suit. 

2. A duo ; as, either hat will suit. 

VII. RAMUS A — SECTION h. 




Than. 

[The right ball is smaller] (than the left , , .) 
[Joseph is older] (than his brother , .) 

Note I. " Than" is the only coramus which conveys the idea of 
inequality. 

*> 

Note II. The two white or blank squares indicate that the section 
where than occurs, is generally implenary. 



VIII. RAMUS A — SECTION U 




Thence, hence, then, therefore, now, so. 

Joseph promised to come, therefore we may expect him. 

The above part of the tree is the consequence flowing 
from the root part as its cause. And the corami, thence, 
hence, then, therefore, now, and so mark a consequence, 
indicate a result, a conclusion, an effect flowing from some 
cause which is mentioned in a preceding section; as, 
Joseph promised to come, (therefore we may expect him.) 
Now, what the promise of Joseph is to our expectation, 
the part of the tree in section i, is to that part of the tree, 
which is found in section/ That in section j, is the root, 
the cause ; and that in section ?, is the effect, result, or con- 
sequence. Therefore denotes a consequence, an effect — 
hence the meaning of therefore is found in that part of the 
tree, which is in section i. 

Note. — John, I wish you to observe that thence, hence, and then are 
presented on ramus G. Hence you may conclude that these words 
are not always corami. 

N. B. Then and now are generally subs. 

Therefore is always a co, except when It is spoken of, when it like 
all other rami becomes a cormos. 

IX. RAMUS A — SECTION j. 




For, as, lest, being, seeing, inasmuch, since, because* 



Those corami, which denote cause, find their significa- 
tion in section j. 



117 



1. You may remain for I want you. 

2. I shall not go, as it looks like rain. 

3. I will take my umbrella lest it should rain. 

4. You may remain being you have expended consider- 
able to come. 

5. I shall not go seeing you will not accompany me. 

6. I must return inasmuch as I have business of impor- 
tance, which must be attended to to-morrow. 

7. I Will try another house, since your accommodations 
are not suitable. 

8. 1 must return because I have business to which I 
must attend immediately. 

X. RAMUS A — SECTION k. 

r 




Whether, if, 

1. I do not know whether he will come. 

2. I will go if he will let me. 

As the vane is turned by every change of the wind, it is 
quite uncertain as to the course to which it may point at 
any future time. Upon this uncertainty those corami are 
located, which indicate uncertainty, contingency. 

They are — if and whether. 

" If" is found in section a, and section k, because it has 
two meanings, concession and doubt. When the idea is 
concession, if is found in section a ; as, you have not killed 
me if you have shot at met Here if is used in the sense 
of though or although, the original, or primary sense of?/. 

XI. RAMUS A — SECTION L 

r 





Neither, nor. 

George will neither come, nor let me come. 

John, you see from the size of the tenon that neither and 
nor are found in section I, As in section g, either and or 
are presented in the size of the tenon, so in section I, nei- 
ther and nor are presented in the size of the tenon. 



118 

XII. RAMUS A— SECTION 171. 




Not-o7ily. 
He is not-only able, but he is willing to aid. 

XIII. RAMUS A — SECTION 11. 



O 



But. 



Not only is located upon the finger in section m. The 
propriety of locating not only upon this finger, is found in 
the fact, that this finger points to section but, namely, sec- 
tion w, as not only points to a section of words, which is 
introduced by but ; as, [He is not only able ;] {but he is 
willing.) 

Here the first intimation of the section which but intro- 
duces, is given by not only. 

Not only apprises the reader in advance, that some sec- 
tion commencing with but, is to be introduced. And, as 
the finger in section in, points to bufs section in the sen- 
tence, there is some degree of propriety in placing not on- 
ly upon the finger. 

Note. — " But" is made in section d except when " not only" as a 
coramus, introduces it. 

XIV. RAMUS A — SECTION 0. 

p piifliiti>^iiininmiiiiiiiini»inm )iimi ( 

As, even, so. 

1. " As it has been done unto you even so shall it be done 
unto others. 

2. " He must have known the fact even when he wrote 
to you." 

Note. Even is rarely a co. 



119 

XV. RAMUS A— SECTION p. 




Unless, if. 

1. John, you can not learn syntax unless you will think. 

2. " You can not get off unless you unloose the boat." 

3. " You can not get away if you do not unloose the 
boat." 

Note. — I have arrived, John, at section p, at the last compartment 
of ramus A in the truncus. I have brought you from the eagle which 
sails in the heavens notwithstanding the arrow has been thrown to take 
his life, through a variety of signs, to a boat so situated that in speak- 
ing of her condition we find some occasion for the use of unless. One 
says to the other, " We can not get from the shore unless we unloose 
the boat." It may be worth your while, John, to observe that the pri- 
mary meaning of " unless" is to unloose. The sense, then, is that we 
can not accomplish this object if we unloose the act of unloosing the 
boat. If we unlosse this act, we cannot get from the shore. That is, 
if we dismiss or cast away the act of unloosing the boat, we cannot 
get off! " Unless Joseph returns I cannot go." That is, if you let 
go of the return of Joseph, I cannot go. Hold on to this action as a 
condition on which I can go — for the moment you let this action slip 
out of your mind's hand, the moment you unless, or unloose this action 
from your mind, that moment it becomes impossible for me to go. 
The man with the oar seems to wish to dismiss, to unloose, to unless 
the action of untying the rope.— But the other tells him, "If you un- 
loose, or unless, or dismiss this action, we are bound beyond relief." 

if may also be made in this place — : but not with much propriety; 
as, we cannot go if we do not unloose the boat. (Unless, if) 

Now, John, make an attempt to locate all the corami: 
Keep trying till you can do it — and when you shall have 
enabled yourself to do it, continue to do it till you become 
familiar with them. 



120 



CHAPTER II. 



Ramus A in the inscclados theorem. 

I. RAMUS A — SECTION a. 

• 1 




• J 

Move, after, before, behind, below, beneath, on, over, un- 
der, underneath, upon. 

John, you should now attempt to locate these monorami 
upon their respective places. 

Note. — After and before are suls where they denote time ; as, He 
came after I , . I arrived before he , 

II. RAMUS A — SECTION b. 

r 




" The fruit of the vine." 

Note l.O/* denotes that the following thing is the source of the 
preceding one. It is thought to be a contraction of off, with which in 
one respect it is nearly synonymous. •' The fruit of the vine." 

That is, the fruit which has sprung off from the vine." The word 
of, seems not only to inherit the significant character of its parent, off, 
but to possess also a sourcituf one tor which it is indebted not to off, 
but to the power of custom. — The truth is, that men saw the conve- 
nience of having a word in our language, which would express not on- 
ly the idea of one thing coming from another thing, but that it comes 
from the other thing as its source. Off denotes the idea of departure, 
but not thai of source — and to furnish this word they have dropped one 



121 

/ in off", which makes of — and to give it its import they have retained 
the import of off, and added that of source* The figure which has 
been selected to represent this word (of) is the sun, the great source of 
light, heat, Sec. &c. 

Of imports source — and as the sun is the source of so 
much, the sun is presented as the meaning of of. This 
cloth is made of good wool. 

Of here means source, and is used to show that the 
wool, called good, is the source off from which the cloth 
sprung. This cloth is made, taken off from good wool. 
Now, as light and heat spring off from the sun, so does 
the cloth spring off from the wool. John, attend to the 
following remark — 

As the sun is the source of light and heat, so is the thing 
mentioned after of the source of something mentioned 
bhfore of— 

1. John is the son of Mr. Jones. 

As light springs from the sun so does John spring from 
Mr. Jones. Mr. Jones is the source of John. 

% Mr. Jones is the father of John. What springs off 
from John] does Mr. Jones'? No. What then? The father 
character of Mr. Jones. What is it that makes a man a 
father? a child. What the sun is to heat, and light, John 
is to the father character of Mr. Jones. But I must devote 
no more time to of; — I should be glad to dwell much 
longer upon it — but I can not any longer. Remember, 
John, where of is made, and what it means. 

Note II. From may denote source ; as, " the cloth has been made 
from bad wool." (See from in section n.) 

III. Ramus A — Section c. 




In, within, without. 

1. They are in the house. 

2. They will return within an hour. 

3. They stood without the gate. 

Note. It may be well to say here that section a, and 6, on page 
120, should not have the brace. The words there represented aro 
monorami, and have no collective frame- work relation to other words — 
their relation is individual in all instances. 

L 



122 

IV. RAMUS A — SECTION d. 




Through, throughout. 

1. "He went through Newark, to New York/' 

2. "He went throughout the land," 

Note L The word, through, originally meant a door, a space, an 
aperture which is filled, or stopped by a frame- work hung on hinges.. 
You see the reason why I have taken a door, a passage, as an emble- 
matic representative of through. This word still retains a full share 
of its primary meaning — I went through the fields to the house of 
John. That is, I went to the house of John — and in this act I made 
the fields the door through which I passed. 

Note II. The word, throughout, is obviously formed from through 
by affixing out. This monoramus has not much of the original import 
of its parent word, through. The two words differ in the amount which 
they embrace, and also in purpose which they indicate. 

1. He went through the land of Judea to Jerusalem. 

2. He went throughout the land of Judea. 

In the first, the idea is that only a portion of the land 
was made a door, a passage, and that he travelled over 
this as a mere door or passage to Jerusalem. 

In the second, the idea of a mere portion is lost, and that 
of totality introduced — in the second the passage, the door 
character which is so prominent in the first is left out — 
hence instead of presenting a portion of the land of Judea as 
a door or medium by which to get to Jerusalem, the second 
presents the whole country as the subject of survey or in- 
spection. Throughout is represented by including the 
whole space as mere space or extent which constitutes the 
aperture of the door without appropriating it to any fixed 
purpose. 

V. RAMUS A — SECTION e, 




About, against, around, at, beside, by. 



123 

1 . He Is about the hous&. 

2. He is against the house. 

3. He is around the house somewhere. 

4. He is at the window. 

5. He is beside the house. 

6. He was by my house in the evening. 

VL ramus A — section/. 



{near.) 



fiBiniinihtffj|ui)umi»| n 

Beside, besides. 



which should be 



1 . " There is something beside this 
noticed." 

2. And there was a famine in the land besides the first 
famine, That is, in addition to the first. 

VII. RAMUS A — SECTION g. 



Among, Amongst, amid, amidst. 

1. He is among his friends. 

2. He is amongst his friends. 

3. He is amid the darkness of night. 

4. He is amidst the waves of the'deep, 

VIII. RAMUS A — SECTION h. 




With, without. 

I. 1. He writes letters with a pencil. 

2. He makes coats with a needle. 

3. He made a coat with fifty buttons. 
II, 1. He write§ letters without a pencil, 



124 

2. He makes coats without a needle. 

3. He made a coat without buttons. 
(See without, section c — page 121.) 

Explanation. In the first two instances with is made 
upon the withe which is employed as an instrument for 
bringing one stake up to the other. 

In the third, with is made upon the act of bringing one 
stake to the other by means of the withe. 

Without is made upon the act of drawing one stake from 
the other by means of the withe. 

Having stated these facts, it may be well to examine the 
philosophy of this application of with, and without. 

John, you find a stake around which is fixed the bushy 
part of a young sapling. Upon this sapling the word, 
with, is made. This word, however, is made not so often 
upon this sapling itself as it is upon the action which the 
fence maker or farmer performs by means of the sapling, 
as the instrument in bringing one stake up to the other. 
The word, withe, was primarily the name of this sapling ; 
and from the fact that this sapling was the instrument or 
means used by farmers in bringing one stake to the other 
in fence making, with, the name of this instrument, has 
come to denote instrument or means in very many in- 
stances in our language ; as, He makes pens with his knife, 
He walks with a cane, He satisfied his creditor for some 
time with fair promises. Here the simple and obvious use 
of ivith is to expresss that the knife, the cane, and the 
promises are to their respective agents what the fence 
maker's withe or sapling is to him ; namely, an instru- 
ment or a means in accomplishing his deeds or operations 
in fence making. 

Now, as withe was the name of the means, the instru- 
ment by which the fence maker brought one stake to the 
other, it was quite natural that with shguld come to be 
applied to the action itself— -Hence in cases where the 
speaker desires to represent that one thing is connected to 
another much in the same way in which one stake is con- 
nected to the other by means of the young withe, he tells 
the auditor to ivithe this already connected, this already 
withed thing, to the other; as, John went with his bundle. 

Here it is not the intention of the speaker that he who 
is addressed, shall actually withe, or bind this bundle to 
John, except in mind. The speaker wishes to show that 
the bundle is gone as well as its owner — and to do this, 
he puts the bundle in such a situation, or condition in re- 
lation to its owner as renders it impossible for the owner 
to go, and the bundle to remain behind. Hence, after assert- 
ing that John has gone, he tells the hearer to withe, tie or 
bind the bundle to him. " John went with his bundle." 



125 

That is, do you withe the bundle to John as the fence 
maker withes one stake to the other. 

" John went without his bundle." This proposition pro- 
ceeds upon the ground that it had be^en presumed or ex- 
pected that John would have taken his bundle with him. 
And to show that this was not the case, the speaker as- 
serts that John went, and then tells the hearer to place the 
bundle in such a condition in relation to John that he 
could not have taken it along. John went without his 
bundle. That is, withe away his bundle from him — tear it 
off. As ivith is represented by drawing, by means of a 
withe, one stake to the other, so without is represented by 
drawing, by means of a withe, one stake from the other. 

IX. RAMUS A— SECTION t. 




Across, athwart. 

1. He came across the fields. 

2. He came athwart my path. 

X. RAMUS A — SECTION j. 



Beyond, past, by, 

1. He went beyond the marked tree. 

2. He thinks that it is past ten o'clock, 

3. He went past the house. 

4. It is past the time. 

5. He had got by me before I saw him. 

XI. RAMUS A— SECTION h 



Atween, atwixt, between, betwixt, 

1. There is much competition between these two men. 

2. There is no strife betwixt these two persons. 

L2 



126 

Note I. Among, and amongst is used where there are more than 
two — between and betwixt where there are but two. (See section g*. 
page 123.) 

Note IT. Atween, and atwixt are confined to poetry. They have 
the same respect to number which between, and betwixt, their syno 
ny ms, have. 

XII. RAMUS A — SECTION /. 



£ 
S 

-§ 



9 4 



Down, up. 

1. He went down the river. 

2. I went up the river. 

XIII. RAMUS A— SECTION m. 




Beside, off. 

1 . He is beside himself. 

2. It is beside my purpose to do any such thing. 

3. He is off his guard. 

4. " They were^seen o^the cape of Goodhope." 

Note. Off is generally a sub ; as, will you take off your cloak 1 
XIV. RAMUS A — SECTIONS. 




From> to, unto, of. 



127 

A Z 

1. They came from New York, to Philadelphia. 

A Z 

2. He came from the Father unto his own. 

A 

3. They came out of Egypt. 

Explanation. In A is found the meaning of from, and 
of in some of their uses ; as, they came/rom Egypt, They 
came out of Egypt. Here these words, do not indicate 
source; but simply the place where these actions began. 
A is the beginning of the alphabet — and as of and from 
may mean beginning, the inceptive character of these 
words, is denoted by A, the inceptive letter of the alpha- 
bet. 

Z is the final letter in the alphabet — Z is the end of that 
combination of which A is the beginning. And as to and 
unto mean end, Z has been taken as the meaning of these 
words. He went to or unto Boston. That is, Boston is 
the place at which his going ended. He went to Boston. 
He went through Boston. To, mid through, are very dif- 
ferent. He arrived at Boston. The word at does not in- 
dicate that his action is ended, but rather that it is to be 
resumed, and continued to another place. 

XV. RAMUS A — SECTION 0. 



At, toivard, towards. 

1. He shot at him. 

2. The arrow went toivard, or towards him. 

XVI. RAMUS A — SECTION £>. 




Concerning, regarding, respecting, touching. 

1. u He spake concerning his parents." 

2. "He said nothing regarding your affairs." 

3. " I examined him respecting his own views, and touch- 
ing those of his friend." 

4. "Now, as touching things offered unto idols, we know 
that we all have knowledge." 

Note. All these words seem to convey the idea of reference to, 
pointing to — hence they are all represented in the ringer which con- 
cerns, respects, regards, and significantly touches the bird. 



128 

XVII. HAMUS A — SECTION q. 



WiiililtllllhM 



Beside, besides, but, except, excepting, save. 

1. "To all beside , , as much an empty shade, 
An Eugene living, as a Cesar dead."* Pope. 

From Ws Die. 

2. " Say first what cause moved our grand parents to 
fall off from their Creator, and transgress his will for one 
restraint, lords of the world besides , , , 1" (Lords 
of the world except this one restraint.) 

Milton. 

The men said to Lot, hast thou here any besides these 
, ?f Gen. xix. 

From Ws Die. 

Remarks. Mr. Webster explains beside, and besides, as meaning 
over and above, and gives the last two instances in illustration of this 
import. I do not deny that the reader may arrive at the idea of addi- 
tion as intimated by Mr. W. But I am of the opinion that these 
words in these instances indicate subtraction. This is a sense which 
Mr.W. does not even give them in any instance. That " besides" does 
in some cases convey the idea of subtraction, is obvious from the first 
of the above instances — 

" Fay first what cause moved our grand parents to fall off from 
their Creator, and transgress his will, lords of the word besides. 31 That 
is, they were lords of the world except this restraint. Or in other w T ords 
— take away this one restraint, and they were lords of the world— or 
they were lords of the world with this exception, with this deduction. 
Now, if Mr. Webster is right, Milton must be understood as saying 
that our grand parents were lords of the world over, and above, inde- 
pendent of this one restraint. Yea, more; that this restraint rendered 
them more independent, or more than independent lords of the world! 

3. " All went but him." 

4. " All went except me." 

5. " All went excepting me." 

6. " Israel burned none of them save Hazor only." 

7. " Of the Jews, five times received I forty stripes save 
one." 

* To all except this, &c. 

t Hast thou here any except, these ? 



129 



XVIII. RAMUS A — section r, s, t, u, V. 




Jlsyfor. 



During, for, through. 



1. John came as a prophet. 
s 
I 2. "The same came for a witness to bear witness that 
jail men through him might believe." 

3. " He loveth our nation, and hath built a synagogue 
t 

for us." 

4. "They trembled for fear." 

u 

5. "He went for his book." 

V 
i 6. " He travelled for an hour." 
V 
7. " He travelled during an hour." 

For is sometimes made on the root, sometimes on the 
face, sometimes on the hand, and at others on the epaulet. 
I When for denotes cause, it is the root; as, she trembled 
for fear. When for denotes favour, it is the face ; as, he 
jhas built a synagogue for us. The face is a sign or token 
|Of grace or favor ; as, " Hide not thy face from thy ser- 
vant, because I am in great trouble," "And we hid, as it 
were, our faces from him." (See the "Appeal," page 99.) 
When for denotes object, purpose or incentive, it is the 
hand ; as, he went fcr his books. 

The idea of an object to be accomplished by procuring 
something, is denoted by the reaching of the hand to pro- 
cure the hammer. 

When the thing mentioned in the inseclados, is spoken 
of under a particular character, or relation, for is the epau- 
let; as, He went for a servant, "The same came for a 
I witness." As the epaulet gives a military, or martial char- 
acter, or relation to him who wears it, so does for give to 
him who is mentioned in the truncus, or seclados, a par- 



130 

ticular character. John came to a witness, is very differ 
ent from, John came for a witness. For makes the per- 
son or tiling mentioned in the truncus, or seclados, bear 
the character or relation which the cormos in the insecla- 
dos, denotes — "witness" is a word which denotes a char- 
acter, or relation, and for gives this character or relation 
to John. 

It is not often that as is found in an inseclados, but when 
it is found in this section, and has the first rank, it is made 
on the epaulet ; as, John came as a witness. 

For, in the Gth instance as w T ell as (luring- in the 7th indi- 
cates the idea that the whole, the entire period of time de- 
noted by the word, hour, was devoted to travelling. The 
sun is the time, the hour — the circle is the word, for, and 
during. (See remarks on for in the Appeal, page 101.) 



CHAPTER III. 

In Part III, Chapter I, I have treated of those words 
which, when used as corami, begin the t?*uncus, or the se- 
c/ados. They are and, therefore, but, &c. 

In Part III, Chapter II, I have presented those words 
which, when used as monorami, begin the inseclados. They 
are on, upon, over, above, of, &c. 

In Part III, Chapter III, I shall say something of that 
word which begins every semisection. It is to. This word 
may be a subramus, and a monoramus. I shall treat of 
to in this chapter, under its swfr-character, for I have con- 
sidered it under its Mcmo-characterin a preceding chapter. 
In treating upon this word, I shall consider, first, its pro- 
vince, secondly, its liability to be understood, or omitted ; 
and thirdly, its incapacity when a sub to receive unto as a 
substitute. 

1. It is the province of to under its inceptive character 




in the semisection, to defeat a command, and a petition. 



131 

Hence ramus A, in the semisection theorem, is presented 
as the true representative of to in the semisection of words. 

Now, what ramus A, in the above frame- work of two 
parts, is to the hieroglyphic command, and to the hiero- 
glyphic petition upon ramus B, or upon the cordiction 
piece page 36, to is to the verbal command, and to the 
verbal petition in the semisection. For as ramus A de- 
feats, destroys the hieroglyphic command, and the hiero- 
glyphic petition in the pictorial or scenic cordictions, so 
does to in its inceptive position in the semisection, defeat, 
destroy the verbal command, and the verbal petition in 
the semisection; as to go, to forgive our sins." 

By omitting to we have, in the first instance, a com- 
mand ; as, go. 

And in the second, a petition, as, forgive our sins. (See 
cordiction piece, page 36. 

In the British system of English Grammar, it is held 
that to is used as the sign of the infinitive mode ! But he 
who will examine this subject, will see that to is not used 
as the mere sign of any mode, but solely to prevent a 
command, and a petition. The character of to as the 
first word in the semisection, is anti-imperative, and anti- 
petitionative. That is, against a command, and against a 
(petition. 

2. " To" is understood in the semisection when the supe- 
rior part has bid, dare, make, see, have, help, hear, feel, or 
let ; as, bid him , go. 

Note. In speaking of the province, or use of to as the first word 
in the semisection, I have said that it is employed to prevent a com- 
mand, and a petition. In a few instances, however, the use of to is 
prejudicial to the euphony, the music, of the language. These in- 
stances have been ascertained by the ear ; and men have agieed to 
Iwithhold to from them. They occur where bid, dare, feel, have, help, 
hear, let, make, or see is found in that part of the section to which the 
semisection belongs ; as, [I saw him , write this letter.] 
| That is, to write, &c. 

Hence if the first part of the section to which the semisection be- 
longs, has bid, dare, feel, have, help, hear, let, make, or see, to is not ex- 
pressed, but understood in the semisection; as, I saw him, in 1836, 
in the city of Boston , , embark for England. 

Now, John, what prevents the giving of a command in the word, 
fimbark ? It is to. For without to, the truncus would have two cor- 
dictions — 

[I saw him embark thou.] 

To prevent this double cordiction in the same section, men have 
agreed to carry to in the mind only. And they have agreed to carry it 
in the mind, and not in the section, because the putting of it into the 
teection, produces a discordant sound which is offensive to the ear. 



132 



3. When unto can not be substituted for to, to is a sub- 
ramus in its anti-imperative, or anti-petitionative charac- 
ter; as, " He is to go immediately." Here unto can not be 
substituted for to — He is unto go immediately." But when 
to is the first word in the section, and unto can be substi- 
tuted for to, to is a monoramus, and means end ; as, He 
went to the mount. (Unto the mount.) 

To at, or near the end of a truncus, a seclados, or a 
semisection is a subramus; as, He was spoken to. He 
was spoken unto. He was to be spoken to. 

Here to has no anti character — its import here, as in the 
ineeclados, seems to be that of final or end. He was spoken 
to. 

Here the idea which is expressed by to, is that the act of 
speaking ended at him. ( To will be resumed.) 

Now, John, see if you can place each co-ramus upon its 
hieroglyphic representative. 

THE HIEROGLYPHIC CORAMI. 

DIRECTIONS in the use of the hieroglsphics 'as here 
presented. 

The teacher should say — Section a. And the pupil 
should then endeavour to give by the aid of the pictorial 
corami, all the verbal corami which section a represents. 

1. Teacher. Section a. 

2. Pupil. But, howbeitj though, although, fyc. 

SECTION a. SECTION /. 




133 




section n. 



SECTION C. 

QiiiiiiminiiHiiiiiiimiiimiiiimiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii 



o 



SECTION d. 



O 



SECTION b. 



SECTION g. 





SECTION Wl» 



SECTION O. 




HIEROGLYPHIC MONORAMI. 



See if you can locate the verbal monorami upon their 
respective hieroglyphic monorami. 



section a. 



section n. 



section b. 





;m 



tlllfc 



&GZ 



W 



134 
section r, 8, t, tt, V. 





ION h. 



SECTION (i. 




won 1 




SECTION . 



I 
I 



SECTION c. 



*. ■ ' ML 



SECTION W. 




SECTION & 



SECTION fc. 



D II 



135 

SECTION 0. SECTION^). SECTION I. 




section/. section q. section j. 



+: 



CHAPTER IV. 



In Partll. Chapter II, Page 77, I have divided the com- 
ponent parts of the Theorem into cormos, and ramus. In 
Part II. Chapter II. Page 104, I have divided the cormos 
parts of the Theorem into orbic, and inorbic. And in the 
same part, and chapter, I have divided under page 105, the 
ramus parts of the Theorem into orbic, and inorbic. In 
Part II. Chapter IV. Page 106, I have divided the orbic 
rami into uni, and ambi. And under the same page I have 
divided the inorbic rami into monoramus, duramus, cora- 
mus, and subramus. In Part III, Chapter I. page 108, 1 
have left the syntax of words for their meaning. I have 
done this because a correct knowledge of the different 
imports of those words on whose meanings I have there 
treated, will greatly assist the scholar in comprehending 
their exact syntax in a sentence. 

I have already divided the cormos parts of the Theorem 
into orbic, and inorbic. I have also divided the ramus 
parts into orbic, and inorbic. I shall now divide those, and 
these into sentensic, and insentensic. 

I. the cormos parts. 

1. A sentensic cormos is one which, by means of its 
sentence forming springs, forms the sentensic elements 
found in the sentential heart, into a full hieroglyphic sen- 
tence, as is illustrated in cormos F, page 136. 

Note. Examine the heart of ramus H, and you will find it to con- 
tain the first principles out of which cormos F has constructed the 
five hieroglyphic sentences which occupy that part of the orb which 
has been drawn out of the other. 



136 

THE DEMONSTRATOR. 




137 

Now, as the prism brings out the seven primary colors 
from the rainbow in the heavens, so does cormos P bring 
out the five cordictions, the five sentence characters, the 
five hieroglyphic sentences from the heart belonging to 
ramus H. 

JP, then, is a sentence making cormos, or a sentensic cor- 
mos. And, as " sentensic" may be contracted to se, F, may 
be called a secormos. 

2. That cormos which does not aid in forming the sen- 
tence, from the sentensic principles which ramus H keeps 
in its sentential heart, is an insentensic cormos, as is 
seen in part X. 

Note. As sentensic has been contracted to se ; insentensic may be 
contracted to inse. Hence one of the tvfr) kinds of eormi, may be de- 
nominated secormos — and the other, insecormos. 

II. RAMUS PARTS. 

1. A sentensic ramus is one which contains the first 
principles of a sentence character; as, H. 

2. An insentensic ramus is a ramus which does not 
contain the first principles of a sentence character ; as, A, 
B, W, A. 

SPECIMEN OP THEOREM PARSING. 

ABCDFGHJKkMRSTUVWXYZ. 

A, an insentensic ramus, first rank, monorelation, belong- 

ing to its own section. 

B, an insentensic ramus, third rank, monorelation, be- 

longing to C. 

C, an insentensic ramus, second rank, monorelation, be- 

longing to D. 

D, an insentensic ramus, first rank, monorelation, belong- 

ing to JF! 

F, a sentensic cormos. (a secormos,) 

G, an insentensic ramus, second rank, monorelation, be- 

longing to H. 

H, a sentensic ramus, first rank, monorelation, belonging 
to F. 

J, an insentensic ramus, second rank, monorelation, be- 
longing to Kk. 

Kk, an insentensic ramus, first rank, monorelation, be- 
longing to F. 

M, a sentensic ramus, first rank, monorelation, belonging 
toF. 

J2, a sentensic ramus, first rank, plusrelation, belonging to 
F, and X. 

M2 



138 

S, an insentensic ramus, second rank, monorelation, be- 
longing to jR, M, or H. 

T, an insentensic ramus, fourth rank, monorelation, be- 
longing to U. 

U, an insentensic ramus, third rank, monorelation, be- 
longing to V. 

V, an inseramus, second rank, monorelation, belonging 
to W. 

W, an inseramus, first rank, monorelation, belonging to 

X, an insecormos. (an insentensic cormos.) 
Y, an inseramus, third rank, monorelation, belonging to Z. 
Z, an inseramus, second rank, monorelation, belonging to 
R, MoyH. 

PREPARED EXERCISES, 

[Cc D F I W X ] ( A F I 

W X )(A F)(AF I WX)(ADdE 
F ) (A F I W X ) (A F I X Y) (A 
E P ) (A F H)(ADdE F.) 

[F (F H K ) (A F ) H] ( A F ) (A F ( F 



I 


X 


Y)( 


A 


F) I 


X. ) 




[E 


(Cc 


D 


F 


H M 


S) (A E 


F) F 


H] 


( A 


E 


F 


)(F I 


X ) ( 


A (F 


I 


X) 


F H ) (F 


H M 


) ( A E 


F ) 


( E 


F H 


K.) 










[A 


Y 


(F I 


) 


F I . 


X Yy](A 


F 


I X 


Yy .) 










[ A 


(AF 


(A 


F 


) I K 


X )(A 


F ) 


H D 


F 


N X 




Y t] [ 


A H 


F N 


W 


X . 


] 










[ A F 


H 


'K 


C 


RV|( A 


F)(A 


F .) 


[F 


I Tt U 


Uu 


X 'A 


C Q, 


R .N] 


[ A Bb 


C 


D 


F 


H J 


L M 


] (A 


Bb 


c 


Dd 


F )(F 


G H 


J 


L 


M 


)(A Bb 




F.) 







139 

[ A F I X Y ] (A E F.) 

[ F I W X .] 

[FH Jj ](A E F 'A BV)( A E F ) (A E 
F ) ( A F H ) ( A Dd E F 'A B \) (A 
E F )(A P .) 

[F H ] ( A E F ) (A F I X.) 

[F H (A C Q R V) (A F H N X) (A E 
F )(A F .) 

[D F HMOS] (AD F 

I X ) (A C D E F .) 

[ ( A B^ H Jj] (A E F .) 

[PI (A B Y] ( A F H Jj ) ( A E F .) 

[ F H 'A B A] 

[ F H ] (A ( A B \) 

For more Exercises in this kind of parsing, see pa^e 
84, 85, and 87. 



CHAPTER V. 

Subdivision of the sentensic rami into uni, and ambi. 

1. That sentensic ramus which holds a frame- work re- 
lation with the sentensic cormos only, is uni ; as, H in the 
Demonstrator, and H, M, O, and Q in the truncus theorem 
on the Theorem. 

Note. H includes the ramus with but one of its tenons — i" includes 
it with both. (See remarks upon the including, and excluding letters, 
page 84.) 

2. That sentensic ramus which holds a frame- work re- 
lation with both the secormos, and the insecormos, is ambi; 
as, / in the Demonstrator, and /, N, P, and R in the trun- 
cus theorem on the Theorem. 

1. How many serami are there on the Theorem, John ? 
Seven— four in the truncus theorem, and three in the 
semisection. 



140 

2. How many of these seven serami, can be included 
in one section 1 Only six. 

3. Can the four serami in the truncus theorem be in- 
cluded in the same section, and all be ambi 1 No — if I 
include tvro, or more, all but the last must be uni. Hence 

I presume that I can not possibly embrace /, N, P and 
JR in the same section 1 

You are correct, John. You can not even include / 
and N in the same section, for you can not have in one 
section two serami which hold a frame- work relation with 
cormos X, the insecormos. 

IMPOSSIBLE. 

1. [D P / N P R W X.] 

POSSIBLE. 

2. [D F H M O Q.] 

Note. Here, John, you can learn that you may include all the 
serami if you confine your section to the uni kind. You may learn 
also that if all the serami in the section are uni, you can not include 
X, the insecormos, in your section. 

IMPOSSIBLE. 

3. [D F / M X.] 

POSSILLE. 

4. [D F H N X.] 

Note. From this you see that only the last serami if any, can be 
ambi. 

5. [D F H M O R X.] 

6. [D F H M P X.] 

IMPOSSIBLE. 

7. [D F H N P X.] 

Note. Impossible because two ambies in the same section (N and 
P) cannot refer to X. 

John, do you see a 4 near the mortise by figure z on 
the secormos ? I do — and " I see a I near the mortise by 
figure a on the insecormos, X. And, 1 presume from this 
contrivance that four serami may belong to the secormos 
at the same time, in the same section — and that only one 
in the same section, can belong to the insecormos." 

John, your remark is very just. But I am somewhat 
disappointed that you have not mentioned the 2 and the +. 

II / observed these — but as I do not understand their im- 
port I have not spoken of them" 

The + indicates that one or more serami may be added 



141 

to the four in the truncus theorem — and the 2 shows how 
many may be added, 

" / presume, then, that the additional serami which 
may hold a frame-work relation with the secormos, must 
be found in the semisection" Certainly, Hence you see, 
John, that six serami may belong to the secormos at the 
same time. 

" This explains the design of the 3 and the + near the 
right hand mortise npou X, the insecormos. 

Note. All the serami upon the Theorem are of the first rank ex- 
cept two. That is, all but two hold a direct frame-work relation with a 
cormos. This is so on the Theorem because it is so in the English 
language. 

Have, and been may be so used as to be thrown, or re- 
moved from a direct constructive relation with any cor- 

3 2 2 

mos ; as, They shall have been punished, Thev have been 

2 
punished, They shall have punished him. 

(See the following cut, denominated The Exception.) 

THE EXCEPTION. 




II. INSENTENSIC RAMI. 
Co, mono, duo, and sub, 

1. A coramus is an insentensic ramus which has a frame- 
work relation with a collection of parts ; as, A having the 
brace, in the Demonstrator, (page 136.) 

(See Ramus A, page 108.) 

2. A monoramus is an insentensic ramus which holds a 
dependent frame-work relation with insentensic cormi 
only; as, A having the shoe in the Demonstrator. 



142 

3. A Duramus is an insentensic ramus which has the ca- 
pacity from the size and form of its tenon to hold a frame- 
work relation with both kinds of cormi, (se and inse); as, 
Win the Demonstrator. 

4. A subramus is an insentensic ramus which in frame- 
work rank, is inferior to some other ramus with which it 
holds a constructive relation ; as, B in the Demonstrator. 

REMARKS. 

The great class of insentensic rami are divided into co, mono, duo, 
and sub. And these divisions have been made from the peculiarity of 
each class in frame-work relation. These remarks are intended to il- 
lustrate these peculiarities, and thus to impress the distinctions which 
exist among the lour classes. 

John, I shall attempt to explain to you in what way 
ramus W differs from ramus A t without the brace. Fix 
your eyes upon both of these parts, John. They are A t 
and H. 

Now, do you see from the size of the tenon of ramus .4 
that it can be inserted into but one of the two cormos 
parts? " I do — the tenon is much too large for any mor- 
tise in the sentensic cormos while it seems well suited in 
size and shape to a mortise in the insentensic cormos." 

You see, then, John, why ramus A is called mono . ? 

Examine the tenon of ramus )>'. Is it not adapted 
both in size, and form to a mortise oi' the insentensic cor- 
mos ! "Yes" — and it is also equally well adapted to a 
mortise of the sentensic cormos/' Ramus JJ, then, may 
be applied to two kinds of cormi, namely, sentensic and 
insentensic. Hence von see in what ramus A differs from 
ramus JJ. Ramus A has a single frame- work capacity ; 
ramus J J a double, or a two-fold frame- work capacity. 
And to denote the single capacity oi' ramus A, mono is 
used — and to indicate the double capacity of ramus IK duo 
is employed. Mono, one — duo, two. 

I have attempted to describe the Mono-ramus, and the 
Duoramus. (duramus.) 

John, have yon noticed the shoe upon ramus A ] I have. 
Now, John, i wish to fix upon your mind the true frame- 
work character of a monoramus — hence i have put upon 
this ramus a shoe — which ii\ its application to the foot is 
confined from its very frame-work capacity to the left foot — 
from this you are to learn that as the shoe is applied to but 
one kind o( foot, so the mono-ramus belongs to but. one 
kind of cormos. Not that it belongs only to one cormos — 
but to but one kind of cormos. 

John, Do you see the shoe on ramus W 1 I do. If you 
examine, you will find that this shoe has the capacity to 



143 

fit two kinds of feet; the right, and the left kind. The dou- 
ble capacity in the shoe is intended to impress upon your 
mind the double capacity of ramus W. The shoe may be 
applied to both kinds of feet — ramus TV may be applied 
to both kinds of cormi — sentensic and insentensic. It is 
a duo-shoe ; not, however, because it is worn on both 
the right, and left foot at the same time, but because it has 
the capacity to be put upon two kinds of feet. The mono 
ramus is well represented in that shoe which is confined 
by its form to the left foot only. This kind of shoe like the 
monoramus, has but one frame-work capacity — it is con- 
fined to the left foot in the same way in which the mono- 
ramus is confined in its frame-work relation to the insen- 
tensic kind of cormi. 

3. Coramus. A coramuais an insentensic ramus which 
holds a frame-work relation to a company, a collection of 
parts ; as, A with the brace. (See the girdle which em- 
braces the collection of branches, Page 76.) 

A is called a Co-ramus. That is, a collective ramus — and 
it is so denominated because it takes hold, by means of its 
long arms, on a collection of other parts. Now, the con- 
jective power of ramus A is the brace — this brace is the 
arms of the ramus, which enable it to embrace, encircle, or 
include the whole mass, group, or assemblage which fol- 
lows this ramus. As the small tenon of B enables B to 
unite itself in frame- work to Win the demonstrator and to 
C on the Theorem, so does the brace of ramus A enable 
ramus A to unite itself in frame-work to the whole mass, 
the entire group of parts, which follows. 

4. Subramus. A subramus is an insentensic ramus 
which has a frame- work dependence upon another ramus ; 
as, B. 

John, I will now undertake to explain ramus B, in its 
relation to ramus W. Will you turn your eye to this tree. 




Now, in frame-work relation, which part of this tree holds 



144 

the highest rank? "The truncus." Which ranks the 
higher, B, or C, in frame- work relation? "ramus B." 
Why 1 " because B sustains, supports C." 

In a frame-work point of view, then, B is superior to C, 
is it not 1 certainly. 

If B is superior to C, is not C inferior to B 1 " surely." 
C, then, is a sub-branch, is it not 1 — "Why, I do not under- 
stand the exact import of sub." " Sub," John, means infe- 
rior, under, less. " O, yes — now I comprehend clearly; 
and I am much pleased with the prefix, and the idea which 
it seems to denote in this place, for I certainly do see that 
ramus C in frame- work importance is inferior, or sub to 
ramus B." " But as the word, ramus, means a branch, 
why not say sub-ramus instead of sub-branch?" If you 
please, John, call C a sub-ramus — indeed it seems much 
better in sound, and quite as p>od in sense. 

Now, John, is ramus B in the Demonstrator, a sub-ramus, 
or not ) " B, is a subramus in relation to W. 

What is W, John, in relation to cormos F 7 " it is a ra- 
mus ; but not a sub-ramus for it is not inferior to another 
ramus, but to a cormos" 

John, what is B in respect to W\ " B is a sub-ramus" 
And what is B in reference to HI " B is a sub-ramus" 

RULES. 

1. That insentensic ramus which belongs to the insen- 
tensic kind of cormi only, is a monoramus ; as, A. 

2. That insentensic ramus which has the twofold con- 
structive capacity to be applied to both kinds of cormi, is 
a duramus ; as, W. 

3. That insentensic ramus which has the capacity to be 
applied only to an assemblage, or company of parts, is a 
coramus ; as, A. 

4. That insentensic ramus which in the frame-work of 
the section, is so disposed of as to depend constructively 
upon another ramus, is a subramus ; as, B. 

5. That sentensic ramus which holds a frame- work rela- 
tion with the sentensic cormos only, is uni ; as H. 

6. That sentensic ramus which holds a frame- work re- 
lation with both kinds of cormi is ambi ; as, /. 

SPECIMEN OF THEOREM PARSING. 

ABCDFGHNVWX. 

A, a coramus. Rule 3. Here give the R. 

B, a subramus. Rule 4. 

C, a subramus. Rule 4. 



145 

2), a duramus. Rule 2. 

F, a secormos. A secormos is, &c. (page 135.) 

G, a subramus. Rule 4. 
H 9 a uni seramus. Rule 5. 

N f an ambi seramus. Rule 6. 

F, a subramus. Rule 4. 

JF, a duramus. Rule 2. 

JST, an inseeormos. An insecormos is, &c. (Page 1 37.) 

PREPARED EXERCISES, 

[Cc D F I W X ] ( A P I 

W X ) ( A F ) ( A F I W X ) (A Dd E 
F ) ( A F I W X ) ( A F I X Y) (A 

E F)(A F H )(A DdE F.) 

[F (F H K ) (A F ) H] ( A F ) (A F ( F 



I 


X 


Y)( A 


F) 


I X. ) 




[E 


(Cc 


D F 


H M 


S) (A E 


F) F 


H] 


( A 


E F 


)(F 


I X ) (A (F 


I 


X) 


F H ) (F 


H M 


) ( A E 


F ) 


( E 


F H 


K.) 








[A 


Y 


(F I ) 


F I 


X Yy](A 


F 


I X 


Yy .) 








[ A 


(AF 


(A F 


) I 


K X )(A 


F ) 


H D 


F 


N X 


Y 7] [ 


A H 


F N 


W 


X 


] 








[ A F 


H 


/A C 


RV|( 


A F ) ( A 


F .) 


[F 


I Tt U Uu 


X 'A C Q, 


R .\] 


[ A Bb 


C 


D F 


H J 


L M ] (A 


Bb 


c 


Dd 


P )(F 


G H 


J 


L 


M 


)(A Bb 


F.) 






[ A 


F 


I X Y ] (A 


E F 


) 


[F 


I 


W X .] 









[FH Jj ](A E F 'A BV)( A E F ) (A E 
F ) ( A F H ) ( A Dd E F 'A B ^) (A 

N 



146 

E F )(A F .) 
[F H ] ( A E F ) (A F I X.) 
[F H 'A C Q, R Y] (A F H N X) (A E 

F )(A F .) 

[D F H M O S] (A D F 

I X ) (A C D E F .) 

[ t A B^ H Jj] ( A E F .) 

[F I 'A B Y] ( A F H Jj ) ( A E F .) 

[ F H 'A B .V] 

[ F H ] (A ( A B \) 

For more Exercises in this kind of parsing, see page 84, 
85, and 87. 

PART IV. 



CHAPTER I. 

John, in this chapter I shall give you an explanation of 
the various characters which belong to the different cormi, 
and rami of the Theorem. But, before I commence this 
explanation of these attributes of the cormi, and rami, I 
shall call your attention to their character, and to their 
name which is intended to indicate their character. These 
properties are called syncratic characters. 

«' Syncratic" is made from two Greek words, sun, and 
kratos, and means power, ability to come together, to be 
put together. The idea of junction, or together, is from 
"sun" which means together—and the idea of power, 
ability, is from kratos which signifies ability, power. 

There is a syncratosity (a capacity of junction, union, 
conjection) between any two particles, or things which 
can be united in any sense whatever. Thus, between 
two drops of water, there is a syncratosity — they have the 
ability to come together. 

There is a variety of kinds of syncratosity — or rather, 
there is a variety of degrees in syncratosity. In some in- 
stances one thing will unite with another so closely, so 
perfectly, as to become indentified with it. Thus a drop 
of brandy, when put into a pint of water, is lost in its 
identity with the water. Liquids generally have the power 



147 

of union to so high a degree that two masses may become 
one mass. Two pieces of timber, however, have not the 
ability of so close a union. Nor have ideas this high de- 
gree of syncratosity — ideas may be conjected one to ano- 
ther by reason of some analogy among them — but they 
never can be so merged into each other as to lose their 
individual, their distinct identity. And as ideas from their 
very nature, maintain a distinct, a separate identity, so 
words from their very construction into assemblages, hold 
a distinct individuality, a separate identity. But, as ideas, 
from their analogy to each other, have a sort of construc- 
tive connection, so words, from their close connection with 
ideas, hold a kind of frame- work relation one with another. 
This frame- work relation is of two kinds ; namely, indi- 
vidual, and collective. The individual relation is found 
among the words of the same section, and is illustrated in 
the individual r elation which the different parts of the 
truncus under page 72, bear one to another in constitut- 
ing the frame-work of that section. It is also illustrated 
in the individual connection of the different parts of the 
clados under the same page. 

The collective relation is found among the sections of 
the same sentence, and is illustrated in the collective rela- 
tion which the truncus and clados, under p. 72, bear one 
to the other. This relation is also found among the sentences 
of the same paragraph, and among the paragraphs of the 
same chapter. 

Now, wherever the individual relation exists, each 
word in the section generally derives a particular char- 
acter from this relation — and this character is deno- 
minated syncratic. Thus, if a cormos is so disposed of 
in the frame work of the section, that it is made to con- 
struct the first principles of a sentence into a sentence 
character, it, by virtue of this act, acquires the positive 
character of sentensic ; as F in the Demonstrator. 

This sentensic character is denominated syncratic. It 
may be seen in the word Moses, in the following in- 
stance — " Moses smote the rock." 

And, if a cormos is so disposed of in the frame-work of 
the section, that it is made to withhold its sentensic agency 
in forming the sentensic elements into a full sentence char- 
acter, it acquires the negative character of insentensic ; 
as, X in the Demonstrator. 

This character also is called syncratic. This insentensic 
character may be seen in the word Moses, in the follow- 
ing instance—" And the child was called Moses. 1 ' 

" And the child was called," contains a, full cordiction. 

All the properties which, in general, come to be consi- 



148 



dered, only when words are put into a syntaxed state, 
are denominated the syncratic characters of words. 
These are number, gender, tense, &c. &c. 

Whenever a word is syntaxed, its syncratosity is em- 
ployed; and, because these properties are presented for 
special consideration or notice, only when the syncra- 
tosity of a word is exercised, they are called syncratic. 

The syncratic characters of the different parts of speech 

as found on the Theorem, are 



&c. &c. 



Explanation of the syncratic characters of the different 
cormi, and rami of the Theorem. 

RAMUS A IN THE TRUNCUS. 



denotes the ramus relation of this part of 
speech. 







denotes the same thing. 



a shows that ramus A may belong to the truncus — 
and b, that it may belong to a clados. a is the top of a 
trunk — 6, the top of a branch, a clados. These parts are 
made tops to indicate that no ramus can be conjected to a 
coramus — no other ramus can belong to a coramus. 



This blank indicates the want of the senten- 
sic elements — a destitution of the first 
principles of a sentence character. 



This character denotes that no coramus 
can be declined, varied. 




149 

S This character illustrates the co, the collective relation 
J of that ramus on which it is found. 

John, words are distributed into different families ac- 
cording to their syncratic characters. The names of the 
different families to which words are referred, are class 

ORDER, GENUS, SPECIES, and VARIETY. 

I will now give you a specimen of the manner in which 
ramus A is run, or put through its different families in 
order to enumerate its various syncratic properties — 

A, a word of the ramus class, insentensic order, indecli- 
nable genus, co species. 

1. How do you know that A is of the ramus class 1 from 
the top of the trunk, or from the top of the branch. 

2. How do you know that A is insentensic? from the 
blank which denotes a want or destitution of the sentensic 
elements, or principles. 

3. How do you know that A is indeclinable] from the 
inability of the knife to bend, open, or shut. (See the 
declinable knife on ramus B.) 

4. How do you know that A is co? from the brace 
which is intended to take things collectively. 

This process, John, is called the syncrafeing of words, 
— or the syncratic graduation of words^ 

Syncratic Graduation is the process of expressing step 
by step, the entire syncratic character of a word by re- 
ferring the word to its appropriate class, order, genus, 
species, and variety upon the scale of the word's syncratic 
properties. 

CLASS, ORDER, GENUS, SPECIES, and VARIETY. 

John, I have not room for fixed definitions of these 
technical terms as used in works of science. I must con- 
tent myself by observing that they are the names of 
the various families into which nature and art have divided 
animals and things. These technical terms may be con- 
sidered apertures in the frame-work of science, through 
which things are drawn in order to press out, or scrape 
off their true characters. For this purpose the apertures 
are of different sizes. The largest is class, the next in 
size is order, the next genus, the next species, and the 
smallest technical aperture is variety. In this way the 
technical apertures are graduated, and the drawing of the 
words of a section through them is denominated Syncratic 
Graduation. The following scheme gives the manner in 
which the different letters of the alphabet may be gradu- 
ated upon the scale of their various shapes or forms; — 

N5 



150 
The whole race. 

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST 
UVWXYZ. 

I. Orbic Class. 

BCDGJOPQRSU. 

Perfect 
Imperfect 

Q. 



Order 



Branch 
Branchless 

Stem 
Stemless 

Monopart 

Duopart 

Tripart 

D Branch 
Q Branch 



Genus 




OQ. 
BCDGJPRSU. 



O. 

B D J P R. 
CGSU. 

J. 

DP. 

BR. 

B. 
R. 

II. Inorbic Class. 

AEFHIKLMNTVWXYZ. 

EFHLT. 
AKMNVWXYZ. 

EFL1\ 
H. 

L. 

Species FT. 
E 

AKNVXYZ. 
M W. 

XYV. 
AKN. 

M. 
W. 

Let us graduate letter O. 

O is a letter of the Orbic class, perfect Order, Branch- 
less Genus. 
JHere, by putting this letter through three of the regu- 



Rightangle 
Acuteangle 

Monostem 
Duostem 

Unibranch 
Duobranch 
Tribranch 

Monostem 
Duostem 

Unibranch 
Bibranch 

Double A 
Double V 



Order 



Genus 



> Genus 

{ Species 

> Species 



151 



larly graduated apertures, we have scraped off all the 
properties which constitute its modification character. 
These properties we have caught in three little technical 
dishes, or verbal vessels, — orbic, perfect, and branchless. 

There are other letters, however, whose various pro- 
perties cannot be scraped off by putting them through the 
first three graduating, and graduated apertures only ; 
namely, class, order, and genus. They have so many 
twists which the first three are too large to catch, that 
they must be put through the entire course, or tier of 
apertures, even down to variety, in order to strip them of 
their various forms. Let us now take letter Q,. Q is a 
letter of the Orbic Class, Perfect Order, Branch Genus. 
What ! has Q, run out at genus ] indeed it has ! Well, we 
will take R. R is a letter of the Orbic Class, Imperfect 
Order, Stem Genus, Tripart Species, Q, Branch Variety. 

Thus we have taken off all the properties which consti- 
tute the entire modification character of R, and put them 
into these five technical cups — 

Orbic, Imperfect, Stem, Tripart, Q Branch. 

Let us now see in what way human beings may be 
divided into different families upon the scale of their topo- 
graphy — 

George Washington was a human being, of the Ameri- 
can Class, United States Order, Virginia Genus, Fairfax 
County Species, Mount Vernon Variety. 

General Jackson is a human being, of the American 
Class, United States Order, Tennesee Genus, Davidson 
County Species, Hermitage Variety. 

Note. — I do not consider the words " United States?' as including 
the territories — hence the phrase, American Class, is more general 
than United States Order. 



THE DISTINCTIVE FAMILIES OF WORDS. 



2. Ramus 



class. 



1. Sentensic ) , 

2. Insentensic j 

in. 

1. Namitive 

2. Unnamitive 

3. Regular 

4. Irregular £>genus. 
6. Ampho 

6. Declinable 

7. Indeclinable 



IV. 

1 . Individual 

2. Family 

3. Exhibiiive 

4. Unexhibitive 

5. Uni 

6. Jlmbi 

7. Duo 

8. Sub 

9. Co 
10. Mono 

v. 
1. Sentensic 
2. 



species. 



> 



I. Sentensic ) . . 
I. Insentensic \ vanet y- 



152 

THE ENTIRE RACE. 



Distribution of the Inferior Families to their respective 
superiors. 
I. 
c.LCormos| class 



order 



II. 
3. 1. Sentensic 
i. 2. Insentensic 

III. 

n. 1. Namitive ) 

u. 2. Unnamitive $ £ enus 

IV. 

f. 1. Family ^ 

u. 4. Unexhibitive J 




N 



fieul 



E 



5c H e * I! 



s. L Sentensic 
i. 2. Insentensic 



Fetation, number, and gender also belong to the cormos 
class. 

1. Formative } 

2. Auditive > relation, 

3. Unperceptive ) 

II. 

III. 

1. Masculine \ 

2. Feminine f «.««/i^». 

3. Ambi \ S ender - 

4. Unapparent ; 



153 



r. 2. Ramus \ class 

II. 
s.LSeptenslc| order 

III. 
r. 1. Regular } 
i. 2. Irregular v genus 
a. 3. Ampho ) 

IV. 

a:2:Ambii s P ecies 



R 



RIA 



Position, and tense also belong to the sentensic order. 

1. Formative ) ....^^ 

2. ExformativefP° sltlon ' 



II. 

1. Present 

2. Imperfect 

3. Perfect 

4. Prior perfect 

5. Future 

6. Prior future. 



tense. 



II. 



1. 



order 



i. 2. Insentensic 

III. 

d. 1. Declinable 

i. 2. Indeclinable C genus 




IV. 

d. 1. Duo 

s. 2. Sub 

c. 3. Co f S P ( 

m.4. Mono J 



1. 



DI 



ttj&jebni 



154 

QUESTIONS. 

1. Into how many classes are words divided.] 

2. Into how many orders is the cormos class divided ? 

Two — sentensic and insentensic. 

3. Into how many genera is each order divided ? Two — 

namitive and unnamitive. 

4. Into how many species is each genus divided ? Two — 

family and individual, under the namitive genus; and 
exhibitive and unexhibitive, under the unnamitive 
genus. 

5. Which species is divided into variety? The exhibitive. 

6. Into how many varieties is the species divided? Two — 

sentensic and insentensic, 

7. How many relations are there ? 

8. How many numbers ? 

9. How many genders 1 

ii. 

1. How many orders has the ramus class? Two — senten- 

sic and insentensic, 

2. Into how many genera is this sentensic order divided ? 

Three — regular, irregular, and amplio. 

3. How many species does each of these genera comprise ? 

Two — uni and ambi. 

4. How many positions belong to serami? 
£. How many tenses 7 

in. 

1. How t many genera does the insentensic order comprise T 

Two — declinable and indeclinable. 

2. How many species has each genus ] The declinable 
has two — dud, and sub. The indeclinable four — duo, sub, 
co, and mono. 

GENERAL QUESTIONS. 

1. To which class does the family species belong? To the 

cormos class. 

2. To which class do the sentensic, and the insentensic 

order belong ? To both. 

3. To which order do the declinable, and the indeclinable 

genus belong? To the insentensic. 

4. How is a whole race divided ? Into classes. 

5. How is a class divided ? Into orders. 

6. How r is an order divided ? Into genera. 

7. Into what is a genus divided ? Into species. 

8. Into what is a species divided ? Into varieties, (class, 
order, genus, species, and variety.) 

9. Which comprises the greatest number of individuals ! 

class. 



155 

10. Which comprises the least number of individuals ? va- 
riety. 

11. Which comprises the greater number of individuals, a 

genus or a species 1 A genus. 

12. What does the entire cut represent ! The first cut is 
the whole mass of words in our language, — and while 
the cormos division of this cut presents one of the two 
classes into which the whole family of words is divid- 
ed, the ramus division presents the other. 

II. Explanation of the syncratic characters of ramus B in 
the trtmcus. 

denotes that the part to which it belongs, is 
of the ramus class— and the preparation upon 
the top to receive another part, indicates that 
another ramus may depend upon B. 



differs from a in this, — while a shows that 
ramus B may belong to a trunk section, b in- 
dicates that this ramus may also belong to a 
clados section. 



indicates a want of the first principles of a 
isentence character, on this destitution the 
nsentensic order is founded. 







indicates the declinable genus. 



indicates the indeclinable genus. 



indicates the subspecies. 

Note I. You will see by examination that / is the 
representative of the smaller tenon of this ramus. It is 
the smaller tenon which enables this ramus to be con- 
nected to another ramus — and, as this subrelation of 
ramus B is produced by the smaller tenon, and as the speciesof this 
ramus is founded upon this subrelation, there is propriety in using the 
! smaller tenon as the sign of the subspecies. 




1$6 

Note II. Let me here observe, John, that this ramus is two parts of 
speech, It is a duramus in relation to cormos F ; and it is a sub- 
ramus in relation to ramus C. When it is considered in relation to 
cormos F, it is called Bb, and when in relation to ramus C, or in re- 
lation to Cc, it is denominated B. 

^gg | indicates the duo species. 

The tenon which g represents gives ramus 
! Bb a double, or a twofold framework capa- 
! city; and, as the species of this ramus is found- 
! ed upon the double capacity, g, the representa- 
! tive of that tenon from which this twofold capa- 
I city is derived, is used as the sign of the duo 
| species. 




, indicates 
word. 



the significant power of 




is the idea hold on which the significant power 
takes. 

GRADUATION OF RAMUS B. 

B, a word of the ramus class, insentensic order, indecli- 
nable genus, subspecies, belonging to C, or to Cc. 

GRADUATION OF RAMUS Bb. 

Bb, a word of the ramus class, insentensic order, duospe- 
cies, belonging to F. 

III. secormos F. 



indicates the cormos class. 



indicates the cormos class. > 

The difference, a shows that the words whose class it 
'represents, may belong to a trunk section — b shows that a 
word of the cormos class may belong to a dados section. 



indicates the sentensic or- 
der ; c is the representative 
of the springs by which the 
secormos forms the senteu- 
sic elements, or first sen- 
tensic principles into a sen- 
tence. (See cormos Fin the 
Demonstrator, page 136.) 





! 



157 



The sentensic order of cormi is that family of words to which aJl 
those cormi are referred, that actually employ the sentensic power in 
constructing the sentensic elements into sentences, as is seen in the 
sentenceizing spring, marked c. This spring- is the sentenceizing, or 
sentence forming power, possessed, and employed by the theorem secor- 
mos — it is here taken from the secormos, and presented in actual ope- 
ration to show that the sentensic order of cormi is not founded upon 
the mere sentenceizing power, but upon the actual exercise of this 
power in forming a sentence from some of the sentential elements. 

Namitive. Family. Individual. 






d denotes the namitive genus. 
e, the circle, marks the family species. 

/, which denotes the straight lines running from the semicircle, 
to individual grapes, indicates the individual species. 

Unnamitive. 

f denotes the unnamitive genus. 
d 

^y' ^^b^S^'f'f^B Note. The sentensic order denoted by #, 

^"is divided into two genera ; namely, namitive, 

^and unnamitive. The difference is that, the 

words of the namitive genus, are names while 

those of the unnamitive are not names. Do 
it, that, which, so. 

you not see that namitive d is really the representative of an animal, 
and that g is not the representative of anything whatever ? 
The words of the Unna mitive Genus. 

I, we, 




thou, ye, 
he, she, they, 
who, whoever, 
whosoever, 
me, us, 
thee, 
him, : 
her, 
whom, 
whomsoever, 
myself, 
ourselves, 
thyself, yours, 
so. 



them, 



himself, j7 7 
, *£ themselves, 
herself 

oneself, itself, 

one-another, 

each-other, 

mine, ours, 

thine, yours, 

his, hers, 

its, theirs, 

it, you, 

one, ones, 

others, 

which, as, 

that, this, 

those, these. 



158 

A cormos word which is as destitute of the characteristic principle 
of a verbal name as the figure, marked g, is of the characteristic prin- 
ciple of a pictorial name, is of the unnamitive genus ; as, it, which, them, 
whom. Now g is not the pictorial name of any animal, of any thing ; 
nor is the word it the verbal name of any animal, any thing. But the 
word, book, is the verbal name of a thing, for there is something in the 
universe of things, which has book for its name. The word, book, and 
figure d, then, agree, for there is a being in the universe of animals, 
which has figure d for its pictorial name. While figure d, then, be- 
longs to the namitive genus of pictorial signs — the word, book, belongs 
to the namitive genus of verbal signs. 

The word, it, however, agrees with figure g ; for, while figure g does 
not belong to the namitive genus of pictorial signs, the word, it, does 
fcot belong to the namitive genus of verbal signs. 

Now, this figure, marked g, and referred to the unnamitive genus, is 
designed to represent a class of words, which is various in charac- 
ter. Hence, the figure itself is presented under many traits of cha- 
racter — it has the hoof of the horse to indicate that some of the words 
which it represents may be applied to the brute creation; and, indeed, 
its feet are various to intimate that the words which it represents may 
be applied to animals in general. The shoes show, in the "first place, 
that some of the words which it is designed to represent, may be ap- 
plied to things ; and, in the second place, that some of them may be 
applied to persons. And to indicate that these words are much used in 
colloqial intercourse, conversation, the picture has a tongue of great 
length, and of apparent flippancy. 

It is said above that the words which the unnamitive figure is de- 
signed to portray, are applied to things, animals, events, &c. And that 
they are so applied is true — but then, they are not applied as the names 
of things, animals, events,&c. They are applied as the representatives 
of the names — as the substitutes for the real names. Hence, the word, 
7, is applied to every human being who speaks English, as a substitute 
for his real name. And was it not for the fact that real names are 
often substituted for other real names, pro genus, or substitute genus, 
would be a proper distinctive appellation for the family of unnamitives. 
That this is the case may be seen in the author's appeal. 

To show that the unnamitive words represent the namitive, the un- 
namitive figure has the letter, d which is the name of the namitive 
figure. To indicate that one unnamitive word may represent another 
unnamitive word, one unnamitive figure has the letter of another. To 
indicate that some of the unnamitives represent entire sections, the 
character called a section is appended to the unnamitive figure, and the 
four unnamitives (it, that, which so,) which represent entire sections, are 
placed under this character. 

To show that the namitive cormos which the unnamitive one repre- 
ents, does not fall into the same section with the namitive, the un- 
namitive figure is never placed in the same group with the namitive 
figure. 



159 



In general the section into which the namitive cormos falls, eomes 
first — and to indicate this, the namitive figure is placed Jirst. 

The unnamitive genus comprises two species as is indicated by the 
two kinds or species of shoe ; namely, the species worn on the right foot, 
and that worn on both the right, and the left. One of the two species 
of shoe, exhibits in its form to which foot it belongs, and may thence 
be called the cxhibitive species. The other species of shoe represented in 
one of the shoes upon the unnamitive, does not indicate in any way on 
which foot its owner may wear it — hence it may be denominated the un- 
exhihitive species. 



Exhibiiive Species. 



Unexhibitive Species. 





I, we, mine, ours, 

thou, ye, thine, yours' 1 

he, she, they, his, hers, 

who, whoever, its, theirs, 

whosoever. it, you, 

one, ones, 

me, us, others, 

thee, which, as, 

him, that, this, 

her, these, those, 

them, so, 

whom, 
whomsoever, 
myself, 
ourselves, 
thyself, yourselves, 
himself, 
herself, 
themselves, 
oneself, itself, 
one-another^ 
eo ch-oiher. 
Note.— Some of the words which constitute the unnamitive genus 

have the power to construct the sentensic elements into sentenses — and 

these words show by their very form that they have this power; 

as, /, thou, &c. Hence they are called exhihitive. 

Others of the unnamitive genus show by their form that they have 

not this power ; as, me, thee, &e. 

Hence these too are denominated exhihitive. 

These words constitute the exhihitive species. They are /, me, we, 

us, thou, thee, ye,— he, him, she, her, they, them f who, whom, whomsoever, 

whosoever, &c. 



160 

It may be seen from the spring which occupies a portion of the exhib- 
itive shoe, that part of the exhibitive species has sentensic power. And 
from the blank which occupies the other portion of the shoe, it may be 
Been that the rest of this species is destitute of the sentenceizing power. 
The exhibitive species, then, is divided into two varieties : namely, senten- 
sic, and insentensio. 

Sentensic Variety. Insentensio Variety. 



a 



me, us, 



I, we, 

thou, ye, thee, 

he, she, they, him, 

who, whoever, her, 



them, 



vjhosoever. whom, 

whomsoever, 

myself, 

ourselves, 

thyself, yourselves, 

himself, ^ 7 

* ,v themselves, 
herself, 

oneself, itself, 

unt-auulher, 

each-other. 

The sentensic variety differs from the sentensic order in this — the or- 
der is founded on the actual exercise of sentensic power, while the varie- 
ty is founded upon the mere possession of the sentensic power. (See 
sentensic order, page 156.) 

These words constitute the exhibitive species. The exhibitive species 
then is composed of two kinds of words ; namely, those which exhibit 
by their form that they have sentensic power, and those which exhibit 
by their form that they have not sentensic power. Hence the ex- 
hibitive species is divided into two varieties ; namely, sentensic, and 
insentensic. The sentensic variety is composed of those words which 
have sentensic power. They are /, we, thou, ye, he, she, they y who, 
whoever, whosoever. 

The insentensic variety is composed of those unnamitives which ex- 
hibit in their form that they have not sentensic power. Trfey are 
me, us, thee, him, her, them, myself, ourselves, thyself, himself herself, 
themselves, whom, whomsoever, &c. 

The other words which constitute the unnamitive genus do not show 
whether they have sentensic power in the sections where they may be 
found, or not. These constitute the unexhibitive species. They are you, 
that, which, as, mine, yours, &c. 

To render this subject perfectly clear, I have taken two kinds of 
shoe, which are easily divided into exhibitive, and unexhibitive. Those 
which show in their form to which foot they belong are exhibitive ; and 



161 



those which do not show in their form to which foot they belong are 
unexhibitive. Those designed in form for the right foot, and those in- 
tended in form for the left, make up the exhibitive species. 

This species may be naturally divided into two varieties ; namely, 
the light foot variety, and the left foot variety. 

Those shoes which do not exhibit in their form to which foot they 
belong, constitute the unexhibitive species. The unexhibitive species can 
not be divided into varieties for the shoes which constitute it, do not 
differ one from another in their specific or species principle. The rights 
and lefts differ in that principle upon which they are classed, for the 
rights exhibit one thing, and the lefts another — hence, here there may 
be a subdivision without leaving the exhibitive principle on which the 
species is founded. 

Formative. Auditive. Unperceptive. 

r M\ _ s ^ t 



I see that 





r illustrates the formative relation, r is the former of the 
sentence — " I see that thou art not he" Hence r bears 
a formative relation to this sentence. 

s illustrates the auditive relation, s is the auditor of the 
• sentence of which r is the former, s gives audience 
to r's sentence. Hence s bears an auditive relation to 
the sentence — " / see that thou art not he. 

t illustrates the unperceptive relation. He seems to be 
unconscious of even the existence of the sentence to 
which s is called on to give audience. 



Singular. 



Plural. 





u Indicates the singular number. 
v Indicates the plural number. 



162 



Masculine. 



Feminine. 





A m b i. 



Unapparent. 





w indicates the masculine gender. 
x indicates the feminine gender. 
y indicates the ambi gender. 
\ indicates the unapparent gender. 

Cormi have four genders, viz. : masculine, feminine, ambi, and un- 
apparent. w Indicates the masculine gender ; hence, when cormos F 
is taken in connection with w, it corresponds in gender to the cor- 
mos, father, man, boy, &c. But when cormos F is taken in con- 
nection with x, it corresponds in gender to the cormos, mother, 
woman, girl, lass, &c. And, when cormos F is taken in connection 
with y, it corresponds in gender to the cormos, parents, y unites the 
hat and the bonnet, y is ambi gender because it indicates both sexes. 
But the gender of z is not apparent, not obvious, not clear, for it is not 
easy to decide for which sex this hat is designed ; hence, when cormos 
F is taken in connection with figure z, it is of the unapparent gender ; 
and corresponds in this respect to the cormi in the following instances : 
" His affectionate parent still lives ;" " A child had just before been 
carried along by some unknown person." 



I 



/| what I is in the hand of the smith in forming 
I f) the shoe from the iron, the springs are in the 
M hands of cormos Fin forming the first princi- 
ples of a cordiction into a full sentence character. 

c=^ == _ == ^ the same may be said of m. As the ham- 

m ^^^«/er, and the tongs are the means em- 
^^^^^ ployed by the smith in forming his shoe 

out of the iron, the first principle, or raw materia] of his 
shoe, so the springs marked k, are the means employed by 
cormos JPin forming a sentence character out of the sentens- 
ic elements, or first principles furnished by the seramus H. 



163 



TRUNCUS THEOREM, RAMUS I. 

Ramus. Ramus. Sentensic Order. 




a indicates the ramus class. 
b indicates the ramus class. 
c indicates the sentensic order. 

Note. The order of a serarnus is founded, not upon furnishing the 
sentential elements, but upon the' possession of them. That ramus, 
therefore, which has the first principles of a sentence character, whether 
they are brought out by the secormos, or not, is of the sentensic 
order, as M. N. P. in the truncus theorem. 



Irregular. 



Regular, 



A m p h o. 




d e 

d indicates the regular genus. 
e, the irregular genus. 
f illustrates the ampho. 

Note. In d the man enters the house in the regular, the common 
way. In e he is attempting to enter the house through the window 
— this is an irregular way of entering into a house. In /, is seen 
both the regular, and irregular — and as ampho means both, ampho is 
applied to these two modes of entering into the house. 

These houses are classed according to the manner of entrance which 
each affords. That which affords the usual or common means or way 
of entrance, is of the regular genus; as, d. That which affords only 
some unusual or uncommon means for entrance, is of the irregular 
genus; as, e. And that which affords both the regular and irregular 
means of entrance, is of the ampho genus; as, /. {Ampho both.) Now, 
as the capacity of each house to be entered in the regular, or an irre- 
gular way, gives it its genus, so does the capacity of a serarnus to have 
its perfect tense formed in the common, regular, or only in some 
unusual deviating way, give it its genus. 



164 

Theserami,in general, possess the capacity of having their perfe 
tense formed with ed ; hence, a seramus having this capacty is of the 
rpfTular genus ; as, walk, walked. 

^Those g serami which have not the regular perfect tense capacity, 
belona-, of course, to the irregular genus; as, is, go. 

Now, is and go have not the ability to take ed, for we can not say 
he isedhe goed last week. But we must here enter the house in an 
irreglL wfy, for there is nothing but a mndou,, and la dtonney, 
affofded as means of entering into the house. We must here say- 

he Mi b ~fin the language resemble house /, for while it affords 
both the regular and irregular means of entering it, they have both 
the regular and irregular perfect tense capacity ; as, dig digged, dig dug, 
build builded, build built. 

Uni. A m b L 



indicates the uni species, 
•saioods iqure QUJ so^oipur ?/ 





Formative 



Exformative' 




j Illustrates the formative position. 

k Illustrates the exformative position. 

The place, the mortise, which j occupies is called the formative posi- 
tion The place, the mortise, which k occupies is denominated the ex- 
formative position. The word, position, signifies place; and as the 
part marked j must occupy the first mortise, in order to form a circle, 
this place, the first mortise, is denominated the formative position. 

The prefix, ex, means out of; hence, the phrase, exformatitc posi- 
tion, means out of the formative position. Each mortise, except the 
first, is an exformative mortise, an exformative place, zn exformative 
position. While j, then, occupies a formative position, k occupies an 

exformative one. . 

Now, as there are formative positions in these figures, so there is a 
formative position in every truncus, and in every seclados. And as 
there are exformative positions in these figures, so there is an cxfcrmativc 



165 



position in every truncus, and in every seclados which has more than 
one seramus. And, as j occupies the formative position in the above 
cut, so does the first seramus in the series occupy the formative posi- 

for ex ex ex. 
tion in the section ; as he could have been seen. 

The formative position of a seramus is the first place in relation to 
the secormos ; it is denominated the formative position, first, be- 
cause it is in this place that the cordiction is formed ; and, secondly, 
because no seramus in the section can aid in forming- a sentence cha- 
racter unless it occupies this position. In the following instance it is 
can which furnishes the elements out of which the secormos forms the 
affirmative cordiction. They can write. 

Write lies beyond the reach of the secormos, they ; they can not reach 
the sentensic elements which lie in write — write is in the exformativc 
position. And to place the sentensic elements of write within the 
reach of the secormos, they, write must occupy the formative position. 
They write. 



1. What position does a 




occupy I 

2. What position does b 
occupy ? 

3. What position does # 
occupy ? 



1540 
Future. 




I illustrates the present tense. The sand which represents time is all 
here, all present. 1837 like the sand in Z, denotes the present tense 
— the entire year is taken in the mass. 

m illustrates the imperfect tense. The time is not all out, not passed 
off — hence imperfect. August 1837 like the sand in m, denotes 
the imperfect tense. August indicates that a portion of the whole 
time has passed off. 

n illustrates the perfect tense. Here all the sand, the time is perfectly 
passed away. 1837 like n, denotes that all the time has perfectly 
passed off. 

o illustrates the prior perfect tense. In n the time has all passed 
off; though not perfectly settled — but in o the sand is perfectly 
settled which indicates priority in the act of passing off. 1835 
like the settled state of the sand in o, indicates priority in pass- 
ing — 1835 passed off prior to 1836, 

p 1840 illustrates the future tense. 

q 1839 illustrates the prior future. 1839 indicates that the time will 
come into q before it comes into p. 



ICG 

SPECIMEN OF SYNCRATIC GRADUATION UPON THE THEOREM. 

A B C D F G II J Kk MUST U V W X Y Z. 

A, a word of the ramus class, insentensic order, indeclina- 

ble genus, co species, belonging to its own section. 

B, a word of the ramus class, insentensic order, declina- 

ble genus, sub species, belonging to C. 

C, a word of the ramus class, insentensic order, indecli- 

nable genus, sub species, belonging to D. 

D, a word of the ramus class, insentensic order, indeclina- 

ble genus, duo species, belonging to F 

P, a word of thecormos class, sentensic order, namitive 
genus, family species, unperceptive relation, singular 
number, unapparent gender. 

G, a word of the ramus class, insentensic order, declina- 
ble genus, sub species, belonging to H. 

H, a word of the ramus class, sentensic order, regular 
genus, uni species, formative position, present tense, 
belonging to F. 
J, a word of the ramus class, insentensic order, indeclina- 
ble genus, sub species, belonging to Kk, 

Kk, a word of the ramus class, insentensic order, declina- 
ble genus, duo species, belonging to F 

AT, a word of the ramus class, sentensic order, irregular ge- 
nus, uni species, exfhrmativ© position', belonging to F. 

JR, a word of the ramus class, sentensic order, regular ge- 
nus, ambi species, exformative position, belonging to 
Fand X, 

S, a word of the ramus class, insentensic order, declinable 
genus, sub species, belonging to R, M, or II. 

T, a word of the ramus class, insentensic order, indecli- 
nable genus, sub species, belonging to U. 

r, a word of the ramus class, insentensic order, indecli- 
nable genus, sub species, belonging to V, 

r, a word of the ramus class, insentensic order, declinable 
genus, sub species, belonging to W. 

IV, a word of the ramus class, insentensic order, declina- 
ble genus, duo species, belonging to X. 

X, a word of the carmQS class, insentensic order, unnam- 
itive genus, exhibitive species, insentensic variety, for- 
mative relation, singular number, masculine gender. 

PREPARED EXERCISES, 

[Cc D F I W X ] ( A F I 

W X ) ( A F)(AF I WX)(ADdE 
F ) ( A F I W X ) ( A F I X Y) (A 
E F)(A F H)(ADdE F.) 



167 

[F (F H K ) (A F ) H] ( A 
I X Y)( A F) 

[ E (Cc D F H 

H ] ( A E F ) (F 

I X ) F H ) (F H 

E F H K.) 



F ) (A F ( F 

I X. ) 

M S) (A E F) F 
I X ) (A (F 

M ) ( A E F ) 



[ A Y 
I X 



(F I ) F I X Yy ] ( A F 



Yy .) 

A (A F ( A F ) I 

N X Y T] [ 



[ 
IDF 

W X .] 
; A F H /A 

[F I Tt U 
[ A Bb C D 



K 



X )(A 
H 



Bb 



C R \| ( A 
Uu X (& 
F H J 

C Dd F ) ( F 

L M ) (A Bb F.) 

[ A F I X Y ] (A E 

[ F I "W X .] 

[FH Jj ] (A E F 'A BV)( 
F ) ( A F H ) ( A Dd E 
E F )(A F .) 

[F H ] ( A E F ) (A F I 



F)(A 

c o, 

L M 
G H 

F . 



F ) 
F N 

F .) 
R .>] 

O ] (A 



A E F ) (A E 
F 'A B V) (A 

X.) 

[F H (A C a R V| (A F H N X) (A E 
F )(A F .) 

[D F HMOS] (AD F 

I X ) (A C D E F .) 

[ f A B^ H Jj] (A E F .) 
[F I (A B S] ( A F H Jj ) ( A E P .) 

[ F H (A B y[ 

[ F H ] (A ( A B \) 



168 

INSECLADOS THEOREM. 

1. A, Bb, D E F 
1. A, Bb, C Dd F 

2. A B C D E F 

3. A Bb, C Dd F 

4. A, Bb, Cc, Dd F 

5. A B Cc, E F 

6. A C Dd E F 

6. A B Cc D E F 

7. A B £ D E F 

8. A B Cc Dd E F 

9. A C D, C D, D E F 

10. A B Cc, D E F 

11. A Bb F B C D E. 

12. A, Bb, B C D E F 

For more exercises, seepage 84, 85, and 87. 

DIRECTIONS. 

Should more theorem practice be necessary to make 
the student somewhat familiar with the process of syn- 
cratic graduation, he may either repeat the graduation 
of the above exercises, or he may take those under page 
84, 85, and 87. But, if his practice on the Theorem alone, 
has already been sufficient to give him a knowledge of 
the technical language used in the process, and to enable 
him to apply it with some degree of ease, he should take 
the following exercises in which the words are set by 
means of appropriate theorem letters to the very exercises 
through which he has just passed. He will enter upon these 
exercises with the great advantage of being able to grad- 
uate the theorem representative of each word in every 
section. In this process, however, the student should be 
required to locate each word upon its theorem representa- 
tive, with his pointer, before he attempts its graduation. 
And lest an immediate leaving of the theorem representa- 
tive which he can graduate, for the represented word 
which he can not graduate, should confuse him, and im- 
pede his progress in referring the word to its different 
families, he should even after locating the word, graduate 
it by graduating its theorem representative — or in other 
words, he should graduate the word through its represen- 
tative. 



Prepared Exercises in Syncratic Graduation. 

A Bb D E F 

1. Behind, that, very fine tree, or 

A Bb C Dd F 

1. Behind, that, very fine tree. 

ABODE F 

2. In very much too cold weather. 

A Bb C Dd F 

3. In that, very new house. 

A Bb Cc Dd F 
4.1n, that, very, new house. 

A B Cc E F 

5. Of coal black, broad cloath. 

A C Dd E F 

6. To that man's new hat. 

A B Cc D E F 

6. Into that man's quite new hat. 

ABC D E P 

7. With this boy's mother's father's son. 

A B Cc Dd E F 

8. With very old, pure, Holland Gin. 

A CDC DDEF 

9. With fiery red, East India, fine silk hats. 

A B Cc D E F 

10. For Mr. Cook's very hard apples. 

ABb F B C D E 

11. On a wall sixteen hands too high. 

A Bb B C D E F 

12. On, a, sixteen hands too high wall. 

Cc D F I W X A F I 

[A certain man planted a vineyard ;] (and , set 

WX AF AF IWXADdE 

a hedge) (about it ;) (and , digged a place) (for the wine 

F A F IWX A F IXYA 

vat ;) (and , built a tower ;) (and , let it out) (to 

E F AFH ADdEF 

husband men ;) (and , went) (into a far country.) 

Directions, — Put each verbal section in a sentence, upon 
its own theorem section, and each word in a section upon 
its own theorem word in the theorem section. 

P 



176 

When the section is implenary be guided iii your pro* 
cess by the following specimen — " He" Understood, a cor- 
mos. A cormos is a foundation word in the frame- work 
of a section. 

N. B. Give all the rules as you proceed/ 

FFHK AFH A F AFF 

[He (that is not) (with me) is] (against me;) (and he 1 (that 

I X Y A F I X 

gathereth , not) (with me) scattereth , .) 

ECcD FHMSAEFF 

[ When (the unclean spirit has gone out) (of a man) he 

H AEFFIXAF 

walketK] (through dry places) (he seeking rest ;) (and (he 

T XFHFHM AEF 

finding none) he saith) (I will return) (unto my house) 

E F H K 

(whence I came out.) 

AYF H FIXYy AF 

[And When (he cometh) hejindeth it swept ;] (and , 

I X Yy 

i , garnished.) 

A AF A F IK X A F 

[" And (if I (by Beelzebub) cast out devils) (by whom) 

HDFNXY A HFN 

do your sons cast them out?] [Therefore shall they be 

W X 

your judges."] 

AFHACR A F A F 
[And he began 'to speak , > (unto them) (by parables.) 

Note. — In this sentence there is a truncus, a semisection, and an in- 
seclados. And of course the first word in each is marked A. This 
manner of designation has been explained already. But the fact that 
the semisection in the preceding" sentence, constitutes a portion of the 
truncus, may be referred to without disadvantage. Every semisection 
must constitute a part of the truncus^ a seclados, or an inseclados ; and 
it is distinguished by half parentheses ; as, ( ^ , 

F I ' Tt U Uu X A C a R 

[It requires a very learned man 'to teach this schools] 

ABbCD FHJLMOA 

[And a very learned man can very easily be found] (in 

Bb C Dd F F G H J 

this singularly literary city,) (who certainly will quite 



171 

L M A Bb P 

readily engage) (in the business.} 

A F I X Y A E F 

[" And I punished them oft] (in every synagogue.") 

F I W X 

[" Moses smote the rock."] 

FHJj AEF AB A EFAE 

[It is easier] (for a camel 'to gcft) (through the eye) (of a 

F A F H A Dd E F A B A 

needle) ^than , , ) (for a rich man (to enters (into 
E F A F 

the kingdom) (of Heaven.) 

F H A E F A F I X 

[I went] (for my book) (for I wanted it.) 

P H A C Q, R. AFH N X A E 

[I went 'to get my booto] (for I had wanted it) (for a 

F A F 

number) (of days.) 

DFHMOSAD F 

[The books have been sent for] (for that gentleman 

I X A C D E F 

wishes them) (for his brother's sister's son,) 



OBSERVATIONS. 

Hitherto I have treated of the syntax of words through 
the medium of the Theorem, their constructive representa- 
tive. Hence it has been hardly possible for me to use 
such terms, and forms in definitions and rules, as are per* 
fectly suited to the purpose of those who have occasion to 
refer to definitions and rules in their colloquial intercourse 
with each other, upon this science. Nor are the words, 
and forms which i have used, altogether adapted to the 
purpose of the student engaged in memorizing his lessons 
in Syntax: for one of the objects of conning defi nitions and 
rules, is to be able to give the principles of the science 
in appropriate words, and suitable forms. It is my inten* 
tion now, therefore, to give a set of concise definitions, and 
rules, suited to any occasion on which the student, and 
the man of science may have to use them. 

But, before I attempt this, it may be well to define the 
following words: articulation, grammar, orthoepy, mono- 
gram, monoalpha.) dialpha, trialpha, polyalpha, bivowel, 
trirowel, monothpng, diphthong, triphthong, polythong, &c f 



172 

1. " Articulation" is from " articulate" — and "articu- 
late" is from " articulo" which is from " articulus," a 
joint. 

Note. — The human voice is divided by the organs of speech into 
short pieces, much as a pole or stick may be sawed into short pieces 
with a saw, or cut into short pieces with some edge tool. Was it not 
for this process, the human voice must remain undivided — it would be 
continuous — without interruption from beginning to end. Now, these 
divisions in the voice break the voice which would be entire without 
them, into parts much as articles, or joints break the entire finger, or any 
other animal limb into short pieces — hence the process of making the 
vocal divisions, is called articulation — hence too the different pieces 
of the divided voice, are denominated articulate sounds. That is, 
jointed sounds. And, because the forming of these divisions is the 
principal operation in constructing vocal words, the word, articula- 
tion has come to be the name of the whole process of forming words 
out of sound. 

2. " Grammar" is from the Greek word, gramma which 
means a letter. Hence the word grammar, as used in this 
work, is not only restricted in its application, to the for- 
mation of mere words, but to the formation of those 
which are constructed from letters only. 

Note.-— The word, grammar, is substituted for the word, orthogra- 
phy ; a word which is just as applicable to the formation of entire 
sentences, entire paragraphs, entire chapters, and to the formation of 
entire hooks as to the formation of single words. 

This word is derived from orthos, right, and grapho, to write. 
Hence there is no good reason why this word should not be applied 
to the just formation of entire books — for hooks are written as well as 
words ! The restriction of the word, orthography, to the formation of 
mere words; the extention of the word, grammar, the name of a mere 
letter, to all the constructive principles of language, and the nameless 
condition in which the process of forming words from sounds is left, 
must prove that little pains have been taken to place the science of 
speech upon a philosophic basis. 

The word, grammar, has been applied up to the present time, to 
all the constructive principles of language for no better reason than 
that of its being in its Greek costume, a sign of a mere elementary 
part of a printed word 1 1 The word, orthography, which is so general 
in its derivative import, that it must extend to all the constructive prin- 
ciples of speech, is brought down to the mere formation of words. 

Would it not be well for the British grammarians to take the fol- 
lowing change into serious consideration — 

English orthography is the art of using the English 
language with propriety. English orthography is divided 
into four parts, viz. Grammar, Etymology, Syntax, and 
Prosody. 



173 

1. Grammar teaches the principles of forming words 
from letters. (Gramma, a letter.) 

Had the application of the word, grammar, been confined to the 
constructive principles of language formed of letters only, the plea of 
justification might be urged with some degree of propriety ; and had 
the application of this word been confined to the formation of mere 
words from letters only, the derivative import of the word would have 
fyeen regarded to the. great advantage of English philology. In the 
American system of English syntax, the application of the word, 
grammar, is restricted to the formation of mere words — and these from 
letters only. (Gramma, a letter.) 

3. " Orthoepy" is from ortlios, right, and epos, a word« 
and means, though more from custom than from deriva* 
Hon, the just pronunciation of words. 

Note. — " Orthoepif\ from its source, means not the right pronuncL 
ation of a word, but a right word. 

4. " Monogram'* is from the Greek, monos, alone, and 
" gramma" a letter, " Monogram" means that number of 
tetters, which, in the grammatical formation of words, is 
taken alone ; as, com-pre~hend, I 9 a 9 an 9 on, in. 

Note. " Monogram 1 '' is substituted for the word, syllable. The word, 
syllable, has nothing but use to sanction ks application to any portion 
of a word, or to any principle in a language. 

For the consideration of the curious in philology, it may not be 
improper to give the etymology of this word. The word, syllable, is 
from the Greek sun, together, and lambano, to take. Hence the true 
import of the word 4 syllable, is to take together. But the obvious cha- 
racteristic of a syllable is directly opposed to this manner of taking. 
For whatever articulate sound is distinct in itself, is a syllable; as« 
a-bout. Now, if a conjunctive state of letters is the characteristic of a 
syllable, the very principle which renders w haul" a syllable, prevents 
a from becoming a syllable \ 

Hu-man-i-ty, 

Here the mind considers hu by itself, alone, not in conjunction witli 
man, i, or ty — the mind takes hu as the representative of a sound 
which is separate, distinct from every other sound in the vocal word 5 
hu-man-i-ty. The fact that this representative, ' hu, has more than one 
letter, and that these letters are taken together, does not render this 
representative a syllable. Let it be said for the sake of the illustra* 
tion, that, in one year from this time, one letter, new in its fornsation^ 
is to be substituted for the two letters h and u, in every instance where 
hit now constitutes a syllable— and will not this one character, this on* 
letter be as much a syllable as hu? What, then, is it whijeh renders this 
grammatic, this letter representative a syllable? It is the fact that & 
stands alone in the frame-work of the word hu-man-i-ty. 

Words we said, and with truth, to be divided into syjjabje& Bi# 
2F 



174 

how does the idea of a division, a separation, comport with the Greek 
word, sun ? " Sun" together, and lambano, to take. To take together. 
That is, to take together by separating 1 1 

The word, syllable, would be a very proper name for all words 
which are composed of two, or more syllables. For, although we 
always divide, separate in order to make syllables ; yet in all cases ex- 
cept in monosyllables, we combine, take together in order to form 
words. Thus the following syllables, hu, man, i, ty, when taken toge- 
ther form the word humanity. The word, syllable, seems to be a very 
appropriate name for this word. " Humanity" is a syllable, because in 
forming the word, separate, distinct, entire parts are taken together. 

The word, " ba-ker," is a syllable, because in its formation there 
are distinct, whole parts which are taken together. The word, in, 
however, can not be denominated a syllable, because there are not in 
this word, distinct, entire, whole, separate sounds. Hence it is impos- 
sible that the idea of taking together should enter into the forming of 
this word. The % is the representative of the only distinct sound in 
the word. The n does not represent any sound which can be taken 
alone, separately (i) (n.) True, the letter, n, may be uttered — not 
alone, however, but with the sound of the vowel e ; as, n. That is, en. 
Should it be said that in order to form the word, in, two letters are 
taken together, and that, therefore, the idea of taking together, actually 
enters into the process of forming this word, it is replied, first, that these 
two letters, i and n, can not form a word unless they are considered as 
the representative of articulate sound, and that as such they are not 
distinct one from the other, for there are not two distinct sounds in 
the vocal word which the printed characters are designed to repre- 
sent. It is replied, secondly, that these characters, i and n, cease to 
be letters the moment they are considered apart from, and independent 
of, articulate sound — a letter is the representative of articulate sound. 
Hence, if i and n are put together independent of the articulate sound 
in the vocal word, they do not even in this conjunctive state form any 
word whatever. The word character of i and n in their combined 
state, is derived from the articulate word which they represent. Hence, 
as soon as these, or any other letters, are deprived of their representa- 
tive relation to vocal words, they lose the letter character, and with it 
the ability to form words ! To render i and n two distinct things, 
they must be considered apart from articulate sound — and as such a 
manner of taking them deprives them of their letter character, they do 
not constitute a word even when taken together as two distinct things I 
As a letter, n is not a distinct character, for it is not the representative 
of a distinct sound in a vocal word. The point is, not what is n in, 
and of itself, but what is it as the representative of articulate sound. 
It is dependent, not distinct — it is a consonant — a letter which cannot 
be uttered without the aid of a vowel sound, or a vowel letter. The 
word, in, then, can not properly be denominated a syllable upon the 
principle that there is a taking of distinct parts together in its forma- 
tion. As the idea of a syllable is separation rather than conjunction, 



175 

would not the prefix, dis, answer the purpose of the British gram- 
marians better than sun ? Dissyllable seems quite significant of the 
disjunctive state of the following distinct parts of the word, hu-man- 
i-ty. 

Is it said that the conjunctive manner of taking, is found in the way 
in which the letters are taken, and, that as h and u are taken together 
in forming a syllable, the manner, denoted by sun, is actually found 
in the mode in which h and u are taken in the formation of the mono- 
gram, hu ? Ah ! And what parts are taken together in the syllable, 
which the solitary letter, i, constitutes ? hu-man-i-ty ! 

The monograms in italic in the following words, furnish 
instances, which can hardly be brought under the true im- 
port of the word, syllable: — 

Eb-o-ny, am-bi-gu-i-ty, cu-ri-os-i-ty, a-bom-i-na-tion, a-gain, a-lone, 
a-long, a-bove, a-bout t a-side, e-met-ic, e-nig-mat-ic-al, e-volve, e-mit, 
u-nite, w-nion, e-vade, a-vail, a-loof, flu-id-i-ty, po-ros-i-ty, ci-vil-i-ty, 
lon-gev-ity, su-i-cide, o-mit-ted &c. &c. &c. &c. 

In the above words, there are twenty six syllables which are com- 
posed of one letter each ! They are o, i, i, a, i, a, a, a, a, a, a, e, e, e, 
e, u, u, e, a, a, i, i, i, i, ?', o. 

Now, if the characteristic property of a syllable is a conjunctive 
state, how is it possible that the above single letters, individually taken, 
can constitute even one syllable ? How is it possible for the letter, /, 
to constitute a syllable in the following instance : " 1 am what /am ?" 

In a compilation on Grammar, by Goold Brown, a syllable is de- 
fined as follows : " A syllable is one, or more letters pronounced in one 
sound." 

In a compilation by Samuel Kirkham, a syllable is defined to be 
a distinct sound — 

" A syllable is a distinct sound uttered by a single impulse of the 
voice." 

In a work compiled by William Lennie, a syllable is defined to be 
a distinct part of a word — 

44 A syllable is a part of a word, or as much as can be sounded at 
once." 

In a work compiled by John Newbery, a syllable is denned to be 
a distinct sound — 

" A syllable is a complete sound uttered in one breath ; as, a, in 
a-lone." 

In Todd's Walker, a syllable is defined to be — " one articulation" 

In several other standard works of this kind, a syllable is denned 
to be " A sound pronounced by a single impulse of the voice." 

Now, from all these definitions, is it not obvious that the distinguish- 
ing idea of a syllable as existing in the mind, is that it is one sound, 
and not two, or more, that this one sound is considered alone, and not 
with another. Is it not obvious also from these definitions, that a syl- 
lable is spoken of in relation to vocal words only ? Would a group of 



176 

letters put together, without any regard to sound or voice, be denomi, 
nated a syllable ! For instance, is the following assemblages of letters 
syllables : 2gq, zict, fgl, ssss ■ 

Are these groups of letters syllables ■ Surely not — they are not syl- 
lables, because they do not represent any distinct sound which can be 
taken alone, which can stand by itself. Yet the letter, I, is a syllable ; 
the letter, a, is a syllable; the letter, o, is a syllable. And how is it 
that / is a syllable J Is 1 a syllable because it is taken together ■ (Sun 
and lambano!) 

I is a syllable because it represents a distinct sound — an articulate 
sound which can be considered by itself; an articulate sound which 
the mind can take uumc, which the mind can consider without con- 
necting it with another sound. lis a s) liable because it is a repre- 
sentative of one ichole distinct sound. But, if the idea of a sv liable is 
Ui^t which is expressed by the word, syllable, as derived trom mm 
and lambano, it is that of taking two or more distinct sounds together ! 
lt Sun. together, and lambano, to take/'* 

Let us now read the above quoted definitions of a syllable agreeably 
to the true import of the word, syllable— 

" A syllable is one, or more letters pronounced in one sound" which 
is taken together ! 

That is, this one sound must be taken together! "No! no! the 
letters must be taken together." Indeed, the sound, then, is not a 
syllable ! M Certainly it is." But if the sound can not be taken together, 
how can it be a syllable • Again, are the letters which can be "pro- 
nounced in one sound" a syllable because they are taken togtther~—ot 
because they are the representative of one distinct articulate sound ? 
These letters are denominated a syllable merely because they repre* 
sent a toad syllable. And does any vocal syllable comprise more 
than one distinct sound ? Again, that unity, and not plurality, is the 
le-ading, the specific character of a syllable, is proved from the fact that 
one letter is as much a syllable if it is the complete representative of a 
distinct sound as two, three, or more. Hence i, is as much a syllable 
as ci. And ci Ls as much a syllable as cir. Why ■ Because the i 
alone represents a sound which can be taken alone, which can stand 
without mixing with another sound. And i with c does not represent 
two sounds which can stand alone, for c does not express a sound which 
Can stand alone, which can be taken from the sound represented by i, 
and placed by itself as a distinct articulate sound. Nor does c enable 
i to represent two distinct sounds. The letter r does not denote a dis- 
tinct sound, but a mere hiss, and this kiss mixes with the full open 
vocal sound which i represents ; and qualities it, turns it into ci — i,ci. 
Can vou take away the qualifying hiss denoted by c, place it alone, 
and view it by itself ? You can not — c denotes no distinct sound— c 
at most is the representative of the mere color of another sound — ci. 

Cir. Now, as c, merely qualifies the distinct syllabic sound repre- 
sented by i ; so does r quality the distinct qualified sound, denoted by 
ci. Hence i is changed to ci, and ci to cir. But still there is but one 
distinct sound, and that one is that which i alone represent*. /, ci, 



177 

and cir are the same piece of cloth having a different shade of color in 
each exhibition. In the first, it has its natural shade ; in the second, 
it has that which c gives it; and, in the third, it has that which r pro- 
duces. 

" A syllable is one, or more letters pronounced in one sound." 

" A syllable is one letter pronounced in one sound," which letter is 
taken together ! I 

" A syllable is a distinct sound uttered by a single impulse of the 
voice," which, of course, is taken together 1 ! 

u A syllable is a distinct sound," which, of course, must be taken 
together ! ! 

Todd defines a syllable as follows : — 

" A syllable is one articulation" 

And can it be that Mr. Todd intended to define a syllable in ac- 
cordance with the general import of the word, syllable, as derived from 
sun, and lambano ? 

Syllables may be composed of sounds, and they may be composed of 
letters. 

A syllable composed of sound, is properly called a Monothong ; and 
one composed of letters, is properly denominated a Monogram. 

ll Monothong," a sound which can be taken alone ; as, 1, in-hu-man. 

"Monogram," as many letters as can be taken alone ; as, in-con- 
gru-i-ty. 

"Monos," one, and " Gramma," a letter. 

5. " Mono alpha" is from monos, one ; and alpha, a letter, 
and means a Monogram, composed of one letter; as, i in 
hu-man-i-ty. 

6. " Dialpha" is from dis, two, and alpha, a letter, and 
means a Monogram, composed of two letters; as, hu, and 
ty, in hu-m&Ti-i-ty. 

7. " Trialpha" is from treis, three, and alpha, a letter, 
and means a Monogram, composed of three letters; as, 
man, in the word, hu-man-i-ty. 

8. "Poly alpha" is from polus, many, and alpha, a letter, 
and means a Monogram, composed of four, or more let- 
ters ; as, gram, in gram-mar, — and as, strength, in 

strength. 

9. " Bivowel" is from binus, double, two, and vowel, a letter 
representing a distinct sound, and means the union or con- 
junction of two vowels in one Monogram; as, ou in sound. 

10. " Trivowel" is from tres, three, and vowel, and 
means the coalition or junction of three vowels in one 

Monogram ; as, u a i in acquaint 

11. " Monothong" is from monos one, and phthongos, a 
sound, and means one distinct sound in vocal speech. 
Hence in the vocal word hu-man-i-ty, there are four mono- 
thongs. 



178 

What a Monogram is in a printed word, a Monothong is in a vocal 
word. Hence it may be said that a Monogram is the representative of 
a Monothong; as, hu-man-i-ty. 

In this printed word there are four monograms, and each monogram 
represents its own monothong in the vocal word. 

** Monothorg" may be applied as the name of all vocal words which 
ha\e but one distinct sound, Hence the vocal word which is repre- 
sented by one monogram, may be denominated a Monothong ; as, in, 
at, but, strength. 

And the printed word which represents a Monothong may be deno- 
minated a Monogram ; as, in, at, but, strength, 

12. " Diphthong'" is from dis, two, and phthongos, a 
sound, and means a word, composed nc t of two mono- 
grams, but of two Monothongs, as is seen in the vocal 
word, un~der. 

13. " Triphthong" is from treia, three, and phthongos, a 
sound, and means a word, composed of three monothongs, 
as is seen in the vocal word, gen-er-ciL 

14. " Polythong" is from^>oto, many, and phthongos, a 
sound, and means a word which is composed of many 
monothongs, as is seen in the vocal word, in-com-pre-hen- 
&i-bil-i-ty. 

Note, Four monothongs are considered many — hence, if a word is 
composed of four monothongs, it is called a polythong, as is seen in 
the word, gen-er-al-ly, 

15. " Monogram" is from monos, one, and gramma, a 
letter, or a group of letters, and means in this, its second 
application in this system, a printed word, composed of 
one letter, or of one group of letters ; as, " / am that J 
am." 

Note. Here, each letter word is a monogram — and each vocal word 
which each monogrammic one represents, is a Monothong. 

16. " Amphogram" is from ampho, two, and "gramma," 
a letter, or an assemblage of letters, and means a word, 
composed of two monograms ; as, in-duce, a-gainst, 
o-pake. 

17. " Triegram" is from treis, three, and gramma, a let- 
ter, or a distinct assemblage of letters, and means a word 
composed cf three monograms; as, gen-er-al, eb-o-ny. 

IS. " Polygram" is from polus, many, and gramma, a 
letter, or a distinct assemblage of letters, and means a 
word, composed of many monograms ; as, gen-er-al-ly, 
in-comrpre-hen-si-bil-i-ty. 

J^ote. Four monograms are considered many. 



LANGtfAGfi. 



Language is a combination of signs, employed by meli 
for the expression of ideas. 

(See the Appeal, page 100.) 

The word, language, is derived from lingua, the Latin name of the' 
tongue — and from the importance of this organ in the formation of 
this instrument, the instrument itself is called language. 

Printing and writing, properly speaking, are the notes of language* 
and bear the same vicarious relation to this instrument, which the 
notes in music bear to the real music. But as printing, and writing 
communicate our ideas, they in function identify themselves with the 
lingua instrument — therefore these representatives have come to be 
called by the name of the thing represented. Hence we have the 
phrases, " written language, printed language, and spoken language" 
But language in the true, confined sense, is that instrument which is 
formed out of voice by a marvellous play of wonderful organ 3 upon 
sounds which are first produced by the action of the trachea upon 
the air that proceeds from the lungs, 

SYNTAX 

Syntax is a science consisting of the constructive prin- 
ciples of language. 

"Syntax." The elements of this word are sun, snid-tasso — Greek. 
Sun signifies together ; and tasso means to put properly. The word, 
syntax, then, means to put things together in a proper manner. 

"Suntasso'" from which syntax has been derived, was used among 
I the Greeks to denote the idea of the proper arrangement of soldiers 
for martial action, for military exploit. Hence this word (syntax) ha« 
.come to be the name of all the constructive evolutions which form 
i sounds into monothongs, letters into monograms, monothongs and 
monograms into words, words into sections, sections into sentences, 
sentences into paragraphs, paragraphs into chapters, and chapters into 
a book. 

Syntax, however, does not include the whole science of 
language. But it does embrace every principle which 
can be denominated constructive. 

As I have introduced the word, constructive, it may not 
be amiss to say a few words upon its import in this science. 



180 

The Hebrews denominated any variation in a word, the 
word's constructed^ or constructive state. Ddbar is He- 
brew, and means word. " Ddbar" is put into a constructed 
state by being changed to debar. This word in this con- 
structed state means word of. 

Hence Debar Elohim is in significant valuation, just equal to the 
phrase, God's word, or, word of God. 

The word, constructive, in its full extent of import as used in En- 
giish Syntax, means not only properly shaping the parts, and properly 
placing them together, but it also means all that significant character 
which words acquire principally if not solely from their conjected, 
their syntaxed state. (See note on consignification, page 31.) 

Syntax is universal, and particular. 

1. Universal Syntax embraces the constructive principles of all lan- 
guages. 

2. Particular Syntax embraces the constructive philosophy of a 
particular language only ; as that of the Greek, Latin, or English. 

ENGLISH SYNTAX. 

English Syntax is a science consisting of the mere con- 
structive principles of the English Language. 

The wrongly using of one word for another, produces an error — 
but this is an error in rhetoric. For instance — 

" I have no hesitation in expressing the surprise which I received?' 

The construction, or in other words, the mechanism of the sentence, 
is correct — but the rhetoric of it is bad — for we cannot properly say that 
we receive surprise. This rhetorical mistake may be rectified by sub- 
stituting felt for received. 

" 1 have no hesitation in expressing the surprise which I felt, 11 &e. 

These errors do not fall within the science of Syntax. 

The constructive principles of a language are usually 
divided into four parts. The four parts into which the 
entire science is divided are Poieology, Syncratology, Syn- 
tithology, and Consignijication. 

PART I. — POIEOLOGY. 

1. Poieology is that part of Syntax, which teaches the 
proper formation of words from sounds, and letters. 
(See G. page 27.) 

SUBDIVISION. 

Poieology is divided into two parts ; namely, articulation, 

and GRAMMAR. 

1. Articulation is that part of Poielogy, which teaches 

the principles of forming words from sounds. 

2. grammar is that part of Poieology, which teaches the 

principles of forming words from letters. 



181 



REMARKS. 



At the close of page 180, Poieology Is presented in two 
parts. One of the two is called articulation; the other 
grammar. But, as these words have become fixed in their 
application, and as they are not sufficiently expressive of 
the character of the two parts of poieology, it may be bet- 
ter to form tw r o words against which no objection can be 
urged. Before the presentation of these words, however, 
it may be proper to make a few observations upon the 
nature of articulation itself. And, perhaps, nothing can 
serve as a better introduction to these than simply to say 
that the word, articulation, is derived from arti cuius, a 
joint. .The very name applied to the process, sets out 
with the idea that the sounds in speech, like the limbs of 
animals, are furnished with parts. But, as there are no 
joints to sounds, articulation is certainly a misnomer. 
Articulation does not divide a sound into parts as joints 
divide a finger into parts. Nor does articulation connect 
sounds as joints connect the parts of a finger. Articula- 
tion is a modification of sounds, a changing of their forms, 
so to speak, and not a division of one sound into two, or 
more sounds. The idea that articulation divides a sound 
into parts is certainly a mistaken notion which is founded 
in an erroneous view of the nature of the process. Hence 
an attempt to illustrate the operation by comparing it to 
the action of joints in dividing a limb of an animal into 
parts, is calculated to produce darkness instead of light. 

The numerous applications which this word has re- 
ceived from the circumstance of its having been first used 
to denote* the breaking of a continuous sound asunder as 
the joints are supposed to break the limbs of an animal, 
are not singular results. The word is now used to denote 
the act of speaking ; as, he articulated, a number of sen- 
tences. And one is said to have a good articulation, a dis- 
tinct articulation. That the word should have received 
these secondary applications is not strange. These spring 
quite naturally from the first. But the problem whose 
solution is so full of difficulties, is how the human mind 
came to apply this word to sounds in the first place. In 
the remainder of these few observations an attempt will 
be made to show that what is denominated articulation 
by the old grammarians, is much more like the steps of a 
man's foot than like the joints of his body ! Hence in these 
remarks, this process will be denominated gradphonation. 

Gradphonation is compounded of gradus, a step, a 
round in a ladder, and phone, a voice, a sound, and means 
the process or act of forming: sounds as distinct from one 



182 

another as the steps in walking, or the rounds in a ladder. 
The sounds which constitute the same word are so dis- 
tinct, so separate one from another that the process may- 
well be denominated stepping. By uttering the different 
sounds, represented by the following grammatic word, 
this observation is both illustrated, and sustained — 

In-com-pre-hen-si-bil-i-ty. 

What in these remarks is denominated gradphonaticn, 
is usually styled articulation. Articulation is made from 
articulus, a joint. This word has been introduced into 
the old system of grammar upon a supposed analogy 
between that state which is produced by the joints of a 
limb, and that condition which is produced by uttering a 
word. The condition produced by the joints must be that 
of separation or connection. It is contended that joints 
separate an animal limb into distinct parts. Be it so. But 
the process of articulation does not divide the sounds of a 
word, for they are never united in any stage of their for- 
mation. The sounds which compose the word, 

In-com-pre-hen-si-bil-i-ty, 

are never continuous, uninterrupted, solid, like a bar of 
iron. Each sound is formed as distinct as the apples of 
the same tree grow. The sounds of words are formed as 
distinct one from another as are hats, shoes, or chairs. 
But, after all, the joints do not separate the parts of the 
limb — they connect them. Hence to make out the ana- 
logy, it should be shown that it is the province of 
articulation to connect the different sounds of a word ! 
Finally, should it be contended that articulation con- 
nects, what will become of a word which has but one 
solitary voice 1 For instance, the vocal word, repre- 
sented by the letter / / And should it be maintained 
that articulation separates, what then becomes of I? The 
vocal word which / represents, is neither divided, nor con- 
nected ! What ! Is it contended that there is a division in 
this indivisible sound, resembling those made by joints in 
a limb of an animal ] Is there any connection in or about 
- this monothong, I, analogous to the connection produced 
by a joint between any two parts of a finger, or any other 
animal limb] 

Again, if articulation either divides, or connects sounds, 
what becomes of all words of but one syllable— these are 
all monothongs — they, therefore, can have nothing resem- 
bling division, nor any thing analogous to connection. 

in, on, up, to, but, here, strength, there, where, is, ivrite 9 
from, long, short, &c. &c. &c 



183 

Articulation is more like the steps taken by an animal 
than like the joints in his body. The vocal word, which 
the grammatic word,/, represents is one step in utterance. 
And each vocal word which each of the preceding gram- 
matic ones, represents, is one gradus, one step in phona- 
tion ; and each step constitutes an entire word. Hence 
it is clear that the very figure which constitutes the ground 
on which this misnomer is applied to express the state of 
sounds in speech, is fraught with delusion. 

In-com-pre-hen-si bil-i-ly. 

These sounds are as distinct as are the rounds of a lad- 
der — they are as separate as are the different steps which 
are taken in walking. The very process of uttering the 
sounds in speech, is so much like that of stepping that on 
this account alone, the idea of stepping may b@ incorpo- 
rated with the word which denotes the act of forming 
words from sounds. The word is slept off. That is, the 
sounds are not made all in one, but in steps — each sound 
is as distinct, as separate, and as much a thing of itself, 
as is each step which is taken in walking — 

In-com-pre-hen - si- bil-i- iy. 

The technical name of the process, erroneously styled 
articulation, .is per-seph-o-na-tion. Per-seph-o-na-tion is 

i compounded of per, by, se, itself, phone, a voice, or sound, 
and the affix, Hon,, which implies action. Per-seph-o-na- 
tion, then, means the act or process of forming each sound 

; in a word by itself, as illustrated in the vocal word repre- 
sented by the following alphapos — In-com-pre-hen-si-bil- 

| i-ty. 

JWonphonation. 

JWonphonation, monphonate, is compounded of the fol- 
; lowing elements mono, alone, by ilself, fihone, a sound, 
a voice, and ate, and tion. 

JMonphunation signifies the act or process of forming 
j each sound in a word by itself, alone; as is illustrated in 
I the vocal word, con-tem-pla~tion. 

This word is synonymous with fiersefihonation. It may 

i have the corrnos forms, monphony, a sound formed alone, 

monfi/ionies, sounds, each of which is formed alone, and 

monphonation, the act of forming each sound in a word 

alone. 



184 

2. Grammar* 

" Grammar''' is introduced under page 172, to which 
the reader is referred. I thought that as this word is de- 
rived from gramma, a letter, it might be used with some 
degree of propriety to denote the process of forming 
words from letters, and I still think so. But as I believe 
" alphaology" {alpha, a letter, and logos, a word) is 
much more expressive and comprehensive, 1 shall offer it 
as a substitute for grammar. 

EXPLANATION OF TERMS. 

HYPERPHONY, KUPOPHONY, THUROPHONY, &C. 

1. Hy-per-pho-ny. 

Hyperphony is compounded of two Greek words ; 
namely, huper, above, and phone, a voice, a sound. 

Whatever is in the conditicn denoted by huper, must 
be free, unstijied, unchecked — hence huper may, upon the 
principle of metonymy, be made to mean free, unstijied, 
unrestrained, unchecked. The word, hyper, then, as de- 
rived from huper, is, in this work, synonymous with free, 
and unstijied. 

" Phony" is made from the Greek, phone, a voice, a 
sound. The word, hyperphony, then signifies a free, un- 
stijied voice, or sound. 

1. Hyper, - - free, unstijied. 

2. Phony, - - a voice, a sound. 

2. Hu-poph-o-ny. 

Hupophony is Greek, and is derived trom hupo, under,, 
and phone, a voice, a sound. 

Note. — The u is retained to render the distinction between hyper- 
pliony, and hupophony, more striking in utterance. 

Whatever is in the condition denoted by hupo, must 
have some restraint, check, encumbrance, stifling, or de- 
ficiency — hence hupo may, upon the principle of meto- 
nymy, be made to signify restraint, check, deficiency, or 
stifled state. Hence the word, hupophony, means a stifled 
voice, or sound. 

Hupo, under, (some restraint,) and phone, a voice. That 
is, not a voice which flows from the lungs through the 
glottis and mouth, without being stifled by the action of 
the tongue, teeth, lips, or some other hupophonating organ, 
but one which is under the restraint, under the stifling ac- 
tion of some one or more of the perphonating organs. 

1 . Hupo, - - stifled, restrained, modified. 

2. Phony, a voice, a sound* 



185 

3. Thu-roph-o-ny. 

Thu-roph-o-ny is of Greek elements— psi-thu-ros, a mere 
whisper, and phone, a voice or sound, and means a ivhis- 
pered voice or sound, or rather, a sound which can not be 
uttered in a louder tone than a mere whisper. 

4. Phonate. 

Phonate is derived from phone, a voice, a sound, and 
from the common active suffix, ate, and means, to form 
make voices or sounds. 

5. Phonation. 

Phonation is the act or process of forming voices or 
sounds. 

6. Hyper phonate. 

To hyperphonate is to form free, flowing, unstifled 
voices, or sounds. 

7. Hypophonate. 

To hypophonate is to form stifled voices, or sounds. 

8. Thu-roph'O-nate. 

To thurophonate is to form those voices or sounds 
which can be uttered, only in whispers. 

9. Symphonation. 

Symphonation is made from the Greek sun, together, 
and phone, a voice, and from the common active suffix, 
Hon, and means the process of putting voices together in 
the formation of words. 

10. Ze-oph-onation. 

Ze-oph-o-na-tion is from the same elements of which 
symphonation is compounded, except the prefix, zeo — and 
this is from the Greek, xeo, to polish, to render elegant, 
tasteful, polite. 

As x, if retained, would be pronounced like z ; it may 
perhaps be better to put z into its place at once. Ze- 
ophonate, and ze-ophonation respect the uttering of words 
according to polite usage. 

11. Po-ie-ol-o-gy. 

Poieology is compounded of two Greek words; namely, 
poieo, to make, and logos, a word, and means the princi- 
ples or process of word-mateng in general. 

Q2 



eek « ords; nan 
m the princip 

. a letter, 
of forming 

i S 

>> ■ is comp of the following 

i n otce, oi Bound, end the 
Lira . i"\ metns the uttering of one monothong 

. a greetei stress upon i/.- as is 
. m the word| <■-•. 



\ 

. I 

I 

ife — m<it in the above 

, : — ill the others art) subs, 

is the 

But, W i.en tins 

•.■ 

surely cvnvict hi 

is - el*- 

. . a sound) ami the 
i monothong 

i h m< nogretn in an ^.'/iha/tos, its r/^r 
..hoc, in phonettng the Qlfihopos, ax 

should be 

iitfAopfoiNrtion" is intended as a 
vm^Hct<llio«. ,, A iikid'n ;>n>m/Heicifu>H is 

.: his mthopkonatwn can not be 
MM n>/if, /HI 



of a just §op 
. . .. 

• 
loot with 
ology, i 
orthoff, 

vn of a word, but a 
.' 
eormo* 2 :y be used cf/rmotly 

I 

' ith a just 
zeopho ound*, and the just super - 

.onothong. z 
and the joa* of sound. J: . 

/oophorites weD. That is, be given rounds, ar. 

just super- ,f sound. 

He speak ,urvU, and 

the just *up' * nds. 

a br, be speaks, and 

.ncludes the <arf, aitf 
to orthfrpfv/ri'. 1 D -ay, then, that 

tkophanatts well, or, he gr 

Every thing which relates U lality 

of the sound, is expressed in the first part of the word, and is dea 
I - 

. each monotbong its 
r t ;\.* _..-:. 

said with propriety that fa he is 

ophonation of any word. 
Is in his attempt at the ortbopbonation of a word, it may 
be said, he has not ortfiojJtf/naU'i — rifaps*- 

17. G \onoiion. 

Gramph m Mm is coi 
rrgssjssjfl a letl rf the 

lisfa active affix, /r tphtmaU 

to pkonatt a fftfci alize a I 

i /e//er*. 

1. ] 

2. ] ate an alfihafi r ^ is tc 
or sounds which the alfiht 



188 

a pupil may be required to gramphonafe t, e, o, s, t % or 
any other letter. He may also be required to gram- 
phonate the first, second, third, or any other monogram in 
an alfihefios. As, for instance — John, gramphonate the 
second monogram in vir-tue. Stephen, gramphonate the 
first monogram in gnomon. James, gramphonate the 
word, cer-ti-o-ra-ri. 

In this exercise the monograms may be designated by 
means of the technicals which relate to the number of let- 
ters in each — monoalpha, dialpha, trialpha, poly alpha. 

John, gramphonate the first dialpha in the word, in- 
com-pre-hen-si'bil-i-ty. 

Gramphonate the second dialpha. 

Gramphonate the first trialjiha. 

Gramphonate the monoalpha in this word. 

Now, John, gramphonate the entire word. 

John, orthophonate the last dialpha in the word. 

John, which is the ^zz/z^r- monogram 1 

John, what is the zeofihony of this word ? 

That is, what are the right sounds, and what are the just 
superelevations? 

What is the ze-oph-o-y of cer-ti-o-ra-ri? 

18. Phongrammalion. 
Phongr animation is derived from the elements, — 
phone, a voice, or sound, gramma, a letter, and the affix, 
tion, and means, when literally taken, to letter sounds, 
or to turn sounds into letters — to grammate phonies. To 
follow a speaker, and to put his vocal discourse into let- 
ters is to phongrammate. And he who does it may be 
styled a phon-gram-w?af-ist. This word, however, is here 
introduced merely because it is the counter part of gram- 
phonate. 

19. Per-seph opiate. 
Per-seph-o-na-tion* 

Persephonation is compounded of per, by, se, itself, 
phone, a voice, or sound, and the affix, tion, which implies 
action, and means the act or process of forming each 
sound in a word, by itself; as, is seen in the word — in-com- 
pre-hen-si-bil-i-ly, in-to, in, I, to, in. 

The vocal word represented by any moncgram, is ut- 
tered by itself; as, to, in, I. 



139 

Ideology, fyc. 

1. Ideology is constructed from idea, and logos, doc- 
trine, and means the doctrine of ideas. 

2. Id-sig-nol-o-gy is constructed from idea, sign, and 
logos, and means the doctrine of the relation between the 
idea and its sign. 

3. Idsignatc is from idea, and signify, and means the 
expressing of ideas by any sign whatever. 

4. Id-ol-o-gize is from idea, and logos ) a word, and 
means the act of expressing ideas in words. 

5. Id-or-ate, id-or-a~lion, is from zafea, and oro, to speak, 
and means the act of expressing ideas in vocal words. 

6. ld-grafih-o-nate, id-graf\h-o-na-tion, is constructed 
from idea 1 and grafiho to write, and means the act of ex- 
pressing ideas by grammatic words. 

Remark. 

The introduction of the word, fihren»od, is not in- 
tended to displace its senior, language. The object in 
the formation of fihren-od, is to furnish a name that is 
more significant of the connection which the great mental 
instrument has with the mind, and which is more ex- 
pressive of the nature of its province in the communica- 
tion of ideas, than is the old word which is derived from 
the tongue. 

Phrenod is constructed from the Greek, fihren, the 
mind, and odos, a way, passage, a medium, a means, and 
signifies the great highway over which mind travels to 
mind — the great medium through which mind is commu- 
nicated to mind — the diversified means by which ideas are 
transmitted by mind to mind. 

There is a great variety of jihrenods — two, however, are 
all which need be mentioned in this work. They are fiho- 
nod and al/ihod. (Phone, a voice, a souud, and alpha, a 
letter.; 

From the materials of which language is constructed, 
it is naturally divided into two kinds ; namely, vocal Ian- 
guage, and letter language. Whether these two instru- 
ments for the communication of thought, are sufficiently 
distinct to entitle each to a distinct name, is not a point 
which the author intends to discuss in this work. Expe- 
rience has abundantly shown that it becomes important to 



190 

make a marked distinction between them in leaching, ?md 

in speaking. And it is somewhat singular that all who 
have aided in forming, and improving the English phren- 

od, have left lis to make litis distinction by the uses 
of fihrases — such as vocal language, verbal language, 
the language of sounds, sfioken language, printed speech, 
letter language, &C. That this important distinction may 
no longer depend upon /ihrases, the author of this work 
has constructed the following words which, be trusts, con- 
venience alone, will induce his country to adopt : — 

Pho-nod, and Al-phod. 

1. Pko-nod is constructed from /ihonr, i\ voice, and 
odos, a medium, and means the vocal fihrenod—ox vocal 
medium of communicating ideas. 

2. Jllphod is constructed from al/iha, a letter, and from 
odos, a medium, and means the letter phreuod — or the 
mental communicative medium which is composed of let- 
ters. The three words, then, are — 

1. P/nrn-od, 2. I'ho-nod, and 3. Al-phod. 

There are three other words which spring from these 
that are employed to denote the respective sciences of 
these phrenoda — Phroi-o-di/, Phc-uo-dij, and M-pho-dij. 

1. English fibre nod if is the ait of using the English 
phre.nod with propriety. 

2. English fihonody is the art of sficaking the English 
fiho-nod with propriety. 

3. English alfihody is the art of writing the English 
al/ihod with propriety. 

It is to be hoped that the time will come when the En- 
glish al/ihod will be constructed more in conformity with 
the English fihonod* 

A fihonod is natural — an al/ihod is artificial. A fihonod 
is evanescent — an al/ihod is durable. A fihonod is a me- 
dium through which we hear ideas — an al/ihod is a me- 
dium through which we sec them. The fihonod extends 
no farther than the instruments employed in its formation, 
can shake the dense air. But the al/ihod is the great his- 
torscofic* through which a present generation may view 
all the past. 

4. Pho-nc'/ios is constructed from fihone, a voice, and 

jta£orta, history, aiul skopeo t to view. 



191 

efios, a word, and means a word constructed from voice or 
sound. 

5. Al-/i/ic~/ios is constructed from al/iha, a letter, and 
efios, a word, and means a word constructed from letters ; 
as, in-com-Jirc-hcn-si-bil-i-ty. PI. fi/io-ne/ioi, al-/i/u-/ioi. 
Phren-o-dy, Pa-nol-o-gy. 

Pa-nol-o-gy is constructed from pan, all, entire, and 
logos, doctrine, and speech, or language — hence doctrine 
of language, 

Phrenody, or Panology is the entire science of language, 

Panology is divided into three parts — 

1. Lo-de-ol-o gy. 

2. Sig-nol-o-gy. 

3. Syd-i-ol~o~gy. 

1. Lodeology is constructed from logos, a word, and 
de, from, (meaning constructed from,/ and signifies that 
part of panology, which teaches the principles of con- 
structing one word from another word ; as, verb from ver- 
btim, zo-ot-o-my from zoos, and tcm-no. 

Sig-nol-o~gy is constructed from signification, and from 
logos, as meaning doctrine, and as meaning a word, and, 
when literally taken, means the signification doctrine of 
words. 

Sig*noUo-gy, then, is that part of Panology, which 
teaches the principles of the signification of words, either 
individually, or collectively taken. 

Syd'i'Ol-v-gy is constructed from sun, together, cli, se- 
parate, and logos, doctrine, speech, discourse, and signi- 
fies the constructive^ principles upon which the separate 
parts of language, or discourse, are put together. 

Syd-i-ol ogy, then, tfl that part of Panology, which 
teaches the constructive principles upon which the separate 
parts of any whole thing in speech, are framed together — 
as, letters in the formation of monograms ; as, con, Hon, 
fila, tern. And as monograms in the formation of words ; 
as, con-tcm-pla~tion. And as w r ords in the formation of 
sections ; as, with great assiduity. And as sections in 
the formation of sentences ; as, [/Tie studies his lessons'] 
(icilli great assiduity.) And so on. 

Division of Signology. 

Sig-nol-o-gy is divided into two parts — 

1. E/i-y-sig-nol-o-gy, and 

2. Scsig-nclogy. 



192 

Epy is formed from efios, a word. 

1. Epy-signology is that part o{ signology, which treats 
upon the significations of mere words ; as, gcot/, virtue, 
eternal, everlasting , endless, &c. 

Se is a contraction of sectional — hence se-sig-nol-o-gy 
is sectional signology. 

2. Se-sig-nol-o-gy is that part of signology which 
teaches the signification of sections. 

Division of Epy signology. 

Efiysignology is divided into four parts — 

1. Di sig-nol-o-gy. 

2. Con-sig-nol-o-gy. 

3. Hem-fihu-sig-nol-o-gy. 
4 Im-fiu-sig-nol-o-gy* 

Di, separate, asunder ; Con, together, in connection ; 
Hemfihu is from the Greek, hem-phu-los which means in- 
bred, natural, constitutional ; " Im/iu" is a contraction of 
impute, and means reckoning to one which does not belong 
to him, or reckoning to a word that import which does not 
belong to it. 

Di-signol-o-gy, Con-sig-nol-o gy, Hem-fihu-sig-nol>o- 
gy, Im-jiu-sig-nol-o-gy . 

1. Di- signology is that part of Epysignology, which 
treats on the significations of words separately taken ; as, 

for, in, land, hat, meteorology, astrology, 

2. Consignology is that part of Epysignology, which 
treats on the significations which are produced by placing 
words together ; as, my hat. 

In di-signology, the import of the word, hat, includes all 
hats ; as, hat. 

Now, is there any hat to which this word's signification 
does not extend ? But when the signification of hat is 
brought in contact with another word, it is more or less 
modified according to the signification with which it is 
connected. 

1. My hat. - Much restrained. 

2. Black hats. Not so much. 

3. Mens 4 * hats. Not so much as is the second. 

4. Ten mens' hats. Much more than in the third. 

What is the Di~sig-no-log-ic-al import of for? 
Various indeed — cause, favour, continuing, &c, &c. 



203 

What is the consignological import of for in the clados 
in the following sentence — [" They cried out] (for an- 
guish 1) 

For in this instance of consignology, means cause. 

3. Hemphusignology is that part of Epysignology, 
which respects the indigenous, natal, constitutional signi- 
fication of words ; as, Will you take a chair, sir 1 

Here the word, chair, is applied under its own native 
meaning. 

4, Impusignology is that part of Epysignology, which 
respects the application of words under imfiuted significa- 
tions ; as, " He addressed the chair an hour." 

Here the import of the word, president, is imputed to the 
word, chair, which may be seen in the following : 
He addressed the president of the meeting an hour. 

1. The fields do laugh, and sing." 

2. The boys do laugh, and sing." 

In the first, laugh, and sing, are used under an inputed 
signification. The signification of the phrase, afifiear 
pleasant, look delightful, is imputed to them. In the 
second, these words are used under their own native 
import. 

1. " The name of my father is James." 

2. Our fathers trusted in thee. Psalm 22-4. Here 
the signification of the word, ancestors, is imputed to the 
word, fathers. 

Division of Impusignology. 
Impusignology is divided into five parts — 
1. Ei-con-o-dy, 
2i Me-nyt-o-dy, 

3. Po-sot-o~dy, 

4. I-ron-o-dy, and 

5. Ze-roS'O-dy. 

1. Ei-con-o-dy is constructed from ei-kon, an image, an 
effigy, a picture, a likeness, a resemblance, and from odos, 
a way, a medium, and means the principles of that way 
or medium of communicating ideas, which introduces one 
thing as the image, effigy, picture, or likeness of another; 
as, " I am the good shepherd, and know my sheep," " The 
earth smiles with plenty," " The good shall flourish like 
the rose." 

R 



204 

Note. Any form of expression which falls within the science or 
principles of Ei-con-o-dy, is called an Ei-con-o-dos, and the word which 
introduces the image or likeness, is denominated an Ei-con-e-pos. Thus 
— " / am the good shepherd," is an Ei-con-o-dos — and the word, 
tficpherd, is an Ei-con-e-pos. 

2.Me-nyt-o-dy. 

JWe-nyt-o-dy is constructed from menutcs, an index, a 
pointer, and from odos, a way, a medium, and means the 
principles of that way or medium of communicating ideas, 
which mentions one thing merely as an index to another 
thing, or which introduces a thing of which the speaker 
does not wish to speak, merely as an index to the thing of 
which he does wish to speak ; as, He addressed the chair 
an hour, The kettle boils, " They have Moses, and the pro- 
phets." 

Note. In the first, the chair is mentioned merely as an index to 
him who occupied it. 

The kettle bears an index relation to its contents — 
hence the kettle is mentioned merely to point out that 
which boils. 

Moses and the prophets are mentioned as an index to 
thir works. 

" The kettle boils" is called a me~nyl-o-dos ; and the 
word, kettle, is styled a me-nyt-e~pos. 

?. JPo'Sot-o-dy. 

Posot-O'dy is constructed from fios-o-tes, quantity, pro- 
portion, and odos, a way, a medium, and means the prin- 
ciples of that way or medium of communicating ideas, 
which introduces one quantity for another, ; as, 1 am not 
worthy that thou shouldst come under my roof, " Till thou 
return to the ground." 

Note. In the first, a part is employed to denote the whole, for, by 
the roof is meant the entire house. 

In the second, the whole man is embraced for his body. The putting 
of one quantity for another quantity, then, is a way, a medium for 
communicating ideas — and po-sot-o dy is the name of this way or 
means, or rather, po-sot-o-dy is the name of the principles of this way 
or means of communicating ideas. 

" Under my roof," is a po-soi-o-do$ — and " roof" is a 
fio~sot-e-f}08. (Posotes, quantity, and cfios, a word, — a 
fio-sot-e-fios is a word whose imputed meaning respects 
quantity J 



205 
4. I-ron-o-dy. 

I-ron-O'dij is constructed from the English word, irony, 
contrary, and, the Greeks ados, a way. a medium, and 
means the principles of that way or medium of communi- 
cating ideas, which employs a word to denote the idea 
which is the very opposite to that which it naturally ex- 
presses ; as, He has taken this rose from his little sister — 
he is good to her indeed, I asked him for a cup of cold 
water to quench my parching thirst, which he was so kind 
as to refuse me, Milo was a small eater — an ox was a 
good meal, They are fools; but you are wise. We are 
weak; but ye are strong V i. Cor. iv. 10. 

Note. " Milo ivas a small eater" is called an ironodos ; and small is 
styled an iron-e-pos. 

5. Ze ros-ody, 

Ze-ros-o-dy is constructed from zeros, empty, void, 
vacant, and odos, a way, and means the principles of that 
way of speaking, which addresses inanimate things, things 
void of the power of hearing ; which also addresses the 
absent, and the dead whether present or absent : as, Hope, 
thou keepest the heart whole, Love, be ashamed to be 
called love, f ' Hear, O heavens, and give ear, O earth ;" 
"I have nourished and brought up children, and they have 
rebelled against me," " Be wise, therefore, O ye kings, 
and be instructed, ye judges of the earth," 

" Thou sun, with golden beams, 
And moony with paler rays, 
Ye starry lights, ye twinkling flames, 
Shine to your Maker's praise." 

Note. Thou sun, &c. is called a ze-ros-o-dos ; and the word, sun, 
is denominated a ze-ros-e-pos. 

The limited space which can be devoted to this branch of the 
great subject of English Panology, admonishes the author that he 
must defer the full presentation of these divisions. It is his inten- 
tion to present the subject of lmpusignology in a separate work. 
Candor obliges him to say here, however, that he does not intend 
to use the names, metonymy, metaphor, synechdoche — nor does he 
intend to employ any other member of this ancient family, in his con- 
templated work. On the contrary, he intends in that work to demon- 
strate that these old technicals produce a confusion in what is denomi- 
nated Rhetoric, which would be styled anarchy and misrule in any 
political government that has ever been known to man. 



206 

Division of Sectional Signology. 
Se-sig-nol-o-gy is divided into two parts — - 

1. Di-sig-se-ol-o-gy, and 

2. Con-sig-se-ol-o-gy. 

1. Disigseology is that part of se-signology which re- 
spects the signification of sections separately taken ; as, 

1. into this house, - Local import. 

2. for a new book, - Uncertain signification. 

3. by that hat, - - Uncertain signification. 

4. of Boston, - - Uncertain signification. 

2. Con-sig-se-ol-o-gy is that part of Sesig-nol-o-gy, 
which respects the signification of connected sections ; as, 

1. [He came] (into this house.) Local. 

2. [He went] (for a new book.) Cause. 

3. [How came he] by that hat ?) Possessive. 

4. [Can any good thing come out] 

(of Nazareth ?) - - Source. 

That is, can Nazareth be the source, the fiarent of any 
good ? 

Although technical terms are as necessary in cultivating 
the mind as is the axe and plough in cultivating the soil, 
yet readers in general are quite apt to condemn them as 
useless, and even cumbersome. And while distinctions 
are as important to both teacher and pupil as are fences 
to the husbandman, still there are even teachers who 
would interdict those with as much impunity as would the 
wild ox prostrate these. That he who has had no 
better opportunity of ascertaining the utility of the 
new words, and distinctions which are here presented, 
than that of reading these pages, will reject them, is 
what the author of the work is well prepared to meet. 
So far as the new words imply a battle against the old, 
the reader may be disposed to say that the author has 
plunged into a logomachy indeed. Be it so — Samson as- 
sailed the house — but he had no hatred against it. His 
enemies lay within — and he destroyed them by attacking 
their castle. If the author, then, has raised the sword 
against the terms within which the old system is concealed, 
he has done it, not to sport with them, but to exterminate 
the principles which they contain. 



207 

SECOND PRESENTATION OF POIEOLOGY. 

Poieology is that part of Syntax, which teaches the 
principles of forming words. 

Poieology is divided into two parts. — 

Phonology and Mphaology. 

1. Phonology is that part of Poieology \ which teaches the 
principles of forming words from sound. 

2. Alphaology is that part of Poieology, which teaches 
the principles of forming words from letters. 

Part i,— Phonology. 

1. Phonology is that part of Poieology, which teaches 
the principles of forming words from sounds. 

DIVISION OF PHONOLOGY. 

Phonology is divided into three parts, viz. : 

1. Persephonation, 

2. Symphonation, and 
2. Ze-ophonalion. 

1. Persephonation is that part of Phonology, which teaches 
the principles of forming the different voices of which 
phonepoi are composed. 

2. Symphonation is that part of Phonology, which teaches 
the principles of putting voices together in the formation 
of words. 

3. Zeophonation is that part of Phonology, which gives 
the tasteful, polished, polite, delicate, elegant finish to 
each sound in a phonepos, and to each phonepos in a sen- 
tence. 

DIVISION OF PERSEPHONATION. 

Persephonation is divided into three parts, 

1. Hy-per-phonatioVj 

2. Hy-poph-onation, and 

3. Tliu-rophonation. 

1. Hyperphonation is that part of Persephonation, which 
teaches the principles of forming the free unstifled voices 
in speech. 

2. Hypophonation is that part of Persephonation, which 
teaches the principles of forming the half toned, stifled 
voices in speech. 

3. Thurophonation is that part of Persephonation, which 
teaches the principles of forming those voices or sounds, 
in speech, which can be uttered, only in a whisper. 

R 2 



208 

Thus the elementary voices (about forty in all) are di- 
vided into three classes or orders — 

1. Hyperphonies, 

2. Hup aphonies, and 

3. Thu-rophonies. 

1. The hyperphonic order is composed of fourteen, or 
fifteen free flowing, unstifled voices. 

The hyperphonies are formed by a continued effusion of 
air from the lungs, which passes through the mouth with- 
out any restraint or stifling from any organs employed in 
speech. These voices are formed by the collective agency 
of the lungs, the larynx, the glottis, the cavity which is 
often called the mouth, and by the real mouth, the apper- 
ture formed by the lips. These different instruments, or 
means employed in this process are denominated, the 
hyper-phonic organs. And the voices produced by their 
use, may well be denominated Hyper. They are hyper 
voices in the original sense of hyper as well as in its de- 
rived sense as explained in a preceding page. They are 
hyper, first, because they are above the reach of restraint 
in the process of their formation; secondly, they are 
hypher, because they are above the reach of defect, defi- 
ciency, when formed : the ear which recalls them for exa- 
mination, must pronounce them fully developed — and 
thirdly, they are hyper voices, because they are the basis 
in all systems of phonics ; hence they are above all other 
sounds in constructive rank. 

2, Hypophonic Order. 

The Hypophonic Order is composed of fourteen or fif- 
teen stifled voices. The instruments or means employed 
in their formation, are the tongue, the teeth, 7iose, lips, &c. 
These instruments which seem to form a class of voices 
that modify the hyperphonies by mixing with them, are 
denominated The Hypophonic organs. The action of these 
organs upon the air from whose vibration they produce 
voice, is complex, mysterious, wonderful. The great out- 
lines of their movements, however, may be denominated 
contact, compression, interception, and separation or open- 
ing. In this way they form sounds even in the shell of the 
mouth, which, to a greater or less extent, unite with the 
hyperphonies that come rushing through the glottis from 
the lungs into the mouth where a sort of symphysis takes 
place, which produces an obvious modification in these 
pulmonary voices. 

3. Thu-ro-phomc Order. 

The thurophonic order is made up of nine or ten voices 
which can not be uttered in a higher tone than a mere 
whisper. 



209 

OBSERVATIONS. 

To phonate is to form a voice of any of the three 
classes of voices. To phonate a letter would be to 
give a letter in voice, or to form a voice which any parti- 
cular letter represents. Thus the pupil may be required 
to phonate a, e, i, o, u, s, t, &c. 

He may be required to phonate b, m, k, s, &c. But to 
utter the vocal name of b, would not phonate this let- 
ter. This would be uttering the sound which be repre- 
sents. The phonation of b, is the uttering of that stifled 
sound which this one letter represents. 

To hyperphonate is to form a free flowing, unstifled 
voice. 

To hypophonate is to utter stifled sounds. 

To thu-rophonate is to form a sound which can not be 
uttered except in a whispered voice. 

These words may all be used cormosly, seramusly, 
duramusly, and subramusly. 

That the reader may not be disheartened at the ap- 
parently great number of words in the following columns, 
it may be well to apprise him that both columns contain 
but one word. This one is phonate. In the following forms 
there is but one word — write, writes, writ est, wrileth, 
wrote, wrotest, written, writing, writings. 

The nine different modifications of this word, serve to 
give it a form for each circumstance in its numerous ap- 
plications in sydiology. Phonate has one general import — 
it uniformly relates to voice, to sound — but the sound to 
which this word relates, is to be considered or spoken of 
under various aspects ; hence the primary import of 
phonate, is modified by secondary ones — and these are 
expressed by the following forms : 

Hon, hyper, hypo, thuro, sym, zeo, fyc. 

1. Phonate, 15. Zeophcnate 

2. Phonation, 16. Zeophonation, 

3. Gradphonate, 17. Su-per-phonate, 

4. PersephonatiGn, Su-per-pho-nation, 

5. Hyperphonate, 18. Or-thoph-o-nate, 

6. Hyperphonation, Or-thoph-o-na-tion, 

7. Hyperphony, 19. Gram-pho-nate, 

8. Hypophonate, Gram-pho-na-tion, 

9. Hypophonation, 20. Phon- gram-mate, 

10. Hypophony, Phon-gram-ma-Hon, 

11. Thurophonate, 21. Per-seph-o-nate, 

12. Thurophonation, Per-seph-o-na-tion, 

13. Symphonate, 22. Mon-pho-nate^ 

14. Symphonation. Mon-pho-na-tion. 



210 

To these form* may be added the syntactical, fc, el, ly, 
9, es, th, st, its, &c. 

QUSTIOXS. 

1. How is phonate compounded t 

By uniting the two elements, phone, and ate. 
'2. What does each element mean! Phone means a 
voice, or sound, and ate signifies to form. 

DIVISION OF ZE-OPHONATION. 

Ze-ophonation is divided into two parts ; namely, 

1. Sti-per-pho-na-tion, and 

2. Or-thoph-o-na-tion. 

1. Su-rER-rHO-NA-TioN is the act of uttering one mono- 
thong above another by laying a greater stress upon it; as, 
ro-cal, Su-per-pho-^a-tion sM/j-port, e-nig-7?2aMc-al, con 
vict, con vict* 

2. Or-thotii-o-na-tion is the act of giving the right 
sound to every monothong in a phonepos, or to every 
monogram in an alphepos ; as, in phonating the alphepos, 
virtue, it should he pronounced virishu, not virtu — and in 
phonating humorous, it should be pronounced yumurous, 
not humorous. 

The supers may be Subdivided into files 24/1 crs and S2ib- 
suficrs. (Plenus, full J 

1. The /ile-sufiers are those monothongs and mono- 
grams which should be urtered in a full sufier-elevation 
of voice, as is heard in ra, in as-pi-ra-tion. 

2. The sub-sufiers are those monothongs, and mono- 
grams which should be uttered in an inferior sufier-ele- 
vation of voice, as is heard in as, in as-pi-ration. 

1. Superphonation. 

2. Orthophonatioii 

These words have all the forms common to words of 
their character, and formation — 

Sufierfihonate, Sufier/ihony, Suficrfihonies, Sufierfiho?iic, 
Sufierfilionically. 

He sufierfihonates well. That is, he gives each mono- 
thong its proper elavation of tone, or its true stress which 
produces the superior height of voice, which one mono- 
thong should have above another. 



211 

Superphony is that degree of vocal elevation, which 
raises the sound of one monothong over that of another. 

The superphonic utterance is that degree of vocal eleva- 
tion, which raises one monothong above another. 

The exact superphony which a monothong should have 
must be determined by the nature of the case. 

He speaks with exactness in super fihonation. He is ex- 
act in the superphonation of his monothongs. He speaks 
with sufierfihonic preciscion. He reads, but not sufierfiho- 
nically — he reads, but not orthofihonically. That is, he 
reads, but not with that vocal elevation which some mono- 
grams hould have above others — he reads, but he does 
not give each monogram its right sound. For instance, 
he phonates the alphepos, yea, yea, instead of ye, and the 
alphepos, tune, he phonates tshune instead of tune. 

He persephonates well ; he sup ersephon ales accurately ; 
and orthophonates like a master. 

1. He persephonates well. That is, he forms each mono- 
thong in a word perfectly alone, by itself- — no two mono- 
thongs of a word address the ear in company — each comes 
alone, by itself. 

2. He sufierfihonates accurately. That is, he gives 
each super monothong, its proper elevation. Or he gives 
to every super monothong its proper superphony. 

3. And he orthophonates like a master. That is, he 
gives the right sound to every monothong in each word. 

Words thus formed are constructed according to the 
principles of Phonology, the first part of Poieology. 
The second part of Poieology is Alphaology, 



PART II. 

Alphaology. 

Alphaology is that part of Poieology, which teaches 
the principles of forming words from letters. 

Letters. 

Letters are the elements of the alphepoi, and the repre~ 
sentatives of the elements of the phonepoi. 



113 N 

Let mc call the attention of the student to two interesting" facts ; 
namely, that the only materials out of which words are formed, 
are in the human ///«£rs, and in this page! The air in the lung-s is 
formed into plionepoi — and the letters in this page, are formed into 
alphepoi. 

The following is a list of the Roman, Italic and old 
English letters. 



Roman. 


Ita 


lie. 


Old English. 


Name. 


Cap. 


Small. 


Cap: 


Small. 


Cap. Small. 




A 


a 


A 


a 


& a 


ai. 


B 


b 


B 


b 


& i> 


bee 


C 


c 


C 


c 


<£ c 


see. 


D 


d 


I) 


d 


D tj 


dee. 


E 


e 


E 


e 


33 e 


ee. 


F 


f 


F 


f 


JF t 


*f. 


G 


g 


G 


ff 


& A 


jee. 


H 


h 


H 


h 


m n 


aitch. 


I 
J 


i 

J 


I 
J 


i 
J 


3 \\ 


i or eye. 
jay. 


K 


k 


K 


k 


» It 


hay. 


L 


1 


L 


I 


% I 


el 


M 


m 


M 


m 


m m 


em. 


N 


n 


K 


n 


Ji u 


en. 














<& o 


0. 


P 


P 


P 


P 


y » 


pee. 


Q 


q 


Q 


9 


<& ri 


cue. 


R 


r 


H 


r 


M v 


ar. 


6 


s 


s 


t 


S a 


ess. 


T 


t 


T 


1 


2F t 


tee. 


U 
V 


u 

T 


U 
V 


u 

V 


3ff $ tt 


u or you 

vee. 


W 


W 


W 


W 


sar in 


doubleu. 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X v 


eks. 


Y 


J 


T 


V 


i? » 


ivy. 


Z 


z 


Z 


K 


z ? 


xe. 



213 



f 



The English alphabet contains twenty-six letters. 
These, Alphaology divides according to the character 
of the sounds which they represent, into three classes ; 
nan.ely, 

1. Hypergrams, 

2. Hupograms, and 

3. Thuro grams. 

1. A hypergram is a letter which represents a hyper- 
phony, a free flowing, unstijied voice or sound ; as, a, o. 
(Hyper, free, and gramma, a letter. J 

2. A hupogram is a letter which represents a stifled 
voice, or sound ;• as, 6, ra, z, (Hvpo, stifled, and gram- 
ma, a letter.^ 

3. A thurogram is a letter which represents a voice, or 
sound that can be uttered in a whisper only ; as, h, s, fi, 

(Tkuro, a whisper, and gramma, a letter,) 

1. The hypergrams are a, e, i, o, u, and y. 

Note. Y is not a hypergram where it precedes another hyper ; as, 
I yet, yard. 

2. The hupograms are b, d, g, j, /, m, n, r, », u, y, z. 

Note. Y is a hupogram, only were it falls before a hyper ; as, 
1 yonder, yes. 

HYPERGRAMS. HUPOGRAMS. THUROGRAMS. 



B Q 
BR 
GV 

mw 

LT 
MZ 



Dispergrams, and Ttispergrams. 

1 . A dispergram is the union of two hypergrams, in one 
monogram; as, oi in voice. (Dis, two.j 

2. A trisfiergram is the union of three hyficrgram* in 
one monogram ; as, iew in view. (Tris, three J 



214 
Every hypergram has two opponent sounds 
long, and short, • — 



namely, 



fa- 

h* 

Long<; % - 
|o - 



which end 



- made'] C^nad 

- mete I I rnet 

- &{fc ;> Shorte! bit 

- rode I ™ rf 

- tube J L^ 
RULES. 

LA. 

1. A is long in all words of one monogram, 
with e: as, late, fate, date. 

2. j3 is generally long when it ends a monogram in 
words composed of two, or more monograms ; as, pa-pa , 
vexa-tion, crea-tion, emancipa-tion. 

3. A is generally long in the last monogram of a wore], 
which ends with e; as, emancipate, create, debate, inflate. 

4. A is short in all words of one monogram, which end 
with a single hupogram or thurogram ; as, pad, ivad, lad- 

5. A is short in all words where it falls before a doubled 
hupogram or thurogram ; as, matter, latter, ladder, add. 

6. A is short in instances where a hupo, or thurogram in 
the middle of a word, may easily be pronouced as though 
it is doubled ; as, banishment, dragon, value. (Banish- 
ment, dragoon, vaZ/ue.) 

II. E. 

1. E is long before a hupogram or thurogram which is 
followed bv another e in the same monogram— or E is long 
where it has the sound of ee ; as, create, precede, austere, 
supercede, sphere. (Creeate, preceed, austeer, superseed, 

spheer.) . . .. • 

2. E is long at the end of words where it is not silent, 
or where it is not nearly so ; or E is long at the end of 
words where ee can be substituted for e without changing 
the sound ; as, be, donee, phoe-be, Penelope, epitome, simile, 
we, she thee, the. (Bee, epitomee, similee, &c.) 

3. E is short in all words, and in all monograms, which 
terminate with a hupogram or thurogram ; as,/ed, men, bed, 
held, well, elm, help, jerk, dress, tanner, manner, matter, 
hatter, written, loved. 

4. E is short in all words in which the hupogram or thu- 
rogram in the middle of the word is doubled ; as, mellow, 
wedding, bedding, getting, referring, spelling. 



215 

III. I. 

1. lis long where silent e terminates the monogram ; as, 
mine, ride, wine, dine. 

2. / is long before gh, ght, gn, mb, Id, and nd, when 
these are uttered in the same monogram with i; as, high, 
height, sign, climb, child, find, wind. 

(Exceptions — limb, guild, build, wind.) 

3. / is short in words of one monogram where but one 
hupo or thuro follows it; as, pin, sin, lid, wit, pit, rib, Jib. 

4. / is short where the hupos or thuros in the middle of a 
word, is doubled; as, omitted, fitted, bitter, giddy. 

5. / is sometimes short in words of one monogram, 
where the last two letters are hupo or thuro ; as, sift, gilt, 
built, mint, mill, hilt, spilt, gills, jilt, wind, (air.) 

Exception — pint. 

6. / is short where it has much the sound of short u ; 
as, third, bird, dirt (Bwrd, thwrd, dwrt.) 

IV. O. 

1. O Is long where it ends a monogram, and also where 
the monogram ends with silent e; as, so, moroc-co, ampho- 
gram, mono-dy, monop-o-lize, hope, home, restore, deplore, 
mo-nop-tote, implore. 

(Exceptions— dove, love, move, improve, involve, revolve, 
resolve, dissolve ) 

2. O is long before //, Id, It, and 1st ; as, roll, sold, bolt, 
bolster. 

3. O is long in many instances where it precedes r where 
r is followed by a hupo or thuro ; as, forty port, sword, 
afford. 

4. O is sometimes long before st, and w; as, most, host, 
post, blow, snow, know, row, crow, slow. 

(Exceptions — vow, now, how, lost, &c.) 

5. O is short when it falls before a hupo or thuro which 
ends a monogram ; as, com-mon, fog, odd, rob, rob-ber, 
nov-ice. 

(Exceptions — sol-dier, bolster.) 

6. O is oil en short before I, and v; as, involve,, resolve, 
revolve, dissolve, dove, love, improve, remove. 

1. O is short in the few words where it has the sound 
of ou, of short i, of oo, and of u; as, broth, cross, women, 
tomb, Rome, colour, wisdom, some, fathom, done, son, 
love, world, brother, mother, other, nothing, iron, environ, 
citron, saffron. 

M S 



216 



8. O is short before n at the close of a word, where it 
loses nearly all sound ; as, button, mutton, cotton. 

9. O is commonly short before ugh; as, rough, tough, 
enough, wrought, thought, ought, bought, brought, 
through. * 

10. O is generally short where it precedes r, where r is 
followed by a hupogram, or a thurogram ; as, sort, retort, 
detort, distort, distortion, abortion, deform, deformity, in- 
form, information, conform, conformity, conformation. 

suborn, subornation, transform, transformation, uniform 
uniformity, multiform. 

V. U. 

A Eevison of the Hypergrams. 



1. 
2. 

A has <( 3. 

4. 

5. 



I. A. 

a long slender sound ; 



a shortish flat sound ; 
a shortish broad sound ; 



a short flat sound ; 
a short broad sound ; 



as, heard in fate, 
as, heard in far. 

as, heard in fall. 

as, heard in fat. 
as heard in wad. 



EhtLS 



g~ 



II. E. 

a long sound ; 



short sound ; 



as, heard in me. 
as, heard in met. 



I has 



£ 



III. I. 

a long sound ; 



a short sound; 



-as, heard in pine. 



as, heard in pin. 



1. cz 



217 
IV. O. 

long open sound : 



Ohas a<J 



J rhasa<5 3> 



shortish close sound ; 
shortish broad sound; 

short broad sound ; 

sho rt close sound ; 

V. u. 

long sound ; 
short sound ; 
short obtuse sound ; 




O in | 



shortish obtuse sound ; 



VI. 01. 

C thirl sound; 



^ as, heard in no. 
as, heard in move. 
as, heard in nor. 

as, heard in not. 

as, heard in wolf. 



as, heard in tube. 
as, heard in sup. 

as, heard in full. 
as, heard in rule. 



i in I 



)>oi, has its- 



i 



as, heard in oil. 



i 



second sound ; 



VII. ou. 

rd sound; 



f third 

Oin\ ! " ,l """M 

\>ou, has its<^ t hird sound ; J>as, heard in fourth 
u in 



J 



218 
Sounds of the Hupograms. 

% m, «?, 3, a, m, aa, n, w, m, », 



u B keeps one unvaried sound, at the beginning", middle, and end of 
words ; as in baker, number, rhubarb, &c. 

D keeps one uniform sound, at the beginning, middle, and end of 
words ; as in death, bandage, kindred ; unless it may be said to take 
the sound of t r in stuffed, tripped, &c. stuft, tript, &c. 

G has two sounds : one hard ; as in gay, go, gun : the other soft ; 
as in gem, giant. 

J is pronounced exactly like soft g ; except in hallelujah, where it is 
pronounced like y. 

L has always a soft liquid sound ; as in love, billow, quarrel. It is 
sometimes mute ; as in half, talk, psalm. 

M has always the same sound ; as, murmur, monumental — except 
in comptroller, which is pronounced controller. 

N has two sounds : the one pure ; as in man, net, noble ; the other 
a ringing sound like ng ; as in thank, banquet, &c. 

R has a rough sound ; as in rome, river, rage : and a smooth one ; 
as in bard, card, regard. 

I 7 " has the sound of flat/, and bears the same relation to it, as 6 does 
to p, d to f, hard g to k, and z to s. It has also oneun iform sound ; as, 
vain, vanity, love. 

W, when before a hypergram, has nearly the sound of oo ; as water 
resembles the sound of ooater. 

Y, when before a hyper, has nearly the sound of ee ; as, youth, York, 

resembling the sounds of eeouth, eeork : but that this is not its exact 

ound, will be clearly perceived by pronouncing the word ye, yea, new 

;r, in which its just and proper sound is ascertained. It not only 

aires a stronger exertion of the organs of speech to pronounce it, 

ji is required to pronounce ee; but its formation is essentially differ- 

/ . It will not admit of an before it, as ee will in the following ex- 

mple ; an eel. The opinion that y and 10, when they begin a word or 



219 

syllable, take exactly the sound of te and oo 1 has induced some gram- 
marians tr assert, that these letters are always vowels or diphthongs. 

When y is a hyper, it has exactly the same sound as i would have, 
in the same situation ; as, rhyme, system, justify pyramid, party, fancy, 
hungry. 

Z has the sound of an g uttered with a closer compression of the 
palate by the tongue ; it is the flat s ; as freeze, frozen, brazen. 

Sounds of the Thurograms. 

c, /, /*, h q, $, x. 
C has two different sounds. 

A hard sound like k, before a, o, w, r, I, i ; as in cart, cottage, curious, 
eraft, tract, cloth, &.c ; and when it ends a syllable ; as, in victim, 
flaccid. 

F keeps one pure unvaried sound at the beginning, middle, and end, 
of words; as fancy, muffin, mischief, &c. except in of, in. which it 
has the flat sound of v. 

H. The sound signified by this letter, is an articulate sound, and 
not merely an aspiration. It is heard in the words, hat, horse, Hull. 
It is seldom mute at the beginning of a word. It is always siient after 
r; as, rhetoric, rheum, rhubarb. 

if has the sound of c hard, and is used before e and i, where, ac- 
cording to English analogy, c would be soft; as kept, king, skirts. It 
is not sounded before n ; as in knife, knell, knocker. 

P has always the same sound, except, perhaps, in cupboard, where 
it sounds like b. It is sometimes mute ; as in psalm, psalter, ptolemy, 
and between m and t; as, tempt, empty, presumptuous. 

Q is always followed by v ; as, quadrant, queen, quire. 

Qu is sometimes sounded like k ; as, conquer, liquor, risque. 

$has two different sounds. 

A soft and flat sound like z ; as, besom, nasal, dismal. 

A sharp hissing sound ; as, saint, sister, Cyprus. 

T generally sounds, as in take, tempter. T before u, when the ac- 
cent precedes, sounds like tch : as, nature, virtue, are pronounced iia- 
tchure, virtchue. 

X has three sounds, viz. 

It is sounded like z at the beginning of proper names of Greek 
•riginal ; as in Xanthus, Xenophon, Xerxes. 

It has a sharp sound like ks, when it ends a syllable with the accent 
upon it ,* as exist, exercise, excellence." 

S 2 



220 
Specimen of Letter Parsing. 

1. Name. 

N — a hupogram, having its pure or natural sound. 
a — a hypergram, having its long or slender sound, 
m — a hupogram, having its first or natural sound. 
e — a hypergram, having its obscure sound. 

2. Rhubarb. 

R — a hupogram, having its rough sound. 
h — a thurogram, having its silent character. 
u — a hypogram, having its long or open sound. 
b — a hupogram, having its natural sound. 
a — a hypergram, having its shortish flat sound. 
r — a hupogram, having its smooth sound. 
b — a hupogram, having its natural sound. 

3. Fog. 

F — a thurogram, having its natural sound. 

o — a hypergram, having its shortish broad sound. 

g — a hupogram, having its hard sound. 

4. Givest. 

G — a hupogram, having its hard sound. 
i — a hupergram, having its short sound. 
v — a hupogram, having its natural sound, 
e — a hypergram, having its obscure sound. 
5 — a thurogram, having- its sharp or hissing sound. 
, thurqgram, having its natural sound. 



5. Voice. 

V — a hupogram, having its uniform sound. 

o — a hypergram, having its shortish broad sound. 

i — a hypergram, having its short sound. 

c — a thurogram, having its soft; sound. 

e — a hypergram, having its obscure sound. 

6. Boat, 
oa — a dispergram, having the long sound of o. 

7. Beau. 

eau — a trispergram, having the sound of long or open •♦ 

8. Voice. 

oi — a dispergram, having the sound of broad a and long t united. 



221 

MONGRAMMATION, 

A Division of Alphepoi into Monograms. 

The materials of which words are formed, devide them 
into two great classes ; viz. Phonepoi and Alphepoi. The 
Phonepoi are formed from sound. The Aiphepoi are 
formed from letters. The Phonepos class is composed of 
words which are formed from Monothongs — the Alphepos 
class consists of words which are formed from Mono- 
grams. 

Each Alphepos is intended to represent a Phonepos. 
And as each sound in the Phonepos is taken alone, by itself; 
so the letter, or letters in the Alphepos, which represent 
the respective sounds in the Phonepos, are taken alone ; 
as, in-com-pre-hen-si-bil-i-ty. Hence it may be seen that 
some rules for dividing Alphepoi into Monograms will be 
of considerable advantage. 

RULE I. 

The Alphepos should, in general, be divided into Mono- 
grams in the same way in which the Phonepos is divided 
into Monothongs; as, nev-er-the-less. 

Note. In this phonepos there are four distinct sounds, four Mono- 
thongs — hence, in the alphepos there are four monograms. 

RULE II. 

In general, all the letters which are used to represent a 
certain Monothong in a phonepos, should stand in the 
same Monogram ; as, " nev-er-the-less, hab-it, ham-let, 
ho-ly, lo-cal, en-gage, an-i-mal, al-i-ment, pol-i-cy, eb-o-ny, 
la-ment, lam-ent-a-ble, prefer-a-ble, re-form, be-speak, ta- 
ble, act-or, pos-sess-or, add-ed, writ-ing. 

Note i. Where each of the hypers that fall into the middle of a 
word, represents a distinct sound, each should stand in its own Mono- 
gram; as, cre-ate, ru-in y re-en-ter. 

Note 11. Where hypers come in the character of a Dispergram or 
Trispergram, all belong to the same Monogram ; as, cease, guilt, 
heed-less. 

Note in. Generally where two hupograms or thurograms come 
together in the middle of a word, they fall into different Monograms ; 
as, gram-mar, writ-ten, re-fer-ring, man-ner, digged, mut-ter, o-mit-ted. 

Note iv. Those letters which cannot be uttered in one Monogram, 
should be attached to another, as, publish. 



222 

Specimen of Monogrammic Parsing* 

1. Maine. 

Itiume, a Poly alpha. (A monogram of 4 letters.) 

2. Khu-larb. 
Rhu, a Polyalpha* 
barb, a Poly alpha. 

3. Fog. 
Fog, a Trialpha. (A monogram of 3 letters.) 

4» Giv-esti 
Giv, a Trialpha. 
est, a Trialpha. 

5. Oth-er. 
Oih, a Trialpha. 

er, a Dialpha. (A monogram of 2 letters.) 

6. Boat 
Boat, a Polyalpha. 







7. Eb-o-ny. 




Eb, 


a Dialpha. 






0, 


a Monoalpha. (A monogram 


of 1 letter.) 


ny, 


a Dialpha. 






Parsing Exercises to be parsed accordir 


ig to the preceding 






specimen. 




Basin 


Glass 


Banner 


Isaac 


Name 


Far 


Balance 


Caesar 


Creation 


Farm 


Comma 


Enigma 


Call 


Father 


Fofa 


Paean 


Wall 


Fame 


Warm 


Aphaeresis 


All 


Favour 


Ay 


Dieresis 


Sail 


Aunt 


Rhubarb 


Cottage 


Certain 


Launch 




Centre 


Mountain 


Boy 


Debtor 


Civil 


Saith 


Cub 


Subtle 


Mercy 


Said 


Robber 


Climb 


Ocean 


Against 


Thumb 


Tomb 


Social 


Gaol 


Baker 


Coal 


Czar 


Cause 


Number 


Cart 


Victuals 


Appear 


Beauty 


Gnash 


Fin 


Beaver 


Dew 


Genius 


Thin 


Breath 


Fan 


Resign 


Thine 


Treasure 


Eye 


Impugn 


Christian 


Bear 


Of 


Hull 


Grief 


Great 


Gul 


Hat 


Keep 


Beau 


Game 


Rhetoric 


No 


Portmanteau 


Gone 


Sarah 


Sad 


Smiths 


Aspersion 


Isle 


Nature 


Vulture 


Wine 


What 


Wrath 



223 

Words have two general frame-work characters ; 
namely, internal and external. 

1. The internal constructive character of a word, is 
made up of those constructive attributes which a word 
derives from its formation from sounds or letters. 

2. The external constructive character of a word, is 
that constructive attribute which a word derives from its 
particular frame-work relation with another word. Or, 
the internal, is what a word is with respect to itself. The 
external, what a word is with respect to another word. 
For example — The watch-men are very vigilant ; neverthe- 
less there is much injury done by night-walkers. 

1. The, in alphaology, with respect to itself, is a Mono- 

gram. 

2. The, in phonology, witfr respect to itself, is a Mono- 

thong. 

3. The, with respect to itself, is a primitive word. 

4. The, with respect to itself, is a simple word. 

5. The, however, with respect to the word, watch-men, is 

a ramus word. 

Watch-men. 

1. Watch* men, in alphaology, with respect to itself, is an 

Amphogram. 

2. Watch-men, in phonology, with respect to itself, is a 

Diphthong. 

3. Watch-men, with respect to itself, is a derivative word, 

(from watch, and men.) 

4. Watch-men, with respect to itself, is a compound word. 

5. Watch-men, however, with respect to the, is a cormos 

word. 

Division of Words. 

Words, with respect to their internal constructive cha- 
racter, are divided, first, into Monothongs, Dipthongs, 
Triphthongs, Polythongs, into Monograms, Amphograms, 
Triegrams, Polygrams; secondly, into Primitive, and 
Derivative ; and, thirdly, into Simple and Compound. 

i. 

1. A Monothong is a phonepos that has only one dis- 
tinct sound which is represented by one monogram ; as, 
in, on, off, m.an. 

2. A Diphthong is a phonepos that is composed of two 
monothongs which are represented by two monograms ; 
as, in-to. 

3. A Triphthong is a phonepos that is composed of 
three monothongs which are represented by three mono- 
grams ; as, gen-er-al. 



224 

4. A Polythong is a phonepos that is composed of four 
or more monothongs which are represented by four or 
more monograms ; as, gen-er-al-ly, in-com-pre-hen-si-oU-i-ty, 

A SPECIMEN OF PARSING UNDER THE FIRST DIVISION. 

The human mind is generally fickle. 

The, a Monothong, and a Monogram,* 

human, a Diphthong, and an Amphogram. 
mind, a Monothong-, and a Monogram. 

is, a Monothong, and a Monogram 

generally, a Polythong, and a Polygram. 
fickle, a Diphthong, and an Amphogram. 

EXERCISES IN MIXED INTERNAL PARSING. 

1. Custom is the plague of wise men. 

2. To forgive is divine. 

3. Ingratitude is a base crime. 

N. B. — For more exercises take poge 100, 150, 175. 

II. 

1. A Primitive word is one which has no derivative 
modification, or form ; as, man, good. 

2. A Derivative word is one which has some derivative 
modification ; as, manly, goodness. 

STATE INTERNAL PARSING. 

" The human mind is generally fickle" 

The, a primitive. 

human, a primitive. 

mind, a primitive. 

is, a derivative from be. 

generally, .... a derivative. 
fickle, a primitive. 

Exercises. 

1. True'religion promotes harmonious intercourse. 

2. [They have given occasion] (for criticism.) 

3. [We are responsible] (for the rest.) 

4. Pious thoughts ; 5, A profuse admixture ; 6, An 

agreeable entertainment. 

N. B. — For more exercises, take page 100, 108, and 109. 

* As a phonepos, the is a monothong ; as an alphepos, the is a mo- 
nogram. 



225 
in. 



1. A simple word is one which cannot be divided into 
two entire words ; as, man. uiviaea into 

2. A compound word is one which comprises two or 
more entire words; as, man-kind. P ' 

MIXED INTERNAL PARSING. 

"The watch-men are very vigilant; nev-er-the-less, there 
is much injury done by night-walkers." 

The a simple word. 

watch-men, . . a compound word. 

are * a simple word. 

very, . . . . a simple word. 
vigilant, .... a simple word. 
nev-er-the-less, . a compound word. 
tker e, . . . . . . a simple word. 

w » a simple word. 

much* a simple word 

w/'ury, .... a simple word. 

^ 0/ze > a simple word. 

"?' a simple word. 

night-walkers, . a compound word. 

1. The cloud-capt towers. 

2. Sea-water is salt water. 

3. The ice-house is designed to accommodate those 

wno like ice-water. 

4. The glow-worm is well known by all man-kind. 
Note. Where the hyphen is omitted, such compound words as 

may be written in a disjunctive state, are taken separately as simple 
words ; as, tea pot, sea water. " 

REMARKS. 

The internal, and external parsing may be united in 
isuch a way as will enable the pupil to examine the in- 
ternal, and the external character in the same process. 
The human mind is somewhat fickle. 

The, . . a simple ramus, belonging to mind. 

human, . a simple ramus, belonging to mind. 

mind, . a simple cormos. 

te> • • a simple ramus, belonging to mind. 

some-what, a compound ramus, belonging to fickle. 

fickle, . a simple ramus, belonging to mind. 

The teacher may exercise his pvpils in this toaij to whatever extent 
jAe may think advantageous. The pupil, however, should be made 
i familiar with both. 



226 

SYNOPTICAL VIEW OF ALL THE TECHNICAL TERMS 
APPLIED TO THE SAME WORD. 

In the following scheme four words are presented as 
phonepoi, and as alphepoi. 

1. The cuts present the phonepoi. The letters present 
the alphepoi. 

2. Each distinct cut is a monothong \ and the letters 
which are presented at each monothong, are a monogram. 

3. The words which stand at the head, are the technical 
names of the word which is presented under them. 

4. The words which stand on the right, are the names 
of the letters which represent each monothong in a pho- 
nepo 

5. The words are 7, in, general, and transubstantiation. 

6. The word, monothong, at the head, applies to the vo- 
cal I. The word, monothong, on the left of /, is applied to 
this same sound, as an element of which the lis formed — 
here the word monothong, means nothing but one distinct 
sound. 

7. The word, monogram at the head of the scheme in 
which / is presented, is the name of the letter I as an en- 
tire word. The word, monogram on the left, is the name 
of the letter, I, as the representative, not of a distinct 
word,, but of a distinct sound. 

1. A monothong. 

2. A monogram. 

3. A 'primitive. 

4. A simple. 

5. A cormos. 

1. A monothong } 

2. A monogram > I ihypergram. 

3. A monoalpha j 

1. A monothong. 

2. A monogram. 

3. A primitive* 

4. A simple. 

5. A ramus. 



1. A monothoncr 

2. 

3. 



A monogram I $ l a hypergram. 

Adialpha S ln *hupogram. 



227 



1. 

2. 
3. 
4. 
5. 



1. 
2. 
3. 
I 
1. 
2. 
3. 

1. 

\ 2, 
3. 



K 



A 
A 
A 
A 
A 

G 



1. 

( 2. 
3. 

1. 
2. 
3. 

1. 
2. 

3. 

I. 

2. 
3. 

1. 
2. 
3. 

1. 
2. 
3. 



)! 



'}i 



triphthong', 
triegram. 
p r i m i t i v e. 
s i mp I e. 
ramus. 



A monothong 
A monogram 
A trialpha 

A monothong ") 
A monogram > 
A dialpha J 

A monothong") 

id 
A monogram V i 

A dialpha J 

1. 

2. 
3. 
4. 

A monothong j 
A monogram <^ 
A polyalpha. ^ 

A monothong 
A monogram 
A trialpha 

A monothong j , 
A monogram < 
A polyalpha j^ 

A monothong" 
A monogram 
A dialpha 

A monothong \ 

A monogram \ a — 

A monoalpha J 

A monothong J * . 
A monogram < > 
A polyalpha ^ 



A p o lyth o ng, 
A p 61 y gram. 
A derivative. 
A e o r m o s. 



a hupogram. 
a hypergram. 
a hupogram, 

a hypergram. 
a hupogram. 

a hypergram. 
a hupogram. 



a th urogram, 
a hupogram. 
a hypergram. 
a hupogram. 

a thurogram. 
a hypergram. 
a hupogram. 

a thurogram. 
a thurogram. 
a hypergram. 
a hupogram. 

a thurogram. 
a hypergram 

- a hypergram. 

a thurogram. 
fa hypergram. 
J a hypergram. 

a hupogram. 



228 
II. ALPHAOLOGY. 

nrW H 7 A0L0 ^ GY is that part of Poieology, which teaches the 
principles of constructing wor-ds from letters 

ri K ;~lT dS are T' lei in th6ir a, P hao %y forms by changing, 
mav b^H. f , a ," d repeat '" g particuIar letters - These variations 

may be denommated Alphaology Deflections. They are— 

1. Retaining *} 

2. Rejecting 

3. Repeating } Deflection. 

4. Exchanging I 

5. iVewter ' J 

ILLUSTRATION. 

r^Z"%fe ^ 1S ^ err ° r in al P h -Io gy ^the * should follow the 
*^^ «* - y be corrected 

th£ if 1 ^ ^ err ° r ^ ln a de ^iency,--another/ is wanting 
th/ft ^TW^ * I 6 '" 1S an T° r WhiGh ma ^ be corrected ^ doubling 

XL GRAMER. 

grammar ' * C ° rreCted ' a " d the mistake rec ^°> thus! 

111. % 

Pale, paleness. . Here, in forming the derivative, the hypergram e 
is retained. 1V 'gram, e, 

Kef.,, „f„,i„ r , n Cmj „ t „,„ d!r]ralire , n ihu |n 

r « . pogram, r, is repeated. 

Form, formmg, . J n f ; M^ the hupo , m> fc 

in the derivative monogram, 
dagger. . . . H e in the formation of the simple word , the Iast 

letter m the first monogram, is repeated in the 
_, second monogram. 

a S°t. - . . Here the 1 ast letter in the first monogram, i s re. 

jected in the second monogram. 



229 

1 . Retaining Deflection. 

The Retaining Deflection is that form which results from 
retaining : first, the final e of the primitive part of the 
word, which is done where the derivative begins with a 
hupogram, or a thurogram ; as, pale, paleness ; guile, guile- 
ness ; close, closeness. 

Secondly, from retaining y in an additional termination, 
which is done : first, where y in the simple state of the 
word, is preceded by a hypergram; as boy, boys ; cloy, 
cloys, cloyed ; and, secondly, wiiere the y is retained, 
although not preceded by a hypergram, to prevent repeat- 
ing i; as, carry, carrying. (Not earning.) 

Note. — The final e is sometimes rejected even when preceded by a 
hypergram ; as, true, truly. 

2. Rejecting Deflection. 

The Rejecting Deflection is that form which results from 
rejecting : first, the repetition of every final hupogram, 
or thurogram, except /, /, and s ; in all monograms except 
add, butt, bunn, buzz, ebb, egg, err, inn, add, and purr ; as, 
must, wind, but, cut : 

Secondly, from rejecting the repetition of /, /, and s in 
a monogram ; as, his, if, of, this, thus, and us : 

Thirdly, from rejecting the repetition of/ in forming the 
derivative with ness, less, ful, and ly ; as, full fulness, skill 
skil-less, skill skil-ful, full fu\-ly — and 

Fourthly, from rejecting the final e of the primitive part 
where the derivative begins with a hypergram; as, write 
writing, love lovmg, rate ratable. 

3. Repeating Deflection. 

The Repeating Deflection is that form which results 
from repeating a hupogram, or thurogram, that is pre- 
ceded by a single hypergram, which is done: first, in the 
monograms, add, butt, bunn, buzz, ebb, egg, err, inn, odd, 
and purr : 

Secondly, where the monogram ends with /, I, and s ; 
as, stat/", mil/, pass. 

As, his, if, is, of, this, us, and yes are exceptions, and fall 
under the Rejecting Deflection : 

Thirdly, where a monogram ending with a single 
hupogram, or thurogram, preceded by a single hypergram 
begins its additional monogram with a hypergram ; as, 
roboer— and 

Fourthly, where the word ends with any single hupo- 
gram, or thurogram, preceded by a single hypergram, is 
accented on the second monogram, and assumes an addi- 
tional monogram, beginning with a hypergram; as, refer 
referring, con conning, permit permitted. 



230 
4. Exchanging Deflection. 

The Exchanging Deflection is that form which results 
from exchanging y for i in additional terminations, which 
is done : first, where the y, in the simple state of the word, 
is preceded by a hupogram, or thurogram ; as, happy hap- 
pily, happiness, lae/y ladies, carry carries earnest car- 
ried — and 

Secondly, where y is preceded by a hypergram ; as, pay 
paid unpaid, say said unsaid. 

5. Neuter Deflection. 

The Neuter Deflection embraces all those words which 
are not included in any of the other deflections. — Those 
words which are accurately spelled different ways — 

1. Abridgment or abridgement e 



2. 
3. 


Allege 
Control 


or 
or 


alledge . . 
controul . 


. d 
. u 


4. 
5. 


Complete 
Connexion 


or 
or 


compleat . 
conection . 


. a 
. ct 


6. 

7. 

a 


Expense 

Inquire 

Honor 


or 
or 
or 


expence. . 
enquire . . 
honour . . 


. c 
. e 

. u 


9. 


Negotiate 


or 


negociate . 


• c 


10. 


Surprise 


or 


surprize . 


. z 



In short the Neuter Deflection embraces all words which 
do not fall under any of the other deflections. 

Remarks* 

A correct idea of framing letters into words is so very important 
that nothing which has the appearance of aiding the learner in this part 
of Poicology, should remain untried. This part of English Syntax 
is difficult of acquisition : first, from the great number of words which 
are built in part from silent letters ; secondly, from a shameful defi- 
ciency in the number of letters in the English alphabet ; thirdly, from 
the variety of sounds, which the same letter is made to represent in 
consequence of this alphabetic deficiency ; fourthly, from the disgrace- 
ful dissonance so common between the Monothong, and the Monogram 
of the same word ; fifthly, from a want of a set of rules, which has 
the power to bring the attention of the pupil critically, and constantly 
to the mechanical shape, the constructive form, the frame-work appear- 
ance of every alphepos in a section. That much depends upon fixing, 
by some means or other, the frame-work appearance of such words as are 
in any way different in their spelling from their pronunciation, in the 
mind of the learner, is demonstrated from the fact that they who are 
in the habit of writing can spell much better with the pen than with 
the tongue; and that those who are in the practice of setting type, can 



231 

spell with greater accuracy with type than with vocal organs. He who 
builds words of materials which have some visible form, has an oppor- 
tunity of fixing- in his mind, not only the form of each part of the 
building-, even after it is set into the frame-work, but the exact archi- 
tectural configuration of the entire temple. 

By the scheme of Declensions presented in this system, the pupil 
may be thoroughly drilled in the examination of the manner in which 
words are formed from letters. The Neuter Deflection enables the 
teacher to bring- the attention of the pupil to those words which do not 
fafl under any of the other declensions. This enables the pupil to review 
the spelling of each word in a section. It may be said, however, that, 
as the Neuter Deflection contains no fixed rules for the correction of 
improprieties in spelling, it avails nothing-. This objection proceeds 
upon the ground that accuracy in spelling is mainly acquired by cor- 
reding improprieties in spelling-. But when it is considered that spell- 
ing skill is acquired, not by correcting bad, but by examining good 
spellings the means, the scheme which induces a close examination of 
words accurately formed, must be considered useful. That the Neuter 
Deflection has this effect is obvious, from the fact that it requires as 
close an examination of the spelling appearance of a word in the Neu- 
ter Deflection, to decide that the word does not fall under any one of 
the other deflections, as it does to decide under which one of the other 
deflections any particular word may fall ; for the pupil must ascertain 
in what way a word should be spelled before he can say that it does 
not fall under some one of the fixed rules in one of the other deflec- 
tions. The advantage which results from the Neuter Deflection is 
that it enables the teacher to drill the pupil in spelling frame- 
work with as much ease and method as he drills him in any other part 
of English Syntax. 

It is not important that the pupil should be furnished with a great 

number of words of false spelling ; by this plan he can inspect the 

spelling of each word in a section. It may be proper, however, to give 

a few exercises adapted to the several deflections ; — these will be given 

! after the following specimen in the use of the different deflections. 

" Thus the Bobber will pass by this Mill. 1 * 

Thus,. . . .a monogram, of the Rejecting Deflection. 

the, a monogram, of the Neuter Deflection. 

robber,. . . .an amphogram, of the Repeating Deflection. 

will, a monogram, of the Repeating Deflection. 

pats, a monogram, of the Repeating Deflection. 

by, a monogram, of the Neuter Deflection. 

this, a monogram, of the Rejecting Deflection. 

mill, . .a monogram, of the Repeating Deflection. 
T2 



232 

M Permit this lad to visit a skilful surgeon" 

Permit,. . . .an amphogram, of the Rejecting Deflection, 

this, a monogram, of the Rejecting Deflection. 

lad, a monogram, of the Rejecting Deflection. 

to, a monogram, of the Neuter Deflection. 

visit, an amphogram, of the Rejecting Deflection. 

a, a monogram, of the Neuter Deflection. . 

skilful, an amphogram, of the Rejecting Deflection. 

surgeon, ... an amphogram, of the Rejecting Deflection. 

Exercises. 

1. It is nott a great merit to spel wel. 

2. Jacob worshipped his Creater, leaning on the topp of 

his staf. 
8. Your maners should neither be gros nor exceesively 
returned. 

4. A carr is a chariott of warr, or a smal cariage of bur- 

den. 

5. Butt he was writing the names of druggSv 

6. The humm of this tune wass cheerring. 

7. I se the fin of thiss fish. 

8. Many trapps are sett to ensnare the feet of yooth. 

9. Many famiJys air suported bi thee symple busines of 

makeing matts. 

[We aught fto bring our fancys^} (within the limitts) 
(off reson.) 

(If though art seaking) (for the liveing) (amungst the 
ded,) [though weryest tbiself] (in vane.) 

[A carr signifies a chariot] (of wor,) (or a smal cariage) 
(off burden.) 

(Inn the names) (of druggs) (and plants,) [a misstake 
(in a word) may indanger life.] 

Nor undelightful is the ceaseless humm. 

(To him) (who muses) (trough the woods) (at noon.) 

[The finn (of a fish) is the limb,] (by which he balances 
his body,) (and mooves) (in the warter.) 

[Guteral sounds are those] (that air pronounced) (inn 
thee throt.) 

[Feters are chains] (for the legs.) 

[A halfpenny is a coper coyn] ^of which) (fore make too 
penny ».) 

[Loos though no time] ( — yow shud despach a mes- 
enger ^too seaze hym,) (hoo has disonestly taken your 
eloke.) 



233 

II, SYNCRATOLOGY. 

Syncratology is that part of Syntax, which teaches the 
conjunctive powers and characters of individual words. 

PARTS OF SPEECH. 

There are two parts of speech ; viz. Cormos and 
Ramus. 

I. CORMOS. 

The Cormos is a foundation word in the frame- work of 
a section, or a sentence ; as, [He went] (unto the mount) 
(of Olives.) 

n. RAMUS. 

The Ramus is a word which has a constructive depen- 
dence upon another word ; as, [He then went] (unto the 
Mount) (of Olives.) 

WORD CONJECTION. 

Note. Word Connection is an exercise in which the pupil conjects 
the inferior words to their respective superiors according to their cor- 
mos and ramus relation. 

Word Connection is the distribution of the words of a Section into 
parts of speech, and the expression of their Rank and Relation. 

Rank and Relation of the Rami. 

The rank of a Ramus respects its near or remote rela- 
tion to the Cormos. There are five ranks. 

The relation of the Ramus respects the number of words 
to which the Ramus belongs. There are two relations, 
yiz. Mono and Plus. 

Illustration. 
1 
cold weather. A ramus of the first rank, belonging 
to weather. 
2.1 1 

too cold weather. A ramus, two constructive degrees 
from weather, and one from cold, 
3.2.1 2.1 1 

much too cold weather. A ramus, three constructive degrees 
from weather, two from cold, and 
one from tw. 
4.3.2.1 3.2.1 2.1 1 

very much too cold weather. A ramus, four constructive degrees 

from weather, three from cold, two 
from too, and one from much. 
5A3.2.1 4 3.2.1 3.2.1 2.1 1 

this boy's mother's father's brother's son. A ramus, five constructive 

degrees from son, four 
from br oilier'' s, three from 
father's, two from mo- 
therms, and one from boy' 9 



234 

CHAPET I.— Cormos. 
A Cormos is a foundation word. 

It may be seen from an examination of the different cormi upon the 
Theorem, that entire sections may become cormi. It may also be 
seen upon the theorem cormi, that the semisection may become a cor- 
mos. These facts are presented by placing pictorial sections, and pic- 
torial semisections upon Cormos F, and Cormos X. The hand which 
seems to be compressing these miniature pictorial sections, by means 
of a brace, is designed to represent the mind in the act of grouping 
words into a section which is taken as a cormos. The manner 
of taking the pictorial section is collective, not disjunctive. The brace 
compresses the various parts into one mass, into one group. And, as 
the mind takes the verbal section which becomes a cormos, in the 
mass, this manner of seizing the pictorial sections upon the different 
theorem cormi, shows the conjunctive state into which the mind throws 
the words of the verbal section in making it a cormos. 

A section becomes a cormos from the foundational frame-work rela- 
tion which the entire section bears to a single word. (Remember tJiis.) 

1. In the following Concordance every variety of Cormi, is presented. 

2. The Cormos which represents a section, has the character called 
a section before it; as, § it. 

3. The section, or sections which are a cormos have one of the the- 
orem cormos letters in them ; as, The second commandment is 
( u thou shalt love thy neighbor) (as thyself,' 11 X.) 

4. When the sectional cormos is a secormos, it has F ; as, [Thou 
shalt love thy neighbor] (as thyself F) is the second commandment.] 

1. [" His disciples said, (who then can be saved" X?)] 

2. [F (" Thou shalt love the Lord") is the first com- 
mandment.] 

3. [The first commandment is, (" Thou shalt love the 
Lord X.)] 

4. [The first commandment is, § that] (" Thou shalt 
love the Lord," &c.) 

5. [F For God ( to do wrongs is impossible.] 

6. [§It is impossible] (for God to do wrong F.) 

I. [Have^/ow read (the Sonship of Jesus Christ?) X,] 

The titles of books, &c. which comprise two or more words, are 
cormi; as, " Brown's Remains,'" " Report of Sunday Schools ;" " Ed- 
wards on Redemption" " Sonship of Jesus Christ." 

8. [F. yTo forgive our enemies j is divine.] 

9. [§ It is divine y to forgive our enemies.)] 

10. [I desire \to return now.) X] 

II. [F. \To return now) is my desire.] 

12. [F. Is \to give tribute) (unto Cesar) lawful ?] 

13. [/wish (for \to return immediately.) F.)] 



235 

14. [F. (For \Jo return immediately, j) is for \to obey his 
orders/ X.] 

15. [7] wish (for {to obey his orders,) F.)] 

16. [/desire yto obey his orders, j X.] 

17. [_§It is said § that] (the President is sick.) 

18. [" Now we know § that~] (thou hast a Devil.") 

19. [Command thou § £/m£] (these stones be made 

20. [For 7 will send all my plagues'] (upon thine head) 
( , § £Aa£) (they may know § £/i«£) (there is none) ( , 

, like) (, me) (in the land.) 

21. [And § ft came v to pass, (in those days) § £/iGtf] 
(there went out a decree) ( , , § £/m£) (all the world 
should be taxed.) 

22. [§ It is so] (with me) ( , , , § that) (I can 
not attend.) 

23. [" And § ft was revealed (unto him) § that] (he 
should not see death before) (he had seen the Lord's 
Christ.") 

24. [" Now § it came ^to pass; (on a certain day) § 
that] (he entered) (into a ship") 

25. [He told me v to read the letter/] (to him ;) (and 7 
did § it so well) ( , , , § that) (he gave ( , me) 
much praise.) 

26. [«#// (£/m£ relates to man) is matter] (of progres- 
sion.) 

27. ( , Much) (as man desires) [a little will answer.} 
[A little will answer] (/or the much) (which man desires.) 

28. [They saw eac/i o^/ier as] (they went out.) 

29. [He was industrious] ( §which every one (t#Ao knew 
Aim) admitted.) 

30. [Let , every one v , attend/] (to one thing) 
(at one time.) 

31. [One should rise early.] 

31. [For one is your father] (which is) (in heaven.) 

33. [These ones are mine ;] (but those are his.) 

His and mine as used here are the same in frame-work relation. 

34. (If he will give ( , me) my book) [7 will give ( , 
him) his , .] 

35. {They saw one another.] 

36. [The writing (of the copy) is according] (to my 
orders^) 

37. [His buying ( , goods) occasioned his embarrass- 
ment.] 



236 

38. [" Writes" is a seramus.] 

39. [" J" is a cormos.] 

40. [" But" is a coramus.] 

41. [A Cormos is a foundation word] (in the frame* 
work) (of a section.) [§ 77ia£ w,] (a cormos basis.) 

42. [That , (/Aa£ that man said,) was that , 
(7/ia£ that man should not have said.) 

43. (What!) 01 &c. &c. 

44. (In the ciVy) [we are entertained] (by the works) (of 
»wflnj — (in the country) (.,,,) (by the works) 
(of God.) [7%/sis the presence] (of nature) (that , 

, ,) (of art) — (£/iese astonish ws ;j (those we com- 
prehend.) 

Note. TAts, £to, ^ese, and f/tose are here cormi of the unnamitive 
genus, representing the several cormi of the namilive genus for which 
they stand. 

CORMOS TERMINATION. 

Jige, ard, cian, dom, I, er, hood, iar, ing, kin, ling, 
ment, ness 9 ock, or, rick, ry, sion, Hon, ty, wick, &c. 

Cormi are made from rami by giving the rami the cormos 
terminations — as, from the ramus, detract, comes the cor- 
mos, detraction. 

Convert the following rami into cormi by the use af the 
cormos terminations. 

Subtract, good, emanate, manifest, submit, local, long, 
brave, knave, elastic, forgive, tempt, active, adhere, remem- 
ber, debase, strong, heroic, begin, induce, lovely, beautiful, 
imperfect, elucidate, injure, fierce, manly. 

The following cormos terminations are incorporated with 
cormi to throw them from the person, to something which 
pertains to him — age, ate, dize, dom, hood, rick, ry, ship, 
wick, y. Patron patronage, Tetrarch tetrarcha/e, Merchant 
merchandize, King kingdom, Priest priesthood, Bishop 
bishopncA:, Smith smithery, Slave slavery, Steward stew- 
ards/*//?, Bailiff baili^'dc, Cutler cutlery, Grocer, grocery. 

The following cormos terminations are generally incor- 
porated with cormi — some, however, may be affixed to 
rami. But whether affixed to rami or to cormi, they are 
employed to change the application of the word from the 
thing which pertains to the person, to the person himself — 
ard, ee, er, ion, ist, or, man. Drunk, drunkard, Drun- 
kenness drunkard, Bail bailee, Teach teacher, Physic phy- 
sician, Botany botamV, Act actor, Create creator, Trade 
tradesman. 



237 

CHAPTER ir. 
Sentensic Cormos, Insentensic Cormos. 

A Sentensic Cormos is one which forms the sentential 
elements of ^a Seramus into a full sentence character ; as, 
Solomon built the temple." 

a S e e i35 e ApPGa1, PaffG 179, 144 ' See aIs ° the EngIish S ^ nta *' 
2 An Insentensic Cormos is one which renders no aid 
in forming the sentence character; as, "Solomon built 
the temple. 

« 1*137 ****** Pag€ 179, 158 * See ah0 the EngUsh Syntax ' 

CONCORDANCE. 

In this concordance the learner can find much aid in many instan- 
ces in deciding whether the cormos is sentensic, or insentensic. For 
instance, should he meet with the word, that, in its cormos rank, and 
find himself unable to determine whether it is a sentensic, or an insen- 
tensic cormos, he will find this cormos in this concordance, presented 
under all its variety of constructive character— hence he will find his 
own case decided by being marked with F, or X 

F, in the truncus and seclados, indicates that the cormos over 
which it is placed, is sentensic. F, in the inseclados, indicates that the 
cormos is insentensic * X is confined to the truncus, and the secla- 
dos, and indicates that the cormos is insentensic. 

The section (§) before an unnamitive indicates that the cormos 
represents one, or more, entire sections. But this character 6 over a 
section indicates that the section is taken in the mass,— in gross, as a 
cormos. 6 

F 

1. [§ That (man is mortal) has never been denied.] 

2. [" I heard § that] (the Greeks had defeated the Turks.") 

3. [You alledge § that] (the man is innocent)— ( , , 

, § that) (he is not.) 

4. [He was not that light ;] (but was sent to bear wit- 

F 

Shtblrev t Hght) (f ° r § that) (al1 men (through him) 

F x 

5. [And \ it came to pass {. that] (while (they communed 

Although all inseclados cormi are ever insentensic, yet it may be 
well enough to place JPover those which are presented as criterions 
in deciding the sentensic, or insentensic character. 



( \ uu- 

\ \ e wurW) wn bora ) 

WOO 

v 

\ 

ID 

1 1 r 

\ - work 

inula 

s> 

v 

14. [It min I know ; 

i - 

v 

is I 

I- I 

\ v 

I 

IV \N ^ I •**•. 

v 






'/MU 

i i 

,< \,U*'ti< hroiiprlil 'unto J"",, ./■).< vMUk 
i x / 

( , | thai) (hfl ihoul/J put hi I hand A 

. I K • 

/ 

fli I («/< ( ,//.,] [Ullt ./'• '/•: .iftj4, 

/ / 

'//'/ , UUlt vMUl/rm , ,, iarulfr/rldd , them 

i i i 

i", I locOYfU UntO "" ., I'" {of ■."/'/'■ . ) 'i-.lln I a ■"!',/,, , 

[oj hea\ 
Hanoi 

Ud t >■■■■■ \\ U '"/A. 

tfliilii \tl I I' n,j,'n 

Beta ■ mpL i < . " •'-'///' / ^"^ 

chUdftn to "<><" . and forliid tli&m not Ut conn u/nU ffk , f'>< •■. 

Iln I ,,, ■><!<,,,, ',) l,< n. < 
i I 

'/A I thai j I 

• blaod , 

fiat , is . (hat) 'to u 

i i 

n,<, ■> ni > . that ) 

wf foe wmMtiTb'- A* * 

motUi Hpm tfoM u> iluit maton I ■ •■:.•. >i,<,i ,,,i 

I hi- ,1,1,1,' till hi',','/ ' 

'I ■: i.ho .-.'., • / \im 

I I I 

I 
/ / 
that) lit * i (<>i my 

■null.. 

I 

/ .', ti t/Um 

I 
/./ \ To what > ' i< i < i , "• .- Impw tatUn 

■■:.< United ■ Uatt*] 

i,v\iv\i#, * 7b what izti 

, i . 



240 

X F 

28. Who art thou ? 

That is, thou art who ? 

F X 

29. [The wages (of sin) are death.] 

F F 

30. [Death is the wages] (of sm.) 

F § «**| i2 

31. [\Tb forgive our enemies > is divine.] 

§ F § X 

32. \\To reform) is K to grow better.)] 

f x 

33. He was crowned /c?Vig\ 

f x x 

34. [//e will make him a good scholar.] Or, 
t f f x 

34. \He will make ( , him) a good scholar.] 

• F F F 

35. [ T/iey came] (to Peter) (and , said) (cZo^ no^ 

f § x 

2/owr master pay tribute XI) 

F X 

36. [fie saith yes.] Or thus — 

F § X 

37. [He saith {yes he does pay tribute. X)] 

Note. — Here the entire section, " yes he does pay tribute." becomes 
the insecormos of saith. 

F X F 

[And when (they had heard the king) they departed :] 
F f x F F 

(and lo , (the star (which they saw) (in the East,) went 

F f " F F 

before them till) (it came,) (and , stood (over , , ) 

F 
where) (the young child was.) X. 

Note. — Here the italic sections are all taken together as the inse- 
cormos of the seramus, lo which is synonymous with behold, " and lo 
thou." (Thou represents the reader.) § 

1. [" His disciples said, (who then can be saved" X?)~\ 

2. [F ( Li Thou shalt love the Lord") is the first com- 
mandment.] § 

3. [The first commmondment is (" Thou shall love the 
Lord. X )] x 

4. [The first commandment is § that] (" Thou shalt 
love the Lord," &c.) § 

5. j~F ( For God to do wrong\ is impossible.] 

§ 

6. [§ // is impossible] (for God to do wrong F.) 
5 § 

7. [Have you read (the Sonship of Jesus Christ?) X] 



241 
Part. II. 

Division of the Ramus Class. 

The Rami are divided into two great classes, viz. 
Sentensic, and Insenlensic. For brevity, the Sentensic 
Rami are called Se-rami, and the Insenlensic, Inserami. 

1. The Seramus is a word which contains the elements 
of a sentence character ; as, Moses smote the rock, Solo- 
mon built the temple. 

2. An Inseramus is a ramus which does not contain the 
elements of a sentence character ; as, Moses smote the 
rock, Solomon built a temple, (the, a.) (See the Demon- 
strator, See page 136 ) 

Rule I. 

A Ramus which can be tensified is a Seramus ; as, be, 

was. been, write, wrote, written, cuts, cut. 

TENSIFICATION. 

Tensification is the regular process of putting a Sera- 
mus through all its tenses ; as, Present, write, writes, wriU 
tth, writest, writing. Imperfect, have, has, hath, or hast 
written. Perfect, wrote. Prior-perfect, had, or hadst writ- 
ten. Future, will, wht, shall, or shalt write. Prior-future, 
will or wilt have, shall or shalt have written, 

BE. 

1. Present, be, am, art, is, are. 

2. Imperfect, have, has, hath, or hast been. 

3. Perfect, was, wast, were. 

4. Priorperfect, had ox hadst been. 

5. Future, will ox will, shall, or shaltbe. 

6. Priorfuture, will ox wilt have, shall or shalt have been. 

It is not expected that the learner will enter into the 
process of regularly putting a seramus through all its 
tenses here. If the new form which he may give a ra- 
mus, respects time, he may pronounce the word a sera- 
mus. 

Caution i. — Be particular to ascertain whether a new 
form gives a different time. In the spirit of this Rule, a 
mere form variation is nothing — tensification requires a 



242 

different time to every different form; as, reads, read, 
write, wrote. 

Caution ii.— Bear in mind that almost every seramus 
has five present tense forms, and that a variation from one 
of these present tense forms to another of them, is not a 
variation in time ; as, write, writes, wrileth, ivritest, writ- 
ing. Hence, it will be well to require the pupil to give 
such a new form to the ramus as will indicate a different 
time ; as, write, wrote. 

The tense variations are produced by the aid of the fol- 
lowing letters :— Jl, I), E, JY, 0, T, U. These are called 
the tense letters. 

Say thus — Sing, sang, sung-, a Seramus. Rule 1. 

The teacher should impress upon the mind of his pupil 
the importance of commencing the variation of the 
seramus, at the present tense — should he find the word 
printed in any other tense, he should begin his varia- 
tions at the present; as, in wrote — he wrote to me — write y 
ivrote, written. 



1. Sing — sing, sang, sung. 32. 

2. Is — is, was, been. 23. 

3. Art — art, wast, been. 24. 

4. Ring — ring, rang, rung, 25. 

5. Know — know, knew, known. 26. 
(\ Go — go, went, gone. 27. 

7. Drawn — draw, drew, drawn. 28. 

8. Fly— -fly, flew, flown. 29. 

9. Drink — drink, drank, drunk. 30. 

10. Begin — begin, began, begun. 31. 

11. Leave — leave, left. 32. 

12. May — may, might. 33. 

13. DeaJ— deal, dealt. 34. 

14. Dwell— dwell, dwelt. 35. 

15. Spill — spill, spilt. 36. 
J 6. Feel— feel, felt. 37. 

17. Send — send, sent. 38. 

18. Be — be, was, been. 39. 

19. Am — am, was, been. 40. 

20. Art — art, toast, been. 41. 

21. Strew — strew, strewed, 4% 



Show — show, shew, shews 
Love — love, loved. 
Has — has, had. 
Hast — hast, hadst. 
Have — have, had. 
Work — work, worked. 
Will — will, would. 
Shall — shall, should. 
Can — can, could. 
Get — get, got. 
Be — be, was, been. 
Am — am, was, been. 
Art — are, was, been. 
Is — is, was, been. 
Are — are, were, been. 
Been — be, was, been. 
Was — is, was, been. 
Were — are, were, been. 
Do — do, did, done. 
Done — do, did, done. 
Dare— dare, dared, 



243 



EXERCISES. 

The words which are placed before the tense letters, are varied by 
the use of these letters. And the letter put first, is used in the first 
variation. The number of periods shows the number of variations 
whiGh the same word may have. 

METHOD. 

Give — give, gave, given, — a Seramus. 

PREPARED EXERCISES. 

Page 242 is a Key to these Exercises. 

22. Show . E N 

23. Love . D 

24. Has 

25. Hast 

26. Have 

27. Work 

28. Will 

29. Shall 

30. Can 

31. Get . 

32. Be . A N 

33. Am 

34. Art 

35. Is 

36. Are . E 

37. Been* . A 

38. Was 
A N 39. Were . E 

40. Do . I 

41. Done 
D 42. Dare . D.- 



1. 
2. 
3. 
I. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 
18. 
19. 
20. 
21. 



bing 

Is 

Art 

Ring 

Know 

Go 

Draw 

Fly 

Drink 

Begin 

Leave 

May 

Deal 

Dwell 

Spill 

Feel 

Send 

Be 

Am 

Art 

Strew 



A 



E 



A 



U 

N 

U 

N 



U 



* Begin the variation of the word at the present tense in all cases ; 
| as, is, was, been, (not been, was, is.) 

TT 



U 2 



244 



The following 


serami have no tense 


variations — hence 


defective. 






Away, 


Forecast, 


Shred, 


Beset, 


Hit, 


Shut, 


Bet, 


Hurt, 


Slit, 


Beware, 


Knit, 


Split, 




Let, 


Spread, 


Bespread, 


Lo, 


Sweat, 


Burst, 


Off, 


Thrust, 


Cast, 


Ought, 


Up, 


Chat, 


Put, 


Wet, 


Cost. 


Rid, 


Wist, 


Cut, 


Set, 


Wit, 


Dispread, 


Shed, 


Wot. 



An Inseramus is a ramus which does not contain the 
first principles of a sentence character ; as, Moses smote 
the rock. 

Rule II. An Inseramus is one which can not be tensi- 
fied ; as, the, a, my, in, to, high, low, higher, lower. 

Specimen — correctly, an inseramus. 
Rule II. That ramus which cannot be tensified is an 
inseramus. 

EXERCISES. 

Correctly, softly, prudently, well, accordingly, badly, 
and, though, hew, and, dealt, and, although, hang, nearer, 
verily, surely, indeed, positively, no, not, nay, never, not, 
clad, knit, mowed, farther, many, clothed, near, hew, knit, 
why, rather, sooner, chiefly, especially, so, as, equally, 
thus, like, otherwise, else, differently, unlike, most, nearly, 
partially, partly, scarcely, hardly, sparingly, scantily, 
less, much, bountifully, liberally, catch, best, deal, clothe, 
worst, dig, clothe, least, dwell, crow, most, dwell, crow, 
least, or, last, engrave, dare, nearest, or, next, gild, dare, 
farthest, gild, deal, foremost, or, first, gird, better, dig, gird, 
worse, perfect, evil, or, ill, catched, best, less, crave, little, 
much, therefore, and, yet, hewed, former, bad, good, knit, 
as, ill, side-wise, how, certainly, truly, undoubtedly, yes, 
loaded, and, so, later, caught, dared, as, as, well, rived, far, 
participate, for, although, crew, learned, hang, late, at, all, 
crowed, namely, universally, together, generally, conjunc- 
tively, off, separately, apart, asunder, singly, alone, apiece, 



245 

ma^e, girded, provided therefore, laboured, again, though, 
fore, yet, hereafter, already, hitherto, lastly, afterwards, 
girt, digged, provided, that, gilded, but, though, dug, that, 
as, well, as, engraved, but, although, but, then, either, since, 
being, also, or, whereas, save, that, both, than, wherefore, 
besides, dwelled, as, but however, unless, beside, at, never- 
theless, lest, shaped, around, notwithstanding, dwelt, past, 
into, shaped, of, after, but, moreover, least, sawed, because, 
amongst, howbeit, sheared, across, not, only, sawed, nay, 
likewise, inasmuch, nathless, hew, if, among, that, shaved, 
soon, primarily, previously, at, once, by, and, by, whereby, 
hanged, in, excepting, be, is, toward, shave, [against, for, 
touching, behind, during, neither, without, except, graved, 
but, under, new, within, hung, throughout, respecting, by, 
no, betwixt, regarding, with, towards, from, beneath, save, 
atween, did, between, unto, an, underneath, atwixt, put, 
long, athwart, was, not, never, in, but, are, or, art, or, of, 
over, were, wot, burst, cut, may, might could, would. 

Note. — All the words upon ramus H on the Theorem, are 
! Serarni — 

Here, there, where, away, whereon, wherein, in, at, on, 
thither, whither, hitherward, whitherward, hence, thence, 
gilt, thence, yet, except, save, otherwise, whether, or, even, 
wherever, out, forth, forthwith, of, to, ahead, behind, to 
and fro, now, when, then, whenever, after, as, afore, 
never, ever, aforetime, about, straightly, immediately, 
wherewith, thereby, first, secondly, thirdly, again, once, 
twice, perhaps, peradventure, likely, possibly. 

Subdivision of the Inserami. 

The great class of Inserami is divided into four families ; 
namely, 

1. Duramus, 

2. Monoramus, 

3. Suhramus, and 

4. Co-ramus. 

1. A Duramus is an Inseramus which has the capacity 
to be conjected to both kinds of cormi ; as, The man saw 
the child, A boy found a knife, Good teachers generally 
make good scholars. 

Note. — " Both kinds of Cormi" This phrase means the Sentensic, 
and the insentensic cormos, the Secormos, and the Insecormos. The is 
conjected to the Secormos, man, and to the Insecormos, child. A is 
conjected to the Secormos, boy, and to the Insecormos, knife. Good is 



246 

conjected to the Secormos, teachers, and to the Insecormos, scholars. 
The, a, and good, then, have the double, the twofold capacity which 
distinguishes the duramus class of words. 

2. Monoramus. 

A Monoramus is an Inseramus which has the capacity 
of being conjected to the Insecormos only ; as, I heard of 
him, the clouds are over our heads. 

3. Subramus. 

A Subramus is an Inseramus which is conjected to 
another ramus ; as, very fine pupils, He writes slowly, and 
exact. 

4. Co-ramus. 

A Co-ramus is an Inseramus which is conjected to an 
assemblage of words only ; as, Man was made upright — 
but he fell. 

Directions. — Turn to page 141, commence near the 
close of the page, and read, or rather examine most cri- 
tically all that is said upon the Coramus, Monoramus, 
Duramus, and Subramus. Read also chapter I, page 108, 
on the Coramus. After which give great attention to the 
following Rules and Cautions. 

PROVING RULES. 



That word which will answer the question that is formed 
by placing the first Seramus after who, or what, is a Se- 
cormos ; as, Moses smote the rock. Who smote ? 

Moses. 

Caution i. — Be careful to use but two words in forming 
the question. 

Caution ii. — Be particularly careful to understand the 
proposition, that you may be able to put such a question 
as that particular Cormos which you desire to prove, will 
answer. 



That word which will answer the question that is 
formed by placing the sentensic cormos before all the sera- 
mi in the section, and whom or what alter them, is an Inse- 
cormos ; as, Moses smote the rock. Moses smote what ? 
Rock. 



247 

Caution i. — Be careful to prove at least in your wind, 
the Sentensic Cormos by Rule 1, before you attempt to 
prove your Insentensic Cormoa by Ru 

Caution ii. — Be particular to ascertain how many Cormi 
there are in your section ; for, if your section is a Trun- 
cus, or a Seclados, and you have but one Cormoa, it fol- 
lows that this or\f- is sentensic. But if your section is a 
Truncus, or a SecJados, and has two (Jormi, it follows 
that one is sentensic, and the other insentensic. 

Caution hi. — Be particular to put such a question, as 
that connos which you desire to prove will answer. For 
instance — you wish to prove apples in the following con- 
struction : — Apples John picked. Who picked ! apples ! 

This is nonsense, for this answer makes the apples 
pick. 

Who picked 1 John. 

This answer is not nonsense — but, as you do not wish to 
prove the word, John, you have not put the proper ques- 
tion. Put such a question as that cormos will answer, 
which you wish to prove: hence as you wish to prove the 
word apples, you should put the following question 
which is dictated by the sense of the section, and con- 
structed according to Rule 2. John picked what \ Apples, 

RULE m. 

Every cormos in an inseclados, is insentensic ; as, of 
him. 

Questions. — 1. How is the question, which proves the 
cormos to be sentensic, formed] 

2. How is the question to be constructed, to prove that 
a cormos is insentensic I 

3. Is the cormos in an inseclados always insentensic 1 

Specimen of proving ly the above Rules. 

" Charles saw hats." 

Proved thus — Jfftosaw? Charles. A Secormos. Rule 1. 
Charles saw what 1 hats. An lnsecormos. Rule 2. 

RULE IV. 



A Ramus which can be tensijied is a Seramus; as, be, 
was, been, ivrite, wrote, written, cuts, cut. 

Caution i. — Be particular to ascertain whether a new 

form gives a different time. In the spirit of this Rule, a 

mere form variation is nothing — tensification requires a 

different time to be given to every different form ; as, 

I reads, read, 



248 

Caution ii. — Bear In mind that almost every Seramus 
has five present tense forms, and that a variation from one 
of these present tense forms to another of them, is not a 
variation in time ; as, write, writes, writelti, writest, 
writing, 

RULE V. 

The Inseramus, except that which can be conjected to 

thou, which can be conjected to tiling, things, man, or 
Adams, is a .Dura.mus; as, the thing, those things, an 
Adams, Mr. Adams, John Adams. 

Caution i. — Be particular to see whether the word does 
not fall under Rule 6 — for all Monorami may be referred 

to things ; as, of tilings, among things. 



That Inseramus which can be referred to them, is a 
Monoramus; as, lie went unto the Mount of Olives. Unto 
them, of them, . 

Caution. — Be particular to ascertain whether your sec- 
tion is ah Inseclados. 

RULE VII, 

That Inseramus which can be conjected to high, heavy, 
strong, black, man's, or men's, — was, fiy, look, lire, or 
spoken is a Subramus ; as, much higher, too heavy, quite 
strong, ebony black, there was, lly high, look here, spoken 
of 

Caution. — Do not attempt to refer a Cormos to any of 
the words mentioned in this Rule, You are cautioned 
against this, because even teachers, from too slight atten- 
tion to the Rule, not unfrequently attempt to prove the 
Cormi /, they, it, by saying, / live, they fly, &c. 

Such do not apprehend the Rule aright. Their practice 
indicates that the spirit of the Rule is mere euphony. The 
Rule, however, is replete with precision, and direction. 
For it says, almost expressly, that the word which is to 
be proyed Is the inferior Ramus; and it clearly affirms 
that the word to bo proved, must be referred -to y///, lire, 
&c. But / is so far from referring to live that live refers 
to /. 

RULE V11I. 

That Inseramus which can be conjected to the section, 
They are there, or to any Seclados, is a Coramus ; as, John 
is here; but they are there. 



249 

Jl full specimen of proving by the preceding Rules, 

[" The power (of speech) is a faculty] ( , , peculiar) 
(to man; ; (and , was bestowed; (on him) ( \>y his 

beneficent Creator; (for the greatest , ) (and , , , ) 
( , , most excellent uses;) (but (alas) how often do 
we pervert it; (to the worst , ) (of purposes.") 

TTie power is a faculty. 

Proved thus — The thing, a Duramus. Rule 5s. 

tower — What is .' power — a Secormos. Rule 1. 

is — is, was, been, a Seramus. Rule 4. 

a — a thing, a Duramus. ituJe 5. 

faculty — Power is what! faculty, an insecorrnos. Rule 2. 

" of speech." 

of— of them, a Monoramus. Rule 0. 

speech — in an Inseclados — an Insecorrnos. Rule 3. 

u which is peculiar*" 

which — What is? which, a Secormos. Rule 1. 
is — is, was, been, a Seramus. Rule 4. 

Peculiar — 'peculiar thing, a Duramus. Rule 5. 

11 to man" 

to— to them, a Monoramus. Rule 0. 
man, an Insecorrnos. Rule £ 

" and i£ m;«* bestowed" 

and — and "they are there," a Coram us. Rule 8. 
A — What was! tfc, a Secormos. Rule 1. 
Was — is, was, been, a Seramus. Rule 4. 
bestowed — bestow, bestowed, a Seramus. Rule 4. 

" on him." 

on — on them, a Monoramus. Rule 6. 

him — /um, in an Inseclados, an insecorrnos. Rule 3. 

" by his beneficent Creator " 

by — by them, a Monoramus. Rule 6. 
his — his things, a Duramus. Ruk 5. 
J beneficent — beneficent things, a Duramus. Rule 5. 
Creator — in an inseclados, an insecorrnos. Rule 3. 

"for the greatest uses" 

for— for them, a Monoramus. Rule 6. 
the — the things, a Duramus. Rule 5. 
greatest — greatest thing, a Duramus. Rule 5. 
uses— in an inseclados, an Insecorrnos. Rule 3. 



250 

" and it was bestowed" 

and — and " they are there," a Coramus. Rule 8. 
it — What was? it, a Secormos. Rule 1. 
was — is, was, been, a Seramus. Rule 4. 
bestowed— bestow, bestowed, a Seramus. Rule 4. 

"for the most excellent uses," 

for— for them, a Monoramus. Rule 6. 
the — the things, a Duramus. Rule 5. 
most— most high, a Subramus. Rule 7. 
excellent — excellent things, a Duramus. Rule 5. 
uses — in an Inseclados, an Insecormos. Rule 3. 

u but how often do we 'pervert it t" 

but — but " they are there," a Coramus. Rule 8. 
how — how high, a Subramus. Rule 7. 
often — often fly, a Subramus. Rule 7. 
do — do, did, a Seramus. Rule 4. 
we — Who do] we, a Secormos. Rule 1. 
pervert— pervert, perverted, a Seramus. Rule 4. 
it — We pervert what] it, an Insecormos. Rule 2. 
" alas" — " alas," in an Inseclados, hence an Insecormos. 
Rule 3. 

" to the worst purpose ." 

to — to them, a Monoramus. Rule 6. 

the — £7ie thing, a Duramus. Rule 5. 

worst — worst things, a Duramus. Rule 5. 

purpose — in an Inseclados, hence an Inscormos. Rule 3. 

" of purposes." 

of— of them, a Monoramus. Rule 6. 

purposes — in an Inseclados, hence an Insecormos. Rule 3. 

The Proof Rules Repeated. 

1. That word which will answer the question that is 
formed by placing the first Seramus after who, or what, 
is a Secormos. 

2. That word which will answer the question that is 
formed by placing the Secormos before all the Serami in 
the section, and whom, or what, after them, is an Inse- 
cormos. 

3. Every Cormos in an Inseclados, is an Insecormos. 

4. A Ramus which can be tensified is a Seramus. 

5. The Inseramus, except that which can be conjected 
to them, that will make sense with thing-, things, man, dr 
Adams, is a Duramus. 



251 

6. That Inseramus which can be corrected to them, is a 
Monoramus. 

7. That Inseramus which can be conjected to high, 
heavy, strong, black, marl's, or men's, was, fly, look, live, 
or spoken, is a Subramus. 

8. That Inseramus which can be conjdbted to the trun- 
cus, They are there, or to any Seclados, is a Coramus. 

EXERCISES. 

To be proved exactly according to the preceding specimen, 
with an application of the Rules. 



1. 

2. 

3. 

God.) 



That man is old ;] (but he is not wise.) 

The birds have flown] (over those very high trees.) 

Paul, (and Silas , , ) sang praises] (to 

1. John Picked apples. 

2. Apples John picked. 

3. Charles saw hats. 

4. Hats Charles saw. 

i • 5. Men build houses. 

6. Julia reads books. 

7. Peter makes shoes. 

8. Nancy makes coats. 

[John picked apples] (which I saw.) 

[John picked apples.] 

Proved thus — Who picked? John — a Secormos. Rule 1. 
! John picked what ! apples — an Insecormos. Rule 2. 

(" which I saw.") 

j Proved thus — I saw what 1 which — an Insecormos. Rule 2. 
' Who saw? I— a Secormos. Rule 1. 

1. [John saw the boy] (that hurt me.) 

2. [James found papers] (which I lost.) 

3. [They have such silk] (as pleases me.) 
What pleases ? as, 

4. [Johnson has such silk] (as I like.) 
I like what ? as, 

5. [The fruit (which falls off) is ripe.] 

6. [The fruit (which John gathered) is ripe,] 
W 



252 

Charles saw John's hat. 

Proved thus — John's things — a Duramus. Rule 5. 

1. Apple trees produce apples. 

2. NewJ^ooks may be entertaining. 

3. He is entertaining his company. 

4. Whose book is that book ? 

5. Which man did he call 1 

6. The present tense marks present time. 

7. [A boy brought the note] (which I read.) 

8. Those young iadies wrote these beautiful lines. * 

9. [Get , thy book] (John.) 

10. I want American, black silk hats. 

11. That house has the best iron, hollow ware. 

Directions. — For additional exercises, take page 94, 
95, 96, 111, and any others which seem well adapted to 
the process of proving. 

THE CORMOS RESUMED 

Cormi are divided into Namitive, and Unnamiiive. 

1. The Cormos which is actually a name, is of the 
Namitive family; as, John, book, pen, rest, vice, goodness. 

2. The Cormos which is not a name, is of the Unnami- 
tive family ; as, he, it, which, as, that. 

Note. — Now, it is not the name of any thing. But, if a thing should 
be invented, and named it, this Unnamitive would become a Namitive 
in reference to this thing. 

Examine with care all that is said upon namitives, and 
unnamitives under page 157, 158. 

Subdivision of the Namitives. 

Namitives are divided into Family, and Individual ge- 
nera. 

1. The family Cormos is the name of a whole class or 
family of things ; as, man, woman* boy, girl, vice, virtue, 
strength, news, remainder, addition, indignation, conjir* 
mation, &c. (See figure e upon secormos F — also page 
157. 

He is the Washington of America, The Smiths were 
present. 



253 

Note i. — Here the word Washington is used in the sense of the 
word General, and is therefore of the family genus. He is the Wash- 
mgton of the age. That is, he is the distinguished General of this age, 
as Washington was of his. 

Note ii. — The word, Smiths, is used in the sense of the word family. 
The Smiths were present. That is, the family of Smiths. The word, 
Smiths, is a family cormos because it is here made to denote the entire 
family. 

Note hi. — It may be well to say in addition to what has already 
been remarked, that in ascertaining whether a cormos is family, or in- 
dividual, the word must be taken disignologically. (See Disignology, 
page 192.) 

If the cormos should be considered consignologically, any family 
cormos may be converted into an individual one; as, My glove, this 
hat, men's hats, hot iron. 

But the question is, not whether the word, glove, is brought down to 
an individual glove; but whether this cormos when printed alone does 
not mean all gloves. 

1. Glove. 

2. My Glove. 

To say that glove is an individual cormos in the second instance 
merely because my applies it to an individual glove f would be to disre- 
gard the native powers of this cormos— it would be to tell, not what 
this cormos is in itself, but what it is through the restraining agency of 
another word. The question for the pupil is,- has this cormos power 
within itself to apply itself to an individual? If so it is not a family, 
but an individual cormos. 

2. An individual cormos is one which has the power to 
apply itself to an individual of a classy as, Paul, Sarah, 
\ Washington, Smith, To see the sun is pleasant, The 
1 reading of these pages will aid your judgment. 

Note. — Seeing, and reading are individual acts — hence their names 
are individual cormi. (See figure/, Secormos F — also page 157.) 

Subdivision of the Unnamitives. 

There are about sixty of the unnamitive cormi in the 
English phrenod, which are used as the representatives of 
other words. These are presented under page 157 — and 
also upon cormos X. This family c»f unnamitives, is di- 
vided into Exhibilives, and Uncxhibitivcs. These, and those 
are presented under page 159, 

The Exhibitives are subdivided into Senlensic, and In- 
sentensic. These, as well as those, are presented under 
page 1(50. 



254 



OBSERVATIONS, 



As it is said in the "preceding paragraph that the sixty unnamitives in 
the English language represent other words, the advocates for the old 
classification of the parts of speech may ask in "a presumed triumph , 
" Why, then, not continue to call them pronouns ?" 

Answer. — Their representative character is not their characteristic 
mark — Nouns as well as pronouns represent other words. For in- 
stance — »* The machine is ingenious ; it is an engine powerful in ope- 
ration, and useful in effect." Here the noun, engine, stands for the 
noun, machine. A pronoun, says the British English Grammar, is a 
word used to prevent the too frequent repetition of another word. Now, 
in the above instance the word, engine, is used to prevent repeating the 
noun, machine. The common noun, engine, is therefore a pronoun. 

Besides, the unnamitives stand for whole sentences ; and not unfre- 
quently for verbs, adverhs, and adjectives ! Those who would see this 
subject fairly discussed, may find the Appeal somewhat interesting. 

The distinguishing character of these words, usually called pro- 
nouns, is this — they are not names. They who desire to understand 
the whole character of these words may accomplish the object of their 
wish by reading with great care what is said upon their character in 
this work. But no man, woman, or child, can understand this cha- 
racter without thought, without a determination to examine this cha- 
racter till it is so well comprehended that the impropriety of styling 
the words pronouns is clear, and the propriety of calling them unnami- 
tives is plain. (Begin, then, at page 157.) 

Indication, Numeration, and Gender. 

In the communication of ideas the persons themselves are 
appointed, so to speak, by the very nature of the process, to 
two distinct offices, stations, ox functions. The great object 
of speech Mto present propositions — and as there must be 
some one teTform, and present these propositions, so there 
must be some one to give them audience ; as, " Master, I 
have brought unto thee my son, which hath a dumb spirit." 

Here he that is called / forms the following proposition, 
and presents it to him who is denominated Master — 

M I have brought unto thee my son, which hath a dumb 
spirit." 

It may be well to direct the attention of the pupil to the 
fact that neither the son nor the spirit is here appointed to 
any office in carrying on this colloquial intercourse. The 
sentence does not constitute either, the former, or the audi- 
tor of the proposition. The former of the sentence, how- 
ever, has mentioned the son and the spirit both, in the 
proposition which he has presented to the Master. Hence 



255 

it app3ars that although these characters have no appointed 
functional concernment with forming, and auditing the pro- 
position, yet the proposition itself has some concernment 
with them. 

The concernmemt, however, which the sentence has 
with the son, and the dumb spirit, is not confined to them — 
for the sentence has a concernment with every person, or 
thing which is mentioned in it. Hence the sentence, " Mas- 
ter, 1 have brought unto thee, my son which hath a dumb 
spirit" has a concernment with the Master, and with him 
who is indicated by the word, /, as well as with the son 
and the spirit. Every sentence is concerned to a greater or 
less extent with whatever is mentioned in it. 

1. " Can you cure me with your roots f ry 

2. " / am quite sick to-day. Doctor" 

Note. — The first sentence concerns you — the sentence speaks of 
you as the one who is to cure. The same sentence has some concern- 
ment with me — it speaks of me as the one who is to be cured. And the 
same sentence has a concernment with the roots ; for it speaks of them as 
the means of the cure. This concernment which a sentence has with 
every thing- which it mentions, may be denominated a propositioned rela- 
tion. But it should be called perhaps a characterizing relation, for it gives 
each thing which is mentioned in the sentence a particular character. In 
the sentence — " Ca.n'you cure me with your roots" the bearing which 
the sentence has upon you, makes you a physician. The bearing 
which the sentence has upon me, makes me a patient — and that which 
it has upon the roots, a sort of medicine. Thus much for the relation 
which the sentence bears to the things with which it becomes con- 
cerned by the simple means of containing their names. 

Lei us now see how many of these things have a functional con- 
cernment with this sentence itself. The person called you, is consti- 
tuted the auditor of the sentence. The person called J, is constituted 
the author, the former of the sentence. 

But the poor roots* like many politicians, are left without an op- 
pointment — -they have no functional relation to this sentence whatever. 

The functional relations which persons, or things ca» bear to a sen- 
tence are two; namely, Formative and Auditive. 

He that forms the sentence, is of the formative function; and he 
that is constituted the auditor of it, is of the auditive function ; as, 
Can uou cure me with your roots? 

The English phrenod has provided the means of indicating these 
two functions in which persons act in relation to a sentence. The 
language has enabled some few cormi to indicate which person is the 
former ; as, 1, me, us, &c. 

And it has enabled others to indicate which person is constituted 
the auditor ; as, thou, thee you, &c. 

W 2 



256 

And the English phrenod has enabled other cormi to indicate which 
person, or which thing is left without any functional concernment with 
the sentence ; as, he, him, them, &c. &c. &c. Upon the subject of these 
functional indications the cormi are divided into three indicative 
classes ; viz. 

1. Formative \ 

2. .Auditive > Indication. 

3. Sinefunctional j 

1. The eormos that indicates which person is consti- 
tuted the former of the sentence, is of the Formative In- 
dication ; as, " Master, / have brought unto thee my 
son." (I) 

2. The eormos that indicates which person is consti- 
tuted the auditor of the sentence, is of the Auditive Indi- 
cation; as, Master, I have brought my son. (Master.) 

3. The eormos which indicates that the person, or thing 
which it denotes, is neither the former, nor auditor of the 
sentence, is of the Sinefunctional* Indication ; as, Master, 
I have brought my son. (Son.) 

FORMEPOS, AUDEPOS, SIN-EPOS. 

1. Form-e-pos is constructed from formative, and epos, a 
word, and means a word which is of the formative indi- 
cation ; as, I, me, us. 

2. Au-de-pos is constructed from auditive, and epos, a 
word, and signifies a word of the auditive indication ; as, 
ye, you, thee. 

3. Sin-e-pos is constructed from sine-functional, con- 
tracted to sine, and from epos, a word, and means a word 
of the Sine-functional Indication ; as, he, she, her, it, book. 

The Unnamitive Sentensic, and Insentensic Formepoi. 

SING. PLU. 

7, we. 

who. 
whoever, 
whosoever, 
that. 

!me, us. 

whom, 
whomsoever, 
that, 
myself, ourselves. 

* Sine (pronounced — sin-e,) means without, destitute -hence Sin~c~ 
functional means without a function. 



1. SEFORMEPOI 



257 





SING, 


PLU. 




thou, 
w h 


ye. 

0. 


1. SEAUDEPOI< 


whoever, 
whosoever, 
that. 




< 


you. 


N-SEAUDEPOI < 


r thee, you. 

thyself, yourseves. 

whom. 

whomsoever. 

that. 
t w h i c h. 




f he, ) 
she, > 
it, ) 

w h 


they. 

0. 




w h o e 


v e r. 


l.SE-SINEPOI 


whosoever, 
t h a t. 
which. 




a 


s. 




one, 
other, 
this, 
; that, 


ones, 
others, 
these, 
those. 


- 


r him, 
her, 
it, 

himself, 
herself, 
itself, j 
who 


them, 
themselves, 

m. 


INSE-SINEPOI i 


whom 
t h t 


soever, 
i t. 




w h i 


c h. 




a 


s. 




one, 
other, 
each, 
this, 
K that, 


ones, 
others. 




these, 
those. 



25S 



II. NUMERATION* 

What is here denominated numeration, is styled in the old system 
number. But, as number belongs to the thing itself, and not to the 
cormos which denotes the thing, this word is improperly applied by 
the British grammarians. The number belongs to the thing itself, and 
is indicated by the numeral power of the cormi; as, book, books. 
Hence the eormic means and act of pointing out the number, is called 
Numeration. 

2. The Numeration of a cormos respects its means, 
and act of numerating things upon the general principle 
of unity, and plurality. 

There are two Numerations, Singular, and Plural. 

The Singular is that restraining capacity of a Cormos,. 
which makes it apply to but one thing, or one collection ; as, 
pen, it, book, jury, court, school, family. 

The Plural Numeration is that multiplying, capacity of a 
Gormos, which makes the word apply to more than one; 
as, fiens, they, books, juries, courts, schools, families. 

That the pupil may become well acquainted with the different ways 
in which the plural numeration of cormi is formed, some scheme calcu- 
lated to require him to say in what manner every cormos which he 
parses, forms its plural, seems almost indispensable. Hence cormi 
are referred to different classes according to the means used in forming 
their respective- plurals. The classes are denominated Pluratories. 
There are fourteeen Pluratories ; namely, 



)>pluratory. 



1. The s Pluratory. 

1. The s pluratory includes those cormi to which s can 
be affixed without the possibility of losing its numeral, its 
affix character ;, as, book, books, pen, pens, chair, chairs, 
vice, vices. 

Note. — It may be well to remark here that s as an affix to cormi, 
is numeral in its import, and denotes plurality. S has this numeral 
import in all instances where it holds in the frame work of the word, 
a mere affix relation j as, book, book-s, pen, pen-s. Iji the same way 



1. 


The S 3 




8. 


The Ic,Ice 


2. 


The Es * 




9. 


The Jm 


3. 


The Ve* 




10, 


The Ae 


4. 


The les 


>pluratory. 


11. 


The / 


5. 


The E 




12. 


The A 


6. 


The En 




13. 


The Nepos 


7. 


The Ee 




14. 


The Seme 



259 

in which semi, and demi is prefixed to cormi to denote half; as, semi- 
vowel, demi-tone ; s is affixed to cormi to denote plurality ; as, book, 
book-s. But as semi, and demi lose their prefix import with the loss 
of their prefix relation; as, seminary, demise, so does s lose its nume- 
ral import with the loss of its affix relation ; as, atlas, John Maas, as. 

1. Semi- vowel, Seminary. 

2. Book, Book-s, At-las. 

Here, as semi modifies the word, vowel, so does s modify the word 
book. Semi makes the word, vowel, mean a half vowel — and s makes 
the word, book, mean many books. And, as semi loses its prefix cha- 
racter in seminary, by becoming- an essential part of the word, so s 
loses its affix character in atlas, by becoming an essential part of the 
monogram to which it belongs — las. 

Hence where it is possible for s to convert the monogram into a 
monogram different from that intended, by appearing to be an essential 
part of it, s should not be used as a pluralizing affix ; as, lady, la-dys, 
wo, wos, potato, po-ta-fos. 

Here s is liable to be taken — not as a mere pluralizing affix to the 
word, lady, but as an essential part to the last monogram, — and as 
such converts dy into dys, dis. Hence the word would become la-dys, 
or la-dis, instead of ladies. And, if we give s its sharp hissing sound, 
it converts wo into was. Hence instead of having woes, we have was. 
And, if we give a its short broad sound, and to s its sharp hissing 
sound, we have in po-ta-fos, po-ta-tas, instead of pota-toes. 

In instances, however, where y is preceded by a hypergram, s retains 
its affix character ; as, attor-ney, attor-neys. Neys, as a mere monogram, 
is nearly equal to nies. 

S retains its affix character where it merely adds its own sound to 
that of the monogram to which it is affixed ; as, money, moneys, chim- 
ney, chimneys. But where s not only adds its own sound to that of 
the monogram to which it is affixed, but actually changes the mono- 
gram into one entirely different in sound and import, s loses its nu- 
meral, its affix character ; as, wo, wos, lady, la-efys, directory, direc- 
to-rys. 

Note ii. — It may be doubted whether these cormi which end their 
singular in e belong to the s pluratory, or not; as, vice, vices, face, 
faces, grace, graces. 

It is more than probable that these cormi belong to the es pluratory. 
True, nothing but s is affixed to the singular — because the e with 
which the singular terminates, answers a double purpose, for while 
it is made an essential part of the word itself, it is made a part 
of the pluralizing affix. This position, however, is taken rather as a 
speculation than as a fact. (Face-cs, race-es, lace-es.) 



26G 



2, 


3, 


4. 


affray 


brief 


grajf 


alky 


dwarf 


mischief 


attorney 


fife 


proof 


chimney 


grief 


reproof 


delay 


gutf 


roof 


money 


handkerchief 


scarf 


Sunday 


hoof 


staff 


Mussulman 




strife 
surf 
turf 
wharf 



1. S PLURATORY. 

t. The S Pluratory is the place, compartment, or class 
to which all those cormi are referred to which s can be 
affixed without the possibility of losing its numeral, its 
affix character; as, pen, book, face, race. 

I. 

Automaton 

Beau 

Cherub 

Encomium 

Medium 

Memorandum 

Seraph 



Note i.-^The word, beau, is French, and is generally pluralized by 
affixing A'; as, beaux. 

The word is so well known, however, in the English phrenod, that 
it may be rendered plural by the numeral s without any danger of 
taking it for another word — indeed I do not see that s is liable to lose 
its affix character in this place any more than in attorneys. 

The other cormi in the first column, are made from foreign phre- 
nods, and may be pluralized by s, and also by the numeral affixes pecu- 
liar to their respective sources. 

Each of these is denominated a Duplus. A Duplus is a word which 
has two plurals ; as r mediums, media, (s, a.) 

A Monoplus is a word which has but one plural ? as, pen, pens. 

Note ii. — The words in the third column, as well as those in the 
fourth, are exceptions to other pluratories. 

II. Es PLURATORY. 

The es pluratory is composed of such cormi as will not 
receive s as a numeral affix without the e ; as, box, church. 
(Box-es, church-es, — not, boxs, churchsj or 

The es pluratory is composed of those cormi where c is 
required to enable s to retain its affix, its numeral charac- 
ter ; as, box, church. 

These are those which terminate the singular in soft ch, 



261 

in x, sh, and 55, and in where o is preceded by a hupo. 

or a thuro. r 

Apolo, grass, memento, 

Box, lass, miss 

Church, lash, negro, 

£cno, manifesto, rebus, 

Calash, musketto, volcano, 

index, elipsis. 

Fee exceptions to the es pluratory, under the s pluratory. The 
exceptions are those instances in which is preceded by a hyper- 
gram; as, folio, io, seraglio, nuncio, punctw. 

REMARKS. 

Individual cormi have the plural, when they refer to a race, or 
family; as, the Cambdls, the Smiths, 

In such instances the individual cormi become Family ones 
Individual cormi are pluralized where they refer to several 'per- 

S ™ S f th " Sam " name ; as ' The ei 2 ht n*»ry8, The two Mr. Smiths, 
The two Miss Browns, The Miss Boardmans. 

But in addressing lexers in which all are equally concerned, it is 
customary to plurahze the tiltle, Mr. or Miss; as, Misses Brown, 
Misses Rand. ■ 

The title is pluralized also where the names are different: as 
Messrs. Adams, and Munroe. * 

Note.- Index may be considered a duplus-it has two plurals 
though not without regard to the sense. When the word signifies 
pointers, or tables of contents it is pluralized by es. 

But when it signifies algebraic quantities, it is pluralized by ices— 
indices. J 

III. Fes PLURATORY. 

The ves pluratory is that compartment, or class to which 
those cormi belong that end the singular in/ and fe, and 
which by substituting r for/ can take the numeral affix, 
ves, without turning into other words ; as, half, halves. 

NoTE.—Those words which ves would so change as to render them 
other words, or so deform as to render them no words, are in the s 
pluratory ; as, as, fife, Jives, gulf, gulves. 

Wiuirf, with some others, is a Duplus. 

be . e . f ' knife, self, thief, 

c ?^' leaf > sheep, W harf, 

f> Iife > «helf, wife, 

half > ^af, staff, wolfi 

.oThH c P woT 7 h : ch end lhe singnkr in f and fe * M] y beI °»s 



262 
IV. IES PLURATORY. 

The ies pluratory is that compartment, or class to which 
those cormi belong, that substitute i for j/, where the s 
alone would lose its affix character, and where the es with- 
out this substitute would deform the word by adding ano- 
ther monogram ; as, lady, ladies, duty, duties. 

Note.— Here if s alone, is affixed, lady becomes la-cfys ; and duty 
becomes diUys. And if es should be affixed, lady would become 
la-dy-es. And if the word should be considered an amphogram — 
thus, la-dyes, dv-tyes, yes, the word yes would become a mere affix to 
other words. In this way we should have two derivative offices im- 
porting precisely the same thing — yes, and ies. 

Besides, yes is not synonymous with ies in sound. Yes is yis, and 
ies is sometimes short ee with s ; as, ies, ees. La-dees, dutess. Nor is 
it in the power of any letter to make yes, ies. Hence dyes is not equal 
to dies— nor is tyes synonymous with ties. Dies is dees ; and ties is 
tees. But dyes is dy-es ; and tyes is ty-es. 

Nor is it in the power of any letter except a hypergram, to make ys 
equal to es, for es as an affix is short ee with s; as, ys, ees. Now eys 
as an affix is nearly, or quite ees— for the y is short which gives it the 
sound of short e— hence eys is nearly or quite ees. Therefore all cormi 
terminating a singular with a y which is preceded by a hypergram, 
belong to the s pluratory ; as, day, days. But unless the y is preceded 
by a hypergram, the cormi belongs to the ies pluratory, as fly, flies. 

beauty, fly, ji es - 

duty, penny, i, es. 

Note, Penny is a Duplus— it may be pluralized in two ways — 

pennies, pence. 

V. E PLURATORY. 

The e pluratory is that compartment, or class to which 
these cormi belong that form their plural by substituting e 
for a; as, man, men, alderman, aldermen. 

VI. En, or Ren PLURATORY. 

The en pluratory is that compartment, or class to which 
those cormi belong that form their plural by the numeral 
en, or ren ; as, brother, brethren, child children. 

Nnte.— Brother is a duplus— it may come under the s pluratory as 
well as under the ren. 

VII. EE PLURATORY. 

The ee pluratory is that compartment, or class to which 



263 

those cormi belong, that form their plural by substituting 
te for oo ; as, foot, feet, goose, geese, tooth, teeth. 

Note. — Booby belongs to the ies pluratory* Moon with some other 
words, belongs to the s pluratory. 

VIII. Ice PLURATORY. 

The ice pluratory is the compartment, or class to which 
those cormi belong, that form their plural by substituting 
ice for ouse ; as, mouse, mice, louse, lice. 

IX. Im PLURATORY. 

The im pluratory is that compartment, or class to which 
those cormi belong, that have been derived from the He- 
brew, and form their plural by the Hebrew numeral affix, 
im ; as, cherub, cherubim, seraph, seraphim. 

Note. — Cherub as well as seraph, is a Duptus. 

X. Ae PLURATORY. 

The m pluratory is that verbuary, or class to which those 
cormi belong that are of Latin extraction, and form their 
plural by the Latin numeral affix, oz ; as, lamina, laminee*. 

XI. / PLURATORY. 

The i pluratory is that verbuary, or class to which those 
cormi belong, which are made from the Latin, and the 
Greek, and which form their plural by the numeral affix, i; 
as, magus, magi, radius radii, genius, genu, cormos, cor- 
mi, or cormoi, ramus, rami, truncus, trunci. 

Note. — When men of genius are meant, genius falls into the es 
pluratory ; as, the Smiths are all geniuses. 

But when aerial spirits are meant, genius is referred to the i plura- 
tory ; as, " these are some good genii sent to protect us k " 

Indeed "genius" may be considered a Duplus. 

XII. A PLURATORY. 

The a pluratory is that verbuary, or class to which those 
cormi belong, that are of foreign derivation, and which are 
pluralized by the numeral affix, a ; as, criterion, criteria, 

arcanum, arcana. 

X 



264 

arcanum medium * 8 

criterion * s stratum * s 

datum stamen * s 

erratum 

effluvium 

genus * es 

XIII. Aepost PLURATORY. 

The nepos pluratory is that class to which those cormi 
belong, that are pluralized by a new word ; as, I, we, he, 
they, thou, ye, you. 

I he 

me him 

thou she 

thee her, it. 

XIV. Sense PLURATORY. 

The sense pluratory is that class to which those cormi 
belong, that are pluralized by the sense only ; as, sheep, 
deer, which. 

Note. — This pluratory consists of the sin-e-sig-nums. 

REMARKS. 

1. There are very many cormi which we have no need to pluralize 
— such as nothing, something, pride, &c. These are denominated 
Sin-e-plures. (Sine without, and plus, plural — meaning without a plu- 
ral.) 

% There are others which are ever plural — such as lungs, politics, 
&c. These are denominated, Everplures. 

3. And there are a few which have no numeral sign or form al- 
though they are used in both indications — such as deer, swine, which, 
who. These are styled Sin-e-sig-nums. (Sine, without, sig a contrac- 
tion of sign, and num a contraction of number. 

* Criterion, genus, medium, stratum, as well as stamen is a Duplus. 
t This word is constructed from the Greek, Neos, new, and epos, a 
word, and means a new word — New word pluratory. 



SIN-E-PLURES. 


EVERPLURES. 


alms 


bellows 


bread 


compasses 


meat* 


ethics 


news 


measles 


tobacco 


mathematics* 


tresses 


optics 


treble 


pains 


trice 


nippers 


nothing 


pincers 


something 


politics 


pride 


pneumatics 


gold 


riches 


rest 


scissors 


strength 


shears 


business 


tongs 


silver 


twezars, &c. 


sobriety 




envenness 




heat 




newness 




philosophy, &c. 






GENDER, 



SIN-E-SIG-NUMS. 

deer 

means 

sheep 

swine 

which 

as 

that 

who 

whom 

whoever 

whomsoever 

whosoever 



The gender of a cormos respects its capacity to dis- 
tinguish one sex from the other, to include both sexes at 
the same time, or it respects a capacity to conceal which 
sex is denoted. 

There are four Genders ; viz. Masculine, Feminine, 
Jlmbi, and Muo. 

1. The Masculine is a capacity of the cormos to distin- 
guish the male from the female ; as, a man. 

2. The Feminine is a capacity of the cormos to desig- 
nate the female ; as, a woman. 

3. The Ambi is a capacity of the cormos to include both 
sexes ; as, his parents are dead. 

4. TheMuo gender respects the ability of the cormos to 
conceal the sex of the animal of which mention is made ; 
as, " a person passed my window in haste." 

Note. — Sometimes the gender of the cormos is determined from 
the context. (See page 162.) 



266 

Genepos, Ne-genepos, Femepos, Malepos, Jlmbi-genepos, 
Mu- genepos Pe~ne-pos. 

1. Genepos is constructed from gender, and epos, and 
means a word which has gender ; &*s, man, woman, person, 
animal, Sun, Moon. 

2. Negenepos is constructed from genepos, and the Latin 
negative, ne, and means a word which has no gender ; as, 
book, table, pen. 

3. Malepos is constructed from male, and epos, and 
means a word which denotes a male; as, lad, taylor, 
drake. 

4. Femepos is constructed from femenine, and e£>os, and 
means a word which denotes a female ; as, girl, taylor ess, 
duck. 

5. Ambigenepos is constructed from Ambi, both, and gen- 
epos, and means a cormos which has both genders ; as, 
his parents. 

Mugenepos is constructed from the Greek, muo, to shut, 
hence to conceal, and genepos, and means a cormos which 
shuts up, or conceals its gender ; as, that child, that parent, 
this servant. 

7. Penepos is constructed from pene, almost, and epos, 
and means a cormos which has almost all the syncratic 
properties ; as, who. Who may have all the genders, both 
numerations, and all the indications, though it is never of 
the insentensic variety. 

SPECIMEN. 

Book, Man, Woman, Servant, &c. 

book, a negenepos, of the s pluratory. 

man, a malepos, of the e pluratory. 

woman, a femepos, of the e pluratory. 

servant, .... a mugenepos, of the s pluratory. 

ladies, a femepos, of the ies pluratory. 

alms, a negenepos, and a sineplus. 

bellows, a negenepos, and an everplus. 

deer, an ambi-genepos, a sinesignum, of the 

sense pluratory. 

/, a genepos, of the nepos pluratory. 

we, a genepos, of the nepos pluratory. 

medium, .... a negenepos, and a duplus of the a, and 

the s pluratory. 
seraph, a genepos, and a duplus, of the s, and the 

im pluratory. t 



267 

EXERCISES. 

Automaton, affray, brief, graff, laugh, beau, Apolo, box, 
lash, lass, ellipsis, beef, calf, wolf, Mussulman, alley, attor- 
ney, lady, money, seraph, cherubs, encomium, memoran- 
dum, medium, gulf, wharf, musketto, negro, miss, mani- 
festo, index, staff, wife, leaf, brother, man, alderman, child, 
foot, seraph, lamina, mouse, magus, radius, genius, trun- 
cus, cormos, ramus, arcanum, criterion, datum, stratum, 
erratum, I, me, thou, thee, it, her, deer, means, swine, 
which, who, whom, as, that, tongs, shears, silver, heat, 
none, business, pride, something, nothing, roof, proof, 
mischief, dwarf; handkerchief, himself, myself, herself, 
itself, them, they, who, we, whoever. 

SUBDIVISION OF THE GREAT CLASS OF INSERAMI. 

The great family of Inserami is divided into Clinepoi, 
and Neclinepoi. 

1. A Clinepos* is an inseramus which can be modified 
by being declined, changed in its form : as, this, that, 
lady's, high, good, mine, thine, — {these, those, ladies', higher, 
highest, better, best, ours, yours.) 

2. A Neclinepost is an inseramus which can not be de- 
clined; as, of, an, but, perfect, imperfect, accurately, accu- 
rate, all, any, &c. 

SPECIMEN. 

My, his, this, that, perfect, much, good, fyc. 

my, .... a clinepos, declined for its plural to our. 
his, .... a clinepos, declined for its plural to their, 
this, ... a clinepos, declined for its plural to these, 
that, ... a clinepos, declined for its plural to those, 
those, . . a clinepos, declined for its singular to that: 
perfect, . a neclinepos. 
much, . . a clinepos — (much, more, most.) 
good, . . a clinepos— (good, better, best.) 

* Pronounced Clin-e-pos. t Pronounced Ne-clin-e-pos , 
X2 



268 

EXERCISES. 

* Correctly, softly, prudently, well, accordingly, badly, 
and, though, and, although, nearer, verily, surely, indeed, 
positively, no, not, nay, never, white, farther, many, near, 
why, rather, sooner, chiefly, especially, so, as, equally, 
thus, like, otherwise, else, differently, unlike, most, nearly, 
partially, partly, scarcely, hardly, sparingly, scantily, less, 
much, bountifully, liberally, best, worst, least, most, least, 
or, last, nearest, or, next, farthest, foremost, or, first, gird, 
better, worse, perfect, evil, or, ill, best, less, little, much, 
therefore, and, yet, former, bad, good, as, ill, side-wise, 
how, certainly, truly, undoubtedly, yes, and, so, later, as, 
well, far, for, although, late, at, all, namely, universally, 
together, generally, conjunctively, off, separately, apart, 
asunder, singly, alone, apiece, again, though, for, yet, 
hereafter, already, hitherto, lastly, afterwards, that, but, 
but, although, then, either, since, also, or, whereas, both, 
than, wherefore, besides, unless, beside, at, nevertheless, 
lest, around, notwithstanding, dwelt, into, of, after, but, 
moreover, least, because, amongst, howbeit, across, not, 
only, nay, likewise, inasmuch, nathless, i£ among, soon, 
primarily, previously, at, once, by, and, whereby, in, be, 
is, toward, shave, against, for, behind, during, neither, 
without, except, but, under, new, within, throughout, by, 
no, betwixt, with, towards, from, beneath, atween, be- 
tween, unto, an, underneath, atwixt, long, athwart, not, 
never, in, but, or, of, over, here, there, where, away, 
whereon, wherein, in, at, on, thither, whither, hitherward, 
whitherward, hence, thence, gilt, thence, yet, otherwise, 
whether, or, even, wherever, out, forth, forthwith, of, to, 
ahead, behind, to, now, w^hen, then, whenever, after, as, 
afore, never, ever, aforetime, about, straight, immediately, 
wherewith, thereby, first, secondly, thirdly, again, once, 
twice, perhaps, peradventure, likely, possibly. 

*The word, correct, is a Neclinepos, whether in the ly form or net. 
To constitute a word a clinepos, the sense must be declined as well as 
the frame-work of the word itself. But, as correct, and correctly mean 
the same thing-, or as they have precisely the same import, correctly 
is a neclinepcs. 



269 
DIVISION OF THE CLINEPOI. 

The Clinepos family is divided into Synclinepoi, and 
Nesynclinepoi. 

1. SYNCLINEPOI; 2, NESYNCLINEPOI: 

1. A Synclinepos is a Clinepos which can have such a 
declesion as indicates that the thing is considered with 
another thing; as, large, high, long, short. {Syn, with, 
or together.) 

Note. — 'If we decline large to larger, or largest, we shall see that 
this new form gives the idea that one thing is put with another thing 
with a view perhaps to decide the relative size of the two ; as, this 
apple is larger than that. 

2. A Ne-syn-clin-e-pos is a Clinepos whose declension 
does not indicate that the thing mentioned is taken with 
another thing; as, my land, our land, Man's residence, 
men's abode. 

SPECIMEN. 

Good, this, ihat, his, high, fyc. 

good, better, best, a synclinepos. 

this, these, a nesynclinepos. 

that, those, a nesynclinepos. 

his, theirs a nesynclinepos. 

high, higher, highest, a synclinepos. 

more, much, more, most, t . . . a synclinepos. 

EXERCISES. 

Its, her, our, my, lady's, man's, near, soon, boy's, their, 
your, red, yellow, white, much, short, new, old, black, 
blue, upper, lower, mine, yours, girls', boy's, tree's, trees', 
bitter, little, late, far, many, better, worse, less, more, least, 
farther, father's, fathers', uncle's, aunts', aunt's, next, 
worst, best, fore, former, latter, foremost, first, book's, 
books'. 

DIVISION OF THE SYNCLIN-EPOI. 

The synclinepoi are thrown into three divisions, deno- 
1 minated Indications — 

1. Sub } 

2. Supersub > Indication. 

3. Super j 

1. Sub; as, long 

2. Supersub ; as, longer 

3. Super; as, longest 

1. Sub; as, short 

2. Supersub; as, shorter 

3. Super; as, shortest 



, 270 

I. The sub indication of a synclinepos, is the primitive state of the 
word, and, where two, or more things are spoken of as to their relative 
amount of whatever the synclinepos may mean, indicates the least; 
as, John is good, but Stephen is better; That tree is high; but this is 
higher ; James is sick, Jason is sicker, and Joseph is sickest. 

II. The supersub indication is that derivative form, or that new word 
form'which indicates an amount superior to that indicated by the sub 
indication of the same word, but inferior to that amount which is in- 
dicated by the super indication of the same word; as, Stephen is better 
than John, This tree is higher than that, James is sick, Jason is sicker; 
but Joseph is sickest. 

III. The super indication is that derivative form, or that new word 
form which indicates the highest amount ; as, James is sick, Jason is 
sicker, but Joseph is sickest. 

When the superior ramus consists of more than one monogram, the 
indications are generally given to the inferior ramus ; as, more or 
most, less or least righteous. 

Amphograms ending in y, change y into i before er and est ; as, in 
happy, happier, happiest. # 

But if a hypergram precedes, y is not changed into i, before er and 
est ; as, gay, gayer, gayest. - , ' 

When the ramus ends with a single hupogram, or a single thuro- 
gram, preceded by a single hypergram, the hupogram, or thurogram is 
doubled before er and est ; as, big, bigger, biggest. 

The indications of some rami are made by affixing 
most to the radical state ; as, upper, uppermost. 

There are many properties which, from their nature, are incapable 
of increase or diminution ; as, perfection, universality, straightness, &c. 
The rami denoting these, have no indications of comparison ; as, perfect, 
extreme. To this class may be referred, this, that, all, &c. 

The declensions of the synclinepoi are— 
1. General, and 2. Special. 

1 The general declension is the monogram, er, and est affixed to 
the same word ; as, large, larger, largest, High, higher, higher. 

2 The special declension is that which is restricted to certain words 
of the synclinepos family ; as, Good, better, best, Much, more, most. 
(Not good, gooder, goodest, Much, mucher, muchest.) 

Synclinepoi of the Special Declension. 

SUB SUPER-SUB. SUPER. 

Good, Better, Best, 

Bad, evil, or ill, Worse, Worst, 

Little, Less, Least. 

Much, or many, More, Most, 

Latei Later, Latest, or last, 

Near Nearer, Nearest, or next, 

Far ' Farther, Farthest 



271 

SPECIMEN. 

12 3 4 5 

Better, Red, Newer, Old, First. 

1. Better, Sub, good — Supersub, letter — Super, best — a Synepos of 

the Supersub indication. 

2. Red, . Sub, red — Supersub, redder — Super, reddest — a Synepos 

of the Sub indication. 

3. Newer, Sub, new — Supersub, newer — Super, newest — a Synepos 

of the Supersub indication. 

4. Old, . Sub, old — Supersub, older — Super, oldest — a Synepos of 

the Sub indication. 

5. First, Sub, fore — Supersub, former — Super, foremost, or first — 

a Synepos of the Super indication. 

EXERCISES. 

Good, bad, ill, former, little, small, much, nigh, near, 
worse, latter, many, late, further, less, first, foremost, red, 
good, high, low, much. 

N.B. — For additional exercises, select all the Synepoi from the Exer- 
cises under page 26b. 

REMARKS. 

The three indications, (Sub, Supersub, Super,) are offered as a sub- 
stitute for the three degrees of comparison in the old system. The 
objections to this British contrivance are numerous ; so much so that 
they can hardly be stated, much less defended, in these few observa- 
tions. As a general reflection, we say that the contrivance is without 
simplicity, without meaning, hence without the power of a true applica- 
tion to the subject which they desired to present to the mind of the 
student. Good, is said to be in the positive degree of comparison. 
The phrase, " positive degree of comparison," is void of all import 
over which the human mind has any command. Besides, when it is 
said, "Mr. Jones is a. good man," is there any idea of comparison] 
The idea is rather that of contrast. He is a good man, not a bad one. 

When it is said, " Mr. Jones is a better man than Mr. James," 
there is clearly an idea of comparison. But, then, the degree does not 
belong to the word better, but to Mr. Jones himself. The means of 
indicating, of pointing out this degree, belongs to the word, better. 
Besides, this word, better, is said to be of the comparative degree. Why, 
is not every degree of comparison a comparative degree ? When it is 
said, " Mr. Jones is the best man of the six," is there no comparison ? 
And when it is said, u Mr. Jones is a good man," is there no compa- 
rison ? how, then, can good be called the positive degree of compa- 
rison ? 



272 

THE SERAMUS RESUMED. 

A Seramus is a word which contains the elements of a 
sentence character; as, To walk, to read, I write, To have, 
can, will, would, &c. 

Note. — These words contain the elements of a cordiction as may- 
be proved by placing some secormos before them to draw these sen- 
tential elements out into a full cordiction, or sentence character. 

/ walk, They read, We write, We can write. 

" We can," is just as much an affirmation as is, "We can write." 
Hence the sentential elements out of which the sentence character is 
formed, are not in write, but in can. Write is in the exformative 
position — hence beyond the reach of the sentenceizing cormos, we. 
But if we say, We write, the sentenceizing cormos, we, forms a sen- 
tence character out of the elements contained in write. 

THE TIMEDEX OF A SERAMUS. 

Every Seramus which occupies the formative position, has some- 
thing about it, which points to time — and this something is denomi- 
nated timedex, timeindex. Sometimes the timeindex is found in a tense 
signification which the seramus has in addition to its proper Dictionary 
meaning. For instance — will has no visible Jinger, or form by which 
it points to a period of future time. But although it is destitute of 
any visible future tense index; yet, it has an invisible one which enables 
it to point to future time with as much distinctness as any visible pre- 
sent tense index enables any seramus to point to present time : 

1. I will attend. 

2. He attends. 

Tense and time are synonymous words — both mean the thing to 
which the timedex of the seramus points. To say that a verb is of 
the present tense, or to say that a verb is of the present time, is to say 
that the verb exists at this time. And to say that a verb is of the 
future tense is to say that the verb does not yet exist, but that it will 
have a being at some future time ! To say, however, that a verb has 
a present tense index, or a future time index, is to say that it has an 
index, a finger, which points to present time, or which points to future 
time. 

Timedex. 

Timedex is the means which enables a Seramus to point 
to different portions of time. 

This means generally consists in a certain form of the Seramus ; 
as, writes, wrote, do, did. 

But it may consist in a new word ; as, am, was, go, went. 



273 

And it may consist in an extra signification ; as, will, shall. Will, 
as well as shall, has a Dictionary meaning — and, in addition to this, 
both words have an invisible future, or post time index. 

There are two general timedexes which belong to se- 
rami. These, for the purpose of a general distinction, 
may be denominated, the Speaking Timedex, and the 
Event Timedex. 

1. Speaking Timedex, 

The Speaking Timedex is that which points to the time 
in which one utters or expresses the sentence ; as, David 
said unto Nathan, " Thou art the man." 

Note. — Here, art refers to the time in which David spoke this sen- 
tence. The word, said, however, refers to the time of the event, not 
to the time when the section in which said is employed, was uttered, 
or expressed. The speaking timedex may point to the time of the 
event; and it may not. For instance — "He is to pay the demand 
next year," is an instance in which the time of the event differs very 
much from the time of uttering- the sentence. Again — " He rides out 
daily," is an instance in which the time of the formation of the sen- 
tence, must differ from that of the event itself. Again — u Be thou at 
my house next week," is a case in which the time of the event, cannot 
be considered that of giving the command. And, again — " He ought 
to return next spring," gives two different times. 

The old system says — 

" The present tense expresses what now exists, or is taking place ; 
as, I hear a noise ; somebody is coming" 

GOOLD BROWN. 

Goold Brown, revise and correct thy " finished labors ! 1" Remem- 
ber that revise, and correct are of the present tense — and do not forget 
that the present tense expresses what is now taking place ! 

2. Event Timedex. 

The event timedex is that which points to the time of 
the event, and not to the time of expressing the sen- 
tence; as, The book was returned last week, The book 
has been returned to-day, The book had been returned be- 
fore I called, The book will be returned next week, The 
book will have been returned two weeks next Saturday. 

The speaking timedex is denominated phemic timedex ; 
and the event timedex is divided into five timedexes. The 
timedexes of the serami are divided, and named in the 
following manner — 

Phemic, Pre-syn-phemic, Pre-di-phemic, Pre-syn-di-phemic, 
Post-phemic, Pre-post-phemic. 



274 

» 

Phem-ic, pre, syn, di, post. 

1. "Phemic" is from phemi, to speak, to tell, and means 
speaking. Hence "Phemic Timedex" is synonymous with 
"Speaking Timedex." Phemic Timedex, the timedex which 
points to the speaking time, the time of speaking, the time 
in which the sentence is formed ; as, I am here, come to 
me, John. 

2. "Pre? before, prior. 

3. Syn, with, connected with. 

4. Di, distinct from, separate, asunder. 

4. "Post" after, future, in respect to the time of speak- 
ing. 

Now, connect the secondary elements with the principal 
element according to the following order — 

SECOtf. PRItf. 

1. Pre- "j 

2. Pre-syn* 

4. pZfyn-di- >pte«*c- 

5. Post- 

6. P re-post- 

1st. Say, Pr e-phemic. 2d. Say, Pre-syn-phemic* And 
so on till you become familiar with the six following 
words — 

TIMEDEXES. 

1. Phemic 

2. Pre-syn-phemic 

3. Pre-di-phemic 

4. Pre-syn-di-phemic 

5. Post-phemic 

6. Pre-post-phemic 






Timedex* 



EXPLANATIONS* 

1. "Phemic^ speaking. 

2. iVe-phemic, before speaking. 

2. Syn-phemic, connected with the time of speaking. 

2. Pre-syn-phemic, prior time, connected with the phe» 
mic, the speaking time. 

3. Z>i-phemic, separated from the phemic, the speaking 
time. 

3. Pre-di-phemic, time prior to, and distinct, or separate 
from the phemic, the speaking time. 

4. Syn-di-phemic, time connected with that which is 
separate from the phemic, the speaking time* 




275 

. Pre-syn-di-iphemic, prior time, connected with that 
which is separate from the phemic, the speaking time. 

5. Po^-phemic, after the phemic, the speaking time — 
hence future. 

6. Pre-^o^-phemic, time prior to another post time. 

ILLUSTRATION. 

1. Phemic time — I hope you are well, sir. 

2. Pre-syn-phemic time — I have seen him to-day. 

3. Pre-di-p hemic time — I saw him last week. 

4. Pre-syn-di-phemic time — I had seen him before he called 

on me. 

5. Post-phemic time — I shall see him next week. 

6. Pre-post-phemic time — I shall have seen him by next 

week. 

I. PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

The Phemic Timedex is that which points to the time of 
speaking, which may, or may not be the time of the event 
itself; as, He rides out weekly — John, call at my house 
next week. 

Note. — As "phemic" means speaking, and as we can not speak in 
any time but the present, phemic very naturally comes to mean present. 
Should it be asked, why not use the word, "present" We answer 
that phemic has two obvious advantages over present. "Phemic" means 
a definite present — it means that very time, and that exact quantity 
of time, occupied in speaking. Hence the phrase "phemic time" is 
distinct, definite, simple, and applicable. Whereas, the phrase, "pre- 
sent time?' is indistinct, indefinite, complex, and inapplicable. It is 
not in the power of man to decide how much time is meant by the 
phrase, "present time." 

It would seem that this day must be present time. But if so, the 
present becomes future ; as, I will call on you this day. We say, too, 
the present year, the present age, &c. Now, if a whole age is present, 
where shall w T e get the past, and the future ? We are compelled to 
cut the entire present age, or mass into parts for the past and future, 
or take this entire age for the present time, the preceding age for the 
past, and all subsequent ages for the future ! But an age that is pre- 
sent, can be made neither future, nor past by cutting it into smaller 
portions — an apple that is present is not made either past, or future 
by dividing it ! 

2. The word, phemic, is a good base with which to compound, or 
connect other elements calculated to express the several nice relations 
which the other times alluded to in speech have with the speakiag 
time. Whereas the word, present, is a bad base for this purpose. 

Y 



276 

The figures marked a, b, c, d> e,f, g, h, are events-^they 
are designed to represent all the events of which mention 
has ever been, or of which mention ever will be made. 
The f sand in the Time-dex S represents the present, or 
speaking time ; and that seen through the Tensescopes 
represents all the time which ever has been, and which 
ever will be. 

The events are denominated the pictorial events. This 
sand is styled the pictorial time. The manner in which 
the pictorial time is divided by being presented in different 
Timedexes, for the location of the pictorial events, is the 
pictorial manner in which the real time is divided by the 
mind for the location of the real events of which mention 
may be made with respect to time. 

Figure S represents the Speaking time. That is, the 
time occupied in speaking, the time which is occupied in 
constructing the sentence which mentions the different 
events that happen in the world. But from the fact that 
some events are located in the Speaking time, it is seen 
that the speaking time may be event, as well as speaking 
time. Some events are commenced, and finished in the 
speaking time. Others are begun in the Speaking time, 
and completed in the ^os^-speaking time which is repre- 
sented by figure W. Event a is commenced in figure S, 
and finished in figure W. All other events as may be seen 
from the location of the events in the pictorial time in 
figure V, and in the time of figure W, are placed into the 
purely event time. 

The speaking time is the only time which is present 
time, for this is the only time which is in our presence. 
The time which is prior to the speaking time, as well as 
the time which is post to the speaking time, is made visi- 
ble — yet it is not present time, it is not in our presence — 
it has either gone by us, or it has not yet come to us. 
The time which had passed off before the speaking time 
came to us, as well as the time which is to come to us 
after the speaking time shall have left us, is a vast distance 
from us. So far from us that we are compelled to look 
through a Tensescope to behold it even with the eye of 
the mind. 



273 
I. PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

The Phemic Timedex is that which points to the time in which the 

sentence is spoken, or formed; which may be all, some, or none of the 

all. some. none. 

time of the event ; as, I speak, virtue is commendable, Go thou to school. 

{See Timedex I, p. 278.) 

II. PRE-SYN-PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

Pre, before, prior — Syn, with, in connection with — Phemic, speak- 
ing time, the time of speaking. 

The pre-syn-phemic timedex indicates that the prior time to which 
it points, is taken in connection with the phemic time itself, as one of 
the three constituent parts which constitute the entire period to which 
the speaking time belongs ; as, I have seen him this day. (See Time- 
dex m,p. 278.) 

III. PRE-DI-PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

The pre-di-phemic timedex points to prior time, and indicates that 
the prior time to which it points is considered separate from, or discon- 
nected with, all other portions of time; as, I never drank better water i 
— (when I was on the earth.) 




279 



IV. PRE-SYN-DI-PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

The pre+syn-duphernic timedex is that which indicates that the time 
to which it points, is prior to, and connected with, the predi-phemU 
time ; as, " I had seen him before he called on me." 



V. POST-PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

The post-phemic timedex is that post time import which some seraml 
have in addition to their Dictionary signification ; as, I will return. 



VI. PRE-POST-PHEMIC-TIMEDEX. 

The pre-post'phemic-timedex is that which indicates that the time to 
which it points, is post to the phemic time, but prior to some post time 
mentioned in another section of the same sentence ; as, I shall have 
seen him (by ten o'clock.) 



P0ST-PH1MIC. 
1840. 



PRE-POST-PHEMIC. 
1839. 




Y 2 



280 



I. PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

The Phemic Timedex is that which points to the time in 
which the sentence is spoken, or formed ; which may be 

all. 

all, some, or none of the time of the event ; as, I speak, vir- 

sorae. none. 

tue is commendable, Go thou to school. (See Timedex I, 
p. 278.) 

CONCORDANCE. 

1. "Thou art the man." 

2. " Is he coming to the city soon!" 

3. " He is to return to America next year/' 

4. " Go thou to school." 

5. Be thou here at the appointed hour. 

6. " I will— be thou clean." 

" I decree it — be thou clean". (I will it.) 

7. I can call in a few days. 

8. I may come next week. 

9. They must return next fall. 

10. I might return to-morrow if I ivould. 

11. I could go next year if I desired it. 

12. I would go now if I was not sick. 

13. Was I in good health, I surely would return to Bos- 

ton immediately. 

14. John should attend to his book at home. 

15. If he was well he ivould visit us. 

16. I wish we were now in Pennsylvania. 

17. Were we out of this place I should be much pleased — 

I would not be foiind here again ! 

18. Had he a knife, he could make his own pens. 

19. Did he write a good hand, he might be employed as 

clerk. 

20. Was he now inclined to attend to his affairs properly, 

he might soon recover from his embarrassment. 

21. I told him to go to church. 

22. He is about to return to London. 

23. If ere the papers here, we would proceed to business. 

24. " When the mail arrives, we shall get some news." 

25. Would he corfie if he could? 

26. I have a book. 

27. Thou hast a pen. 
23. He has a knife. 

29. I am to have a new book next week. 



281 

II. PRE-SYN-PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

Pre, before, prior — Syn, with, in connection with — Phonic, speak- 
ing time, the time of speaking. 

The presyn-phemic timedex indicates that the prior time 
to which it points, is taken in connection with the phemic 
time itself, as one of the three constituent parts which con- 
stitute the entire period to which the speaking time be- 
longs ; as, I have seen him this day. (See Timedex m, p. 278.) ' 

Note. — Here the day is the entire period which as have indicates, 
consists of three constituent parts ; namely, the part in which the act of 
seeing took place — the part in which this act is spoken of; and the 
part which remains after the speaking portion has passed off. 

(See figure m, Ramus H, Theorem.) 

CONCORDANCE. 

1. I have written a book. ( , , *) 

2. Thou hast read the letter. ( , , ) 

3. He has, or hath been at church ( , , ) 

4. He mast have returned this week. 

5. He may have been here {this evening.) 

6. He might have been here (this year.) 

7. He could have gone (this week.) 

8. " He would have gone (this week) had the boat made a 

third trip." 

9. I have never drunk better water. 

Note. — Where there is an allusion to a whole period of time which 
obviously consists of three component parts; viz. the event part, th* 
speaking part, and the ^osi-speaking part, the Pre-syn-phemic timedex 
must be used ; as, I never have drunk better water ! 

Here the entire life is the period to which allusion is made. The 
part which is indicated as the prior, event part is the portion which is 
past. The speaking part is that portion which is occupied in uttering 
the sentence, and the ^os£-speaking portion is that part which follows 
the speaking part. (See Timedex m, p. 278.) 

But if the period is all past, and is to be considered separate from, or 
disconnected with all other time, the Pre-di-phemic timedex must be 
used ; as, " I never drank better water." Here the whole life is 
alluded to — and alluded to as having past prior to the time of uttering 
the sentence. Hence the former of the sentence throws himself out of 
this world, for his life has closed. And should this departed spirit be 
asked, " when he never drank better water," he must answer, " When 
I was in the body, before I had taken up all my connections with the 
eirth !" 

* The commas indicate some implied timedex section; as, this day, 
this month, &c. 



282 

III. PRE-DI-PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

The pre-di~phemic timedex points to prior time, and indi- 
cates that the prior time to which it points is considered 
separate from, or disconnected with, all other portions of 
time ; as, I never drank better water — (when I was on the 
earth.) 

CONCORDANCE. 

1. Thou wast the man. ( , , ) 

2. Was he coming to the city. ( , , ) 

3. He was to return (last year.) 

4. I had a book. ( , , *) 

4. Thou hadst a knife. ( , , ) 

6. "Had he come (last week,) he could have seen his 
brother." 

Note. — In this, and in the following instances, the time of the 
event is known to be pre-di-phemic by the prediphemie inseclados 
which forms a part of the sentence. (See Principal X.) 

7. If he had called (last evening) I would have gone to 
church with him. 

8. He may have written (last week.) 

9. He must have gone (last evening.) 

10. " He might have seen me (on Monday last) had he 
called at my office." 

11. He could, have seen me at home (in the evening) (of 
Saturday last.) 

12. He should have written (last evening.) 

13. He would return in despite of all his friends could say 
to him. 

14. He would not be consoled — and we could do nothing 
for him. (See Principal IX.) 

(The Prediphemie Timedex on the Theorem, is figure n, 
on ramus H.) 

* It is not necessary to have an expressed past timedex section to 
make had point to past time. There is always a past timedex section 
implied in the past timedex of the scramus itself. We should not say- 
She had a book to-day, for had indicates that the time alluded to is all, 
every whit of it, prior to that of speaking. Hence we should say — She 
had a book yesterday, last evening, last week, &c. 



283 
IV.- PRE-SYN-DI-PIIEMIC TIMEDEX. 

The pre-syn-di-phemic timedex is that which indicates 
that the time to which it points, is prior to, and connected 
with, the predi-p hemic time ; as, '-Ihad seen him before he 
called on me." 

CONCORDANCE. 

1. I had learned my lesson before I went to school. 

2. He had had the book two days when I called on him. 

3. He had been sick several days before he sent for his 
physician. 

4. He that had been dead, sat up, and began to speak. 

5. He may have been there before I arrived. 

6. He must have seen the man before this event hap- 
pened. 

7. I might, or could have seen the President before he 
came to Philadelphia. 

8. They would have seen the President before they left 
Washington, had he been at Washington at the time of 
their sojourn in that place. 

9. He should have done it before I came home. 

V. POST-PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

The post-phemic timedex is that post time import which 
some serami have in addition to their Dictionary signifi- 
cation ; as, I will return. 

CONCORDANCE. 

1. Will he lend me one thousand dollars'? 

2. Will you go with me! 

3. Will you take a piece of the pie 1 

4. Wilt thou send me a piece of pudding 1 

5. Shall I send you a piece of the pie 1 

6. They shall fall upon you with arms. 

7. Thou shalt not steal. 

8. Should they come, we shall see them. 

9. He shall go, and that too in haste. 

10. If he should return, he will call on us. 

11. I wish that he would come back. 

Note. — Shall and will are the only serami which uniformly have 
the post-phemic timedex. Would and should may have this timedex in 
such instances as those above in which these words are introduced. 

Will has the phemic timedex when it is not followed by another 
aeramus; as, " I will — be thou clean." 



284 

VI. PRE-POST-PHEMIC-TIMEDEX. 

The pre-post-phemic-timedex is that which indicates that 
the time to which it points, is post to the phemic time, but 
prior to some post time mentioned in another section of the 
same sentence ; as, I shall have seen him (by ten o'clock. ) 

CONCORDANCE. 

1. " I shall have dined at one o'clock." 

2. The two houses will have finished their business by 

the first of March. 

3. If he shall have come by seven o'clock, p.m., we shall 

have seen him by eight, p.m., of the same day. 

Note. — It may not be improper to remark here that will and shall 
mark the time as post to the phemic time — and that have marks it as 
prior to the other post time mentioned in the same sentence though in 
a different section. Hence it is clear that shall and have, or will and 
have must both be employed in constituting the Pre-jposf-phemic timedex. 

1. Phemic Timedex — e, s, es, th, st, t. 

2. Presynphemic Timedex — have, hast, hath written. 

3. Prediphemic Timedex — had, d, ed, t. 

4. Presyndiphemic — had, hadst written. 

5. Postphemic Timedex — will, shall, should, would. 

6. Prepostphemic — shall, have, will, have written. 

1. The phemic timedex is either the primitive state of 
the soramus ; as, write, walk, put. 

Or the s, es, st, and ih termination ; as, writes, writes/, 
write/ft, Walks, walkesf, walked, Puts, puttes/, putteM. 

( Write — s, st, ih. 
Phemic Timedex I Walk — s, est, elh. 
[ Put — s, test, teth. 

2. The presynphemic timedex is formed by placing 
have, has, hast, or hath before another seramus ; as, have 
written, has written, hast written, hath written, may have 
written, &c. with a timedex section expressed or implied, 
including the time of the event, the time of speaking, and 
more or less post time ; as, I could have gone (this week.) 

f"l have~] 

Presynphemic Timedex^ m i ^written ( , , ) 

LHe hath] 



285 



Presynphemic Timedex< 



may 

can 

must 

might 

could 

would 

should 



>have written (to-day ) 



Note. — It should be remarked here that may, can, must, &c. have 
no agency in pointing out the time : this may be seen by removing 
these serami — As, I have written to-day. Hence these serami do not 
coustitute any part of the timedex. Nor does written form any part of 
the timedex — this may be seen by removing have, and substituting 
had, or is — As, I had written — The letter is written. Had gives the 
presyndiphemic time ; as, I had written before this day came. And is 
gives the phemic time ; as, the letter is written. 

3. The prediphemic timedex is that modification which is 
produced in the primitive state of the seramus by the ed 
monogram ; as, walk, walked, love, loved. 

Or by incorporating with, or casting from the primitive 
state one or more of the following timedex letters — a, d, e, 
t, o, t) u ; as, bid, bade ; pay, paid ; blow, blew ; do, did ; 
get, got ; leave, left ; sting, stwng. 



PHEMIC 


PREDIPHEMIC 


TIMEDEX. 


TIMEDEX. 


bid 


a e 


love 


ed 


walk 


ed 


pay 
blow 


id 
e 


do 


id 


get 
leave 




t 


sting' 


u 



REMARK. 

I do not know the exact number of serami which the 
English phrenod has. At the time Murray wrote, it seems, 
from his statement, that there were 4,300. The number 
has very probably increased to 6,000 since the time of 
his calculation. Out of the 4,300, says Mr. Murray, there 
are but 177 irregular verbs. According to this calculation 
the proportion of irregular, to regular verbs, was 177 to 
4,123. And it is not probable that this proportion has been 
much changed by the introduction of new serami into our 



286 

phrenod. The regular verb being that which forms its 
imperfect tense with the monogram ed, it seems that this 
monogram is a very general past timedex — so much so in- 
deed that a distinguished grammarian, as says Mr. Mur- 
ray, suggested the propriety of calling it the regular way of 
forming the imperfect tense — and all other ways the irre- 
gular way ! With great defference to the memory of Mr. 
Murray, and to that of his authority, I must be permitted 
to'express my surprise that any scholar should suggest the 
use of regular and irregular upon so feeble a basis, as 
general and special. Is a course regular because it is 
general? If so to sin is to lead a regular life; and to re- 
frain from iniquity is to lead an irregular life. " Regular" 
seems to me to be nearly synonymous with right, accord- 
ing to rule, or some regulated or established order or plan. 
Now is it not right to form the past tense of do with id — 
did ? If it is not right it is wrong ! Is not this way of 
forming the imperfect tense according to the regulated 
method of forming the imperfect tense of do ? How, then, 
can it be said that id is an irregular method of forming 
this tense ? 

Nor does the absurdity end here, for from the fact that 
some verbs form their imperfect tense in the general or 
usual way, ( ed) and others in a special way, the verbs them- 
selves have come to be called Regular, and Irregular ! ! 
Thus loved, walked, &c. are right verbs — but did, ivas, 
had, wrote, &c. are wrong verbs ! ! Why, is the cloth of 
a garment good or poor according to the form or fashion 
of the garment? Is one verb a general verb because one 
of its tenses is formed in the general way — and another 
verb a particular verb because one of its tenses is formed 
in a special way ! 1 

DIVISION OF THE PREDIPHEMIC TIMEDEXES. 

The prediphemic timedexes may be denominated gene- 
ral and individual. 

1. The monogram ed (not e d) is the general prediphe- 
mic timedex, — walked 

2. The modifications which are produced by incorpo- 
rating with, or casting from, the radical state of the 
seramus, one or more of the following timedex letters, 
are the individual, the special timedexes— do, did, write, 
wrote, id, o. 



287 
DIVISION 

Of the serami in reference to their capacity and their want 
of capacity to receive these two sorts of prediphemic 
timedexes. 

1. Edible. 2. Unedible. 

1. That seramus which can take the prediphemic mo- 
nogram, ed, is an edible seramus ; as, walk, love, walked, 
lovecZ. 

2. That seramus which can not take the prediphemic 
monogram, ed, is an unedible seramus ; as, do, write, — did, 
wrote. We do not say doed, writed 

SPECIMEN. 

Pay, paid, an unedible seramus. Debate, debated, an 
edible seramus. 

1. Why is pay unedible ? Because it is incapable of taking the mo- 
nogram, ed, for its prediphemic timedex. 

2. Why is debate edible ? Because it is capable of taking the pre- 
diphemic monogram, ed. 

EXERCISES* 

Go, look, shake, flow, cry, lie, lay, say, be, do, punish, 
dug, did, see, am, was, put, cast, fast, read, rain, snow, 
fall, born, blow, run, bid, think, bring, fling, rules, feels, 
hears, speakest, sing. 

Note. — It may be well to say in this place, that, in a few 
instances untimedex letters are introduced — They are used merely 
to give the timedex letters an admission, they are not strictly 
speaking timedex, in themselves. For instance, in left, we have / 
with the t. But, then,/ is a mere substitute for ave — this substitution 
is necessary to the admission of t — for we can not incorporate t with 
leave — leavet. 

These instances fall perfectly within the definition of the special pre- 
diphemic timedexes. 

The special prediphemic timedexes are those modifications which 
are produced in the radical state of the seramus by incorporating 
with, or casting from one, or more of the following timedex letters — 
a, d, e, i, o, t, m. 

Now, as the / modification is produced by incorporating the t, this 
case comes as fully up to the principle of the definition as does do — did. 

REMARK. 

It may be well enough to remark here that went is the prediphemic 
of g — W as that of am — and were that of are. (New words, instead of 
modifications of the primitive state.) 

Z 



288 

Division of the Seramic Forms, wilh respect to their 
ability to point to time. 

The forms of a Seramus may be divided into Timedex, 
and Nontimedex. 

1. The timedex forms of a seramus, are those which 
point to time; as, write, writest, ivrites, writeth, wrote, 
wrotest, Love, lovest, loves, loveth, loved, lovedst, Be, am, 
art, is, are, was, wast, were, Put, puttest, puts, putteth. 

2. The nontimedex forms of a seramus, are those which 
do not of themselves point to any fixed division of time ; 
as, written, writing, Loving, Being, Putting. 

How Formed? 

The nontimedex forms are produced by incorporating 
en, ne, n, u, or ing either with the radical state, or with 
the prediphemic timedex; as, written, gone, flown, begun, 
going. 

Division of the Nontimedex forms with respect to the state 
of the Seramus with which they are incorporated. 

The nontimedex forms are en, ne, n, u, and ing, together 
with the particular modifications which are produced in 
rejecting, exchanging, or doubling certain other letters in 
order to render it possible to incorporate en, ne, n, u, and 
ing with the seramus; as, written, writing, putting. (Not, 
write?i, writeing, puting.) 

DIVISION. 

The Nontimedex forms are divided into Radical, and 
Predi-radical. 

1. The radical nontimedex is that which is always in- 
corporated with the radical state of the seramus; as, 
looking, being, seeing, running, (ing.) 

2. The Predi-radical nontimedex is that form which 
can be incorporated both with the predi-phemic timedex, 
and with the radical state of the seramus. 

Note. — " Predi-radical" is constructed from prediphemic and radical, 
and is synonymous with, Prediphemic and radical.' 1 



289 



Forgot 


en, 


Hid 


en, 


Trod 


en, 


Chid 


en, 


Bore 


ne, 


Forbore 


ne, 


Stole 


B, 


Spoke 


n, 


Wove 


n, 


Rang 


«, 


Drank. 


«, 


Flew 


o, n, 



RADICAL. 


fall 


en, 


wax 


en, 


load 


en, 


write 


en, 


be 


en, 


do 


ne, 


go 


ne, 


blow 


n, 


saw 


n, 


rise 


n, 


ring 


u, 


drink u, 


bear 


o, n, 



NONTIMEDEX. 

en, 

en, 

en, 

en, 

en, 

ne, 

ne, 

n, 

n, 

n, 

u, 



u, 
o,n, 

A FURTHER DIVISION OF THE SERA-MIC FORMS. 

The forms of a seramus may lastly be divided into 
Havible and Beible, and into Inhavible, and Inbeible. 

I. Havible form. 

Any form of a seramus, which can receive have in 
any one of have's modifications, is a havible form ; as, 

1. I have put up the book. (Not puts.) 

2. Thou hast rode too far. (Not ride.) 

3. He has written the letter. (Not wrote.) 

4. He hath walked sl mile. (Not walk.) 

II. Beible form. 

Any form of a seramus, which can receive be in any 
one of be's own forms, or in any one of be's substitutive 
forms, is a beible form ; as, 

J. I must be put to inconvenience. 

2. The horse was rode too fast. 

3. The letter will have been written. 

4. This ground was walked over by me. 

5. " We are putting up our books." 

6. " Thou art riding out, James." 

7. " They were walking from town." 

III. Inhavible form. 

Any form of a seramus, which can not receive have in 
some one of have's modifications, is aninhavible form; as, 



1. I have puts. 

2. Thou hast putt est. 

3. He has pultetn. 

4. They have putting. 



290 

5. I have ride. 

6. Thou hast ridest. 

7. He had rideth. 

8. They have riding. 

9. I have walk. 

10. He has walking. 

11. Thou hadst walketh. 

12. We have walk. 

IV. Inbeible Form. 

Any form of a seramus, which can not receive be, or some 
one of be's modifications, or some one of be's substitutes, 
is an inbeible form ; as, 

1. The paper will be puts up. 

2. The books are putteth away. 

3. The horse was ride too fast. 

4. This ground is walk over quite often. 
6. The letter was well wrote. 

6. The river is froze over. 

7. The bottles are broke. 

I. HAVIBLE FORM. 

The havible form is, first, the predi-radical nontimedex ; as, writ- 
ten, Secondly, the derivative prediphemic timedex ; as, paid, loved, 
Thirdly, the primitive prediphemic timedex ; as, put, burst, let, come, 
bid. 

The Havible form is, first, the predi-radical nontimedex of such 
serami as can have this nontimedex; as, written, trodden, laden, fallen, 
beaten, Secondly, the derivative prediphemic timedex of such serami 
as can not have the predi-radical nontimedex ; as, paid, loved, 
Thirdly, the primitive prediphemic timedex of such serami as have no 
derivative prediphemic form ; as, put, cost, let, And, fourthly, the primi- 
tive state of such serami as often use their primitive state for their 
derivative prediphemic timedex ; as, bid for bade, forbid for forbade, 
come for came. 

II. BEIBLE FORM. 

The beible form is, first, any non-timedex; as, written, writing, 
Secondly, the derivative prediphemic timedex ; as, paid, loved, Thirdly, 
the primitive prediphemic timedex ; as, put, burst, let, come. 

The beible form is, first, any non-timedex ; as, written, writing, trod- 
den, treading, laden, lading, fallen, falling, Secondly, the derivative 
prediphemic timedex of such serami as can not have the predi-radical 
nontimedex ; as, paid, loved, Thirdly, the primitive prediphemic 
timedex of such serami as have no derivative prediphemic form ; a.s,put, 
cost, let, And, fourthly, the primitive state of such serami as often sub- 
stitute their primitive state for their derivative prediphemic timedex ; 
as, bid for bade, forbid for forbade, come for came. 



291 

The beible form is produced by incorporating the following frame- 
work modifiers with serami — 

d, ed, en, ght, ne, ing, 0,00, ou, t, u. 

t 7 1 (made. 

1. a - - - make, ^ , . 

I making. 

07 u ^ had. 

2 a - - - have, < 7 

I having. 

s.d - - - wA paid -' 

( paying. 



„ (walked. 
walk, ^ 77 . 
' £ walking. 



4. ed 

5. m - write, wrote, 

o 7 , . ,i • 1 ( thought. 

6. 2m - - - think, -} ., . F. 

& ^ thinking. 



' written, 
writing. 



7. ne - 
1 


- go, went, ^ & . 
& ^ going. 


8. - 

( 


° ' • getting. 


9. 00 - 


1 C stood. 
- - stand, -2 , 7 - 

£ standing. 


10. ou - 


• a (ground. 
° ' ^ grinding. 


11. /; - 


' £ lending. 


12. w - 

J ■ 


, C hunp. 
- - hang, <J 7 . 

& £ hanging. 




REMARK. 



There are some serami which are neither havible, nor 
\beible ; as, may, can, ought. That is, /lat^e and 6e can not 
precede them — for we cannot say, have can, be might; 
though we do say, can have, can be. Another peculiarity 
I of these serami, is that they will not receive have and be 
1 even after them in any other form than have, and be — for 
we do not say, I can has written, Thou might hast writ- 
ten. Nor do we say, He can is there, I can am here — 
But we say, he can be there, I can be here. The serami 
, which can not take have and be before them, nor even 
] after them except in the primitive state, are restricted in 

z 2 



292 

their framework relation to the secormos— these serami are 
always secormic. These serami, therefore, are denomi- 
nated Pan-secormic. (JPante, always.) 

PANSECORMIC SERAMI. 

may, might, ought, 

can, could, will, 

must, would, shall, 

should. 

Note. — Would, and will may be used so as to be dicormic ;as, " And 
he would not that any man should know it." " We will that execu- 
tion be done." 

1. I - - - ought to return. 
Note.— Ought denotes a state of obligation or duty. 

2. I - may be at home. 

Note. — May expresses a state of probability cr possibility. 

3. I - can be at home. 
Note. — Can denotes a state of possibility. 

4. You - may go out, Charles. 
Note. — May denotes a state of freedom or liberty. 

5. I - - would that all would come. 
Note. — Would denotes the state of the mind. {Dicormic.) 

6. You - should write to your brother. 
Note. — Should denotes a state of obligation, arising from duty. 

7. He - - would not read. 

Note. — Would denotes a state of the mind, arising from resolution 
or determination, 

8. They - might or could read. 
Note. — Might, as well as could, denotes a state of possibility. 

9. They - - - might have been sick ; but I doubt it. 
Note. — Might denotes a state of possibility. 

10. - - - May you find your friends well. 
Note. — May denotes a state of the mind, arising from a wish. 

11. I - - - must return to-day. 

Note. — Must denotes a state of compulsion, necessity, or obligation 
12. 1 - - - will not work without a reward. 

Note. — Will denotes a state of the mind, arising from resolution or 
determination. 
13. - - Shall I send you a little of the pudding ? 



293 



Note.— Shall alludes to the state of the person's mind, as to receiv- 
ing some of the pudding-. SMI I send ? that is, what is the state of 
your mind I The same word, and that too in the same example, relates 
to a state of permission or liberty. Shall I send ? that is am I free 
or at liberty to send you a little of the pudding- ? 

1 4 ' " **?« you have some of the pie ! 

• ^'" - J W ^!i UdeS 6ntirel ^ t0 the stat *of the person's mind who 
is addressed. WiU you have ? that is, what is the state of your mind 
as it respects having- a piece of the pie. 

"1. If he is able, he shall aid his friends. 

2. I will pay you to-morrow. 

3. I will make thee a great nation. 

4. We will come to-morrow. 

5. He says that he will bring Goldsmith's 
Rome to-morrow. 

16. You say you will certainly come. 
'I. Thou shall not steal. 

2. Thou shalt not bear false witness. 

3. But of the tree of knowledge, ye shall 
not eat. 

4. Thou shalt write. 



Promises. < 



Commands. 



Threatens. 



: 1. In the day that ye eat thereof, ye shall 

[ surely die. 

( 2, The soul that sinneth, shall die. 

fh Should it rain, we shall remain at 
home. 
Foretells. { 2. I shall have a book to-morrow. 
3. We shall return next week. 
[4. Were I to run, I should be fatigued. 
SHALL. 

1. Shall, in the formative indication, only foretells ; as, 
1 shall go to-morrow. 

2 In the auditive, and in the sinefunctional indication, 
rtwS or threatens ; as, you shall be 

in,Titw '• The 3f*^ be paid, Thou**afc not steal, The 
soul that sinneth, sAa// die. 

WILL. 

1. JFz/Z, in the formative indication, denotes a promise 
or a resolve ; as, I will call at your office in the evening 
I will not let thee go. *' 

2. In the auditive, and in the sinefunctional, will <r ene - 
rally foretells ; ns, He will call at my house to-morrow 

Correct the following — 

" I will drown ; for no one shall come to help me out." 



294 

DIVISION OF THE INEDIBLE SERAML 

The Inedibles may be divided into several classes in re- 
ference to timedexes, and nontimedex es. 

1. Sin-e-nontimedex Semper Phemics, 

2. Sinenontimedex Post Phemics, 

3. Sinenontimedex Sense Prediphemics, 

4. Radical Nontimedex Primitive Prediphemics, 

5. Radical Nontimedex Derivative Prediphemics, 

6. Ambi Nontimedex Derivative Prediphemics, and 

7. Amhi Nontimedex Nonderivative Prediphemics. 

J. SINE-NONTIMEDEX SEMPER-PHEMICS.* 

Phemic. Phemic. 

Away, up (rise,) 

Can, wist (to know,) 

Lo, (see,) wit (to wit,) 

Off, wot (to know.) 

Ought. 
* Sine, without — Semper, always. The above sera mi are without a 
nontimedex form, — hence they are Sine-nontimedex. They are always 
phemic in their timedex — hence, they are semper phemics. 

1-. " Away , with him." 

2. I can write. 

N OTE . — To say, I can have written is neither sense, nor English. 

3. " Off , with his head." 

4. " Up , let , us be going." 

5. " He ought to write to his brother." 

Note. — It is obvious that those grammarians who, with Mr. Mur- 
ray, assert that ought may have a present time, are in error. To say, 
" He ought to have written to his brother, is to affirm that it is his duty * 
to do an act which is represented as having been done by him<prior to 
the existence of the duty. 

II. SINENONTIMEDEX POST-PHEMICS. 

Will. 
Shall. 

IJI SINENONTIMEDEX SENSE PREDI-PKEMICS. 

May, Could. 

Must, Would. 

Might, Should. 



295 
IV. RADICAL NONTIMEDEX PRIMITIVE PREDIP HEMICS. 





Burst 


Dispread 


Knit 


Beset 


Cast 


Forecast 


Must 


Bet 


Chat 


Hit 


Put 


Beware 


Cost 


Hurt 




Bespread 


Cut 


Let 




Rid 


Shut 


Thrust 




Set 


Spit 






She J 


Spread 


Wet 




Shred 


S weat 







Note.— Beat, bid, knit, quit, and slit may be so used as to entitle 
them to a place in this class of serami. 

V. RADICAL NONTIMEDEX DERIVATIVE PREDIPI1EMICS. 



Phemic. 


Prediphemic. 


Phemic. 


Prediphemic. 


Abide 


abode 


Read 


read 


Behold 


beheld 


Rend 


rent 


Bend 


bent 


Ride 


rode 


Beseech 


besought 


Say 


said 


Bind 


bound 


Seek 


sought 


Bleed 


bled 


Sell 


sold 


Breed 


bred 


Send 


seijt 


Bring 


brought 


Shoe 


shod 


Buy 


bought 


Shoot 


shot 


Dare 


durst 


Shrink 


shrunk 


Dwell 


dwelt 


Sink 


sunk 


Feed 


fed 


Sit 


sat 


Feel 


felt 


Sleep 


slept 


Fight 


fought 


Sling 


slung 


Find 


found 


Slink 


slunk 


Flee 


fled 


Speed 


sped 


Fling 


flung 


Spend 


spent 


Get 


got 


Spin 


spun 


Grind 


ground 


Stand 


stood 


Hang 


hung 


Stick 


stuck 


Have 


had 


Stin^ 


stung 


Hear 


heard 


Stink 


stunk 


Hold 


held 


String 


strung 


Keep 


kept 


Sweep 


swept 


Lay- 


laid 


Swing 


swung 


Lead 


led 


Teach 


taught 


Leave 


left 


Tell 


told 


Lend 


lent 


Think 


thought 


Lose 


lost 


Weep 


"wept 


Make 


made 


Win 


won 


Mean 


meant 


Wind 


wound 


Meet 


met 


Wring 


wrung 


Pay 


paid 







296 



REMARK. 



Although the following serami are .edible, they may- 
have the special as well as the general, (ed,) prediphemic 
timedex — for we say, He dug a place as well as, he digged 
a place. These words, however, have but one timedex — 
hence they are not removed from the class of " Radical 
Nontimedex Derivative PredipUemics." Still, to enable the 
teacher, and learner to speak with brevity, and clearness 
upon these words, it may be well to add fa", (both,) to the 
general title or name of the whole class— Hence these few 
members of the Radical Nontimedex Derivative Predi- 
phemics, will be denominaned — 

RADICAL NONTIMEDEX DERIVATIVE BI-PRED1PHEMICS. 

BI-PREDIPHEMICS. 



Phfmic, 


Bi-pre-di-phemic. 


Nontimedex. 


Bereave 


bereaved bereft 


bereaving. 


Build 


builded built 


building. 


Catch 


catched caught 


catching. 


Clothe 


clothed clad 


clothing. 


Deal 


dealed dealt 


dealing. 


Dig 


digged dug 


digging. 


Gild 


gilded gilt 


gilding. 


Gird 


girded girt 


girding. 


Shine 


shiried shone 


shining. 


Work 


worked wrought 


working. 



TN t ote. — Hang, and dare are not considered Bi-prediphemics. Hang, 
to hang up, is not capable of receiving ed, the general prediphemic 
timedex. And hang, to take away life by hanging, always has the 
general, (cd) prediphemic timedex ; as, He was hanged. 

Dare, to venture, is not edible, — hence it can not have both predi- 
phemic timedexes. We do not say, he dared go — but, lie durst go. 
And dare, to challenge, is edible without the power to be otherwise. 
We do not say they durst us to meet them — but, they, dared us to 
meet them. 

AMBI NONTIMEDEX ED PREDIPHEMICS. 



Phemic. 


Prediphemic. 


Nontimedex. 


Grave 


graved 


graven, graving. 


Engrave 


engraved 


engraven, engravin 


Hew 


hewed 


hewn, hewing. 


Load 


loaded 


laden, loading. 


Mow 


mowed 


mown, mowing. 


Rive 


rived 


riven, riving. 


Saw 


sawed 


sawn, sawing. 



297 



Phemic. 


Prediphsmic. 


Shape 


shaped 




Shave 


shaved 




Shear 


sheared 


Show- 


showec 




Sow 


sowed 




Strow or Strew 


strowedorstrew( 


Swell 


swellec 


I 


Thrive 


thrived 




Wax 


waxed 




VI. AMBI NONTIMEDEX DERIVE 


Phemic. 


Prediphemic. 


Awake 




awoke 


Bear (to carr 


y) 


bore 


Bear (to bring forth) 


bare 


Begin 




began 


Blow 




blew 


Break 




broke 


Choose 




chose 


Come 




came 


Do 




did 


Draw- 




drew 


Drive 




drove 


Drink 




drank 


Fall 




fell 


Fly 




flew* 


Forbear 




forebore 


Forsake 




forsook 


Freeze 




froze 


Give 




gave 


Go 




went 


Grow 




grew 


Know 




knew 


Lie 




lay 


Partake 




partook 


Rise 




rose 


Run 




ran 


See 




saw 


Shake 




shook 


Slay 




slew 


Slide 




slid 


Smite 




smote 


Speak 




spoke 


Steal 




stole 


Stride 




strode 



Nontimedex 
shapen, shaping, 
shaven, shaving, 
shorn, shearing, 
shown, showing, 
sown, sowing, 
i strown, strowing, ( 
swollen, swelling, 
thriven, thriving, 
waxen, waxing. 



Nontimedex. 

awaken 

borne 

born 

begun 

blown 

broken 

chosen 

come 

done 

drawn 

driven 

drunk 

fallen 

flown 

foreborne 

forsaken 

frozen 

given 

gone 

grown 

known 

lain 

partaken 

risen 

run 

seen 

shaken 

slain 

slidden 

smitten 

spoken 

stolen 

stridden 



298 



Phemic. 


Prediphemic. 


Nontimedex. 


Strive 


strove 


striven 


Swear 


swore 


sworn 


Take 


took 


taken 


Tear 


tore 


torn 


Throw 


threw 


thrown 


Tread 


trod 


trodden 


Wear 


wore 


worn 


Weave 


wove 


woven 


Write 


wrote 


written 


31 NONTIMEDEX SUBSTITUTIVE or 


NON DERIVATIVE 




PHEMS-PREDIPHEMS. 




Phemic. 


Prediphemic. 


Nontimedex. 


Be 


wast 


been 


Am 


was 


been 


Art 


wast 


been 


Are 


were 


been 
being 1 



The circumstance which classifies the serami under this head, is 
that they procure their phemic, and prediphemic timedexes by substitu- 
tion instead of variation ; as, be, am, was. Be with its two variations, 
and with its different substitutes, constitutes the entire class. 

Be has but three forms, namely, be, being, and been. Been is havible, 
and beible. It lias been said, that am, art, is, was, wast and were are 
so n any forms of be. 

Am, art, &c. are not forms of be — for they are new, and distinct 
words ! These words are substitutes — am is a substitute for be — for 
in the order of indication, we leave be upon the introduction of I; 
as, J am — (not I be.) 

In leaving / for thou, we do not say, thou am — but thou art. Hence 
in the second step of indication, we substitute art for am — art, then, 
is a substitute for am ; as, I am, thou art. 

In the third step in indication, we substitute is for art ; as, Thou 
art, He is. 

In leaving the singular secormos for the plural, are is used instead 
of am, art and is ; as, 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

I am, We are, 

Thou art, Ye are, 

He is. They are. . 

^Ire, then, is a substitute for am, art, and is. 

Having shown the vicarious relation of these substitutes, one to 
another, in the phemic time, it may be useful to say a word or two 
upon the relation of the set of substitutes which are used in the predi- 
phemic time. This set consists of was, wast, and were. 



299 

To denote prediphemic time we do not say, I anted — but we sub- 
stitute was for am; as, I am now, I was then. 

Nor do we, to denote prediphemic time, say, Thou arted — but we 
substitute wast ; as, Thou art now, Thou vmst then. 

And to form the prediphemic timedex of is, we do not say ised ; 
but we substitute was for is ; as, He is now, He was then. 

In the prediphemic time, then, was is a substitute for am, art, and is. 

Now, as in passing from the phemic to the prediphemic timedex, 
was is a substitute for am, art, and is, so in leaving the singular 
secormos for the plural, were is a substitute for was ; as, 



SINGULAR. 


PLURAL. 


I was, 


We were, 


Thou wast,* 


Ye were, 


He was. 


They were. 



RULES. 

Rule i. The singular secormos of the formative indi- 
cation substitutes am for be in the phemic, and was for am 
in the prediphemic timedex ; as, I am, I was. 

Rule ii. If there is neither a command, nor a petition, 
the singular secormos of the auditive indication, substitutes 
art for am in the phemic, and wast for art in the predi- 
phemic time ; as, thou art, thou wast. 

Rule hi. The singular secormos of the sinefunctional 
indication, substitutes is for art in the phemic, and was for 
is in the prediphemic time ; as, he is, he was. 

Rule iv. Plural Secormi substitute are for am, art, and 
is, in the phemic, and were for was in the prediphemic 
time; as, We are, we were. 

Note. — It maybe well to say here that neither of the nontimedexes 
of be, is a beible form — for we do not say, I must be been — I am been, 
I am being. 

It is not unfrequently the case that we meet with instances in which 
the radical nontimedex is made beible ; as, the house is being built. 

This form of expression is contrary to the genius of our phrenod; 
though it is not contrary to ffood sense. It is not contrary to good 
sense to say, " me am sick ;" but it is contrary to the genius of the 
English phrenod. Let men cease to say, therefore, that because this 
form of speech, "the house is being built," is sense, it is English ! 

* Wast is not a substitute for was — for the t inflection is a mere 
variation of was, which is produced by the indication of thou. 

A a 



300 



AMBI NONTIMEDEX DERIVATIVE FUGITIVE PREDI- 
PHEMICS. 



Phemic 


Prediphemic 


Nontimedex 


Bid 


bade 


bidden 


Bite 


bit 


bitten 


Cleave (to split) 


clove 


cloven 


Chide 


chid 


chidden 


Eat 


ate 


eaten 


Forbid 


forbade 


forbidden 


Forget 


forgot 


forgotten 


Hide 


hid 


hidden 


King 


rang 


rung 


Sing 


sang 


sung 


Spit 


spat 


spitten 


Spring 


sprang 


sprung 


Swim 


swam 


swum 



I. PHEMIC PRO PREDIPHEMICS, and PHEMIC PRO PRE- 
DIRADICALS. 



Phemic Prediphemic 

Bid for bade , and 

Eat for ate and 

Forbid for forbade and 



Prediradical Nontimedex, 
for bidden. 

for eaten. 

for forbidden. 



II. PHEMIC-PRO-PREDI-PHEMICS. 



Phemic. 
Bid 
Come 
Eat 
Forbid 
Spit 

Bade, come, forbade, ate, 



Prediphemic. 
bid 
come 
eat 

forbid 
spit 

and spat are the true predi- 






phemics of bid, come, eat, forbid, and spit. 

I IT. PRE-DI-RADICAL PRO-PREDIPHEMICS. 

Phemic. Prediphemic. Nontimedex. 

Ring rang rung rung , 

Sing sang sung sung 

Swim swam swum swum 

IV. PREDIPHEMICS PRO-PREDIRADICALS. 



Phemic. Prediphemic. 




Nontimedex. 


Chide chid 


for 


chidden 


Cleave (to split) cleft clove 


for 


cloven 


Hide hid 


for 


hidden > 


Forget forgot 


for 


forgotten 


Spit spat 


for 


spitten 


Bite bit 


for 


bitten 



301 
PRINCIPLES. * 

PRINCIPLE I 

The sentence character is formed out 
elements of the first seramus in the sei-^.v. acrta», uo, 
[He should have been punished] (for his offence.) 

PRINCIPLE II. 

As that place which the first seramus in the section, 
occupies, is the place where the sentence character is 
formed by the secormos, this place is denominated the 
formative position; as, " He has been seen to-day. ,? 

principle III. 

That seramus which occupies the second, or any place 
more remote from the secormos, is in the exformativc posi- 
tion ; as, He has been seen to-day. 

principle IV. 

As the first seramus is the only one that decides ivhich 
of the six times is meant, none but the first is said to have 
a timedex ; as^ I shall have written, He is writing, He ivas 
writing, He will be writing, 

principle v. 

The first step in tensification gives the phemic timedex ; 
1 as, is, was, been, Write, writes, writeth, writes t 9 wrote, 
written. 

principle vi. 

The second step in tensification presents the prediphemic 
timedex; as, is, was, do, did, have, had, write, wrote, 

principle vii. 

The third step in tensification presents the prediradical 
nontimedex ; as, write, wrote, written, Is, was, been, Fly, 
flew, jloivn. 

principle viii. 

When have, (ha? 9 hath, hast,) or will is the only seramus 
j in the section, the timedex is phemic ; as, I have a book, 
" I will, — be thou clean." 



302 

PRINCIPLE IX. 

When have, (has, hath, hast,) is the first in the seramus 
series, have has the presynphemic timedex ; as, [" I have 
been informed] to-day that the president is among us." 

principle x. 

When have (has, hath, hast,) falls after may, must, might, 
could, ivould, or should, the time is partially fixed by the cir- 
cumstances of the case — and it may be presynphemic, pre- 
diphemic, or presyndiphemic ; as, I coidd have written this 
week, I could have written last week, I could have written 
before my brother returned. 

principle XI. 

When may, must might, can, or should is not followed 
by have, the time is phemic ; as, I may write, I must write, 
I might write, I can write, I should write. 

principle xii. 

The tense circumstances of the proposition, may vary 

would, and could from the phemic to the pre.diphemic 

time; as, I tvould return then in despite of all my 

friends could, say, I could write better then than I can now. 

principle xiii. 
Will, and shall in a seramus series, have the postphemic 
timedex; as, I will call, I shall call, I will have that book. 

PRINCIPLE XIV. 

Will, and shall have the prepostphemic timedex where 
have with another seramus follows ; as, 1 shall have called 
before he leaves the city, He will have returned by six 
o'clock. / 

PRINCIPLE xv. 

Had has the presyndiphemic timedex where it is followed 
by another seramus ; as, I had called before you left, Had 
you returned before I left, I should have seen ^you. 

PRINCIPLE xvi. 
Have, in the semisection, has the presyndiphemic time- 
dex, where it is followed by another seramus ; as, I was 
very sorry last evening to have seen you at a public-house 
the evening before. 



303 

PRINCIPLE XVII. 



As the general way of forming the prediphemic time- 
dex, is tie affiring of J, or ed to the phemic, the ed mon- 
ogram is denominated the general, or common predi- 
phemic timedex ; as, love, loved, walk, walked. 



PRINCIPLE XVIII. 



As the ed monogram is the common prediphemic time- 
dex, any other prediphemic timedex must be special ; as, 
Do, did, Go, went, Pay, paid, Is, ivas, F\y,fleiv. 



principle xix. 



As no seramus in the seramic series can have the com- 
mon, the ed, prediphemic timedex, except the last, none but 
the last, can be edible ; as, I have been punished. 



principle xx. 



All serami which do not form their prediphemic timedex 
by affixing d merely, or ed to the phemic, are denominated 
inedible serami; as, is, was, go, went, write, wrote, fly, flew. 

principle xxi. 

As no seramus but the last in the sera-mic series, can 
make sense with the insecormos, none but the last can be 
dicormic ; as, " I have been writing a letter," "I will sec 
you at one o'clock. '' 

Note. — This principle may be given thus — all but the last must be 
secormic ; as, I have been writing a letter. 

Note. — Where a seramus is thrown from its affirmative position in 
the section with a view to indicate the idea of granting, admitting, 
supposing, or conceding, the proposition is brought, by the nature of 
the case, into the phemic time in despite of the prediphemic timedex of 
the seramus; as, Was I now at Boston, I could see my friends, Wert 
they here now, I could consult them, Had I the means now, I would 
return to England, Did he now write well, he could be employed as 
clerk, If I now was at Boston, I could see my friends. If they were 
now here, I could consult them, If I had the means now, <fec. 

In these cases the timedex, and the time ittelf differ. The clock is 
wrong. 

Aa 2 



304 

SERAMIC INFLECTIONS. 

The inflections of a seramus may be divided into two kinds, or 
into two sets ; namely Secormous, and Timedex. 

1. The Secormous inflections are s, es, ih, t, and st. They are 
called secormous inflections, not because they belong to the secormos, 
but because they are controlled by the secormos. 

2. The Timedex inflections are a, ed, t, u, &c. 

As il is important to include these two kinds of seramic inflec- 
tions in one technical name, they will be denominated, Biflect ions. 

BIFLECTION. 

Biflection is a full systematic presentation of both kinds of seramic 
inflections. 

BIFLECTION OF be 

SEMISECTION. 

Phemic Timedex — To be. Presyndiphemic Timedex — To have been. 

WHOLE SECTION. 

Phemic — Be thou, be you, or be ye. 

PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

1. Formative Indication, I am. 1. Form. Indication, We are. 

2. Auditive Indication, Thou art. 2. Aud. Indication, You are. 

3. Sinefunctional Ind. He is. 3. Sinef. Indication, They are. 

PRESYNPHEMIC TIMEDEX. 
SING. PLU. 

1. Form. Ind. I have been. 1. Form. Ind. We have been. 

2. Aud. Ind. Thou hast been. 2. Aud. Ind. Ye have been. 

3. Sinef. Ind. He has been. 3. Sinef. Ind. They have been. 

PREDIPHEMIC TIMEDEX. 
SING. PLU. 

1. Form. Ind. I was. 1. Form. Ind. We were. 

2. Aud. Ind. Thou wast. 2. Aud. Ind, You were. 

3. Sinef. Ind. He was. 3. Sinef Ind. They were. 

PRESYNDIPHEiMIC TIMEDEX. 

SING. PLU. 

1. For?n. Ind. I had been. 1. Form. Ind. We had been. 

2. Aud. Ind. Thou hadst been. 2. Aud. Ind. You had been. 

3. Sinef. Ind. She had been. 3. Sinef. Ind. They had been. 

POSTPHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

SING. PLU. 

1. Form. Ind. I will be 1. Form. Ind. We will be. 

2. Aud Ind.Thoxi wilt be 2. Aud. Ind. Ye will be. 

3. Sinef. Ind. It will be 3. Sinef. Ind. They will be. 

SING. PLU. 

1. Form. Ind. I shall be 1. Form. Ind. We shall be. 

2. Aud. Ind. Thou shalt be 2, Aud. Ind. Ye shall be. 

3. Sinef Ind. She shall be 3. Sinef. Ind. They shall be. 



305 

PRE-POSTPHEMIC TIMEDEX. 
SING. PLU. 

1. For. In. I shall have been. 1. For. In. We shall have been. 
% Aud. In. Thou wilt have been. 2. And. In. You shall have been. 
3. Sinef. In. She will have been. 3. Sinef. ira. They shall have been. 

PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 
S1XG. - PLU. 

1. For. Ind. If I am. 1. For. Ind. If we are. 

2. Aud. Ind. If thou art. 2. Aud. Ind. If ye are. 

3. Sinef. Ind. If he is. 3. Sinef. Ind. If they are. 

It may be here asked, how is it known that the time is phemic ? 
Answer — by the form of the seramus. If it was postphemic, it would 
be, be; as, if I be. That is, if I shall be. But because it is am, art, 
is, and are, no word, denoting futurity, can be employed. 

Prediphemic timedex of Be changed to the phemic 
by supposition, concession, <^c. 

1. For. Ind. Was I well, we would attend. 

2. Aud. Ind. Wast thou a good writer, I would employ thee. 

3. Sinef. Ind. I wish he was here. 

SING. PLU. 

1. For. Ind. If I was now there. 1. For. Ind. If we were now, &c. 

2. Aud. Ind. If thou wast no * r , &c 2. Aud. Ind. If ye were now, &c. 

3. Sine/*. 7«cZ. If she was now, &c. 3. Sine/*. Ind. If they were now, &c. 

ELLIPTICAL POSTPHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

Where there are doubt and futurity, shall or should may be omitted 
— yet it is better to express it. 

sing. PLU. 

1. For. Ind. If I , be 1. For. Ind. whether we , be. 

2. Aud. Ind. If thou , be 2. Aud. Ind. unless ye , be. 

3. Sinef '. Ind. If he , be 3. Sinef . Ind. lest they,' be. 

This elliptical state of the sentence, however, produces no beauty, 
nor any other good — it is, therefore, better to give the full expression ; 
as, If thou shouldst be at my house next week, thou wilt find me at 
i home. 

Nontimedexes — being, been. 

The constructions of the seramous series may be called 
secormic, and dicormic in relation to their capacity to 
receive the unnamitives of the sentensic, and the insen- 
tensic variety. The seramus series which can receive 
those of the sentensic variety only, is called secormic; 
! as, / am called he. 

But the seramus series which can receive the sentensic, 
and the insentensic variety, is called dicormic ; as, / am 
calling- him. 



306 



The secormic series is produced by withholding the 
radical nontimedex from any seramus that is naturally 
dicormic when alone, which is preceded by be, or by some 
one of he's forms ; as, am punished, art considered, was 
styled. 

The dicormic series is produced by affixing the radical 
nontimedex to any dicormic seramus which has be, or 
some one of be's forms before it ; as, am punishing, art 
considering, tvas styling. 

BIFLECTION OF see. 



SEMISECTION. 



Phemic Timedex. 
To see. 



Presyndiphemic Timedex. 
To have seen. 



WHOLE SECTION. 



Phemic — See thou, see you, or see ye. 



PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 
KING. 
1. For. Ind. 1 see. 1. 

•2. Aud. Ind. Thou seest. 2. 

3. Sine/. Ind. He sees. 3. 



plu. 
For. Ind. We. see. 
And. Ind. You see. 
Sinef. Ind. They see. 



PRESYNPHEMIC TIMEDEX. 



SING. 

1. For. Ind. I have seen. 

2. And. Ind. Thou hast seen. 

3. Sinef. Ind. He has seen. 

Secormic 

SING. 

1. I have been seen. 

2. Thou hast "been seen, 

3. He has been seen. 

Dicormic 

SING. 

1. I have been seeing. 

2. Thou hast been seeing. 

3. He has been seeing.* 



PLU. 

1. Far Ind. We have seen. 

2. And. Ind. You have seen. 

3. Sinef. Ind. They have seen. 

Series. 

PLU. 

1. We hare been seen. 

2. You have been seen. 

3. They have been seen. 

Series. 

PLU. 

1. We have been seeing. 

2. You have been seeing. 

3. They have been seeing. 



PRED1PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 
SING. PLU. 

1. For. Ind. I saw. 1. For. Ind. We saw. 

2. Aud. Ind. Thou sawest. 2. Aud. Ind. Ye saw. 

3. Sinef. Ind.lle saw. 3. Sinef. Ind. They saw. 

Nontimedexes — seeing, seen. 



307 

DIVISION 

Of the Serami, into Secormic, and Dicormic. 

Those rami, whether se, or inse, which are correctable to a cormos, 
are divided into different classes according to their capacity to be con- 
nected to but one kind, or to both kinds of cormi. The ramus which can 
be conjected to the secorrnos only, is denominated a Secormic ramus. 
That which can be conjected to the insecormos only, is called an Inse- 
cormic ramus. And that which can be conjected to both kinds, is 
called a Dicormic ramus. (Di, both, two.) 

Serami are divided into Secormic, and Dicormic. 

1. A Secormic Seramus is one which is conjected to the 
Secorrnos only; as, " John can write a letter." (Can.) 

2. A Dicormic Seramus is one which is conjected to 
both kinds of cormi ; as, " John can write a letter. 
(Write.) 

SPECIMEN. 

John will be a good boy, 
John, a Secorrnos. 
will, a Secormic Seramus, conjected to the Secorrnos 

only. 
be, , a Dicormic Seramus, conjected to both kinds of 

cormi. 
boy, an Insecormos. 

Note. — Pay no attention to the Inserami in the following Exercises. 

EXERCISES. 

This , is a fine lad. 
He will be a good boy. 
She will be a beautiful girl. 
Nancy will make a good tayloress. 
[Will Jane attend] (as a seamstress ?) 
Can they be masters (over men ?) 
Where is the Deacon ? 
Who is the Deaconess ? 
Is that man a Duke ? He is an Emperor. 
Is Jane an Empress ? 

I am no Enchanter. Thou art a Duchess. 
I am not an Enchantress. 
• Who is the Executor ? 

[The person (whom you see) is a Jewess.] 
[There is no Jew] (in this company) (of men.) 
Did you ever see a Tiger ? 
Mother, have you ever seen a Princess ? 
Which lady is the songstress ? 



THE INSERAMUS RESUMED. 
Division of the Inserami into Cormic, and Necormic. 

I. CORMIC INSERAMUS. 

A cormic inseramus is one which relates to a cormos ; 
as, [" And he entered again] (into the synagogue ;) (and 
there was a man there) (which had a withered hand.") 

II. NE-CORMIC INSERAMUS. 

A Ne-cormic inseramus is one which does not relate to 
a cormos ; as, [" And he entered again] (into the syna- 
gogue,) (and there was a man there) (who had a withered 
hand.") 

Specimen. 

And, ... a necormic inseramus, belonging to its own section. 

he, a cormos. 

entered - - a seramus, belonging to he, 
again, - - - a necormic inseramus, belonging to entered, 
into, - ... a cormic inseramus, belonging to synagogue, 
the, - - - - a cormic inseramus, belonging to synagogue, 
synagogue, - a cormos. 

Exercises. — See pages 81, 94. 

Duramus, Monoramus, Subramus, and Cora?nus. 

I. DURAMUS. 

A Duramus is a dicormic inseramus ; as, These good 
children will read these good books. 

CONCORDANCE. 

1. He saw no good fruit. 

2. This , is a very wise man. 

3. That lad is quite young. 

4. " A certain Centurion 's servant." 

5. " ji certain man planted a vine yard." 

6. That man's large vine-yard. 

7. ii That thing that that man has said, is that thing 
that that man should not have said." 

8. This man is a would-be President. 

9. The above facts are obvious. 

10. And two she bears came, and devoured the children. 

11. Neither book is my son's , 

12. Hither apple is good. 

13. Both men are intoxicated. 

14. He is both intoxicated, and mad. 

15. " The before-mentioned facts are before you." 



309 

16. Flying clouds are flying. 

17. Mr. Adams. 

18. Miss Brown. 

19. Modestia Brown was Jive months old on the 14th 
of April, 1837. 

20. Lord Byron. 

21. John Adams. 

22. /. Monroe. 

23. General Jackson. 

24. General Jackson's administration was popular. 

25. What , shall we do 

26. Which , of the two books is here ? 

27. Some , of the apples are ripe. 

28. Your son may have either , of these two books. 

29. You may read that book — I will read this , 

30. These books are new — those , are old. 

31. This gentleman'' s argument is that , of sophistry, 

32. He is cunning. 

33. Such cunning is not wisdom. 
34 This child's wisdom teeth. 

35. Which tooth did he pull ? The one which gave 
him the 'tooth ache. 

36. One man came — the other remained. 

37. This boy's brother's son is ten years old. 

38. The first boy is taller than the second. 

39. But my dear sir, I do not much like these but pro- 
positions. 

40. Marble ware-house, 

41. Mine eyes are now dim. 

42. Yours , are bright. 

43. Theirs , are jet black, 

44. A semi-sectional seramus. 

45. Leather shoes are made of leather. 

46. Rail-road car house. 

47. Rail-road-car house. 

The Synepoi are found among the Durami, and the 
Subrami. Hence some Durami have the three indications 
— Sub, Supersub, and Super. 

There are some Durami to which the sense itself denies 
the indications ; as, straight. 

Durami are formed from other words by the following 
; affixes — ic, al, an, ish.ful, ly, ing, id, en, ed, ty, iar, ous ; 
as, secormos, secornuc, accident, accident^/, belove, beloved, 
fly, flying, &c. 



810 



II. MONORAMUS. 

A Monoramus is an insecormic inseramus ; as, I heard 
of him. 





MONORAMI. 




Above, 


atwixt, 


excepting, 


to, 


about, 


before, 


for, 


touching, 


across, 


behind, 


from, 


toward, 


after, 


below, 


in, 


towards, 


against, 


beneath, 


into, 


through, 


amid, 


between, 


of, 


througout, 


amidst, 


betwixt, 


off, 


under, 


among-, 


beyond, 


on, 


underneath, 


amongst, 


but, 


over, 


unto, 


around, 


by, 


past, 


up, 


as, 


concerning, 


regarding, 


upon, 


at, 


down, 


respecting, 


with, 


athwart, 


during, 


round, 


within, 


atween, 


except, 


save, 


without. 



Note. — When these words fall into a Truncus, or a Seclados, they 
are Subrami; as, He was spoken to. 

CONCORDANCE. 

Above. 
1. He had an opportunity of viewing the scene for , 

, ) ( , , ) (above an hour.) 
2 Seek those things which are (above , , , .) 

3. The above fact is (above my comprehension.) 

4. The boat went above six miles an hour. 

5. " I saw a light (above the brightness) of the sun." 

6. He was seen (by , , ) ( , , ) (above 
fifty men.) 

7. The weight is {above six pounds.) 

8. " Hannaniah feared God (above many" , .) 

9. " In stripes (above measure.) 

10. God will not suffer you to be tempted (above what 
, ) ( , , ) ( , ye are able to bear.) 

11. He lives (above board.) 

12. He is (above disguise.) 

13. Invoke the powers (above , , .) 

About. 

1. He is (about the house.) 

2. They sit (about the fire.) 

3. He went out (about the third hour.) 

4. Paul was (about ^to open his mouth.;) 

Note. — Here the Semi-section is the Insecormos of about. 



311 

5. (What , [is he] about?) 

Note. — {About what business) [is he ?] 

6. The tree is two feet (about the trunk.) 

7. There fell that day, (about , , ) ( , 
three thousand men.) 

Note. — This is quite implenary — There fell on that day (about the 
number) (of three thousand men.) 

8. Scatter the sands (about , .) 

9. This tree is about as high as that. 
Note. — Here about is a sub. 

10. (Wandering about , , ) (from place) (to place 

11. Why go ye (about , , ) to injure me ? 

Across, 
1. The stick was put across the road. 
After. 

1. One man was placed (after another , .) (Behind.) 

2. (After whom) have you come ? 

3. Ye shall not go (after other gods.) 

4. I went (after my books.) . 

5. " To walk (after the flesh.") 

6. " To judge (after the sight) of the eye." 

7. Did they enquire (after me ?) 

8. (After this manner.) 

9. The child was named (after his uncle.) 

10. (After all) he has not appeared. 

Against. 

1. " His hand will be against every man. ' 

2. He is against the door. 

3. This law is against reason. 

4. Burr was a candidate for the presidency against 
Jefferson. 

5. He sailed against the wind. 

6. The John Adams lies over against us. 

7. All these things are against us. 

8. Lay this up against winter. 

9. He is much spoken against. 

Note. — Here against is a Sub. 
Bb 



312 

Amid, Amidst. 

1. He is amid the waves. 

2. He was amidst the shade. 

3. The shepherd was amidst his flock. 

Among, Amongst. 

1. He is among his friends. 

2. He is amongst his enemies. 

3. There is not one (among thousands) who is so ca- 
pable. 

Around, As, At. 

1. A light shone around hiin. 

2. They went around , , ) ( , , ) (about 
the camp.) 

3. They rode around the country. 

As. 

1. John came as a prophet. 

2. They came to me as pupils. 

3. He came as a wkness. 

4. He will act as moderator. 

5. I shall use this stick as a pen. 

6. I address you as his friend. 

7. John went into the field as a soldier. 

8. I meet you as a friend. 

Note. — Where as introduces an inseclados to show the rank, call- 
ing, or character of him or it mentioned in the truncus or seclados to 
which this inseclados that as introduces, isconjected in sense, it is a 
Monoramus; as, [" 1 address you] (as his friend.") 

Here it is not the province of as to point out the manner of address- 
ing, but to show the character under which the person is addressed. 
[" I address you] (as his friend.") 

This form of expression does not decide whether the word, friend, 
is synonymous with 7, or with you. If I am the friend, then the sec- 
tion, as a friend, indicates under what character I address you. But, 
if you are meant by the word, friend, then, the section, as a friend, 
indicates under what character you are addressed. [" I address you] 
(as his friend.^) 

N. B. — Whenever the person or thing" mentioned in the inseclados 
introduced by as, is one of the persons or things mentioned in the trun- 
cus, or in the seclados to which the inseclados is corrected in sense, as 
is a Monoramus ; as, ["John came] (as a. prophet.) 

Here John is the prophet — hence you may be certain that as in this 
case is a mono. But where the person or thing mentioned in the sec- 
tion in which as is found is not the person or thing mentioned in the 



313 

superior section, as is not a mono ; as, [ u Ye shall be] (as Gods , ) 
( , knowing- good) (and , , evil.) 

Here the beings mentioned in the truncus are Adam and Eve — but 
those mentioned in the section which as introduces are gods. And as 
the sense of the proposition is, not that they shall be gods, but that they 
shall resemble gods, you may be certain that as is not a mono. Be- 
sides, as, in the above instance, is in a seclados — hence you may be 
certain that it is not a mono, for a monoramus must introduce an 
Inseclados. 

At. 

1. There is trouble at our doors. 

2. They are (at war) with a powerful enemy. 

3. The bill was to be paid at sight. 

4. I am (at a loss) for words. 

5. I will attend at his calL 

6. I told you (at the first , ) that this would not 
answer. 

7. When party feelings were (at the highest , .) 

8. You have come then (at last.) 

9. (At all events) I myself shall not be there. 

10. He made no reply (at all.) 

11. He aims (at neatness) in all things. 

12. " He deserves well (at our hands.") 

13. They are at rest. 

14. He is a poor tool at best. 

Note. — In the following instances at is a Sub — 

1. He was shot at. 

2. \ was laughed at. 

3. I was even hooted at. 

At is a Sub when it is found out of an Inseclados. 
Athwart, Alwixt, Ahveen. 

1. " Whence, and what art thou execrable shape] 
That darest, though grim, and terrible, advance, 
Tby miscreated front (athwart my way.") 

2. The fleet stood (athwart our course.) 

1. ("Aiwixt two thieves,) [a victim stood to intercede] 
(atween man) (and God.") 

Before. 

1. He stood before his desk. 

2. " The world was all before them." 

3. « Poverty is desirable before torments." 

4. He esteemed virtue before gold. 



314 

5. He that cometh after me, is preferred before me, for 
he was before me." 

Note. — It may be well to say here that this verse is not English. 
After denotes time, and is not a mono, but a sub. The second before 
also means time — and is a sub — not a mono. The word, me, should 
give place to I ■ 

[He (that cometh after) (I came,) is preferred] before 
me) — (for he was before) (I was.) 

REMARK. 

When before means place, preference, or superiority, it 
is a mono — in other instances, it is a sub. 

Behind. 

1. He rode behind me. 

2. He stands behind me. 

3. He left his family behind , 

4. He is behind his brother in Syntax. 

5. For I suppose I was not a whit behind the very 
chiefest apostles." 

6. " They cast thy laws behind their back." 

7. I know not what evidence is yet (behind , , ) 

8. Look (behind , .) 

9. " Forgetting those things which are (behind" , .) 
10. There is a large amount (behind , , ) ( » 

• ,. , .) 
(Behind that sum) (which has been paid.) 

Below. 

1. " We are below the stars." 

2. This bill is below par. 

3. He hit below the mark. 

4. " Men are below angels." 

5. " He is below this station." 

6. My brother is below , 

Beneath. 

1. " The waters rolled beneath the ice." 

2. " Such men are beneath his notice." 

3. " That people sunk beneath oppression." 

4. " Judas could not stand beneath the burden of his sin." 

5. This act is far beneath his station. 

6. " In the heavens above, or on the earth (beneath , 

, •") 

7. (Above) there is every thing which even angels can 

wish—f Beneath , , ) there is nothing 

which good men can even desire. 



315 

Between* 

1. His nose is between his eyes. 

2. Rivers run between their branks. 

3. Things go ill just now between him, and me. 

4. There is not much to choose (between the two , .) 

Betwixt. 

1. "His nose is betwixt his eyes." 

2. " Rivers run betwixt their banks." 

3. " Affairs go ill betwixt him, and me. 

4. '• There is not much to choose (betwixt the two 
, •") 

Beyond. 

1. " He sent the ball two feet beyond the mark." 

2. " To comprehend this doctrine, is far beyond the 
ken of our minds." 

3. " It is beyond the power of man, to redeem himself." 
3. " It is beyo?id all doubt that all men are not philoso- 
phers." 

5. " Let no man go {beyond , , ) and defraud his 
brother in any matter." 

6. " Let no man think that he is wise beyond what , ) 
(,,)(, is written.") 

But. 

1. All went but John. 

2. All the papers were prepared but those , of Mr. 
Jones. 

3. And has but three letters. 

4. Who knows all things but God 1 

Note.— But is a monoramus where it is used in the sense of except ; 
as, all went but me. {Except me.) 

2. Where but begins a seclados, it is a coramus ; as, He was called — 
but he did not come. 

3. Where but is found in a seclados, and does not begin it, it is a 
subramus ; as, he did but speak. 

But, however, may be a seramus. 

By. 
By in significant character, is active, causative, conducive, continua- 
tive, contiguous, presence, medium, solitarious, systematic, possessive. 

1. " All things were made by God." 

2. He was hurt by a fall. 

3. They stole him away by night. 

Bb2 



316 

4. " By the space of seven years." 

5. His house stands by mine , 

6. There was a gentleman (by , ) at the time. 

7. Fortunes are made by speculations. 

8. He stands by himself. 

9. It was sold by the pint. 

10. How came he by the land 1 

Concerning. 

1. "The Lord has spoken good concerning Israel." 

2. Did he speak concerning me 1 

3. This is a principle {concerning which) he said nothing. 

4. I know nothing concerning the matter. 

Note. — Where about, of, or respecting can be put for concerning, 
concerning is a monoramus ; as, I know nothing concerning the matter. 
(About, of, or respecting the matter.) 

Except, Excepting. 

1. " All went except me." 

2. " All came except him." 

3. They were all found {excepting two , .) 

Down. 

1. He went down the river. 

2. They run down the hill. 

3. They have gone down town. 

4. We sailed down the sound. 

5. I went down the country. 

6. He went {down , , ) to the river's side. 

7. He went (up , , ) (and , , (down , , .) 

In the following, down is sub — 

1. The clock has run down. 

2. The sun has gone down. 

3. He has been down a long time. 

4. They hold him down. 

5. Party politicks should be put down. 

6. Error should be written down. 

7. Virtue should put doivn vice. 

8. The horse is lying down. 

9. They jumped up, and down for a long time. 

10. , , Down, down. 

Note. — Down may be used seramously ; as, Down , with 

him, " Down , with the fore-sail." 



317 

During. 

1. He walked during the day. 

2. During the time of the storm. 

3. During the last war. , 

For. 

The significant character of for is adversative, anticipaiive, causa- 
tive, characteristic, favoural, objective, proxy, total. 

1. This medicine is good for a cold. 

2. He has laid up many things for winter. 

3. " They cried out for anguish. 

4. Let her go for a wretch. 

5. " He hath built a synagogue for us." 

6. He has gone to town for his books. 

7. I appear for my brother. (In the place of.) 

8. He rode for three days in succession. (See the Appeal, 
page 99.) 

From. 

1. He came from Philadelphia. 

2. From this circumstance, it seems that he will not 
return. 

3. " This cloth has been made from good wool." 

4. It flew from branch to branch. 

In. 

1. He is in the house. 

2. He is in trouble. 

3. He came in disguise. 

4. Rain fell in due time. 

5. Is there sugar in your tea ? 

6. I am in good health. 

1. (In the mean time) I must inform you that I can not 
discover any thing wrong (in his conduct.) 
8. In deed, I can not do it. 
9» In truth, he is not in the city. 

10. In fact, he is in the country. 

11. There is not one (in ten , ) who would bear it 
so well. 

12. (In the viewing) (of the sun,) he injured his sight. 

13. He came in the spring. 

Note. — In is a sub, belonging to walk, fell, and taken. 

1. Walk in, sir. I fell in with this man on the road 
to London. 

2. He was taken in as soon as possible. 



318 

Into. 

1. I went into the house. 

2. " I put the knife into my pocket." 

3. The business has fallen into good hands. 

4. Divide the apple into three parts. 

5. He went into a full explanation. 

6. He may not come into our presence soon. 

Of. 

1. James is the son of Charles Henry. 

2. He is a merchant of Boston. 

3. " He has been ill of a child." 

4. " Of a truth I say unto you." 

5. This is the house of John. 

6. " This cloth has been made of good wool." 

7. " He was lead up of the spirit." 

Note. — Where of falls into a seclados, it is a subramus ; as, He was 
spoken of. 

off. 

1. "He was taken when he was off his guard." 

2. "I have not been off my seat for an hour." 

3. " He resides about thirty miles off this lake." 
5. " I am not yet off my horse." 

Off may be a duramus ; as, which is the off ox? 

In the following, off is sub — 

1. The house is a mile off ( , , , .) 

2. " Will you take off your cloak?" 

3. " He should cut off the top of the plant !" 

4. "The bird has flown off" 

5. " The gun went off" 

6. " They have run off" 

7. " This sheet comes off clear." 

8. " He speaks well off hand." 

9. " We must be off." 

10. " He came off better than usual." 

11. " Will you get off, and go in]" 

12. "He may think himself well off to get off without a 
broken head." 

13. " They are certainly badly off" 

" Off may be a seramus ; as, Off , with you," " Off , 
with his head." 

On. 

1. " The man stood still on the log." 

2. " Some seed fell on good ground." 

3. " He plays on the violin." 



319 

4. " He has sustained loss on loss." 

5. " They came on shore." 

6. " They were wrecked on the English coast." 

7. " New York is situated on the Hudson." 

8. " On what conditions will you come] 

10. M On Saturday last our ship was launced." 

11. " On the third week." (In is better.) 

12. " He appeared on this occasion to be without strong 
hopes of success." 

13. " Christ has had pity on the sinner." 

14. " He promised on his honor." 

15. " They have taken all the responsibility on them- 
selves." 

16. " His blood be o?i us, and on our children." 

17. "On the ratification of the treaty, the armies were 
disbanded." 

18. " On which side are you?" 

19. " They are now on the road." 

20. " When the house was on fire, all were on the alert." 
31. " He has ascended up on high." 

22. " It is not always safe to enter on important business 
on a sudden." 

23. " They shot most of their feathered game on the 
wing." 

On is sub in the following—. 

1. "He went on." 

2. "Move , on." 

3. " I went from James to John, and from John to Ste* 
phen, and so on, till I saw them all," 

4. " Say , on." 

5. He is neither on, nor off. 

6. " Put on your hats." 

On may be used seramously ; as, " On, on, my brave boys." 

Over. 

1. The bird flew over the tree. 

2. " The horse moves over the ground with great 
speed." 

3. " The smoke of the cannon rolled over our heads." 

4. " The mercy seat that is ever the testimony." 

5. " The advantage of truth over error, is as great as 
that of virtue over vice." 

6. " I will make thee ruler over many things." 

7. " Watch over yourselves." 

8. " His tender mercies are over all his works." 

9. " He remained with me over night." 

10. " The water is orer his head." 



320 

11." The snow is over the tops of his boots." 

12. "Prepare breakfast over night." 

13. The board is a foot (over , , .) 

14. The boat is safe [over , , .) 

15. " They carried the goods (over , , ) to France." 

16. " Good measure, pressed down, and shaken toge- 
ther, and running (over , , ) shall men give into 
your bosom." 

17. They gained (over , , ;) and , , 
(above , , ) money enough to defray all incidental 
expenses. 

IS. (" Over , , ) against this church stands a 
large hospital." 

In the following over is a sub — 

1. " These goods have been delivered over to the sheriff." 
"2. " We read over his letters with care." 

3. "They read them over and over" 

4. Do the job over. (Again.) 

5. " They soon gave over the enterprize." 

6. u Ke turned himself over/' 

7. " They have given him over — they can not cure him." 
S. " His troubles are now over" 

Past. 

1. He went past my house last week. (By.) 

2. I saw him when he was several rods past my house. 

(Beyond.) 

3. [It is] (past nine) (o'clock.) (Beyond.) 

Regarding, Respecting, Touching. 

1. " I said not one word regarding that affair." 

2. " He mentioned his own difficulties; but said nothing 
respecting those of Mr. Jones." 

3. " Nothing decisive has been done respecting a loan 
from the state." 

4. M Now, as touching things offered unto idols, we 
know that we all have knowledge." 

Note. — Regarding, respecting, and touching arc generally serami ; 
as, I am not now regarding (lie thing in that light, I wish to be con- 
stantly respestxng all good men, I hope, sir, that I am not now touch- 
ing any thing on which I have no right to speak openly, and freely. 

Round. 

1. "He put the chain round his wrist." 

2. " The family sat round the table." 

3. " They stood all round him." 



321 

4. " The horse has run all round the field.' 1 

5. " He attempted to sail round the world." 

6. " And the fame of him went out into every place of 
the country {round , , ) (about , .") 

7. " In this contract, you have got rouud me." 

8. " He wanted to return (across , , ) (but his friend 
wished to go) (round , , .") 

9. " I will look (round , , ) still farther." 

10. " The guard is to go (round , , .") 

I. Round 
May be a cormos — 

1. " The rounds of a ladder should be firm." 

2. " This man purchased a round of beef." 

3. u They played a round apiece." 

4. " Each man knows the time in which he is to perform 
his round" 

5. " They fired a round apiece." 

IT. Round 
May be a seramus — 

1. " The sun rounds the horrison." 
M. " Can you round the end more ?" 

III. Round 
May be a duramus — 

1. "A bottle maybe round." 

2. " They set off upon a round trot." 

3. " We will give you his answer in round numbers." 

4. " Make your letters round" 

IV. Round. 
May be a subramus — 

1. " They compassed ihee round" 

2. "I turned round to see who was behind me." 

3. " He has come round" (Changed sides.) 

Save. 

1. " And none of them was cleansed save Naaman, the 
Syrian." 

2. " And they saw no man save Jesus only." 
Save in the following is a coramus — 

1. " But he said unto them, all men can not receive this 
saying ; (Save they (to whom) (it is given) can under- 
stand it") 



322 

2. " But unto none of them was Elias sent (save , 
, , ) unto Sarepta." 

Note. — It would improve the above instances in which save is a 
coramus to adopt the following construction — 

1. " But he said unto them, no man can receive this 
saying save him to whom it is given." 

2. " But unto none of them was Elias sent save Sa- 
repta." (Except.) 

Save is generally a seramus ; as, Save all that you have, and acquire 
as much as you can by industry and honesty. 

to. 

1. " He went to the window." 

2. " He is going to a trade." 

3. " He is rising to honor." 

4. " He has an occupation suited to his taste." 

5. " He has a wife suited to his mind." 

6. " These letters were addressed to his mother." 

7. " Romans, to you I call." 

8. " Go, buckle to the law. (Study closely.) 

9. " Meditate upon these things — give yourself wholly 
to them." 

10. " Add to your faith virtue." 

11. " They met us to the amount of three hundred." 

12. «' Three is to nine, as nine is to twenty-seven." 

13. " They stood face to face." 

14. " It is ten to one that you will offend by your offici- 
ousness." 

15. Keep your thoughts to yourselves. 

16. " This is agreeable to the taste." 

17. "I must believe it true, notwithstanding he affirms 
to the contrary." 

.18. " All that they did was piety to this." 

19. " Few of the Esquimaux can count to ten. 

20. " There arc few who are perfectly deaf to the cries 
of the poor." 

21. This is our duty to ourselves." 

22. " He has a dislike to spirituous liquors." 

23. " She stretched her arm to heaven." 

24. " He is generous even to a fault." 

25. *' He was flattered to his ruin." 

26. " She was painted to the life." 
Note. — To is a sub in the following — [" He was spoken to [to 

officiate;] (as clerk.") 

To is a mono in an inseclados — in a truncus, and in a seclados to 
is a sub. 



323 

Toward, Towards. 

1. " He set his face toward the wilderness." 

2. " His eye shall be evil toward his brother." 

3. " Herein do I exercise myself to have always a con- 
science void of offence toward God, and toward man." 

4. " This was the first alarm England received towards 
my trouble." 

5. " I am towards nine years older since I left." 

Note. — Toward, and towards when found in a truncus, or in a 
scclados, are subs. 

Toward may be a duramus ; as, " a toward youth." (Ready, apt.) 

Through, Throughout. 

1. " He put the ball through the board." 

2. " He passed through the gate." 

3. " Through these hands this science has passed with 
great care." 

4. " Now are ye clean through the word which I hare 
spoken unto you." 

5. " He rode through the country." 

6. " This principle is w^ell understood, and thoroughly 
acted upon throughout America." 

Thruogh, and throughout are subs in a truncus, and 
in a seclados — 

1. " They will carry the thing through" 

2. " We have both read the work through." 

3. " They went through with much hardship." 

4. " The coat had no seam, but w r as woven from the 
top throughout." 

Under. 

1. "He stood under his umbrella." 

2. "The cellar is under the whole house." 

3. " We may see things which are under water." 

4. u Pupils are those who are placed under teachers." 

5. " I also am a man under authority, having soldiers 
under me." 

6. " He is under age." 

7. " I can not take under one thousand dollars for the 
land." 

8. " He does this under the name of charity" 

9. " This argument is not to be evaded under some 
plausible distinction." 

10. " Several young men could never leave the pulpit 
under half a dozen conceits." 

11. "II was more than he could do to sustain himself 
under so great a burden." 

Cc 



324 

12. " Man can not be happy under opposition." 

13. " We should be resigned under misfortune." 

14. " If you do this, you do it under the penalty of the 
law." 

15. " These are the conditions under which every Pre- 
sident should enter upon his office." 

16. " Man is under the necessity of obeying the laws, 
or submitting to their penalties." 

17. " He bound himself under a vow." 

18. " Man lies under the curse of the law which he has 
broken." 

19. " He trades under the firm of Jones & Co." 

20. " We live under the gospel dispensation." 

21. "The American revolution commenced under the 
administration of Lord North. 

22. " Our Saviour is frequently represented under the 
figure of a lamb." 

23. " Under favour of the prince, our author was pro- 
moted." 

24. " He may be considered under two characters." 

25. " This deed is under his hand, and seal." 

26. " He has left us evidence under his own hand." 

27. ^The bi^l is under discussion." (hot good.) 

23. " We shall have the subject under consideration 
next week." 'lood.) 

29. " Under Cod we can not err." 

30. " They are all under sin." 

31. " The boat in which Mr. Spencer left his native 
country for England, had got under way a few minutes 
before I arr.ved at the wharf." 

32. 4i He wrote under the name of Franklin." 

33. " To keep under , , 

Note. — Under may be used Duramously ; as, an under sheriff. 
Underneath, 

1. " His remains lie underneath this stone." 

2. " The slate did not lie flat upon it, but left a free 
passage (underneath , .") 

3. *^Or sullen mole that runneth underneath , , ." 

Unto. 

1. " He went unto the Mount of Olives." 

2. " He answered, and said unto them." 

N :,te. — Unto can not be used subramousiy. 

This monoramus is generally used in solemn style instead of to. 



325 
Up. 

1. " They are up town." 

2. " I went up that street." 

3. " We traversed up , , ' ;) (and , , ) 
(down the country.") 

Note. — Up is generally a sub. 

1. " He stood upon a high hill." 

2. " He sat upon a rock." 

3. " He stood upon a rock." 

4. " He stood upon one foot." 

5. " He looked down upon the fields below." 

6. " His hat was upon his head." 

7. " His shoes are upon his feet." 

8. " His coat is upon his back." 

9. " I will go upon these conditions." 

10. " They will work wpon no other terms." 

11. " We hope to be forgiven upon our repentence." 

12. "Impose upon yourself this task." 

13. " Upon the right hand I see many upon whom, I 
trust we can depend." 

14. " They are now engaged upon the affairs of the 
bank." / - 

15. (" Upon the whole,) I think that he ought not to go." 

16. " The city is situated upon the Ohio river." 

17. " He came upon an hour's notice." 

18. " He sent the officer upon a bold enterprize." 

19. u He embarked for Europe upon the first of August, 
1837." 

20. " I wish to borrow money upon lands, upon mort- 
gage." 

21. " The Romans were upon them." 

22. " The Philistines be upon thee, Samson " 

23. " You do this upon pain of death, or upon the pe- 
nalties of the law." 

24. " What was their conduction this event?" 

25. " Upon his principles, we can have no stable govern- 
ment." 

26. " What < is he upon ? (About.) 

27. " The horse is now upon a hard trot," 

28. "He is put upon his good behaviour." 



326 

29. " Cattle live upon grass." 

30. " Some will come upon the parish, or town/' 

31. "To take {upon , , .") 

Note. — Upon may be a sub; as, " I was called upon early in the 
day." 

With. 

1. " We are distressed with pain." 

2. " We are elevated with joy." 

3. " Men become respectable with study." 

4. " Fire is extinguished with water." 

5. " Fear not — for I am with thee." 

6. " They have struggled long with adversity." 

7. " They fought with each other." 

8. " He will play with any man living." (Against) 

9. " This color does not compare well with that." 

10. " The gentleman travelled with me from Boston to 
Philadelphia." 

11. " There is no living ivith such neighbours." 

12. " He gave me the Bible with much good advice." 

13. " I will buy with you." 

14. "I will trust you with the secret." 

15. " He shares the profits with others." 

16. " We can not twist our fortune icith your sinking- 
fate." 

17. (" With this , ) he pointed to his face." {Upon.) 

18. "I left the assembly with the last." {Amongst.) 

19. " Such arguments had invincible force with those 
pagan philosophers." {Upon.) 

Within. 

1. "He stood within the circle at that time." 

2. " A man should strive to be happy within himself" 

3. " He stood within my reach." 

4. " He will come within four days from this time." 

5. " Ills from (within , ) thy reason must prevent." 

6. Keep within your income. 

Without. 

1. " He stood without the gate." 

2. " He came without a book." 

3. " We are without a teacher." 

4. " Riches are without our reach." 

5. " Men like to live without labor." 

6. " Without the separation of the two monarchies, the 
most advantageous terms from the French must end in our 
destruction." 

Note. — Without should not be substituted for unless. It is bad to 
say, " I will not go without he does." ( Unless he does.) 



327 



CHAPTER II, 



NECORMIC INSERAMI. 

The necormic inserami are divided into two kinds ; 
namely, 

1. Sub, and 

2. Co. 

1. A subramus is a necormic inseramus which has an 
individual subordinate frame-work relation with another 

4 3 2 

ramus ; as, He writes much too fast. 

Subramus affix ly. Subramus prefix a. 

The subramus is ever inserted into a seramus, a duramus, or a 
subramus. 

CONCORDANCE. 

1. " The more I read, the better I like the book." 

2. " A certain Centurian's servant was sick." 

3. " Peter's wife's mother lay sick." 

4. " The coat is a world too big." 

5. " To be good is to be happy." 

6. " He has been spoken to." 

7. " On a wall sixteen hands too high." 

8. " He rode with this boy's mother's father's son." 

9. He did not taste at all. 

10. Open your hand wide, or shut it close. 

11. " No man's opinion is law with me." 

12. " The victory cost them dear." 

13. "The grass grows higher, and higher." 

14. " The fields look greener, and greener. ^ 

15. "A crooked stick may appear straight." 

16. "A straight stick may look crooked.''' 

17. " The men marched straight up a steep ascent of 
steps, which were cut close, and deep into the rock. 

18. " The cakes taste short, and crisp." 

19. "The water runs clear." 

20. " The sun shone bright." 

21. "The grass grows straight, and green. 

22. « The trees look beautiful." 

23. " The stick appears crooked — yet it is straight." 

24. " The stick looks straight — but is crooked." 

25. " That lady looks beautiful." 

C c 2 






"!». - Tin . Itdj ii certainly quite beautiful." 

li I le counted Ins men c.nwt ." 

88 ii The book was o&lletJ for," 

".», ti ///•:./, John will declaim— secondly t hii brother — 

end thirdly^ hie toacher.' 1 
.'!(). .ifhr (six daye , , ) Mers was a feast* 9 ' 
,'< i . "i [e bad come he/ore \ j I , .") 
82, ti Mr came g/ter | (I , .") 
88, ll They rode (or two days ( , , together") 
84, M 7%ti /'"//'^ brother*! ion in full ten years old." 
/-';/// li ;i r.ni), and belongs, i><>i to tm, but t<» (t, fin li i tub, 

tnd belongs to yferti Jfttirj li ;i sub, and oolongs to old Old li ;» 

duo, bolonging t" •>"". 

88* M h ii somewhat warm* 

.'v(». " What with tin* bread, and what with the water, 
in- euetained himeelf for several weeks/ 1 ( Partly* \ 
87i tl The sun ihinei every w^ere/ 1 
.'is. ti Docs he live any where in Pennsylvania? 11 

The Subramii like other words, denote maimer, positive 

nSSSi aeration, idenfiti/, conjunction, disjunction, cause, 

dunce, similarity ) dissimilarity % quantity ^ place, time, 
instrumentality y method, numbery tyc* 

Manner — < lorrectly, softly, prudently*, well, accordingly , 
badly, at, ill, tide w ite, hovi , a <•. 

PoeiTivBNiea- ( iertainly, truly, undoubtedly! yee, verily , 

smcly, indeed, politic elj . d <". 

Negation No, not, nayi never, not ;it all, 
I din ii i \ — Namelj . 

< Jonjunction i Universally, together, generally, conjunc- 
tively, 

Disjunction oil", separately, apart, asunder singly, 
alone, apie< e, 

< Iavsb Wh) . <<>r, ,\ c. 

Okoioi Rather, .*■<>. >ner, ohiefly, especially, 

SiMii mm So, as, equally, thus, like, 

DissiMii \kii\ -Otherwise, else, different, 

Quantiti Almost, nearly, partially, partly, soaroely, 
hardly, sparingly, scantily, lev, much, bountifully, libe- 
rally . &o. 



329 

Place — Here, there, where, away, whereon, wherein, in, 
at, on, thither, whither, hitherward, whitherward, hence, 
thence, wherever, out, forth, forthwith, off, to, ahead, behind, 
to and fro, every -where, any -where. 

Time — Now, when, then, whenever, after, as, afore, be- 
fore, yet, hereafter, already, hitherto, lastly, afterwards, 
never, ever, aforetime, about, straightly, immediately, soon, 
primarily, previously, at once, by and by. 

Instrumentality — Whereby, wherewith, thereby. 

Method — First, secondly, thirdly, &c. 

Number — -Again, once, twice, &c. 

Probability — Perhaps, peradventure, likely, &c. 

Possibility — Possibly, &c. 

Necessity — Needs, necessarily, &c. 

Note. — Some of the Subrami have the indications; as, more wise, 
most wise. 

% II. CORAMUS. 

Before giving a definition of a coram'us, it may be well to say, first, 
that co is a contrection of con which means tog-ether, in company, in 
mass, in collection. Hence a coramus is a ramus which belongs, not 
to a single word like a sub, a mono, and a duo, but to an assemblage 
of words. A coramus is a sectional ramus, for it belongs to a whole 
section ; as, Man ruined himself — but he has been redeemed. 

A coramus, then, is a sectional ramus — and it ever belongs to a 
sentensic section; hence it .may be denominated a se-sec ramus. (A. 
sentensic-sectional ramus.) 

In the second place, it may be well to remark that co is a contrac- 
tion of the word, co-epos. " Co-epos" is a technical term which has 
been formed from con, together, and epos, a word, and means that 
number of words which receive their syntax character from being con- 
nected with each other ; as, [" And there was a man there] (who had 
a withered hand.") 

In this sentence there are two coepoi, two sections. " And" belongs, 
not to the whole sentence, but to the first coepos only — [" There was a 
man there."] Hence and is a coepos ramus, or a coeposic ramus. For 
brevity, however, coepos is contracted to co as factum in u fac simile" 
is to fac. Hence, and with all other coepos rami, is denominated a 
, co-ramus. 

A COEPOS, or SECTION. 

A coepos, or section is any number of words which 
receive their syntax character from their individual frame- 
work connection with each other. 



330 



II. CO RAMUS. 



A coramus is a necormic inseramus which ever belongs 
to a sentensic coepos ; as, [Man fell :] and (he was ruined) 
(in his fall.) 

CORAMI. 



And 


further 


now 


although 


furthermore 


neither 


as 


hence 


or 


as-well-as 


however 


otherwise 


again 


howsoever 


provided 


beside 


howbeit 


since 


besides 


if 


still 


being 


inasmuch 


than 


but 


lest 


then 


both 


likewise 


thence 


either 


moreover 


therefore 


except 


nay 


though 


excepting 


nathless 


unless 


else 


not-only 


whereas 


farther 


notwithstandin g 


whether 


for 


no 

CONCORDANCE. 


yet 



As. 

1. " I can not aid him, as Phave not the means." 

2. " Ye shall be as Gods 

3. " He threw the ball as far (as we could see.") 

4. (" As it rains) [I can not go."] 

5. " Men are more happy as they are less involved in 
public concerns." (Bad.) 

6. "As , , with the people, so with the priest." 

7. " As your day is, so shall it be unto you." 

The last two examples are bad. They should read thus — 
As it is with the people, it is with the priest. 
As your day is, it shall be unto you. 

Fully corrected. 

It [It is with the priest] {as it is) (with the people.) 
2. [Your strength shall be] (unto you) (as your day is.) 

8. " He is as good (as any man , .") 

As-well-as. 

1. He is willing (as-well-as , , able.) 

2. [John , , ] (as-well-as I am ready.) 






33J 

Again. 

1. " For we know him that hath said, vengeance be- 
longeth unto me, and I will recompence, saith the Lord." 
And again, " The Lord shall judge his people." 

"And" is redundant. "Again" as here used, is nearly synonymous 
with and. The first co, (and) should be omitted. 

•' Again," " The Lord shall judge his people." 

REMARKS. 

The word, again, is employed to give notice that some 
additional matter is about to be subjoined to what has al- 
ready been advanced upon the exclusive right which God 
has reserved to himself of punishing his subjects, or peo- 
ple. Now, inasmuch as this additional matter must be 
presented in new, in additional sections, in additional co- 
epoi, again may be said to be a co-ramus, a sectional 
ramus. It is not true, however, that every word which 
seems to give notice of the approach of a new section, is a 
coramus, a sectional ramus. " When," in the following 
instance, seems to predict the introduction of a new co- 
epos — 

" I will return when." 

Now, when is a word which may mean every point of 
time, and is without the ability to fix upon any — hence 
some ccepos is always required to give some ciue to the 
point of time to which when alludes ; as, [" I will return 
when] (I feel inclined") 

But it does not follow, because this section is necessary 
to give when a more restricted application than when can 
give itself, that when has a frame-work relation to this ex- 
planatory coepos. This point may be somewhat clearly 
illustrated by substituting some word which has a more 
restricted application than "when," for the word, when — 
" I will return now" 

No one will say that now has any thing to do with any 
coepos, with any new, or old section. The word, now, has 
a frame-work relation with return-r-noio return, return 
71010. So also has the word, "when." When, as well as 
now, holds an individual frame-work relation to return. 
These words, then, have the same syntax relation — hence 
the same syntax character. Yet, these words are different 
in meaning. " Now" seizes a distinct point of time by the 
aid of some implied section; as, [I will return now] ( , 

: , o 

Whereas " when" seizes a distinct point of time by the 
aid of some expressed section; as, [I will return when] (/ 
feel inclined.) 



332 

Remember this — A coramus differs from a mono, a duo, 
and from a sub, in this — A coramus is collective in its frame- 
work relation to other words, whereas a mono, a duo, and 
a sub are individual in their frame-work relation to other 
words. A coramus is a co epos-ram us, a sectional ramus— 
whereas, a mono-ramus, a duramus, and a sub-ramus is a 
z#or<i ramus — 

1. He was invited, but he did not attend. (But, a 
coramus.) 

2. He sent a line (to me.) fTb, a mono.) 

3. This tree is very high, (This, and Azg*A, duo — and 
very, a sub.) 

With respect to the word, again, it must be observed 
that strictly speaking, it can hardly be considered a cora- 
mus. This word means repetition in some way or other. 
To understand this word as used in the following in- 
stance, it seems important to render the whole verse, or 
paragraph plenary — 

For we know him that hath said, Vengeance belongeth 
unto me, I will recompence, saith the Lord. And again, 
" The Lord shall judge his people." 

Rendered Plenary. 

And I will bring again the words of the Lord to show 
that he only, has the right to punish his people — " The 
Lord shall judge his people." 

Paul wished to establish the fact that vengeance be- 
longs exclusively to God — To do this he brings in the first 
place, the following words — 

" Vengeance belongeth unto me." 

In the next place he adduces the following — 

" / will recompence." 

Having twice drawn proof from the Lord himself to sus- 
tain the position that God only, has the right of punishing 
his people, Paul says — 

[And again I draw proof] (from the Lord) ( , , 
himself) ( , that) (the Lord alone has the right to punish 
his people)— "The Lord shall judge his people." 

In the case before us the word, again, is a subramus, 
belonging to draiv, bring, or present, understood. 

1. [And again , , ,•](,,»)(»»») 
( , , ) ( , , , , ,,,,,,'.){" The Lord 
shall judge his people") 

2. "For to which of the angels said he at any time, Thou 
art my son — this day have l"begotten thee ? [And again 

> » ?](? > i ) ( > » ) C » * » » J 

( , , , :) ( I will be (to him) a father ;) (and he shall 
be (to me) a son.") 



333 

3. [" And again ,,,](,,,,)(,,) 
( , , , , ) ( , , , :) ( Let all the angels (of 
God) , worship him.") 

N. B. — In each of the above instances, the sentences may be ren- 
dered plenary by the following words — 

[1 bring scripture proof] (to establish this fact.) 

Hence the ellipses may be filled with fewer words than are in- 
dicated by the elliptical commas. 

OR 

These ellipses may be filled in the following way — 

1. And I prove again this fact from the following scrip- 
ture — " Vengeance belongeth unto me." 

2. And I prove this fact again, from the following scrip- 
ture — "I will he to him a father ; and he shall be to me a 
son." 

3 And^ I prove again this fact from the following scrip- 
ture — "Let all the angels of God worship him" 

It may be well to show now the very sections which 
again seems to introduce in each of the three instances 
which are presented under this concordance. 

Again gives notice of the introduction of the coepos, or 
section which follows the hand — 

1. Again, \LT (" The Lord shall judge his people.") 

2. Again, O 3 (" Thou art my son,) {this day) (have I be- 
gotten thee") 

3. Again, HZT (" I will be {to him) a father,) {and he shall 
be (to me) a son") 

REMARK. 

Where the sentence is so implenary that again seems to imply 
additional matter rather than repetition of an act, it may be denomi 
nated a coramus by all who are too lazy to render the sentence pie' 
nary. 

In the following, again is a sub — 

1. " He answered me again" 

2. " Will he come to us again ?" 

3. "I will not again curse the ground." 

4. " He gave me as much again as I wanted." 

Being. 

1. ("Being you have come.) [you may remain."] 

2. [" You may remain,] (being you have come.") 

3. f" Being you have written this copy well,) [I will 
set you another."] 



334 

Note. — This use of being is not elegant ; yet it is common ; and 
perhaps rs just as many of those eccentricities in speech, which have 
the sanction of what is denominated good usage. 

These sentences, however, are presented in their implenary state — 
hence it may be well to take another view of them. 

1. (" Being that) (you have come,) [you may remain."] 

2. [" You may remain,] (being that) (you have come.") 

3. (" Being that) (you have written this copy well) [I 
will set you another."] 

This shows that being is in truth a seramus, instead of a coramus. 
The coepos, or section, " being that," is a seclados — and that is a se- 
cormos, representing the section, u you have come" The following 
section in italics, is precisely like, the section, " being that" 

(" He being wise) [we gave heed] (to his counsel.") 

Eoth sections indicate the cause of an effect — hence they agree in 
sense. 

1. (" Being that) (you have come) [you may remain."] 

2. ("He being wise) [we gave heed] (to his counsel."; 

What is the cause of this particular construction? In some instan- 
ces it is brevity. Be is thrown into its radical nontimedex for the pur- 
pose of briefly expressing that causative idea for the expression of 
which because, or for must be employed in the absence of this non- 
timedex of be. 

2. (" Because he was wise) [we gave heed] (to his 
counsel." 

We see more brevity in, "He being wise" than in 
" Because he was wise." 

It i* likely that the radical nontimedex of be was employed in the 
first place, to denote cause for mere brevity ; but in the second, it is 
very likely that this nontimedex was employed, not for brevity, but 
merely because it had acquired a causative import. In the following 
in tunce, this nontimedex does not promote brevity although it indi- 
cates cause. 

(" Being you have come,) [you may remain."] 
(" Because you have come,) [you may remain."] 
( u As you have come,) [you may remain."] 
(" Since you have come,) [you may remain."] 

It may be well enough to say here that because is not a proper sub- 
stitute for being in all instances in which being is used to indicate 
cause. Being in general convejrs an allusion to circumstances to 
which because does not point at all. Because is too absolute to supply 
the place of being. Being, in the following instance, implies that I 
do not want, or wish what I will permit — 



335 

(" Being you have come) [you may remain"] 

And being conveys an allusion to the cause which induces me to 
permit what I do not want. But for gives no intimation to any one 
thing but the mere cause of the permission. 

But. 

1. I will call ; but I can not stay but a few moments. 

[I will call ;] (but I can not stay) ( , , , ) (but a few 

moments.) 

The second but is a mono — except a few moments. 

2. " John resides at York ; but Thomas resides at 
Bristol." 

3. " It is written man shall not live upon bread ( , , 
, alone ;) but upon every word that proceedeth out 

of the mouth of God." 

4. " James is prudent ; but his brother is not." 

5. [" He gave me but one cent :](,,,»»' .") 
Note. — The section, or coepos to which but points is implied — 

Whereas I expected much more. 

6. (" If I could but return) [I should be happy :] ( , 

5 > J •> • J 

Note. — The section to which but points is implied in but, and is 
this — 

but I can not return. 

It may be well to give these examples in the form in which but is 
generally used. — 

1. He gave me one cent— but I expected ^.ve. 

2. If I could return I should be happy — but I can not 
return. 

REMARK. 

But, as used in the fifth, and in the sixth example may be deno- 
minated an Exiled, or an Exile coramus. It is sent away from its 
own section, or group of words by the peculiar construction of the 
sentence. 

An exile coramus is one which is thrown from the sec- 
tion to which it belongs in sense and construction, into 
some foreign section. Exile may be contracted to ex: 



D d 



336 

THE EX-CORAML 

Also, Both, But, Not-only. 
Both. 

1. [He is (both wise,] and , , good.) 

Both stands in the truncus while it introduces the seclados — " and 
he is good." 

Both is an excoramus belonging to its own section from which it is 
exiled by the peculiar construction of the sentence* 

2. ["And (both Jesus] and his mother was there.") 

3. [" He is (both virtuous] and , , brave.") 

4. [" He is virtuous] (and , , brave) (both ) 

Note. — Both in this position implies that a question had been put. 
(" Is he virtuous ?" (he is virtuous,) (and brave) both.) 
The section to which both belongs is the question which it implies. 
Both may be a duramus, and a subramus — 

1. Both men were found. 

2. Both men's hats were found. 

Mso. 

1. [He is right,] (and wrong) (also. 

Also is an excoramus, belonging to the interrogative section which 
it implies, and which is answered by the sentence, or by that clause 
of the sentence, in which also stands. 

" Is he right ?" he is right, and wrong also. 

2. [I wrote a letter] (and he wrote one) (also. 

Note. — The import of also is that more has been done than is con- 
templated in your question. Hence where nothing more has been done 
than is contemplated in the question, also should not be used. 

Do you sing, sir ? I sing, and I play on the violin also. 

Do you sing, or play ? I sing, and play both. " Indeed that is 
more than I had expected." 

" Indeed that is more than I had expected" is the section, or sections 
to which both points. 

But. 

1. " He hath not grieved me but in part." 

2. " Could I but read my title clear." 

3. " There was but one man present." 

4. " He has paid but three dollars." 

5. " And but infirmity which waits upon worn times, 
has something seized, His wished ability, he himself the 
land, and waters measured." 



337 

Now, the section to which but points is — 

But infirmity hath somewhat seized his wished ability. 

The idea will be better understood from constructing- the sentence 
as follows : — 

And had not infirmity which waits upon worn times, somewhat 
seized his wished ability, he himself would have measured the land, 
and waters. But (infirmity did seize his wished ability,) (therefore he 
did not measure the land and water.) 

6. " And but my noble Moor is true of mind, it were 
enough to put him to ill thinking." 

[And my noble Moor is true] (of mind,) (but it were enough to put 
him) (to ill thinking) (if it was not so.) 

7. " He has but one dollar left." 

He has but one dollar hft—(notwitJistanding he had a large amount 
(a few years) ago.) 

7. " His sand has nearly run — he has but one hour left." 

He has but one hour left (although he once had a long life) (before 
him.) 

Not- only. 

" Then Agrippa said unto Paul, Almost thou persuadest 
me to be a Christian." 

1. "[And Paul said] (I would (to God) that) {not-only 
(thou,) but also all (that hear me) (this day) were both 
almost,) (and altogether such) (as I am) (except these 
bonds.") 

The two words, not and only, constitute but one part of speech. 
These two words taken conjunctively, or together, give notice of the 
introduction of the section which begins with but. 

[And Paul said] (I would (to God) that) (not only (thou 
, , ) ( , , , but , , also , ) 

(all , , (that hear me) (this day) were both almost 

, ) ( , , , ) (and , , , ) ( , , 

altogether such) (as I am) (except these bonds.) 

This sentence may be rendered plenary in the following manner — 

[And Paul said] (I would (to God) that) (not-only 
(thou wast such) (as I am;) (but I would also that) Call 
the persons (that hear me) (on this day,) were both almost 
such) (as I am) (*and I ivould that) (they were alto- 
gether such) (as I am) (except these bonds. 

* And should give place to but. 



338 

Not-only, also, and both are ex-corami — 

1. Not-only foretells the introduction of this section — (" but I would 
also that.") - 

2. Also gives notice of the introduction of this section — ("all the 
persons were both almost such") 

3. Both gives notice of the introduction of this section — (" and I 
would that") 

1. [" And Paul said] (I would (to God) that) not-only 
(thou , , ) ( , , , ) but , » 
also , ) all , , (that hear me) ( , this day) 
were both almost , ) ( , , , ) (and ,_ , , ) 
( , , altogether such) (as I am) (except these 
bonds.") 

2. [He is (not-only willing,] but he is able to aid us.) 

3. [It (not-only rained] (on that day,) but it snowed.) 

Either. 

1. (Either [John , , ] or his brother must go,) 
(or we can not get the papers.) 

Either is an ex~coramus employed to give notice of the intended in- 
troduction of the coepos — "or his brother must go " 

2. f" Either [he , , , ] ' or I shall be there) 
(in season.'") 

3. (" Either [negligence , , , , ~] or design 
has caused this injury " ) 

4. ( u Either [the charter must be forfeited] or the banks 
must redeem their notes." ) 

5. " (Either [money , , ] or credit is necessary) 
(to all.") 

6. [" He went (either up] or he went down.') 

OR, 

6. [" He went] (either (up the country) or he went) 
(down the country.) 

Either may be a duramus ; as, on either side. Either man. 
Either may be a subramus ; as, " Either man's hat." 

Except. 

1. No man has a right to enter this park (except the city 
authority gives ( , him) leave.) 

2. No man can come unto me (except the Father draws 
him.") 

3. (" Except ye repent) [ye shall all likewise perish."] 



339 

Except, and excepting may be mono ; as, I would that all were 
such as I am except these bonds. 

Else. 

1. I must get his consent ; else I can not go. 

2. " Thou desirest not sacrifice ; else would I give it." 

3. " Repent, or else will I come to thee quickly." 

Or is redundant. 

1. Else may be a duramus ; as, What man else can be found, 
(other) Who else can be ? What else will you have ? 

2. Else may be a subramus ; as, Where else can we go? 

For. 

1. At the commencement of a truncus, and a seclados, for is a 
coramus ; as, 

1. [" For pay ye tribute also;] (for they are God's 
ministers.") 

2. ["For rulers are not a terror] (to good works.") 

1. For is a monoramus at the commencement of an inseclados ; as, 
[For, (for this cause,) pay ye tribute also,] I call (for the reading) (of 
the rale.) 

2. For is a subramus when it terminates a truncus, or a seclados ; 
as, [The reading (of the bill) is called for.] 

Farther, Further, Furthermore. 

Farther, further, and furthermore are eorami where 
they are used in the sense of moreover, in which situation 
they generally, if not always, begin a sentence — they are 
sometimes preceded by and, and but. The remarks which 
have been made upon again, apply to farther, further, 
and furthermore. But, farther, he himself has admitted 
his guilt. That is, But / proceed farther to establish 
the truth of this charge from the admissions of the pri- 
soner, for he himself has admitted his guilt. 

1. Farther, and further may be durami ; as, Any farther 
illustration of farther, further, and furthermore, seems 
unnecessary, This measure will prevent all further pro- 
ceedings in the case. 

2. Farther, further, and furthermore are generally subs; 
as, " He has gone farther into the subject than others," 
" To proceed further in this affair seems unimportant to 
every one concerned," "And he said furthermore that he 
knew nothing of his own business." 

Dd 2 



340 

Hence, Thence. 

Hence, and thence are corami where they are used in 
the sense of therefore ; It rains — hence we can not return, 
God has given every man ability to do good in some way, or 
other — thence no one can be idle with impunity. {There- 
fore we can not return, Therefore no one can be idle with 
impunity.) 

1. Hence, and thence are subrami were they mean place ; 
as, " Let us go hence," "I will send thee far hence to the 
Gentiles," "He wishes to pay a year hence," " When 
you depart thence, shake off the dust of your feet." 

Note. — From should never precede hence, thence, and whence. These 
words are synonymous with from — hence to use from with them is to 
tautologize without any excuse — 

" Then will I send, and fetch thee from thence," is bad. Better — 
" Then will I send, and fetch thee hence. 

In construction "from thence'''' is a full section, and should be dis- 
posed of as such. Hence thence becomes an insecormos. 

However, Howsoever. 

However, and hoivsoever are corami where they are 
used f in the sense of notwithstanding, nevertheless, yet, and 
but ; as, I do not believe that it will rain to-day — however 
it may rain within an hour. 

1. However, and hoivsoever are subs where they denote 
degree ; as, However hard this sentence may appear, it is 
just. 

Howbeit. 

Howbeit is always a coramus, and is nearly synonymous 
with, notwithstanding, nevertheless, yet, however, and 
but ; as, " He ought to pay — howbeit he can not." (Yet 
he can not.) 

If, and Inasmuch. 

These words are always corami. 

Likewise. 

Likewise is a coramus where it is used in the sense of 
also, too ; as, " For he seeth that wise men die, likewise 
the fool, and the bruitish person perish, and leave their 
wealth to others." (Also the fool, &c.) 

Likewise is a subramus where it is not used in the sense of also; as 



341 

u Go, and do likemise." (Go, and do as some other one who has been 
mentioned, has done.) 

Lest, and Moreover. 

These are generally, if not always corami. 

Nay. 

Nay is a coramus where it is used in the sense of more ; 
as, he asked me for my purse — nay, he demanded it. 

1. Nay is a subramus where it has a negative import; 
as, " I tell you nay — but except ye repent ye shall all like- 
wise perish." 

2« Nay may be a cormos ; as, " His answer was nay,''' 
11 He that will not when he may, when he would he shall 
have nay," 

Nathhss. 

Nathless is always a coramus, and is synonymous with 
nevertheless ; as, He has never known fear, nathless he 
has been in great danger. 

Not-only* 

Not-only taken as one part of speech, is a coramus where 
the idea expressed is that of something beyond, or above 
what is presumed, or expected ; as, He is not-only virtuous, 
but he is brave. (See page 118, 300.) 

Notwithstanding. 

Notwithstanding is always a coramus, and implies a 

- failure on the part of whatever exerts any influence to 

hinder, prevent, retard, or invert ; as, " Notivithstanding 

much has been said to perplex, and confuse, this subject 

is perfectly clear." (See page 111.) 

No. 

No is a coramus where it is used in the sense of more ; 
as, " No man — no, not with chains. (Nay.) 

1. No is a duramus ; as, no man could bind — no, not with chains. 

2. No is a subramus ; as, " No man's hands should be folded up in 
these days." 

3. No is a subramus in the following — Can I have your book, 
Charles ? No. 

Rendered plenary — You can not have it. 

N. B. — Where no stands for the whole sentence, or answer, here 
t is omitted, which should be supplied when the section is rendered 
plenary. 



342 

Now. 

Now is a coramus in all cases where it is not used in 
the sense of the coepos, " at this time" or, " at that time" 

1. "Not this man, but Barabbas; noiv Barabbas was a 
robber." 

Here now has the sense of " you must know that 1 " Barabbas was a 
robber. 

2. Now, how is any man to learn the will of his Maker 
except from the Bible, and his conscience ?- 

Here now seems to have the sense of " things being as they are" or, 
" man being as he is, limited in intellect." 

Man being as he is, " how is any man to learn the will 
of his Maker except from the BibJe, and his conscience]" 

3. Now, if you will reform, John, ah these things will 
soon be forgotten; and you will soon be restored to good 
standing among us." 

Now, here, has the sense of after all — 

After all, " if you will reform," &c. 

4. " Now, I know that the Lord will do me good, seeing 
I have a Levite for my priest." 

Now, seems to indicate that the means by which Micah knows 
that the Lord would do him good is some special event which has 
been mentioned, or which is to be mentioned in connection with this 
verse. Now is here nearly synonymous with from this fact. 

From this fact, I know that the lord will do me good, — 
What fact 1 " / have a Levite for my 'priest." 

5. "Now, we know that thou hast a devil." (From this 
fact.) 

6. "Now, I beseech you, my dear brother to refrain from 
this vice." 

(In view of the dreadful consequences, I beseech you, my dear bro- 
ther, to refrain from this vice.) 

Neither. 

1. ("Neither [he , , , J nor I was severely 
punished.") 

2. (" Neither [man , , ] nor woman was found) 
(in the whole land.") 

3. " Neither shall any man know him— nor shall any 
angel find him out," 



343 

Note. — Neither may be a duramus ; as, Neither book is new. 
Neither may be a subramus; as, "Neither man's book is here." 
(See page 360.) 

Or. 

Or is always a coramus. 

Otherwise. 

Otherwise is a coramus where it implies an alternative ; 
as, " Man will be saved if he repents ; otherwise, he will 
be lost forever," Man will repent if God gives him power 
— otherwise, he will remain in his sins, God will give man 
power to repent — otherwise the Bible is not true. 

Note.— Otherwise is a subramns where it belongs to a seramus ; 
as, he acted otherwise with me," To do otherurise would be to violate 
the law of duty, which no man should transgress. 

Provided. 

Provided is a coramus where it is used in the sense of 
if; as, I will return provided he sends for me. 

Since. 

Since is a coramus where it is used in the sense of for 
this reason ; as, 

J. ("Since I can not return) [I must remain."] 

2. [Man must die] (since he is not immortal.") 

3. [" You should take your umbrella] (since it may 
rain.") 

4. (" Since none (but a fool) can make a fire ;) (and) 
(since John can make a fire,) [it follows that] (John is a 
fool.") 

[It follows that] (John is a fool) (since none (but a fool) can make 
a fire, (and , , , ) ( , , , , ) (since John can 

make a fire.) 

Since is a subramus where it has any allusion to time. 

1. "It is seven years (since I left York.") 

2. " About six years (since I went) to London." 

3. [The Lord hath blessed me since] (my coming , 

4. Holy prophets (who have been since) (the world 
began.) 

5. [He has been ill ever since] last November , , .) 

Still. 

Still is a coramus where it is used in the sense of 
nevertheless, or notwithstanding ; as, 

1. [" He has been taught]— (still he is ig norant.") 



344 

2. [He has possession still]-— (stiU he has no right) (to 
the property.) 

3. [The call is still made ;] (still men remain) (in their 
sins.) 

Note. — Still may be a duramus, a subramus, and a seramus — 

1. " A still small voice." 

2. [He holds possession still}-' (still he has no right.) 

3. Can you not stiU this noise 1 

A duramus. 

1. "He is quite still about his troubles." 

2. " Children, be ye still immediately." 

3. " They sat perfectly still" 

4. " The waters are still" 

A subramus. 

1. " His pamphlet was still born." 

2. " This is a still born pamphlet." 

3. " Well, we are still here." {Yet) 

4. " The rain still continues." (Yet.) 

5. " Let him proceed — that we may understand him still 
better." 

Than. 

Than is always a coramus, and indicates a compari- 
son of inequality ; as, " a man is older than a child." (See 
page 115, section K.) 

Then. 

Then is a coramus where it is used in the sense of 
therefore, or " in that case ;" as, 

1. "It rains; then I can not go." 

2. " Men transgressed the law"" What, then, was to be 
done?" (What therefore was to be done?) 

3. " If all this is so, then man has a natural freedom." 

4. " Now, then, be all thy weighty cares away." 

Note. — Then may be a duramus; as, The then proceedings. 
Then is generally a subramus, and denotes prediphemic time; as, 
" Then he came to me, and gave me the whole history of his parents." 

1. " Till then who knew the force of those dire arms." 

2. " And the Canaanite was then in the land." 

3. " First be reconciled to thy brother, and then come, 
and offer thy gift." 

4. " Now I know in part — but then shall I know even as 
I am known." 



345 
Therefore, Though, Unless, Whereas, Whether. 

These words are corami in all cases. 

Thence, hence, now, then, therefore, and so are presented 
under page 116, where they are explained as denoting a 
consequence. 

Though is explained under page 111. 

Unless is illustrated under page 119. 

Whereas is illustrated under page 113. 

Yet. 

Yet is a corantus where it is used much in the sense of 
but, nevertheless, notwithstanding, and indicates that the 
result is different from what might have been looked for ; 
as, 

1. " He eats heartily; yet he has no strength." 

2. " He gives wise counsel to others ; yet his own deeds 
are unwise acts." 

3. " They have promised ; yet they do not perform." 

4. " They still hold possession ; yet they have no right 
to the property." (p. 111.) 

Note. — Yet is a subramus where it alludes to time; as, We are 
yet in Philadelphia, Are you not up yet ? 

VERBATORIES. 

Verbatories are those places into which the words of a 
section, are placed by their respective syntax characters. 

REMARKS. 

A verbatory is a sort of word-case, and bears the same relation to 
words, which a hook-case bears to books. This word-case is divided 
into different compartments — and the words of a section are thrown 
into these different compartments by their particular syntax characters. 
And what is generally, but improperly, called parsing, is the act of 
ascertaining, and stating in what particular compartments any certain 
word in a section is found. 

Now, this whole word-case is denominated a Verbatory. And the 
different compartments which constitute it, are called verbatories. The 
yerbatories are somewhat numerous— but as the name used is signifi- 
cant of each one's exact character, they are all easily acquired — so 
much so that no pupil need be required to memorize any thing. 



346 
I. CORMOUS VERBATORIES. 



Sentensie - - 
Insentensic - 



{ CORMITORY. 



Family-.--- ) NAMIT0RY . 
Individual - - - $ 



Exhibitive - - 
Unexhibitive 

Sentensic - - 
Insentensic - 



UNNAMITORY. 



EXHIBITOR Y. 



Formative § - - ) 

Auditive - - - - > INDICATORY 

Sinefunctional - ) 




Singular - 
Plural - - 



{ NUMITORY. 



The S 
The Es - ■ 
The Ves - ■ 
The Ies - - 

The E 

The En - ■ 
The Ee - ■ 
The Ic, Ice- 
The 1m - - 
The Ae - ■ 
The / 
The A - - - 
The Nepos 
The Sense - 



PLURATORY. 



Masculine - 
Feminine - 
Ambi - - - 
Muo 



i GENITORY. 



347 
II. SERAMOUS VERBATORIES. 



Sentensic 



I RA-MITORY, 



Spedaf - - - - \ PREDIp HEMITORY, 

£S5/e::hsi T o RY) 



Phemic - - - - 
Presynphemic - 

Prediphemic - - . T iMEDEXITORY, 

Presynd lphemic j ' 

Postphemic - - | 

Prepostphemic J 



III. INSERAMOUS VERBATORIES. 



Ir^Tensic -- HA-MITORY, 



Mono "} 

Sub - - - - - - J^RELATORY, 

Co J 

vSSSS*™ - ^LINATORY, 

Formative - - ) 

Auditive - - - - > INDICATORY, 

Sinefunctional - ) 

PiS a - "--'-- Fumitory, 

Ee 



348 



The £ 

The Es 

The Ves 

The Jes 

The E 

The En 

The Ee 

The Ic, Ice - - - 

The Im 

The Ae 

The / 

The .4 

The Nepos - -. - 
The Sense 



PLURATORY, 



Masculine - - 

Imb^ n . e . ::: ^enitory, 

Muo 

Sub ) 

Supersub > INDICATORY. 

Super - ) 

From the above presentation, it is seen that the Verba- 
tory is divided into two general compartments ; namely, 

1. Dormitory* and 

2. Ra-mitory. 

1. Any word in a section, which sustains a cormos cha- 
racter, is placed by this character, into the cormitory of 
the Verbatory ) as, [" There was a ma?}] ( , , sent) 
(from God.") 

2. Any word in a section, which sustains a ramus cha- 
racter, is placed by this character, into the ramitory of the 
verbatory ; as, [" There was a man] (who ivas sent) {from 
God.") 

In the next place, it may be seen from the above pre- 
sentation of the compartments in the verbatory, that the 
cormitory, as well as the ramitory, is subdivided into dif- 
ferent compartments. For instance, the great cormos 
compartment is divided in such a way as makes a distinct 
place for the sentensic cormos, a distinct one for the insen- 
tensic cormos, a distinct one for the namitive cormos, a 
distinct one for the unnamitive cormos, a distinct one for 
the family namitive cormos, a distinct one for the indi- 
vidual namitive cormos, &c. Ovc. 



349 

The great ramitory also is divided in such a way as 
provides a distinct place for the sentensic ramus, a distinct 
place for the insentensic ramus, and so on. In this way 
the same word has as many places as it has traits of cha- 
racter in the section in which it is used. And the process 
of ascertaining, and pointing out the various compart- 
ments, or places into which the same word is placed by its 
different traits of character, is called Passimation. " Pas- 
simation" is formed from passim, in many places, and 
ation. This word is used in all the forms common to 
words of the kind— Pas sirnate, passimation, passimating, 
'pa -ssi 'mated. 

To passimateis to follow a word into all the verbatories 
into which its syntax character has placed it. 

SPECIMEN OF PASSIMATION. 

" Moses smote the rock" 

" Moses, a word of the sentensic cormitory, individual namitory, 
sinefunctional indicatory, singular numitory, es pluratory, 
masculine genitory. 

smote, . . a word of the sentensic ramitory, special prediphemitory, 
diconnic relatory, formative pository, prediphemie time- 
dexitory, belonging to Moses, and rock. 

the, ... a word of the insentensic ramitory, duo relatory, belong- 
ing to rock. 

rock," . . a word of the insentensic cormitory, family namitory, 
sinefunctional indicatory, singular numitory, s pluratory. 

EXPLANATION OF TERMS. 
1. Cormify. 2. Ramify. 

1. To cormify is to present a word which may be both 
a ramus, and a corrnos, in its corrnos character; as, 
love. 

This word may be cormified in two ways — first, it may 
be thrown into a corrnos form which excludes the possi- 
bility of a ramus character ; as, loveliness. 

Secondly, it may be cormiried by being foundationally 
applied in a section ; as, " Love is a distinguishing attri- 
bute of a Christian." 

2. To ramify is to present a word which may be both 
a corrnos, and a ramus, in its ramus character ; as, love. 



350 

This word may be ramified in two ways — first, it may 
be ramified by being put into a decidedly ramus form ; as, 
lovest, loveth, loves, &c. 

Secondly, it may be ramified by being unfoundationally 
used in a section ; as, " All real Christians love each 
other," To love. 

1. Secormify. 2. Insecormify. 

1. To secormify is to present a cormos in its sentensic 
relation to a seramus ; as, " 3Ioses smote the rock." 

2. To insecormify is to present a cormos in its insen- 
tensic relation to a ramus ; as, [The rock was smitten] 
(by Moses.) 

1. Seramify. 2. Tnseramify. 

1. To seramify is to present a word which may be both 
a seramus, and an inseramus, in its seramus character ; 
as, love, learned. 

1. Seramifed — Parents love their children, These chil- 
dren learned their lessons well. 

2. Inseramified — Lovely children, Learned men. 

1. Duramify, Monoramify, Sub-ramify, Co-ramify. 

To duramify is to present a word in its duramus cha- 
racter ; as, high, higher, highest — or, high clouds, higher 
clouds, highest clouds. 

2. To monoramify is (o present a word in its monoramus 
character by framing it into a section ; as, I heard of James, 
He went for a book. 

3. To subramify is to present a word in its subramus 
character, or form ; as, He was spoken of The book is 
spoken for, Highly, Ahead. 

4. To coramify is to present a word in its coramus re- 
lation ; as, It is cloudy; but it does not rain, I went, for 
I was called. 

QUESTIONS. 

1. How do you cormify booh ? New book. 

2. How do you ramify book ? bookish, book's, boo k 
case, Book the articles to me. 



351 

3. Hew do you secormify book ? M A new book de- 
lights the child." 

4. How do you insecormify book ? The child is pleased 
(with a new book.) 

5. Flow do you seramify book ? u Book the articles to 
me^'booketh, bookest, booked, booking, to book. 

6. How do you inseramify book ? Book worm, book's, 
bookish, bookiskly. 

7. How do you duramify book ? Book case, book worm, 
book printing, book knowledge, bookish philosophy, book' 
ish habits, book's margin, bookish. 

8. How do you subramify book ? His arguments ap- 
pear bookish, or bookishly, This looks book-like. 

9. How do you monoramify book ? Book can never be 
used monoramously. 

11. How do you co-ramify book? Book can not be 
used coramously. 

Of, For. 

1. How do you cormify of, and for ? Of is not for. 

2. How do you secormify of? " Of is not for." 

3. How do you insecormify of? For is not of. 

4. How do you secormify for ? " For is not of." 

5. Can of, and for be seramified ? No. 

6. Can they be inseramified ? Yes — " Of that man I 
know nothing, for i have never heard of him/ nor have I 
ever read of him." (These are inseramified by their nature.) 

7. Can these words be duramified 1 No. 

8. Can these words be subramified 1 Yes — This mea- 
sure has been spoken of, The reading of the motion is 
called for. 

9 Can these iaserami be co-ramified ? For can — but 
of can not. 

10. How do you coramify for? " We must return, 
for our friends wish to see us." 

Head. 

1. How do you subramify head? *#head — He has 
gone ahead. 

N. B. — There are sixty, or more words in our phrenod, which can 
be subramified by prefixing a ; as, way, away, &c. 

Ee 2 



352 

The, A. 

How do you subramify the, and a ? The man's servant 
saw a bear's track. 

QUESTIONS, 

1. How are serami cormified'? 

Those serami which can be cormified, may be cormi- 
fied, first, by actual application in the formation of sec- 
tions ; as, " As they walked to take a walk." 

Secondly, by modification, improperly called in the old 
system, derivation; as, Deduce, deduction, Abate, abate- 
ment — and in two other ways which will be noticed under 
the following head — 

TRANSVERBATION. 

Transverbation is constructed from trans, from one 
place to another, and verbum, a word, and means the act, 
process, or science of removing the same word from one 
class, or verbatory to another. 

The principles which constitute the science of trans- 
verbation, are the following : 

1. The nature of the word ; as, virtue, writes, free. 

2. The application of the word in forming a section ; 
as, This is the book that I saw, Of has two letters. 

3. Pronunciation, or accent ; as, reb-el, re-bel. 

4. Change in form ; as, mode, modf//. 

I. CORMIFICATION. 

Cormification is the process of rendering words cormi. 
Words are cormified by the four following means — 

1. By the nature of the word; as, Moses, rock. 

2. By the application of the word in the construction of 
a section ; as, [All (that relates) (to man) is matter] (of 
progression.) 

3. By accent, pronuuciation ; as, reb-el, con-vict. 

4. By some new form in the word; as, dote, dotage, 
free, freedom. 

II. SERAMIFICATION. 

Seramification is the act, or principles of rendering 
words serami. 

Words are seramifed in four ways — 

1. By the nature of the word; as, am, is, writes, go. 



353 

2. By pronunciation, or accent ; as, re-bel, con-vict. 

3. By application in forming sections ; as, They love to 
read, " These fires dry the ground quite fast," to love. 

4. By some change in form ; as, origin, originate, bath, 
bathe, grass, graze. 

III. DURAMIFICATION. 

Duramification is the act, or principles of rendering 
words durami. 

Words are duramified in three ways — 

1. By the nature of the word ; as, free, high, black, red. 

2. By application in forming a section, or phrase ; as, 
Salt water, Moses Brown, table spoon s, flying clouds, rail 
roads. 

3. By a change in the form of the word ; as, mode, 
modaZ, irony, ironical. 

IV. SUBRAMIFICATION. 

Subramification is the act, or principles of rendering 
words subrami, . 
Words are subramified in three ways— 

1. By the nature of the word; as, too, indeed, here. 

2. By the application of the word in forming a section ; 
as, The coat is a icorld too big, John's brother's son is ten 
years old, He is spoken of. 

3. By some change in the form of the word ; as, accu- 
rate, accurate/^, just, justly, way, away, head, ahead. ^ 

V. MONORAMIFICATION. 

Monoramification is the act, or the principles of render- 
ing words monorami. 

Words are monoramified in two ways — 

1. By the nature of the word ; as, of, to, in } on. 

'2. By application in forming a section ; as, All went but 
him, all went past the house, all came except, or save 
John. 

VT. CORAMIFICATION. 

Coramification is the act, or principles of rendering 
words cor ami. 
Words are coramifled in two ways — 

1. By the nature of the word; as, because, notwithstand- 
ing, therefore, than, nathless, and, or. 

2. By application in conjecting the word to a coepos, or 
section; as, I can not return except he sends for me, I 
shall go provided it does not rain, It is a fine day — hence 
we must go to town. 



A MINUTE PRESENTATION of TRANSVERBATION- 

I. CORMIFICATION. 

Cormification is the process of rendering words cormi. 
Words are cormi fied by the four following means — 
J. By the nature of the word; as, Moses, rock. 
2. By application ; as [All (that relates) to man) is matter] of progression. 

3. By accent, pronunciation ; as, reb-e\, con-vict. 

4. By some new form; as, dote, doiage, free, freedom. 

I. [Many serami are cormified by the following cormijiers. 

SERAM1C CORMIFIERS. EXAMPLES OF ILLUSTRATION. 

age dote, dotog-e. 

ance repent, repentance. 

ancy occupy, occupancy. 

ence depend, dependence. 

ency depend, dependency. 

ant . . . . . defend, defendant. 

ent preside, president 

ment manage, management. 

ure expose, exposure. 

otion ..... simplify, simplification. 

ion depress, depression. 

ition add, addift'on. 

si on admit, admission. 

lion . . . . . produce, production. 

er make, maker. 

or . . . . . . create, creator. 

ce defend, defence. 

se expend, expense. 

ship ..... court, courtship. 

trig begin, beginning-. 

red hate, hatred 

tare mix, mixture. 

th ..... . grow, growth. 

ist copy, copyist 

II. Some serami are cormified by pronunciation mere- 
ly ; as ,con-vict, convict, re-bel, reb-el. 

III. Many durami are cormified by incorporating some 
of the following durawic cormifiers with the durami. 

DURAMIC CORMIFIERS. EXAMPLES OF ILLUSTRATION. 

dom free, freedom. 

hood false, falsehood. 

ness good, goodness. 

ity . . . . . . real, reality. 

ship hard, hardship. 

ce fragrant, fragrance. 

cy fluent, fluency. 

t high, height. 

th strong, strength. 

ard drunk, drunkard 

ist universal, universalis?. 



II. SERAMIFICATION. 

Seramification is the process of rendering words serami. 
Words are seramified in four ways — 

1. By the nature of the word ; as, am, is, written, go. 

2. By pronunciation, or accent ; a, re-bel, con-vict. 

3. By application; as, "These fires dry the ground quite fast." 

4. By some change in form ; as. origin, originate, bath, bathe, 
grass, graze. 

I. Some cormi are seramified by incorporating the fol- 
lowing seramijiers : 

CORMIC SERAMIF1ERS. EXAMF T.ES OF ILLUSTRATION. 

ate origin, original. 

en height, heighten. 

fy beauty, beauty. 

s love, loves. 

es beauty, beautifies. 

th gift, ' giveth. 

ize method, methods. 

e bath, bathe. 

s ...... device, devise. 

ze ..'... . grass, gra^e. 

en rage, enrage. 

in form, inform. 

II. Some durami are seramified by incorporating the 
following seramijiers : 

DURAMIC SERAMIFIERS. KiMPLEi op iLLUgTRXTTn^. 

ate domestic, domesticate. 

en light, light en. 

ize moral, moralize. 

III. Some durami are seramified by application without 
any change of form ; as, 

1. " Wet cloth. They wet the cloth." 

2. " Dry cloth. They dry the cloth." 

Note. — It may be well to say here that these durami ma y take the 
s, cs, th, t, and st seramifiers; as, He v:arms himself. 

IV. Some subrami are seramified by application without 
any change of form ; as, 

1. "He went forward. They forward goods." 

2. " Take off your hat. Off with his head." 

3. " Get up. Up, let us be off." 

V. Some words are seramified by incorporating the 
following prefix seramifiers : 

C & R. SERAMIFIERS. EXAMPLES OF ILLUSTRATION. 

en dear, endear. 

in form, inform. 

trans late, translate. 

re mind, remind. 



356 

III. DURAMIFICATXON, 

Duramification is the act, or process of forming durami. 
Words are duramified in three ways — 

1. By the nature of the word ; as, free, high, black, red. 

% By application ; as, Salt water, Moses Brown, table spoons, fly- 
ing colours, rail roads. 

3. By a change in the form of the word ; as, mode, modaZ, irony, 
ironical. 

I. Some cormi are duramified by incorporating the fol- 
lowing cormic duramifiers : 

CORMIC DURAMIFIERS. EXAMPLES OF ILLUSTRATION. 

al mode, mod«/. 

iced - - - - irony, ironical, 

ine - - - - adamant, adamantae. 

ous - - - - mountain, mountainous. 

eous - - - - right, righteous, 

ions - - - - space, spaciows. 

y bone, hony. 

ly - - - - - man, manly 

ish - - - - slave, slavish, 

ful - - - - skill, skillful, 

ic - - - - - hero, heroic. 

He - - - - infant, infanU'/e. 

able - - - - reason, reasoh«6/e. 

ible - - . . convert, convertible. 

cm Rome, Roman. 

en brass, brazen. 

ed saint, sainted. 

some - - - - burden, burdensome. 

ese - - - - Portugal, Portugese. 

less - - - - sun, sunless. 

's - - - - lady, lady's. 

ladies, ladies'. 

y, ine - - - - me, my, mine, thou, thy, thine. 

o, rs - - - - us, our, ours. 

r, rs - - - - you, your, yours. 

is - - - - he, his. 

s - - - - her, hers, it, its. 

ir, irs - - - they, their, theirs. 

se - - - - who, whose. 

II. Some cormi are duramified by dropping the cormify- 
ing monogram ; as, Goodness, good, Badness, bad, Black- 
ness, black. 



357 

IV. SUBRAMIFICATION. 

Subramification is the process of rendering words subrami. 

Words are subramified in three ways — 

1. By the nature of the word ; as, too, indeed. 

2. By the application of the word in forming a section ; as, The 
coat is a world too big", John's brother's son is ten years old, He is 
spoken of. 

3. By some change in the form of the word ; as, accurate, accu- 
rately, just, justZy, way, away, head, ahead. 

I. Some durami are subramified by incorporating ly ; 
as, 

DURAMIC SUBRAMIFIERS. " EXAMPLES OF ILLUSTRATION. 

ly ----- - virtuous, virtuous^. 

ly brave, brave/y. 

ly - second, second^. 

II. Some cormi, some serami, and some durami, are 
subramified by incorporating a as a prefix ; as, 

SUBRAMIFIERS. EXAMPLES OF ILLUSTRATION. 

Cormic a ly side, aside, man, manly. 

Seramic a go, ago, miss, amiss. 

Duramic a right, aright, wry, awry. 

III. Many words are subramified by their original na- 
ture ; as, too, here, there, where, &c. 

These are never removed from the subrelatory, their 
native place, except when they are spoken of, when they 
are thrown into the cormitory ; as, too is a subramus. 

V. MONORAMIFICATION. 

Monoramifjcation is the act, or the principles of ren- 
dering words monorami. 

Words are monoramified in two ways — 

1. By the nature of the word; as, of, to, in, on. 

2. By application in forming a section; as, All went 
but him, all weni past the house, all came except, or save 
John. 

VI. CORAMIFICATION. 

Coramification is the act, or the principles of rendering 
words cor ami. 

Words are coramified in two ways — 

1. By the nature of the word; as, because, notwith- 
standing, therefore, than, nathless, and, or. 

2* By application in connecting a word to a coepos, 
or section ; as, I can not return except he sends for me, 
I shall go provided it does not rain, It is a fine day — 
hence we must go to town. 



358 



I. CORMOS MODIFICATIONS'. 



Cormos Modification is a change which is produced in 
the sense by giving the word a new cormos form; as, 
patron, patronage. 



CORMOS MODIFIERS 

ade 

age 

ate 

dom 

head 

hood 

rick 

ship 

wick 

ion 

V • 
ery 
el . 
erel 
kin 
let . 
ling 
ock 
ist . 
• holi 
fore 
man 
states 
trades 
&c. 



EXAMPLES 


OF ILLUSTRATION 


lemon, 


lemonade. 


parent, 


parentage. 


tetrarch, 


tetrarcha/e. 


king, 


kingdom. 


God, 


Godhead. 


priest, 


priesthood. 


bishop, 


bishoprzcA:. 


friend, 


friendship' 


bail, 


bailiwick. 


music, 


musician. 


cutler, 


cutlery. 


smith, 


smithery. 


cock, 


cockerel. 


lamb, 


lamb&m. 


river, 


rivulet. 


duck, 


duckling. 


hill, 


hillock. 


machine, 


machinist. 


day, 


holiday. 


runner, 


forerunner. 


slaughter, 


manslaughter. 


man, 


statesman. 


man, 


tradesman. 



359 



II. SERAMUS MODIFICATIONS. 

Seramus modification is a change which is produced in 
the sense of the seramus by incorporating the following 
monograms with serami themselves : 



SERAMUS MODIFIERS. 

a . . 

be . . 



for . 
fore 

mis 

over 

out 

un . 

under 

up . 

with 

&c. 



EXAMPLES OF ILLUSTRATION. 

VOW, #VOW. 

spread, 6espread, 

like, dislike. 

bear, forbear. 

tell, foretell. 

give, misgive, 

see, oversee, 

live, outlive. 

do, imdo. 

went, underwent 

set, upset. 

stand, withstand. 



III. DURAMUS MODIFICATION. 

Duramus modification is a change produced in the 
meaning of the word by incorporating some additional 
monogram. 

DURAMUS MODIFIERS. EXAMPLES OF ILLUSTRATION. 

ish red, re&ish. 

dis honorable, dishonorable. 

in sentensic, ircsentensic. 

un deniable, tmdeniable. 

ne cormic, necormic. 

&c. 

PROVING RULES. 

I. That cormos which will answer the question that is 
constructed by placing the first seramus after who, or 
what, is in the sentensic cormitory ; as, Moses did smite 
the rock. Who did ? Moses. 

II. That cormos which will answer the question that is 
constructed by placing the secormos before all the serami 
in the section, and whom, or what after them, is in the 
insentensic cormitory; as, Moses did smite the rock. 
Moses did smite what 1 Rock. 

III. Every cormos which belongs to an inseclados, is in 
the insentensic cormitory; as, (" into the house") 

IV. A ramus which can be tensified, is in the sentensic 
ramitory ; as, be, was, write, wrote, cuts, cut. 

Ff 



360 

V. T&at inseramus which can not be conjected to them, 
but which can be conjected to thing, things, man, or 
Adams, is in the duo relatory ; as, the thing, those things, 
an Adams, Mr. Adams, John Adams. 

VI. That inseramus which can be conjected to them, 
is in the mono relatory ; as, unto them, of them, to them, 
among them, under them, over them. 

VII. That inseramus which can be conjected to high, 
heavy, strong, black, man's, men's, — was, fiy, look, live, or 
spoken, is in the sub relatory ; as, much higher, too heavy, 
" an army ten thousand men strong," ebony black, one 
man's hat, three men's hats. " there was there a man," 
fly high, look here, spoken of. 

VIII. That inseramus which can be conjected to the 
coepos, " They are there," or to any seclados, is in the 
co relatory ; as, [" For I speak] (to you,) (Gentiles,) {inas- 
much as I am the apostle) (of the Gentiles.") 

[For " they are there"]— {Inasmuch as " they are there.") 

PASSIMATION. 

Passimation is a methodical presentation of the syntax 
character of a word; and is made by pointing out the vari- 
ous verbatories into which a word is placed by its syntax 
character. (See page 336.; 

Passimation is divided into Plenary, and Implenary. 

I. Plenary Passimation is a full presentation ot' the 
syntax character of a word. 

a specimen of plenary passimation. 

"Moses smote the rock." 

Moses, a word of the senlensic cormitory, ccrmified by its nature, in- 
dividual namitory, sinefunctional indicatory, singular numi- 
tory, es pluratory, masculine genitory. 

II. Lyiplenary Passimation is a partial presentation of 
the syntax character of a word. 

A specimen of implenary passimation. 

"Moses smote the rock." 

Moses, an individual secormos, sinefunctional indication, singular nu- 
meration, masculine gender. 

In the following scheme, the words of the following sections, are 
passirnated — 

["Moses then smote the hard rock] (with his most sacred 
rod.") 



361 



PLENARY PASSIMATION. 

["Moses then smote the hard rock] (with his most sacred 
rod: 1 ) 



I. CORMOUS 

Moses, a word of the 

rock, 

rod, Sentensic - - 

Insentensic - 

Family- 

Individual - - 

Exhibitive* - 
Unexhibitive 

Sentensic - - 
Insentensic* ■ 



VERBATORIES. I 



i Moses, 

CORMITORY, 

\ rock, rod, 
cormified by 

rock, rod, 
NAMITORY* 

i Moses, 



l UN-N^ 



MITORY, 



■\ 



EXHIBITOR Y, 



Formative - - ) 

Auditive - - - VINDICATORY,* 

Sinefunetional ) Moses, rock, rod, 



Singular - - - 
Plural 

The S I 

The Es 

The Ves 

The Ies 

The E 

The En 

The Ee 

The Ic, Ice - - 

The Im 

The Ae 

The / 

The A 

The Nepos - - 
The Sense - - 



Moses, rock, rod, 
NUMITORY. 



rock rod 
Moses, 



j. PLURATORY. 



J 



Masculine - - *) Moses 
Feminine - - - (, GENIT0RY . 

Ambi j 

Muo - J 



CORMIFICATION. 

1. NATIVE C0RM1F1ER. 

its nature. 

2. ACCENT C0RMIF1ER. 

its accent. 

3. APPLICATION CORM1FIER. 

its application. 

4. SERAM1C CORMIFIERS. 

age. 
ance. 
ancy. 
ence. 
ency. 
ant. 
ent. 
ment. 
ure. 
ation. 
ion. 
ition. 
sion. 
tion. 
er. 
or, 
ce. 
se. 
ship, 
ing. 
red, 
ture. 
th. 
ist. 
[&c. 

5. DURAMIC CORMIFIERS. 

r dom. 

hood. 

ness. 

ity. 

ship. 

ee. 

cy. 

t, 

th. 

ard. 
| ist, 



362 



shall have smitten. 
II. SERAMOUS VERBATORIES. II. SERAMIFICATIOjN . 



smote, a word of the 
shall, 

ftave ' Sentensic 
smitten^ 



General - - 

Special 

Secormic - - - 
Dicormic - - - 
Formative - - 

Exformative - 

j 

Phemic 

Presynphemic 
Prediphemic - - 
Presyndiphemic 
Postphemic - - 
Prepostphemic 



smote, 
shall, 
have, 
smitten, 
|>RAM1T0RY, 



seramified by 



> PREDIPHEMITORY, 
smote, 



smitten, 

shall, 
have, 
RELATORY, 
smote, 
smitten, 

smote, 
shall, 
} POSITORY. , 

have, 
smitten, 



smote. 

TIMEDEXITORY. 
shall have, 



SERAMIF1ERS. 

1. its nature, 
% its accent. 
3. its application. 

CORM1C SERAM1FIERS. 



fate, 
en. 
fa 



4. 



th. 
ize. 
e. 
s. 

ze. 



DURAMIC SERAMiriERS. 



C. & R SERAMIF1ERS. 



6. 



(en. 
J in. 
1 tra 
[re. 



trans. 



363 

"then, the, hard, with, his, most, sacred." 

III. INSERAMOUS VERBxVTORIES. HI. LNSERAIYllFICATION. 
then, a word of the 

the, "} *• BURAMIFIERS. 

1. its nature. 
{•RAMITORY, 2. its application. 

then,the, hard, with, . 

his, most, sacred, Cormic Duramijiers. 



hard, 
with, 



ls \ Insentensic - - 
most, 

sacred, 

DlIO -------^ the, hard, his, sacred, 



Sub 

Mono 
Co - 



Comparative* . 
Numeralt - - • 

Formative - - 

Auditive 

Sinefunctional 

Singular 
Plural 



then, most, 
\ RELATOR Y, 

with, 

duramified - *] 
subraraified - ! , 
monoramified j ^ 
coramified - J 
} hard, most, 
> CLINATORY, 
3 his, 

i JUDICATORY. 

3 his, 

} his, 

} NUMITORY, 



(al 
ical. 
ine. 
ous. 
eous. 
ious. 

ish. 

fid. 

ic. 

3. { He- 
able, 
idle, 
an. 
en. 
ed. 
some, 
ese. 



The # 

The Es 

The Ves 

The Ies 

The E 

The En 

The Ee 

The Ic, Ice - - - 

The Im 

The Ae 

The / 

The A 

The Nepos - - - 
The Sense - - - 
Masculine - - - 
Feminine - - - - 

Ambi 

Muo j 

Sub ) 

Supersub > 

Super ) 



y- 

or. 

r. 

is. 

s. 

ir. 

se. 

ine. 

ors 

rs. 

irs. 

fyc. 



PLURATORY. 



his 
GENITORY. 

hard 
^INDICATORY. 
most 

Ff2 



^is, &c. 
4. the rejection of the 
cormifiers cy, ness, &c. 

II. SUBRAMIFIERS. 

i 1. its nature. 

2. its application. 

DURAMIC, AND CORMIC SUB- 
RAMIFIER. 

3. . . ly. 

CORMIC, SECORMIC, AND DU- 
RAMIC SUBRAMLFIER. 

4. . . a. 

III. MONORAMTFXERS. 

1. its nature. 

2. its application. 

IV. CORAM1F1ERS. 

1. its nature. 

2. its application. 



364 
PASSIMATION. 

There are three methods of passimation. 

The pupil should be well drilled in the first, and in the third 
method of passimation. (See p. 376.) 

1. [" Now we know that] (thou hast a devil.") 

["Now we know that'"'] 

Now, a word of the insentensic ramitory, co relatory, coramified by 
its application, belonging to its own section. Rule 8, page 360. 

we, • . a word of the sentensic cormitory, cormified by its own nature, 
exhibitive unnamitory, representing the formers of the sentence, 
sentensic exhibitory, formative indicatory, plural numitory, 
nepos pluratory, masculine genitory. Rule 1, page 359. 

know, a word of the sentensic ramitory, seramified by its nature, spe- 
cial prediphemitory, dicormic relatory, formative pository, pre- 
diphemic timedexitory, belonging to we, and that. Rule 4, 
page 360. 

that, . a word of the insentensic cormitory, cormified by its applica- 
tion, unexhibitive unnamitory, representing the section, " thou 
hast a devil" sinefunctional indicatory, singular numitory, 
sense pluratory. Rule 2, page 359. 

(" thou hast a devil") 

thou, . a word of the sentensic cormitory, cormified by its nature, ex- 
hibitive unnamitory, representing Christ, the auditor of the 
sentence, sentensic exhibitory, auditive indicatory, singular nu- 
mitory, nepos pluratory, masculine genitory. Rule 1, p. 360. 

hast, . a word of the sentensic ramitory, seramified by its nature, 
special prediphemitory, dicormic relatory, formative pository, 
phemic timedexitory, belonging to thou, and devil. Rule 4, 
page 360. 

a, . . . a word of the insentensic ramitory, duo relatory, duramified by 
its nature, belonging to devil. Rule 5. p. 360. 

devil, a word of the insentensic cormitory, cormified by its nature, 
family namitory, sinefunctional indicatory, s pluratory, mascu- 
line genitory. Rule 2. p. 359. 

N. B. It should be observed by the reader that in the process of 
passimation he comes from namitory to indicatory, omitting unnam- 
itory, and EXHIBITORY. 

It should be remarked here that the two exhibitories are formed out 
of the exhibitive unnamitory. (See page 157.) 



365 

2. (Ah!) (John,) [have you come again?] 

("Ml") 

All, . . a word of the insentensic cormitory, cormified by its nature, 
individual namitory, sinefunctional indicatory, singular numi- 
tory, and without any pluratory. Rule 3, page 360. 

("John.") 

John, a word of the insentensic cormitory, cormified by its nature, 
individual namitory, auditive indicatory, singular numitory, s 
pluratory, masculine genitory. Rule 3, p. 360. 

3. [His book is better] (than mine , , .) 

" His." 

His, . . a word of the insentensic ramitory, duo relatory, duramified 
from he by is, numeral clinatory, sinefunctional indicatory, 
singular numitory, nepos pluratory, masculine genitory, be- 
longing to book.- Rule 5. 

" Better." 

Better, a word of the insentensic ramitory, duo relatory, duramified 
by its nature, comparative clinatory, supersub indicatory, be- 
longing to book. Rule 5. 

" Than." 

Than, a word of the insentensic ramitory, co relatory, coramified by 
its nature, belonging to its own section, " mine book is." 
Rule 8. 

(" mine book is.") 

6 mine." 

Mine, a word of the insentensic ramitory, duo relatory, duramified 
from me by ine, numeral clinatory, formative indicatory, sin- 
gular numitory, nepos pluratory, (ours) muo genitory, belong- 
ing to book, understood. Rule 5. 

4. [\To obey all reasonable laws,j is to do right.] 

To obey all reasonable laws, 
a semisection, of the sentensic cormitory, cormified by its application, 
individual namitory, sinefunctional indicatory, singular numitory, and 
without any pluratory. Rule 1. 

44 To do right." 
To do right, 

a semisection, of the insentensic cormitory, cormified by its application, 
individual namitory, sinefunctional indicatory, singular numitory, and 
without any pluratory. Rule 2. 



366 

Note. — It may be well enough to say before leaving this sentence, 
that all similar instances should be rendered plenary, and the words 
of each section undergo an individual passimation. 

[(For a man) ^" to obey all reasonable laws^ is (for him) 
v to do right.";] 

Right in this case is subramified by its application. Right is by its 
nature, a duramus — and generally subramified by ly ; as, right, right/?/. 

5. [He went] {because of his brother's request.) 

Here " because of" is a monoramus, belonging to request. 

5. He came (for v to see me;j) 

Here for is a monoramus belonging to the semisectional corrnos, 
\To see me./' And l \To see me" is an individual insecormos, of 
the singular numeration, sinefunctional indication. 

[" He went] (unto the mount) (of olives.") 

" Unto" 

Unto, a word of the insentensic ramitory, mono relatory, monorami- 
fied by its nature, belonging to mount. 

7. [The English government is kingly.) 

The, a word of the insentensic ramitory, duo relatory, dura- 

mificd by its nature, belonging to government. 
Rule 5. 

English, . . a word of the insentensic ramitory, duo relatory, dura- 
mified from England, by ish, belonging to government. 
Rule 5. 

government, a word of the sentensic cormitory, cormified from gov- 
ern, by ment, family namitory, sinefunctional indicatory, 
s pluratoiy. 

IS, a word of the sentensic ramitory, secormified by its 

nature, &c. 

kingly, .... a word of the insentensic ramitory, duo relatory, dura- 
mified from king by ly, belonging to government, 
Rule 5. 

DIRECTIONS. 

The pupil should now examine with much care the ob- 
servations on the following words. These words are full 
of transverbation; and the observations upon them treat 
of their transverbatory character. 

The exercises under the different observations, are pre- 
sented for Passimation. But before the pupil even attempts 
to passimate one word, he should be able to render each 
section plenary. 



367 

In the process of Passimatio?i, the various concordances 
should be consulted with great care. 

1. Cormos Concordance, page -34. 

2. Secormos, and Insecormos Concordacne, page 237. 

3. Principles, page 301. 

4. Duramus Concordance, page 308. 

5. Monoramus Concordance, - - - - page 310. 

6. Subramus Concordance, - - - - page 327. 

7. Coramus Concordance, ----- page 330. 

N. B. The general syntax character of a word is said to be its 
nature, or natural character; as, love. 

Love by its nature, is a cormos ; for we must suppose that Ihe aff- 
ection was named before its exercise was named. Hence love is eprmified 
by its nature, and seramified by application, or by s, es, th, or st. 

The word salt is cormified from its nature, but seramified by s, es, 
th, st, or ing, or by its application ; as, They salt meat well. 

Salt is duramified by ish, or ine, or by application, as salt water. 

The pupil should be made to prove many of the exercises which are 
presented under the following tjiansverlatory observations before he 
attempts to passimate them. 

The pupil is now left to help himself with the means which the 
author has put into his hands. 

Another, Another's. 

As, 

Each, 

One, one's, ones', ones. 

Other, other's others', others. 

That, those. 

This, these. 

What, 

Which, 

OBSERVATIONS I. 

Another may be a cormos, and a ramus. 

1. It is a cormos where it is used in a reciprocal sense ; 
as, They saw one another. 

2. It is- a duramus where it belongs to some cormos, 
either expressed, or understood ; as, I have another book, 
I wish another apple, I have taken two shares, and want 
another , 

3. It is a subramus where it belongs to another ramus ; 
I as, I have another man's hat. 



, 



368 

EXERCISES. 

Direction. — Before these exercises can be passimaled to advantage, 
the observations standing above the exercises, must be thoroughly studied. 

The pupil should enable himself by means of his own reflection to 
supply every word which is vnder stood, before he attempts to passi- 
mate a sentence. 

These exercises may be prepared by the pupil, upon his slate. 

[I must not use another's book when] (I have one) (of 
my own.) 

[They accommodate one another daily.] 

[Give , ( , James) another apple.] 

[The interest (of another , ) is not as dear] (to 
me) (as my own , , .) 

[I claim this one] (for my own , ;) (but another 
, claims it) (as another's , .) 

[This day suits my interest ; ] (another , may 

suit another's , better) (than this , , , .) 

[Any interest (except my own , ) is another's 

\ •] 

(Ah,) [here comes another , ;] (and (of course) 

another's views are to be given;) (another's interest , 

to be taken) (into the affair ;) (and another's whims 

,,,,)(,, prejudices , , , , ) (and 

, opinion , to be nursed.) 

OBSERVATIONS II. 

r 

As, may be a cormos, and a ramus. 

1. It is a cormos where it follows such, much, same, or 
many ; as, He has such fruit as I desire. 

When as stands next to a seramus, it is a sentensic cormos, as I 
have such apples as please me. 

But when any word stands between as, and the seramus, as is an 
insentensic cormos; as, I have such apples as he purchased. 

2. It is a mono where it is used in the sense of for ; or 
in the sense of the phrase — u in the character of;" as, He 
went as a soldier. (See p. 312.) 

3. It is a coramus when between two sections, denoting 
a comparison ; or when used with well as ; as, I am not so 
old as he is — He is good as well as bad. 

4. It is a subramus where it denotes the time of the 
event ; as, As he came in, I went out. 

That is, when he came in, I went out. 

5. Also where it is used much in the sense of so ; as, As 
far as I am able to judge. {So far, &c.) 



369 

EXERCISES. 

chEg)(and ^ \ ^much ' H» J **- 
chased;) (and I shall be satisfied.) ' ^ S pur " 

>»E?w *V ^ e J° b J ( in such a manner) (as will nlea^P 
[>„ Much > (as man desires) [a little will answer 1 

^fister* by) he saw a manj (that ** &*> 

i wJrid .)° ng (aS X am) (ln thG W ° rld ° * am the li ^ (° f th e 
[He was good] (as well as , , r i ch ) 
[They came] (to my school) (as pupils.) 

OBSERVATIONS III. 

I Each may be a cormos, and a ramus. 

I. It is a cormos where it is used in a reciprocal sense - 
.as, They confide in each other. ' 

1 2. It is a duramus where it belongs to a cormos either 

^TZ%° r ™ dersto ° d ^ as > He give each man I dollar 
r He met ten lads, and gave each , a crown . ^ 
I d. It is a suoramus where it belongs to another rami™ • 

p^etSih^ man ' ssword,He gave «*SKSa 

EXERCISES. 

i [Men should respect each other ] 

Each man should be] (at his post.) 
J [Su ch ' (° fth ese men) is well informed.] 
bathO^ SCW ^ ° ther] (at Church) ( ' ^ach sab " 

[Each man's hat is black.] 

[They obtained a dollar] (for each one's knife.) 

OBSERVATIONS IV. 

One may be a cormos, and a ramus. 
SI. It is a cormos when in the plural form ; as, These ones 

I Also when it is used in a reciprocal sense ; as, They saw 
pne another. ^ 

When one is used in any other sense than that of unity, or sinffle- 
iess, u ls a cormos; as, Will he pretend to vie with one like me? 
Where one hearetu the word of the kingdom, and understandeth it 



370 

not, then cometh the wicked one, and catcheth away that which wag 
sown in his heart, " He will call one of these days, One should be kind 
and liberal in all things." " I will not use your book while I have 
one of my own." The one which you gave me, They met one another. 

2. Where one means nothing but unity, as well as where 
it is used much in the sense of single, and belongs to 
some cormos, it is a duramus ; as, There is but one God, 
He paid me but one dollar. 

In the sense of single ; as, If any one soldier ever sub- 
dued a powerful enemy, it was Perry on the lake. 

One , of them must return. 

That is, one person, or individual of them, must return. 

When one has the apostrophic form, whether in the sin- 
gular, or plural, it is a duramus ; as, one's mind should be 
improved, &c. These ones' books. 

EXERCISES. 

[One is apt to think ill] (of others.) 

[But one would think that] (rational beings would not 
be guilty) (of such faults) (as , these , .) 

[One book should be bound,] (the other , should be 
used) (in the form) (of a pamphlet.) 

(In all the walks) (of life) [how much , one sees 
, to shun :] (every street " , , ) (and , alley 
(of a populous city) is full) (of such objects) (as make a 
wise man cautious,) ( , , , a foolish one miser- 
able,) (and , , a feeling one sad.) 

(" If ever one man subdued a powerful enemy,) [that 
one was Perry] (on the Lake.") 

[We should be kind] (to one another.) 

[How often does one feel the pangs] (of sin!) 

[He called one , ] (of his men,) (and , sent him 
to get an apple) (for the child : (and he got one.) 

[One , of these apples is mine.) 

[One's own interest leads one to do right.] 

"The ones (which you have) are such ones] (as will 
please me.) 

[The boys' books (whom I teach) are old] — (the one's 
books (whom you teach) are new.) 

[It is one , ] (of the twelve.) 

OBSERVATIONS V. 

Other may be a cormos, and ramus, 

1. It is a cormos, where it is used in a reciprocal sense, 
and where it has the plural form ; as, They heard each 
other, His brothers, and others were present. 

2. Others", or other, when it belongs to a cormos is a 



371 

duramus ; as, Others' books are not mine, He wishes 
other articles. 

3. When other belongs to a ramus, it is a sub ; as, 
Other people's business should not Goncern me. 

Other in the possessive form (otlier's) can never belong to another 
ramus. Nor can other be rendered possessive in the singular — for we 
can not say other's books — Though we say with propriety, another's 
books. 

EXERCISES. 

[Men should respect each other.] 
[Each man should be] (at his post.) 
[Each , (of these men) is well informed.] 
[They saw each other] (at church.) ( , each Sab- 
bath.) 
[One is apt to think ill] (of others.) 

. OBSERVATIONS VI. 

That may be a cormos, and a ramus. 

1. It is a cormos where it can be exchanged for which, 
who, or whom; as, He is the pupil that learns syntax — 
who learns. That is the book that I purchased — which I 
purchased. 

2. That is a cormos where that, and this are used in 
contrast ; that denoting what is more distant, or what is 
first mentioned — this what is less distant, or what is last 
mentioned ; as Wednesday, and Sunday were both fine 
days — though that was cold, but this quite warm. Which 
day was cold ? 

3. That is a cormos where it represents a following 
section, or all the following parts of a sentence ; as, He 
said that he 4 was in the city of London, in 1825. It is said 
that he is in the city. Here that represents " he is in the 
city:' 

When that, stands next to a seramus, it is a secormos ; as, He is the 
lad that came for the book?. 

But when any other word stands between that, and the seramus, tJuzt 
is an insecormos ; as, He has the book that he purchased. 

That is a duramus where it belongs to a cormos, and 
can be exchanged for the ; as, That book — the book. 

That is a subramus where it belongs to a ramus, and 
can be exchanged for the ; as, I saw that man's house, — 
the man's. 

EXERCISES. 

[The book (that you see) is far off;] (the one (that I see) 
is near by ;) (hence that appears less) (than this , .) 



372 

[ Soul , , ] (and body must separate ;) (that will 
return) (to its Maker ;) (this , , ) (to its primitive dust.) 
[That , is an old work;] (this , is a new one.) 
[That thing (that that man said) was that thing] (that 
that man should say again.) 
[That has four letters.] 

(Master,) [did this man sin] (or , his parents , 
) ( , , , that) (he was born blind ?) 
[I must work the works] (of him) (that sent me.) 
[Then said the Jews] (unto him,) (now we know that) 
(thou hast a devil.) 

That is here a cormos, representing the section — " thou hist a devil." 

[It is thought to be the gout] (that made him so very 
peevish,) (with all , , ) (that were) (about him.) 

[He (that loveth his father,) (or , , , 

mother more) (than , , me) is not worthy] (of 
me.) 

[I say (unto you) that] (it shall be more tolerable) (for 
the land) (of Sodom) (than , , , ) (for you.) 

[That , is the lady] (that I saw.) 

[That book is the one] (that I read.) 

OBSERVATIONS VII. 

This may be a cormos, and a ramus. 

1. It is a cormos where it is used in contrast with that, 
or those ; that, or those denoting what is more distant, or 
first mentioned — this, what is less distant, or last men- 
tioned; as, "Wednesday, and Sunday were both fine days; 
though that was cold— but this warm. 

2. This is a duramus where it belongs to a cormos 
either expressed, or understood ; as, This boc& is new, 
that is old. This , is the book which I desire to read. 
That is, this book is the book. 

3. This is a sub where it refers to another ramus ; as, 
This man's hat is new. 

EXERCISES. 

(In the city,) [we are entertained] (by the works) (of 

man,) (in the country) ( , , , ) (by the works) 

(of God; )(this is the presence) (of nature;) (that , , 

, ) (of art ;) [these astonish us ;] (those we comprehend.) 

[This man's goods are fine,] (but that man's goods are 

coarse.) 

OBSERVATIONS VIII. 

Those is the plural of that, and may be a cormos, and 
a ramus. 



373 

1. Those is a cormos where it is used in contrast with 
this, or these; those donoting things which are more dis- 
tant, or first mentioned ; and this, or these denoting what 
is less distant, or last mentioned , as, " I have two apples, 
and three plums — these I shall keep; those I shall give to 
you." 

2. Those is a duramus where it belongs to a cormos 
either expressed, or understood; as, Those children are 
idle, These pupils are studying ; but those , are not. 

3. Those is a sub where it belongs to another ramus ; 
as, Those mens' gloves. 

OBSERVATIONS IX. 

Those is the plural of this, and may be a cormos, and a 
ramus. 

1. It is a cormos where it is used in contrast with those ; 
those denoting the things which are more distant either in 
time, or space, and these, the things which are less distant 
in time, or space; as, I have two apples, and three plums — 
" those I shall keep — these I shall give to you." 

2. These is a duramus where it belongs to a cormos 
either expressed, or understood; as, Those children are 
idle ; but these , are busy, These books are new ; 
those , are old. 

EXERCISES. 

iThose , (of you) (that would not have him to 

rule us,) should speak] (and , , tell why.) 

[John has six books] (and his brother , seven 
, ) (those , ( , , added) (to these) make 
thirteen , .] 

[My brother had some apples) (and , , , cents;) 
(these he gave) (for those.) 

[Those books are newer] (than these , , .] 

OBSERATIONS X. 

What may be a cormos, and a ramus. 

1. It is a cormos where it is used to express some supe- 
rior, or sudden emotion ; as, What ! who comes there 1 

2. It is a duramus where it belongs to a cormos either 
expressed, or understood ; as, [The parent got what , 

] ( , , ) ( , the son desired.) 

The common practice is to omit what in some instances. But 
surely none will say that this omission is a solution of the word ! That 
and which take the place of what. These words are parsed, and what 
is thrown out ! Now, if the parsing of that, and which can be consi- 
dered a parsing of what, the parsing of a word is sometimes entirely 



374 

different from any thing of which I have had a conception. Let us 
take the true method, which, I believe, is the following — 

He got what he wanted. 

That is, He got what thing it was which he wanted. The word 
what is a duramus, belonging to thing understood. The calling of 
words compound relatives, and then throwing them from the sentence, 
is certainly a queer way of parsing them ! ! ! 

3 What is a sub where it refers to another ramus ; as, 
what man's interest is safe in bad hands 7 

4. It is a sub also where it is used in the sense of partly ; 
as, What by magnifying, what by diminishing, what by 
distorting, and disfiguring, he has in many places bur- 
lesqed the original. 

That is, partly by magnifying, &c. 

EXERCISES. 

[The parent obtained what , ] ( , , ) ( 

, the son desired.) 
[What man is able to meet such misfortunes] (as these 


(What !) [shall he (who is strong) submit] (to him) (who 
is feeble 1) 

[What , , , ,] (with the bread,) (and what 
(with the wine,) they preserved their lives.] 
[Give , ( , me) what , ] ( , , 

) ( , I want ;) (and I will leave you,) (sir.) 
[What , is the hour,] (John 1) 

OBSERVATIONS. 

Which may be a cormos, and a ramus. 

1. It is a cormos where it is so used as not to refer to 
any cormos after it; as, This is the book which I pur- 
chased. 

2. It is a duramus where it is so used as to refer to a 
cormos either expressed, or understood, which follows it; 
as, Which man shall 1 call 7 Which , of these books 
is mine 1 That is, which eook of these books is mine 7 

3. It is a sub where it refers to another ramus ; as, 
Which man's lot is the larger 1 

The words, all, such, former, latter, little, much, some, any, few, 
many, &c, are generally rami — and often refer to cormi understood ; 
as, all of them came. 

That is, all the individuals of them came. 



375 
II. METHOD. 

A specimen of the second way of Passimating the Words 
of a Section. 

[" John went] (for his book ;) (but he hid not get it.") 

[" John went ;"] 

John, a word of the cormos class, cormified by its nature, namitive 

genus, individual species, sinefunctional indicatory, singular 

numitory, s pluratory, masculine genitory. 
went, a word of the ramus class, ramified by its nature, sentensic 

order, inedible genus, secormic species, formative pository, pre- 

diphemic timedexitory, belonging to John. 

("for his book;") 

for, . . a word of the ramus class, insentensic order, indeclinable genus, 
mono species, monoramified by its nature, belonging to book. 

his, . . a word of the ramus class, insentensic order, declinable genus, 
duo species, duramified from he by is, numeral clinatory, sine- 
functional indicatory, singular numitory, nepos pluratory, mas- 
culine genitory, belonging to book. 

book, . a word of the cormos class, cormified by its nature, insentensic 
order, namitive genus, sinefunctional indicatory, singular nu- 
mitory, s pluratory. 

(" but he did not get it") 

but, . . a word of the ramus class, insentensic order, indeclinable genus, 
co species, cormified by its nature, belonging to its own section. 

he, ... a word of the cormos class, cormified by its nature, sentensic 
order, unnamitive genus, representing John^ exhibitive species, 
sentensic variety, sinefunctional indicatory, singular numitory, 
nepos pluratory, masculine genitory. 

did, . . a word of the ramus class, sentensic order, seramified by its 
nature, inedible genus, secormic species, formative pository, pre- 
diphemic timedexitory, belonging to he. 

not, . . a word of the ramus class, insentensic order, indeclinable genus, 
sub species, subramified by its nature, belonging to did. 

get, . . a word of the ramus class, sentensic order, seramified by its 
nature, inedible genus, dicormic species, exformative pository, 
belonging to he, and it. 

it, .... a word of the cormos class, cormified by its nature, insentensic 
order, unnamitive genus, representing book, unexhibitive spe- 
cies, sinefunctional indicatory, singular numitory, nepos plu- 
ratory. 

(N. B. See another mode of Passimating the words of a section, 
page 116.) 

Gg2 



3U 

III. METHOD. 

[" John went'] (for his book ;) (but he did not get it.") 
[" John went."] 

John, an individual namitive secormos, sinefu fictional indication, sin- 
gular numeration, masculine gender. 

went, an inedible secormic seramus, formative position, prediphemic 
timedex, belonging to John. 

("for his book.") 

for, . a monoramus belonging to book. 

book, a family insecormos, sinefunctional indication, singular 
numeration. 

(" but hd did not get it." 

but, . . a coramus, belonging to its own section. 

he, . . an unnamitive secormos, representing John, sinefunctional in- 
dication, singular numeration, masculine gender. 

did, . an inedible secormic seramus, formative, position, prediphemic 
timedex, belonging to he. 

not, . a subramus, belonging to did. 

get, , an inedible dicormic seramus, exformative position, belonging 
to he, and it. 

it, . an unnamitive insecormos, representing book, sinefunctional 
indication, singular numeratoin. 



GRADUATION RULES. 

As the pupil is now to leave his Syntax to be exercised 
in some other book, it may be necessary to give him some 
rules to enable him to divide a sentence into its different sec- 
tions. 

1. Every cordictive proposition, whether plenary, or 
implenary, constitutes a distinct section ; as, [a certain 
man planted a vineyard,] (and , set a hedge,) 
(and , digged a place,) (and , built 
a tower,) (and , - " let it out,) (and , went.) 

2. Every Monoramus gives a new section ; as, he went 
(unto the mount) (of Olives.) 

3. Every Coramus gives a new section ; as, [Paul , 

, ,] (and Silas sung praises,) [I , , ,] (or thou 
art here.) 

4. When the regular connection of a Cormos with a 
sentence, is not produced by a Ramous word, but by the 
sense itself, the Cormos with its Rami, should it have any, 
constitutes a distinct section; as, (my good boy,) come 
here, {ah), (John,) have you come again ! — (See rule, p. 45.) 



part in. 

SYNTITHOLOGY. 

CHAPTER I. 

Syntithology is that part of Syntax, which teaches how- 
to put words together in the formation of sentences. 

Syntithology is divided into two parts : viz. Prose, and 
Syntithody, or Prosody. 

Note. — Syntithody is derived from the Greek, Sun, together, tithemi, 
to put, and ode, a song, and means, from these sources, the putting 
together of songs, or versus. 

Prosody is derived from the Greek, pros, for, and ode, 
' a song, and means, from these sources nothing but for a 
| song. We leave the British grammarians to say, whether 
it is sense, or not. 

3. Prose Syntithology teaches the principles of putting 

i words together in such a way as produces straight for- 

' ward sentences, or sentences in which there is no turning 

i back to produce harmonic sounds, or a regular number 

of syllables. 

Note. — Prose is from the Latin, prosa, from prorsus, meaning 
straight forward. Verse is from the Latin, versus, and means turn- 
j mg back. 

2. Syntithody, or Verse Syntithody is the second part of 
Syntithology, and teaches the quantity of sounds, and the 
| measures of verse. 

SECTION I. 

Prose Syntithology teaches the principles of forming 
i prose sentences ; as, " Moses smote the rock." 

It may be divided into three parts ; viz. : Government, 
Agreement, and Position. 

1. Government respects the influence which one word 
exerts over another in giving some particular form, or 
character ; as, thou writest well. 

" Thou" gives, " write," the st form. 

2. Agreement respects the exact correspondence in 
some of the properties of two, or more words ; as, those 
ladies send their respects to you." 

Those ladies, and their agree in number- ^ being plural. 



378 

3. Position respects the place of a word, or a section, 
in reference to another word, or another section ; as, 
they rode for two days together ; I will call, and pay you 
again. 

By the position of " together" the days are represented as being 
together. And by the position of " again" the speaker is made" to 
say, that he will repeat the payment. In the following construction, 
the above sentences are changed in meaning — " They rode together 
for two days." " I will call again, and pay you." 

OBSERVATIONS. 

Some of the Secormi affix the s, es, th, t, and the st in- 
flection to the Serami ; as, He has written, He writes, 
Thou hast written. 

Others cut off these inflections; as, I have written, They 
have written, we write. 

These affixes, s, es, th, t, and st, are called secormos 
inflections, because they are produced by the secormos. 

The s, es, and the th inflection belongs to the serami of 
the phemic, and presynphemic timedex only ; as, He 
writes, He has written. 

The t and st run through all the timedexes; as, Thou 
writer, Thou hast written, Thou hadsZ written, Thou 
wrotest, Thou wh7 write. 

CRITICAL REFLECTIONS. 

CHAPTER I. 

This chapter is designed to sustain Rule n, in reference 
tp the use of was instead of were, with the singular secor- 
mos : If I was ; not if I were.— (See Rule n, page 393.) 

Good writers have long- been in the constant practice of using were, 
in certain instances, with the singular secormos of the formative indi- 
cation, wert with the singular secormos of the auditive indication, and 
W(re with the singular secormos of the sinefunctional indication^ as, 
If I were there, If thou v)ert there, If he were there, Were I there, 
Wert thou there, Were he there, &c. 

The use of these substitutes {were, wert) for be, is inconsistent with 
the nature of that relation which exists between the secormos, and the 
seramus. Nor is this use of these forms consistent with the custom of 
using other serami to accomplish the same object. The object is to 
mark phemic time by the prediphemic timedex ; as, Were I well, I 
would attend ; if I were there, I would inform him of his danger. 
That is, were I now well, If I were now there, &c. 

But as was may express phemic time with as much precision as 
were, why should were be preferred ? That other serami arc used in 
the prediphemic timedex, to mark phemic time without any peculiar 
modification, may be seen by the following instances — 



379 

1. If he tvrote a good hand, he might be employed as 
clerk. {Phemic time.) 

2. Bid he write well, I would employ him. {Phemic 
time.) 

3. Had he a book, he would learn Grammar. {Phemic 
time.) 

4. Hadst thou a teacher, thou couldst be taught. {Phemic 
time.) 

Now, uniformity seems to require that wrote, did, had, and hadst 
should be thrown into some peculiar form, when their prediphemic 
timsdexes are used to denote phemic time. But instead of seeking" for 
uniformity in new forms for all serami in such instances, would it not be 
wiser to obtain it by abandoning were, and wert by adopting was, and 
wast ? 

1. Was I a good writer, he would employ me. 

2. Wast thou a good scholar, thou couldst be employed 
in teaching. 

3. If I was in Boston, I could see my friends. 

4. If thou wast well, we would return. 

Were and wert are also used to denote prediphemic time, when the 
secormos is singular; as, 

If I were in Boston last week, he did not know it, If thou 
' wert in Boston last week, I did not know it, If he were in 
'Boston last week, I did not know it. 

If bad English consists in a deviation in the use of any, or of all the 
words of our language, from its true genius, the above use of were, and 
iwert, is certainly incorrect. 

There are those, however, who will attempt to sanction this use — 
they will resort to the subjunctive mode. But as this old subjunctive 
mode is a mere grammatical dream, ungrammatically told, and beyond 
[interpretation, no argument from this source can sustain the use of weie 
|witb any- singular secormos. 

And as for wert, it is a .shameful fungus which might be severed 
Ifrom our language without diminishing the number of its words. (The 
legitimate form is wast.) 

Rule i., II., and III., under Syntitholocy, are founded upon the true 
relation which exists between be, and the secormi — and a conformity to 
jthese rules is recommended, not only by truth, but by simplicity. 

Chapter II. 

This chapter is designed to show the absurdity of the common doc- 
trine with respect to the plurality of collective names, or collective 
cormi. (See Rule IV. page 392.) 

Remarks on collective cormi, or cormi of multitude. 

Hitherto the subject of cormi of multitude, has not, per- 



; 



380 

haps, been well understood, and of course not clearly 
presented to the mind of the student of English Syntax. 
That these cor mi are not rendered peculiar from the fact 
that they denote bodies which are made up of different 
parts, or numerous members, is quite obvious to any 
who have a mind capable of comprehending simple prin- 
ciples, and plain truths. It is said that the word, jury, 
is a collective cormos, (noun) a cormos of multitude. Is 
the prototype, the thing denoted, of the word, jury, com- 
posed of many members, or parts? So is the prototype 
of the word, hand! A jury may comprise six men ; a jury 
may comprise twelve men ; and a jury may comprise twenty- 
four men. A hand comprises five nails, four fingers, one 
thumb, many joints, many arteries, many veins, and many 
bones ! If, then, the word, jwry, is a collective name, a 
cormos of multitude because its prototype comprises many 
parts, certainly the word, hand, is a collective name, a 
cormos of multitude! ! 

"Family" is said to be a name of multitude, while 
book is excluded from this class. Yet there are very few 
families that comprise as many members as a book. 

It is hardly possible to find a family that is composed 
of more than thirty parts, or members — yet it is equally 
hard to find a book which is made up of so few parts, 
members, or pages ! A family is one thing made up of 
parts — a book is one thing made up of parts — a jury is one 
thing made up of parts — a tree is one thing made up of 
parts—a church is one thing made up of parts — a minute 
is one thing made up of parts. Is the church coin- 
posed of sixty parts, or members, so is the minute. The 
word, minute, then, is as much a cormos of multitude, as 
is the word, church. 

It may be said that as the members of a jury, &c are 
distinct individuals, it is hardly just to consider them as 
bearing the same relation to the jury, which the fingers, Sic. 
bear to the hand. True, a man is a distinct whole ; but he 
is also a mere part. John is a whole human being — but 
he is not a whole jury — he is a mere part of a jury. 
Every finger is a whole, abstractly considered ; but in refer- 
ence to the hand, every finger is a mere part. John is a 
part of a jury— -a finger is a part of a hand ! 



381 

It is not sense to say, 

The jury has agreed. 
And it is bad sense, and bad English, also, to say, 

The jury have agreed. 

It takes two to make an agreement! How, then, can one jury 
agree ? But for brevity, this form «f expression is generally used. 
The correct construction, however, is 

The members of the jury have agreed. 

But as the right one has a prolixity which the erroneous one has 
not, the incorrect one has grown into general use. A similar case 
is found in the use ofyou y when applied to but one person : as 

John, where have you heen ? 

The people have been disposed to sacrifice sense to ease in phra- 
seology. Hence instead of saying — 

" John, where hast thou been ?" 

they have adopted the substitute, 

" John, where have you been?" 

1. "The jury has agreed." 

2. "John, where have you been." 

In both, there is a defect in sense. The defect in sense in the 
first, lies in asserting that one can make an agreement ; or, in other 
words, in intimating that it does not require as many as two to make 
an agreement. 

The defect in sense in the second, lies in naming, calling, or 
addressing tvio, or more, when but one is meant ! 

The next point is, do expressions of this kind, stand condemned by 
the rules of Syntax, as well as by the laws of reason ? The first one 
frequently does — the second one rarely, if ever. 

" The jury have agreed." 

Now, as this cormos denotes but one jury, we can as well say, he 
(have agreed, as the jury have agreed! 

" The jury will remain out till they have agreed on a 
verdict." 



382 

This is correct English — for the unnamitive, they, does not repre* 
sent the namitive, jury, but the word members — 

" The jury will remain out till its members have agreed 
on a verdict." 

In order to be brief, men have fallen into error ; and being consciovs 
of this error, they embrace the first opportunity to correct it — hence 
we use they instead of it — 

" The jury will remain out till they have agreed on a 
verdict." 

Why is they used ? because the common sense of the case confines 
the mind to the members of the jury. The word, they, therefore, does 
not stand for the word jury's but for the word, members, which is con- 
stantly in the mind. 

The unnamitive ramus which represents the word, jury, must be 
singular — 

"The jury will remain out till its members have agreed 
on a verdict." 

That is, the jury will remain cut till the jury's members have 
agreed on a verdict. 

But, it may be said, as the word, jury, is substituted for the noun, 
members, that jury should exert the same influence over the sentensic 
inflections, which members would — hence the expression — 

" The jury have agreed," 

is no violation of any grammatical rule. This principle, however, 
cannot be adopted without improper innovation — it would compel us 
to say, 

" John, how hast you been?" " John, art you well?" 

The adoption of this principle would render the expressions which 
are now bad in sense only, bad in grammar also. 

CHAPTER III. 

In the first chapter of these reflections, we have attempted to show 
that the use of were with the singular secormos, is inconsistent. 

In the second chapter, we have undertaken to show thit the popu- 
lar doctrine upon the subject of collective names, is absurd. 

And in this, the third, w T e shall attempt to demonstrate that the 
doctrine that the seramus, the verb, should be plural where and stands 
between two secormi, (or rather between two sections) two nomina- 
tives, is far from being sound. 



383 

And here, as usual, it is our task to combat error. But 
what renders our task, in this chapter, peculiarly painful is, 
that to error in grammar, we are under the necessity of 
supperadding that of long, universal, and reverential usage. 
To say whence the error on which we intend to submit a 
few observations has come, is no part of our present object 
— nor do we intend to express our astonishment that our 
language should be deformed by this common error, while 
it has been guarded by men of taste, and skill in English 
philology. The error to which we refer lies in the obliquity 
of the following, and similar sentences, from the genius of 
our language. 

1. I, and he are. 

2. I, and thou are. 

The use of are, for is, in the first, and are for art, in the 
second sentence, is opposed to propriety in speech, and to 
solution in grammar. Are never can be made to have any 
frame- work relation with he — he are ! Nor can are hold 
any constructive relation with thou — thou are! 

It is pretended, however, that /, and he, are united by 
and. Be it so, though it is not so ! Now, if these two 
pronouns are united they have become one — singular. Can 
the plural number be formed by putting two words into one? 

It matters not in what way /, and he are united, since no 
union can render neither one, nor both plural* Will "that 
union which may be produced between two chairs, by plac- 
ing a string about a round of one, and then about the round 
of the other, produce plurality? Is there not plurality as 
much before the application of the string as after? There 
are two chairs before the string is applied, and there are two 
after ! The use of this string does not make the two single 
seats into one plural one ! To make a plural chair there 
must be room for more than one person in the same frame- 
work. The plural noun is one frame-work, not two ; as, 
books, pens! 

Now, "book," and "pen," cannot be considered plural 
because they happen to be used in the same sentence — these 
words can not be put together in such a way as will consti- 
tute plurality. Nor can the real pen, and the real book be 
expressed in two words in such a manner as .^will constitute 
plurality in grammar. For so long as these things are 
denoted by two distinct words, they are taken separately, 

Hh 



384 

both by the mind, and by the means employed with which 
to denote them ; as, book, and pen. But plurality in gram- 
mar is found where two or more things are seized at the 
same time, and by the same word ; as, books. 

When two, or more things are noted separately, there 
is no plurality; as, " 7, and he are, I, and thou are." 

Here the individuals are denoted separately, hence while 
there appears, from a slight glance, to be but one affirma- 
tion in a sentence, there are in truth tivo. One is made by 
expressed words, the other by implied ones — [I , 3 
(and he are.) [I , ] (and thou are.) 

Now, by rendering these sections plenary, we shall con- 
vince our readers of the gross error which we trust the 
world will gradually, and gladly correct. 

1. [I are~] (and he are.) 

2. [I are] (and thou are.) 

Corrected — 

1. [I am] (and he is.) 

2. [I am] (and thou art.) 

But the sections should of course be left in their imple- 
nary state ; as, 

1. I, and he is. 

2. I, and thou art. 

Improper — 

1. I, and he write. 

2. He, and thou write. 

Proper — 

1. I, and he writes. 

2. He, and thou ivritest. 

Rendered plenary — 

1. I write, and he writes. 

2. He writes, and thou writest. 

1. 1, and he write. 

2. He, and thou write. 

By rendering these sections plenary, it is seen that they 
arc actually bad English — 

1. I write, and he write! 

2. He write, and thou write J 

In instances in which or occurs, the seramus, or verb is 
properly used — 

I, or he is, He, or thou art. 
Rendered plenary — I am, or he is, He is, or thou art. 
We will now parse these pronouns, and verbs, in order 



385 

to show how far grammatical resolution is crippled by this 
error. 

" I, and he are?'' 

lis a pronoun, first person singular, and in the nomina- 
tive case. But to what verb ? no one knows — every gram- 
mar is mute ! Can it be nominative to are! I are! ! 

He is a pronoun, third person, singular, and in the nomi- 
native case. To what? Why, we infer that he is nomina- 
tive to are — he are ! ! 



" When a verb has two, or more nominatives connected 
by and, it must agree with them in the plural number !" 

How can the verb agree in the plural number with nomi- 
natives which are singular! ? Can the black coat, and the 
red coat agree in colour ! ? 

I and he are both singular ! 
I, or he is. 

I is a pronoun in the nominative case to is — I is. 

Is is a verb of the third person singular, agreeing with I, 
and he. 

RULE. 

" When a verb has two, or more singular nominatives 
connected by or, or nor, it must agree with them in the sin- 
gular number !" G. B. 

Thus we see that is, yes, is, is actually made to agree 
with I! ! Now, the verb that agrees with 7, is am, under- 
stood — I am, or he is. No verb, not even one can have 
two nominatives connected by or, nor, and, nor by any 
other conjunction in the language! The conjunction con- 
nects the two propositions ; as, [I , , ] (and 
he is sick.) That is, I am sick ; and he is sick. 

Suppose a speaker to be roused from some cause, or other, 
and in order to be emphatic, should utter with force, and ful- 
ness the following sentence, would he use are? 

" I tell you, my good Sir, that I are, and he are your 
friend in all things, and at all times 1" Monstrous ! I are, 
and he are your friends ! ! Would he not rather say—" I 
tell you, my good friend, that I am, and he is your friend 
in all things, and at all times ! 

If, then, in the full, plenary expression is, and am should 



386 

be used, is it not clear that is should be used in the imple- 
nary one ? 

To enumerate all the rules, and observations which have 
grown out of this error, would prolong this chapter to little, 
or no purpose. Suffice it to say, that they are numerous, 
perplexing, and prejudicial to a correct knowledge of the 
true principles of our language. 

N. B. It will be seen that note third provides for the con- 
tinuation of this error. Should the error be corrected, the 
third rule would be found a sufficient guide without the note 
which follows it. And we do hope, for the simplicity of 
speech, for the good of grammatical science, and for the 
honour of all who use our language, that this philological 
sin may be blotted out from the book of our language. 

To accommodate those who feel resolved to adhere to 
this error, the following rule is presented under page 398, 
with exercises to be rendered improper by the pupil that 
he may learn to use our phrenod with propriety. 

RULE VI. 

In compliance with the power of custom, but in despite 
of the genius of the English language, singular secormi 
which occupy the two sections between which and stands, 
require are, or were, and cut off the secormos inflections 
from every other seramus ; as, I, and he are his pupils, he, 
and I were his friends, he, and thou write. 



THE THEOREM. 

SECORMOS INFLECTIONS. 

s, es, th, t, st. 

It may be well to observe here, that the old British Rule — " The 
Verb must agree with its Nominative case in Number, and Person," 
is intended for the regulation of the secormos inflections. Had these 
inflections never existed, this Rule would never have had a place in 
English Grammars. This Rule, however, has not the least bearing 
upon these inflections — it is even applied where they are not found ; 
as, he wrote ! (See the Appeal, chap. XIV. page 218.) 

Upon the secormos F, the student will find the first five 
rules in Syntithology so clearly illustrated that he will 
find no difficulty in forming them from their Theorem Il- 
lustration. The first five rules respect the secormos in- 
flections, s, es, th, t, st. Upon the first spring of secormos 
F, the student will find no secormos inflection. Have you 
examined this spring? I have— and 1 have not been able 



387 

to find any of the secormos inflections on it Well, John, 
let me now tell you what it is which prevents these inflec- 
tions from attaching themselves to this spring. There are 
two preventives on this spring against the reception of 
the whole ^ve secormos inflections — these are the petition, 
and the command. Either of these is a sure preventive 
against the spring's receiving any of these inflections. 
The symbolic petition is the act of the figure marked aa 
— the verbal petition is in the section, " Forgive thou." 

The command is denoted by the crown to which the 
petition seems to be addressed. The verbal command is 
in the section " Be thou." Now upon this spring is dis- 
played the following Rule — 

Every command which contains no affirmation, and 
every petition which contains no question, requires be, 
and cuts off the secormos inflections from every other 
seramus ; as, " Be thou here in season," " Forgive thou our 
sins," " Write ye to us soon." 

Do you understand this Rule] " Every command which 
contains no affirmation. Now, John, if the first spring 
possessed a timepiece, such as illustrates the affirmative 
cor diction, or if it had an interrogative character (I), it 
might take the secormos inflections in despite of the com- 
mand, and in despite of the petition which is found on it. 
From this you learn that where there is an affirmation 
with the command, or where there is an interrogation 
with the petition, a secormos inflection may be attached 
to the seramus; as " Thou shalz not steal," Wilt thou give 
me a cup of cold water with which to cool my parched 
tongue 1 

Here it is seen that, " Thou shalt not steal," is a com- 
mand which contains an affirmation. Hence shall has the 
t inflection — shalt. It is seen also that, " Wilt thou give 
one a cup of cold water," is a petition which contains an 
interrogation, a question. Hence will has the t inflec- 
tion — wilt 

Now, John, examine the spring — see what it does con- 
tain, and what it does not. Does it contain a petition 
without a question, without this sign (?) If so, the spring 
cannot receive a secormos inflection. Again — does this 
spring contain a command without an affirmation, a time- 
piece 1 If so, the spring can not receive a secormos inflec- 
tion. 

The Rule may be better understood when construed in 
the following terms, — Every petition which contains no 
interrogation, as well as every command which contains 
no affirmation, requires the seramus to remain in its pri- 
mitive state; as, " Be thou here by nine," Have thou every 

Hh2 



388 

paper with you, Go thou to school, Give us this day our 
daily bread, Forgive thou our sins. 

Now be is the primitive state of been, being, am, art, was, 
wast, are, were. 

Observe this — Been, being, am, art, is, was, wast, are, 
and were are in truth mere inflections of be. The above 
Rule, then, when brought to its brief state, runs as fol- 
lows — 

A mere command, or a mere petition cuts off all inflec- 
tions from the seramus; as, Be thou, come ye, read thou. 

Let this principle be well understood — "A mere peti- 
tion, or a mere command excludes, rejects, or cuts off, not 
only every secormos inflection from all serami, but also all 
the timedex inflections, all the nontimedex inflections from 
all serami — nay, more, a mere petition, or a mere com- 
mand is a sure preventive against the substitution of one 
seramus for another to supply deficiencies in be, and go, in 
real deflections, or modifications. Hence if am, art, is, 
&c. are not considered actual modifications of be, but 
mere substitutes, — these words are rejected in all cases 
where there is a mere petition, or a mere command; as, Be 
thou, be ye, be you. (Not am thou.) 

RULE I. 

A mere command, or a mere petition cuts off the secor- 
mos inflections from all serami, and rejects the substitutes 
of be, and go ; as, Be thou, Forgive thou. (See page 298, 9.) 

SPRING II. 

Upon this spring there are no secormos inflections — they 
are all rejected, cut off; and in order to ascertain what spe- 
cial attribute of the secormos, cuts these inflections off of 
this spring, it is necessary to find what figure is placed on 
the spring itself. This seems necessary, because the figure, 
or character which is on the spring, is the representative of 
that particular property which enables secormos, F, to cut 
off the secormos inflections from the seramus. The symbol 
is marked r, and is the representative of the Formative in- 
dication. (See page 254.) 

The man on the first spring, is the former of the sen- 
tence, " I see that thou art not he." In the addressive pos- 
ture of his person, and hand, lies the indication that he is 
the former of this sentence. 

This figure, is one of the syntax properties of secormos, 
F, and, as its posture is indicative of forming sentences, it is 
the Formative indication of the secormos to which it be- 
longs. 



389 

The springs which belong to secormos, F, are divided 
into singular, and plural. This distinction is made by at- 
taching figure v, the plural numeration of this cormos, to 
that spring upon which is written ive, &c. On the plural 
spring are found cormi of the plural numeration ; as, we, ye, 
they, &c. 

Now, they numerates, numbers, or embraces more than 
one. 

Upon the second spring are found cormi of the singular 
numeration, as /. Now, in order to understand the follow- 
ing Rule, it is important to keep in mind this numeral dif- 
ference between these two springs. What has the second 
spring upon it ? It has the singular numeration, and the 
formative indication. 

RULE II. 

The singular secormos of the formative indication re- 
quires am, or was, and cuts off the secormos inflections 
from every other seramus ; as, 1 am, I was, I forgive, I 
write. (Not, I be, I are, I were, I for gives, I writes.) 

Now, can you not see this Rule upon the second spring ? 
Do you not see am, and ivas placed on this spring ? And 
do you not see that all the secormos inflections are cut, or 
kept off of this spring ? Look upon the spring, and make an 
attempt to repeat the Rule — you can do it, if you feel re- 
solved to do it. 

The rule speaks of singular secormi of the formative in- 
dication. Now, all three cormi are on this spring. Will 
you count them ? 

12 3 

/ ivho that. 

SPRING III. 

Now, examine the third spring. What do you find upon 
it ? Is this spring singular, ox plural 1 Singular — thou means 
but one. 

This spring also has the auditive indication upon it, s. 
It has also art, and wast, and the t, and st secormos inflec- 
tion. The following Rule, therefore, can be read upon this 
spring itself. 

RULE III. 

The singular secormos of the auditive indication, re- 



390 

quires art, or wast, and gives the t, or st inflection to all 
other serami ; as, Thou art, Thou wast, thou wilt, thou 
forgivest, thou writes^ 

Now count the number of secormi which are of the sin- 
gular numeration, and auditive indication — 
1 2 3 

thou who that. 

SPRING IV. 

Examine this spring with great care to see how many 
things are on it. 

1. Is it singular, or plural ? Singular — he is singular. 

2. Has it the sinefunctional indication ? It has — this in- 
dication is found in the figure marked t ; sine, without, and 

function, a part assigned in the accomplishment of some 
work, deed, or business. What is the work which is to be 
done ? A sentence is to be formed, and audience is to be 
given to it. The sentence which is to be formed, and re- 
ceive audience, is, " I see that thou art not heT 

1. The function of r is to form the sentence. 

2. The "function of s is to give audience to it, to turn an 
ear to it. 

The sentence is formed by r, and audited by s. And as 
there are but these two functions in the g-ift of the sentence, 
t is left without an office, a function. Hence you see him 
moving off, without a function. And on this account, he 
is presented as the sinefunctional indication of secormos, 
F. You see r engaged in his function — you see s engaged 
in his. But from the very posture of if, it is indicated that 
t is icithout a function. 

Upon this spring you find is, and teas, and also the s, es, 
and the th secormos inflection. And this spring you find 
is referred, or led off to the phemic, and presynphemic time- 
dex, rn. 

Hence you see that the secormos inflections on this spring, 
are used with some reference to the presynphemic, timedex 
of the seramus. 

RULE IV. 

The singular secormos of the sinefunctional indication 
requires is, or was, and gives the s, es, or th inflection in 
the phemic, and presynphemic timedex, to every other sera- 



391 

mus which can take these inflections ; as, He is, He was, 
He writes, he writeth, He has a book, He has, or hath 
written a book. 

Re-examine the spring, and see whether all the facts 
mentioned in this rule, are presented on it. 

This spring presents he, which, who, that and as as se- 
cormi which fall under this rule. But these are by no 
means all the secormi which this rule embraces — it includes 
thousands. 

spring v. 

Now, if you examine this spring, you will find that it is 
connected with no symbol, except the plural chair. The in- 
dications which stand upon the other springs are not found 
upon this. The three indications are omitted. To show 
this fact, — when the secormos is plural, the secormos con- 
trols the inflections, not through the medium of its indica- 
tions, but through the instrumentality of its plural numera- 
tion. 

The following rule, then, is founded solely upon the plu- 
ral numeration of the secormos — 

RULE V. 

The plural secormos cuts off all the secormos inflections, 
and, except, in a mere command, or a mere petition, requires 
are, or were ; as, We write, We forgive, Ye write, They 
zcrite, We are, we vjere, You are, ye were, They are, 
they were. 

Note. — Observe this, the second rule, the third rule, and the fourth 
rule is founded upon an indicaiim of the secormos — but thatjhe fifth 
rule is founded upon the plural numeration of the secormos. Learn 
from this fact that when the secormos is singular, the indication of it 
controls the secormos inflections ; as, I am, thou art, he is. But when 
the secormos is plural, the indications cease to control these inflections, 
and that the plural numeration alone controls them; as, We are, Ye 
are. — (See the appeal, page 2*26.) 

N. B. As you find who, and that upon the second spring, 
you may know that these two cormi are of the singular 
numeration, and formative indication. As you find who, and 
that upon the third, you learn that who, and that are of 
the singular numeration, and auditive indication. And, as 
you find these same words on the fourth spring, you learn 
that these cormi are singular in numeration, and sinefunc- 
tional in indication. And from the fact that you find who, 



392 

and that on the plural spring, you learn that these two 
cormi are plural also. 

RULE I. 

A spring which comprises a mere command, or a mere 
petition, cuts off the secormos inflections from all serami, 
and rejects the substitutes of be. 

1 . Which spring is this? 

RULE II. 

The singular spring of the formative indication, requires 
am, ox was, and cuts off the secormos inflections from every 
other seramus. 

2. Which spring is this? 

"from every other seramus." That is, every seramus be- 
sides am, and was. 

RULE III. 

If there is neither a command, nor a petition, the singular 
spring of the auditive indication, requires, art, or wast, 
and gives the /, or the st inflection to every other seramus. 

3. Which spring is this? 

RULE IV. 

The singular spring of the senefunctional indication, 
requires is, or was, and gives the s, es, or the th inflection, 
in the phemic, and presynphemic timedex, to every other 
seramus. 

4. Which spring is this? 

RULE V. 

The plural spring cuts ofT all the secormos inflections, 
and, except in a command, or a petition, substitutes are for 
be, am, art, and is, and were for was, and wast. 

5. Which spring is this? 

RULES 

For correcting those improprieties which lie, 

First, in the secormos inflection itself; as^ I writes, (s.) 
Secondly, in the want of a particular secormos inflec- 
tion ; as Thou writeth, (st.) 

Thirdly, in the use of be, or some of be's substitutes; 
as, I be, (am.) 



393 

I. Secormos Inflections. 

s, es, th, t, st, 

II. Inflective Substitutes. 

am, art, is, are, was, ivast, were. 

1. Rule, be, . No inflections. 

2. Rule, am, ivas, . 

3. Rule, art, wast, t, st. 

4. Rule, is, was, s, es, th. 

5. Rule, are, were, • 



RULE I. 

A mere command, or a mere petition cuts off the secor- 
mos inflections from all serami, and rejects all inflective 
substitutes; as, Be thou here in time, Forgive thou our 
faults, Go thou to school, Come ye home. 

Specimen of correcting by Rule I. 

Gives me a book, John. 

Improper — the error lies in the s inflection of give. 

The impropriety is a violation of Rule first, which says, &c. 

As, give me a book, John. 

EXERCISES. 

Come here, Charles, and reads. 

Writes these copies accurately, John. 

Comes in, Sir. 

Returns to me, John, immediately. 

Forgives thou us our sins. 

Has thou mercy upon us. 

RULE II. 

The singular secormos of the formative indication, re- 
quires am, or ivas, and cuts off the secormos inflections from 
every other seramus ; as, I am, I ivas, [I (that am now 
weak,) was once strong,] The lad called (on me) who 
am his uncle, I write, If I was there, Was I there, I could 
see him. 

In the above instances who, and that are singular, and formative. 

Note. — The singular secormi of the formative indication, are I, who 
that. 

How can the numeration, and the indication of who, and that be 
determined ? By the cormos which these unnamitives represent — for 
who, and that take the numeration, and the indication of those cormi for 



394 

which they stand. I who, me who, I that, me that. The numeration 
of who, and that is singular ; and their indication is formative. 

We who, we £to, us who, us Jta, plural, and formative. 

Thou 10A0, or Jfotf, £Ae»e, wAo, or tfto. The numeration is singular, 
and the indication is auditive. 

[" They call me] {that speak) (to you.") Why is that in this instance 
singular, and formative ? Because it represents me. 

Specimen of correcting bad English, in which there is an 
application of the second Rule. 

" I laughs." 

Improper — the error lies in the s inflection of laugh. The impro- 
priety is a violation of Rule second, which says, &c. (Here let the 
pupil read the Rule.) 

As, I laugh. 

Remark. — The pupil should not say the error lies in is, consent, 
fyc; but in the t, st, s, es, or th inflection, or in the use of is for 
am, &lc. 

Exercises to be corrected according to the preceding Speci- 
men. 

I sings very little. I is. 

I be in good health. I runs. 

I cans read French. I believest. 

I will return. Says I. 

I wast. Thinks I to myself. 

I art. Says I, you cannot return. 

[The child saw me] (who is its present protector.) 

[They called me] (that speaks) (to you.) 

[I (that reads so well) is now to declaim.] 

[I (who art bad) must repent] 

[I (that art friendly) (to all) are glad to see thee.] 

[I (who teaches thee) art thy brother.] 

The following instances are considered correct English as they now 
stand. Nothing is more obvious, however, than that they are incorrect. 
(See Remaks, page 38*2.) 

To be corrected. 
2. ["John , , ,] (and I are sick.") 

2. ["Samuel , , , , ,] (and I are good 
boys.") 

Samuel is a good hoy ; and 1 am a good boy. 

3. [" Nathaniel , , , ,] (and I are pu- 
pils") 

4. [ u James , , ,] (and I reads books.") 
[" H >•>.»] nd I were there.") 



395 

RULE III. 

If there is neither a command, nor a petition, the singu- 
lar secormos of the auditive indication, requires art, or 
wast, and gives the t, or st inflection to every other sera- 
mus ; as, Thou art, Thou wast, If thou art, If thou wast 
there, Wast thou there thou couldst see thy friend, [I saw 
thee] (who didst betray my friend.) 

Note. — The singular secormi of the auditive indication, are thou, 
who, and that. 

Specimen of correcting by Ride III. 

I hope that thou am well. 

Improper — the error lies in the use of am for art. 

The impropriety is a violation of Rule III. which says, &c. 

As, I hope that thou art well. 

EXERCISES. 

Is thou reading, Charles 1 

Thou is my friend. 

Perhaps thou be a teacher. 

Thou smiles. 

Thou art in error, Thomas. 

Thou wrote too soon. 

Thou am called a hasty man. 

Why am thou not a philosopher? 

Do thou love thy neighbour? 

Thou loved thy brother too little. 

Thou did not see him. 

Thou has a fine book, Stephen. 

Thou were at my house. 

Thou saw him with me. 

[The child saw thee] (who am its present protector.) 

[I called thee] (that speaks) (to her.) 

[Thou (that reads so well) am now to declaim.] 

[Thou (who is bad) should repent.] 

(See Remarks, page 382.) 

1. [" John , , ,] (and thou are sick.") 
2 [<>Samuel ,,,,,] (and thou ase 
good boys.") 

[Samuel is a good boy,] (and thou art a good boy.) 

3. " Nathaniel ,■ , . ,,-.,] (and thou are pupils.") 

How can Nathaniel be two ? — it is here asserted that Nathaniel is 
pupils, and that thou art pupils ! ! 

I i 



396 

4. [" James , , ,] (and thou read books.'*) 
[James reads books,] (and thou reddest books.) 

5. [" He , , ,] fand thou ivere there. "j 
Does thou require ivere, or wast ?" 

RULE IV. 

The singular secormos of the sinefunctional indication, 
requires is, or was, and gives the s, es, or the th inflec- 
tion, in the phemic, and the presynphemic timedex, to 
every other seramus which can take these inflections; 
as, He is, He was, He has a book, He has or hath writ- 
ten a book," The jury* has or hath agreed, The meeting 
is large, The family was well, Was he well he would 
attend, I , , and he is, -"He , , , and 

she has arrived." 

Note. — May, can, must, might, could, would, should, will, shall, and 
ought cannot take the s, es and th inflection. 

Specimen of correcting by Rule IV. 

He write to his friend every week. 

Improper — the error lies in the want of the s inflection of write. 
The impropriety is a violation of Rule IV. which says, &c. 
As, he writes. 

EXERCISES. 

He am with John. He write his copies too fast. 

Joseph art my brother. John have returned. 

She are his sister. She move gracefully. 
Stephen walk with me daily. He drink too much water. 

It rain quite fast. The apple taste sweet. 

She sing sweetly. The grass grow high. 

James have a new book. He appear well. 

Neither precept, nor discipline are so forcible as example. 

Either the boy, or the girl were present. 

Neither character, nor dialogue were yet understood. 

Either money, or credit are necessary to all. 

John, or James write letters. 

Were he, or his mother at church ] 

There are enough already. 

Parliament have at length dissolved. 

* Every name of an assemblage, or collective body, is singular, 
unless it has the plural form ; as, Jury, Church, Committee, Con- 
gress. (See page 379.) 



397 

The court have disagreed. 

The jury are not unanimous in opinion. 

The committee agree upon this point. 

The meeting was well attended. 

The flock are fed. 

When the nation complain, its rulers should listen. 

The regiment consist of a thousand men. 

The crowd are so great that I cannot get through it. 

The weight* are sixty pounds. 

Sixty pounds is the weight. 

* The preceding is the secormos, and controls the seramus; as, 
The wages of sin are death, Death is the wages of sin. 

1. [" Socrates , , , ] (and Plato were 
eminent philosophers." 

2. [The son , ] (and father meet.] 

3- ["Life , ] ( , . , ,)( " , , , ) 
(and death are) (in the power) (of the tongue.") 

4. [« The time , , ] (and place were appointed.") 

5. ["Idleness ,,,](, , ) 
(and ignorance are the parent) (of many vices.") 

6. [" I , ] ( , thou , ) (and he write.") 

7. ["Every plant , ] ( , , , ) ( 
every flower ,)(,,,) (and every 
drop (of water) abound) (with living creatures.") 

8. ["Wisdom , , ] ( , virtue , , ) 
(and happiness dwell there.") 

9. [" Every desire (of the heart) , , ] ( , 
, ) ( , »•■",'..) (and every secret thought 

is known) (to him) (who made us.") 

10. [" Each day , , , ] ( , 

, ) (and each hour bring some business) (that 
require our attention.") 

Corrected. 

Socrates, and Plato was an eminent philosopher. 

The son, and father meets. 

Life, and death is in the power of the tongue. 

The time, and place was appointed. 

Idleness, and ignorance is the parent of many vices. 

I, thou, and he writes. 

Wisdom, virtue, and happiness dwells there. 

Every plant, every flower, and every drop of water 

abounds with living creatures. 
Every desire of the heart, and every secret thought is 

known to him who made us. 
Each day, and each hour brings some business that 

requires our attention. 



398 

Note. — It may be well enough to say here that the British English 
Grammarians, and the American English Grammarians, give to and 
no power over the seramus, the verb, in cases like that in the seventh, 
ninth, and tenth example. Hence they write the seramus with its 
secormos inflections — 

" Every plant, every flower, and every drop of water 
abounds (not abound) with living creatures." 

This, which, strange to tell, is considered a mere excep- 
tion, is in truth English, while the other form which is 
considered to be founded on the general principle, is not 
English. 

1. The general principle — "John, and Joseph are good 
children." 

2. A mere exception — "Every boy, and every girl is a 
good child." 

What is it, yes, what is it which renders are proper in 
the first, but improper, in the second 1 

By rendering the first plenary, it will be seen how 
exactly the fact accords with the import of the proposi- 
tion — 

John are good children, and Joseph are good children ! ! ! 

It is a singular doctrine which compels a simple propo- 
sition to make two children out of one ! 

Let us turn it into English — 

[John , , , , ,] (and Joseph is a good child.) 

"That is, John is a good child; and Joseph is a good 
child." (See critical reflections, page 382.) 

Note 1. — When the secormi are singular, and of different indica- 
tions, the last controls the expressed seramus ; as, I, or thou art in 
error, Thou, or I am in error. 

Note 2. — When the secormi are of different numerations, the last 
controls the expressed seramus ; as, I, or they are in error, Thou, or 
they are in error. 

Note 3. — 7b, in the semi-section, whether expressed, or under- 
stood, cuts off all the secormos inflections, and confines the seramus 
to its radical state ; as, They went to see the man, They saw the ship 
, move. 

RULE V. 

The plural secormos cuts off all the secormos inflec- 
tions, and, except in a command, or a petition, requires 
are, or were ; as You write, Ye are, They are. 

Specimen of correcting by Rule V. 

" We is well pleased." 

Improper — The error lies in the use of is for are. 

The impropriety is a violation of Rule V, which says, &c. 

As, We are well pleased. 



399 

EXERCISES. 

They be fine apples. 

You is good children. 

Ye art reading my part. 

They was in Philadelphia. 

They am not in this place now. 

The gentlemen art satisfied; and the ladies is much 

pleased. 
These lads runs. What signi^es good opinions'? 
Hence comes wars. 
Disappointments sinks the heart. 
Fifty pounds (of wheat) contains forty pounds (of flour.) 

N. B. The following Rule may be read, and the exercises under it 
may be corrected by it. Yet as the Rule itself is founded in error, the 
author can not recommend any persons to speak, or write by it. The 
doctrine of this Rule, is discussed under page 382 ; and to this discus- 
sion the reader is earnestly desired to give his attention. 

The author hopes that such a reformation w 7 ill so soon take place in 
the minds of the learned, that the discussion of this Rule, and the Ex- 
ercises under it, may be expunged from the next edition of this work 

RULE VI. 

In compliance with custom, but in opposition to the prin- 
ciples of our language, the ellipsis in the superior section, 
of the seramus which is expressed in the inferior section 
subjoined by and, cuts off the secormos inflections, and, 
if there is neither a command, nor petition, requires are, or 
were; as " - [" I , ,] (and John laugh") 

[•'I , , , ,] (and thou are his friends. ") 

("Thou , , , ,) (and I were his friends." ) 

(See paoe 382.) 

That it is the ellipsis which cuts off those inflections, and requires 
are, or were, is obvious from the fact that when the superior section is 
made plenary, the singular secormos in both sections, has the same in- 
fluence over the seramus, which it has where and does not occur ; as, 
[" I am his friend ,"] (and he is his friend,") Not, [I are his friends',] (and 
he are his friends.) [[ laugh;] (and John laughs,) Not, [I laugh] (and 
John laugh.) 

The verb, the seramus, then, receives the plural form as they call it, not 
because of and, not because of the two secormi which we are told are 
connected by and, but simply, and merely, because the seramus which is 
expressed in the section subjoined by and, is understood in the section to 
which and?s section is conjected ! The verb, then, agrees, not with the 
nominative, but with the ellipsis in the superior section!! 

The following exercises are correct English as they now stand, ac- 

Ii2 



400 

cording to the principles of that relation which exists between the secor- 
mos, and the seramus — but still they are placed under the sixth Rule, 
to be corrected by the doctrine of custom. 

EXERCISES. 

Socrates, and Plato was eminent philosophers. 

The son, and father meets. 

Life, and death is in the power of the tongue. 

The time, and place was appointed. 

Idleness, and ingorance is the parent of many vices. 

I, thou, and he writes. 

Wisdom, virtue, and happiness dwells there. 

Every plant, and flower abounds with living creatures. 

Every desire, and secret thought is known to him who 
made us. 

Each day, and hour brings some business that requires 
our attention. 

RULE VII. 

The imnamitive cormos should agree with the namitive 
cormos which it represents, in indication, numeration, and 
gender ; as '• Jane had seen James before she called him" 
,' The jury will remain out till they have agreed on a 
verdict." 

The unnamitive, they, represents the word, members, im- 
plied. (See page 379.) 

Specimen of correcting by Rule VII. 

" Take handfuls of ashes, and let Moses sprinkle it 
toward heaven." 

Improper, the error lies in the singular numeration of it — the 
impropriety is a violation of Rule VII, which says — the unnamitive 
comos, &c. as, 

and let Moses sprinkle them. 

EXERCISES. 

No person is fully satisfied that they will not be de- 
ceived. 

The minds of men are active — it must have something 
to work on. 

Each of them received the amount to which they were 
entitled by law. 

I gave him oats — but they would not eat it. 

I gave the horse hay— but they would not eat it. 

I gave the horse grass— but he did not eat them. 

I gave the ox spires of grass-— but he did not eat it. 



401 

Note i. — When, for brevity, the name of the assemblage, or col- 
lective body, is used instead of the name of its constituent parts, the 
mind dissolves the body into its several parts, and the unamitive rep- 
resents the name of these parts; as, the jury will remain out till they 
have agreed on their verdict. 

Here, they represents members. (See page 379.) 

EXERCISES. 

The jury will continue out till it have agree on a ver- 
dict. 

The council was not unanimous, and it separated with- 
out coming to any determination. 

The committee was divided in sentiment, and it referred 
the business to a general meeting. 

The enemy was not able to support the charge; and he 
fled. 

The defendant's counsel had a difficult task imposed 
upon it. 

Note II. — When the name of the assemblage, or collective bod}', 
is not used for the name of the constituent parts, (members) the mind 
does not dissolve the body into its several parts — hence the unnami- 
tive cormos represents the true name of the collective body ; as, A 
committee was appointed ; and it made a report upon the subject. 

Here it represents, not members, but committee, the true collective 
name. 

Specimen of correcting under Note II. 

" The crowd is so great that I cannot get through 
them." 

Improper — the error lies in the plural numeration of them. The 
impropriety is a violation of Note II, under Rule VII, which says, 
When the name of the, &c, as I cannot get through it. 

EXERCISES. 

The crowd is so great that I cannot get through them. 
The company was very small at first; but they increas- 
ed daily. 
The school is quite large now; and they still grow 

larger. 

The third flock of sheep is fed; but they are not 
watered. 

The family is not so well pleased with its situation as 
they expected to be. 

Note III. — When the unnamitive cormos runs into a ramus, the 
ramus represents the name of multitude, in a ramified form, (com- 
mittee's) not members understood, and should remain in its singular 



402 

form ; as, the committee published its proceedings. [Not their procee- 



EXERCISES. 

When the nation complains, their rulers should listen. 

This company conducts their business with accuracy, 
and despatch. 

The church will conduct their own business. 

The family is very well with the exception of two of 
their members. 

The school must attend to their writing now. 

This class has lost some of their members. 

Note IV. — When the unnamitive cormos is preceded by two ante- 
cedents of different characters, it commonly takes the indication, nu- 
meration, and gender of the nearer; as, I am the man who commands 
you. 

Did who represent 7, who would then be of the formative ; hence it 
would be, who command ? (no s,) for who by representing /, would be- 
come equal to / in indication, numeration, and gender ; and you would 
not say I commands ; but I command. 

EXERCISES. 

I am the man who command you. 

Note. — This something which indicates that the person alluded to 
by i, is the former of the sentence. The word, man, however, has 
nothing of the kind. True, i, and man denote the same person — 
hence the word, man, must denote the former of the sentence as much 
as "/" But, then, the word, man, has no tongue, no means with 
which to tell, to indicate that it denotes the former — the word, i, how- 
ever, has the means of indicating that it (J) does denote the former. 
Bence the difference between i, and man. 

I am a person who adopt that sentiment, and main- 
tain it. 

Thou art a person who possessest bright parts ; but who 
hast cultivated them but little. 

I am the man who speak but seldom. 

Thou art the friend that hast often relieved me; and 
that hast not deserted me in time of peculiar need. 

I am the boy that write letters. 

You are the boy who pick my apples. 

RULE VIII. 

Every inseramus that is formed from an unnamitive 
cormos, must represent some inseramus which is formed 
from some namitive cormos by the apostrophe ' , and 
5, ('$) or by the apostrophe only ' , and must agree with it 



403 

in indication, numeration, and gender ; as, John saw his 
bruther, The jury will remain out till its members have 
agreed. 

Here "his" represents, not John, but the duramus, John's; as, John 
saw John's brother. 

And u its" represents, not "jury" but the duramus, jury's ; as, The 
jury will remain out till the jury's members have agreed on a verdict. 

EXERCISES. 

Can any person on their enterance into life be fully se- 
cure that he shall not be deceived 1 

The minds of men cannot be long without some food 
to nourish the activity of its ihoughts. 

Each of them in their turn receives the money to which 
they are entitled. 

Each of the boys took their own book. 

He teaches mathematics with all its branches. 

Carry the scissors to its place 

John, and James have found his books. 

Stephen, or Joseph ha* returned their copy. 

I have examined the subject of alms in all their conse- 
quences. 

RULE IX. 

Have through all its variations, gives the following se- 
ramus the havible form ; as I have begun, Thou hast 
written, He has walked, They had flown, He hath put. 
(Not, have began, hast wrote, has walk, h^vefleiv, have 
jmts.) 

Specimen of correcting by Rule IX. 
I have did it. 
Improper — the error lies in the want of the havible form of did. 
The impropriety is a violation of rule ix. which says, &c. as, I have 
done it. 

EXERCISES. 

I have came. He has wrote his copy. 

I have drank. I would have wrote a letter. 

The birds have flew. He has drank. 

He had mistook his true interest. 

Vie has wore the web. The river has frozen over. 

They had chose the part of honor and virtue. 

My people have slid backward. 



404 

He has broke the bottle. 
The price of cloth has lately rose very much. 
His vices have weakened his mind, and broke his con- 
stitution. 

RULE X. 

Be, through all its variations, gives the following sera- 
mus a beible form; as, The book is written, I am writing. 
Letters are written. 

Specimen of correcting by Rule X. 

The hat was took. 

Improper — the error lies in the want of the beible form 
of took. The impropriety is a violation of rule x. which 
gays, &c, as, the hat was taken. (See page 289.) 

EXERCISES. 

It was drank. 

His resolution was too strong to be shook by opposition. 

The horse was stole. 

The Rhine was froze over. 

She was invite into the drawing room. 

Some fell by the way side, and was trod down. 

The work was very well execute. 

It has been did. 

The French language is spoke in many countries. 

Note. — The prediradical nontimedex should never be used unless 
have, or be is either expressed, or understood before it; as, "He done 
well," "I seen him this week." (have done, have seen.) (See Nontime- 
dexes, page 288.) 

RULE XL 

When the time, and event both exist at the period in 
which they are mentioned, with no other cessation than 
occasional intermission, the phemic timedex should be 
used ; as, They frequently call on us. 

RULE XII. 

The presynphemic timedex should be used where a por- 
tion of the time within which the event is placed, yet re- 
mains; as, 

1. I have written a letter to day. 

2. I have seen him twice in my life. 

3. I have never drunk better water. 

A portion of my life yet remains — and as these events are placed 
within the period of my life, the presynphemic timedex must be used 



405 

He who has passed completely through ; or he whose period of life is 
perfectly passed off, may look back through the prediphemic timedex ; 
as, 

1. I saw him twice in my life ! 

2. I never drank better water in my life ! 

(See page 278.) 

Specimen of correcting under Ride X1L 
" I wrote to my brother to-day." 

Improper — The error lies in the use of the prediphemic timedex. 
The impropriety is a violation of Rule XII., which says, &c. As, I 
have written to my brother to day. 

EXERCISES. 

I saw my uncle Thomas in market this evening. 
Mr. Jones made a thousand dollars this year. 
John, did you do the job yet ? 

Did you see your sister since you have been in Philadel- 
phia] 
I purchased this book this evening. 
I spoke with my brother since I came out. 
Will you go, James ! No, I concluded to remain at home. 

RULE XIII. 

When the period of time within which the event is 
placed, is all passed off, and taken as disconnected with any 
other time, the prediphemic timedex should be used ; as, 

1. I wrote a letter to my brother yesterday. 

Specimen of correcting under Rule X.III. 

I have made out very well last year. 

Improper — The error lies in the use of the presynphemic timedex, 
where the time is perfectly passed off, and unconnected with other 
time. The impropriety is a violation of Rule XIII. which says, &c. 
As, I made out very well last year. 

EXERCISES. 

I have written to my brother a number of times while he 
was in Boston. 

While I was writing this work, I have prepared another 
for the press. 

He has seen me last week in Philadelphia. 

EULE XIV. 

Where one event takes place before another, the first 
section should have the presyndiphemic timedex ; as, 

1. They had dined before I arrived. 



406 

2. I had concluded to return before I got my father's let- 
ter, (see page 279.) 

SPECIMEN OF CORRECTING. 

I returned before John came home. 

Improper — the error lies in the use of the prediphemic timedex, 
for the presyndiphemic timedex- The impropriety is a violation of 
Rule xiv, which says, &c. As, I had returned before John came home. 

EXERCISES. 

Joseph wrote his copies before school commenced. 

Jane learned her lesson before she went to school. 

God created the earth before he formed man. 

I was in business a number of years before my broth- 
er's death. 

They saw me twice at my own house before I called on 
them. 

RULE XV. 

When the superior part of the section is founded upon 
a hope, command, desire, intention, or duty, the semisection 
should have the phemic timedex , as, 

1. They meant to write last week. 

2. We desire to find him at home. 

3. They bade* him return the book. 

4. I told him to bring the articles. 

5. "He ought to come" 

The observation is clear — clear because the presyndi- 
phemic timedex would denote that whatever is hoped for, 
commanded, desired or intended, had been realized before 
even the existence of the hope, command, desire, or inten- 
tion. 

Specimen of correcting. 
I saw him to have drunk the wine. 

Improper — the error lies in the use of the presyndiphemic time- 
dex for the phemic. The impropriety is a violation of Rule XV, 
which says, &c. As, I saw him drink the wine. 

* If bid, dare, make, see, behold, hear, feel, need, or have, is 
found in the superior part, to, except in the secormic series, should not 
be expressed in the semisection ; as, 1 saw him , write 

this letter. 

Dare forms an exception to this note when it signifies to challenge. 



407 

EXERCISES. 

They meant to have written last week. 

We desired to have found him at home. 

The teacher told us to have done these sums. 

They intended to have returned home. 

We hoped to have seen all the family happy. 

They desired us to have gone home with them. 

RULE XVI. 

Where the event expressed in the semisection, had hap- 
pened before that expressed in the superior part, the pre- 
syndiphemic timedex should be used in the semisection ; as, 

1. I was delighted to have seen my brother. 

2. He was glad to have paid the debt. 

Here it is clear that the seeing had taken place before the delight 
was felt ; as, He was delighted on Saturday to have seen his brother 
on Friday. 

It is also obvious that the payment had been made before the glad- 
ness was felt. 

Specimen of Correcting, 
I was much pleased yesterday to see you the day before 
at my house. 

Improper — the error lies in the use of the phemic for the presyndi- 
phemic timedex. The impropriety is a violation of rule xvi ; which 
says, &,c. As, I was much pleased yesterday to have seen you the 
day before, at my house, 

EXERCISES. 

I was very sorry last evening to see you the night before, 
at a public house. 

I have been happy to-day to see you at church last Sab- 
bath. 

RULE XVII. 

When the events in both parts of the section happen at 
the same time, both parts should have the phemic, or the 
superior, the prediphemic timedex; as, 

1. I am delighted to see you. 

2. I was delighted to see you last week. 

Specimen of Correcting. 

I was delighted to have seen you. 
Kk 



Improper — the error lies in using the presyndiphemic for the phemic 
timedex. The impropriety is a violation of rule xvii, which says, 
&e. As, I was delighted to see you. 

EXERCISES. 

I was pleased yesterday to have seen you yesterday. 
I hope to have got a letter to-day. 
I saw you to have written the letter. 

Before leaving the timedex of the semisection, it may be well enough 
just to say that the very common, and highly authorized expression, he 
" ought to have written," is no better than " he hoped to have seen his 
son." 

The word, ought denotes duty — written denotes an action — and have 
indicates that he had done the action even before the duty is repre- 
sented as existing! He should have written is good. 

RULE XVIII. 

The postphemic timedex should be used where the 
event is individual, not habitual, where the post time allu- 
ded to, and where the event is to take place, not before, 
but within that one portion of time; as I shall dine at two 
o'clock, I will see you again. 

Note. — Where the event is habitual, the phemic timedex is gene- 
rally used ; as, When the stage returns, we shall see our friends. 

The returning of the stage is spoken of as an habitual event, a 
customary act; hence the phemic timedex is used ; (returns.) The see- 
ing of our friends is not mentioned as an habitual event — hence it has 
the post phemic timedex, (shall.) 

RULE XIX. 

Where the nature of the case makes two portions of 
postphemic time, and the event, whether individual, or 
habitual, mentioned in the first section, is to take place 
within the first portion, but before the commencement of the 
second, the first section should have the prepostphemic 
timedex; as, "When the stage shall have returned, we 
shall see our friends; We shall have dined by two o'clock; 
I shall have seen the merchant before you return. 

Note. — There are from the nature of the case three points of time 
which in some sense, or other regal d this sentence. First, there is the 
phemic, the time within which the sentence was formed. Secondly, 
there is a postphemic portion within which I am to do the act of seeing 
the merchant. Thirdly, there is the postphemic portion which falls 
immediately after that postphemic portion within which the act of see- 
ing is to take place — and within this portion, which may be called the 
|?os£-postphemic, the act of returning is to be done. 



409 

John will call before you set out for Boston. 

Improper — the error lies in the use of the postphemic for the pre- 
postphemic timedex. The impropriety is a violation of rule xix, which 
says, &c. 

As, John will have called before you set out for Boston. 

EXERCISES. 

We shall get some news by 1 1 o'clock. 
James will write you before next week. 
He will send you the book before you want it. 

Note. — In the sections of the affirmative kind, will have should not 
be used with i, or ice ; nor shall have with thou, or ye, nor with any 
secormos of the sinefunctional indication; as, 

1. I will have written, &c. 

2. Thou shalt have written, &c. 

3. He shall have written, &c. 

There is an obvious absurdity in promising in such instances. But 
to foretell is consistent; as, 

I shall have written, &c. Thou wilt have written, &c. 
He ivill have written, &c. 

Shall, in the formative indication, only fortells ; as, I sliall go to- 
morrow. In the auditive, and sinefunctional, shall promises, com- 
mand^, or threatens; as, You, or they shall be rewarded, Thou shalt 
not steal, The soul that sinneth, shall die. 

Will, in the formative, denotes a promise, or resolve ; as, I will not 
let thee go. 

In the auditive, and sinefunctional, it generally fortells, as, He will 
reward the righteous. {Seepage 292.) 

Before leaving the Timedexes, it may be well to observe 
tbat the section in which the radical nontinaedex is used in 
the formative position, has no distinct time of its own — its 
time is always desired from some other section ; as, He 
being a wise, man ; we °ive heed to his counsel, (Phemic.) 

RULE XX. 

Sections which are subjoined by and, or, neither, either, 
and as well as, when they can be left in an implenary 
state, should agree in timedex with those to which they 
are subjoined; as, I have read, and, written many books. 

EXERCISES. 

I have read, and wrote many books. 

He saw me, and has satisfied me. 

He saw me, and even had called me before you came up. 



410 

He being a wise man, we gave heed to his council. (Pre- 
diphemic.) 

RULE XXL 

A dicormic seramus requires an Unnamitive of the In- 
sentensic variety instead of the Sentensic, for its Insecor- 
mos ; as, John saw me. (Not /.) (See p. 160.) 

Note. I. Be, through all its variations, requires an Unnamitive of 
the Sentensic variety for its inseeormos ; as, I am he. Who art thou ? 
It is she. (See p. 160.) 

The variations of be are — am, art, is, are, being, was, wast, were, and 
been, 

EXERCISES. 

Who do you see, James 1 

They have called he, and I. 

Mother taught she, and him that they should rise early. 

It is me. 

Whom do the people say that I am ] 

I took it to be he. 

They thought that it was me. 

We think that it was them. 

Is this her] 

Was that him 1 

John called her, he, they, thou, and I, to the house. 

Note II. The secormic seramus series requires an unnamitive of the 
sentensic variety, or exhihitory, for its inseeormos ; as, This girl is 
called she. (Not her) (See p. 305.) 

EXERCISES. 

Who is the teacher 1 that man is called him. 
Are you the gentleman who performs these marvellous 
cures 1 I have been reputed him. 
By whom have you been called him 1 
I have been denominated him by all. 
Who first styled you him ] 

RULE XXII. 

The Cormi in the implenary subjoined section must have 
the same character that they would if the section was 
plenary; as, John saw him, and her, I, thou, and he went, 
I purchased the hats of Mr. Jones, , , he 

that lives in South Eighth street. That is, I purchased the 
hats of Mr. Jones ; who is he that, &c. 



411 

EXERCISES. 

These young gentlemen saw them, and we at church. 

They, and us went to the Fosters, them that teach in 
Philadelphia. 

He purchased his hat of Stephen Shepherd, Mm that 
lives in Broadway. 

I went to see my brother, Mm that lives in London. 

Their sister, her that lives in New York, is now in Phil- 
adelphia. 

RUjJE XXIII. 

Me, and us should follow Cormi of exclamation ; as, Ah! 
me, O ! us. 

These unnamitives, however, are not controlled by Cor- 
mi of exclamation ; but by some Ramus understood ; as, 
what has befallen me, or Ah ruin has overtaken me, or, 
will overtake me. ■ 

Note I. Thou follows Cormi of exclamation; aSj O! thou wretch. 
That is, O ! thou art a w 7 retch. 

Thou, then, is the sentensic Cormos of art understood — and me in 
the other note, the insentensic Cormos of befallen, or overtaken, under- 
stood. 

RULE XXIV. 

Monorami should come before their Cormi which should 
ever be insentensic ; as, To whom do you speak, John ? 
(Not, who do you speak to, John I) 

EXERCISES UNDER RULE XXV. 

(Who [do you speak] to,) Nancy 7 

He put his hand upon some one ; but I do not know 
upon who. 

He called for Charles, John, and I. 

[Monorami refer] (to insentensic Cormi) (which (they 
should stand) before.) 

[Give (me) some water] (which to wash in.) 

(Who [does he speak] of]) 

(What [does he think] of?) 

Observation.— The same Monorami which follow the 
primitive word, generally follow the derivative; as, Derive 
from, Derivation from, Friend to, Friendly to. 

Note 1. Where the relation is denoted by the Monorami, is mere 
acquaintance, of should be used after friend ; as, He was a friend of mine. 

But when the relation is real friendship, or genuine affection, to 
should be used ; as, He is a friend to the poor, They have long been 
friends to me, Washington was a friend to his country. 

Kk2 



412 

Note II. Although generally, the same Monoramus which follows 
the primitive words, follows the derivative, yet we say diminish from ; 
but diminution of — and sometimes friend of; but in all cases, friend- 
ly to. 

Note III. One Cormos should not be subjoined to another, unless 
both will admit the same Monoramus ; as, This is a rule, and guide to 
his conduct. 

Now, as we cannot say rule to, the construction of the sentence 
should be changed, that each Cormos may have its proper Monoramus ; 
as, This is a rule of, and a guide to his conduct. 

Note IV. Between, and betwixt should be used where there are but 
two things — among, and amongst, where there are more than two ; as, 
Between these two, there is great contention ; but among those three, 
there is great harmony. 

Note V. When we are disappointed in obtaining a thing, we use of ; 
as, They have been disappointed of money. 

But when we possess the thing, and the quality does not come up to 
our expectations, we use in; as, They are disappointed in these silks. 

Note VI. During should be used only where the event continues 
through all the period which is mentioned ; as, I have written letters 
during the day. 

But where the event does not continue throughout the whole period, 
in, to, or within should be used ; as, I have written three books within 
this year, 1 have written three letters to day. 

EXERCISES UNDER THE ABOVE NOTES. 

Subtraction is a derivative of subtract. The derivation 
of one word of another, &c. 

Washington was a friend of his country. 

This is a guide, and rule to his conduct. 

He divided the apple between his few friends. 

There should be no difference betwixt those three 
brothers. 

The property will be divided among the two brothers. 

"This document which has just been printed, states that 
during the past year 1,721,000 pages of tracts have been 
distributed in the city of New \ ork." 

"On one occasion during the peninsular war, the same 
regiment came suddenly upon the French army." 

"I had occasion during our preliminary remarks on 
knowledge, to insist much on the importance of accurate 
language." 

"The substance of the three first lectures which appear 
in the present volume, was first delivered in Cincinnati, 
during the course of the last summer." 

"Conditions. — Two dollars if paid in advance, two dol- 
lars, and fifty cents if paid during the year. 3 ' 



413 

in, and at. 

1st. In is employed before the names of countries, cities, and large 
towns ; as, I live in (not at) New York, They are in America, They re- 
side in Lancaster. 

2d. At is employed before the names of foreign cities, villages, 
(whether foreign, or not,) and small towns ; As, They live at Rome, She 
resides at Springfield. 

3d. At is employed, generally, after be, when he is literally applied ; 
as, I shall he at church, They have heen at church, They are at (not to) 
church. 

EXERCISES. 

He lives at New York. 

They reside at Lancaster. 

Our friends who live at Rome are at Philadelphia. 

I was to the Banking house last week. 

I was to church last evening. 

He purchased these books to this bookstore. 

INVITE, &C. 

Invite, when the local section shows where the invitation is given, re- 
quires in; as, He invited me in the street, to call at his house. 

Invite, when the local section shows to what place one is invited ; re- 
quires into, or to ; as, He invited me into his house, They invited 
her to our house. 

In, may be used as a sub ; as, He invited me in. 

Put, when the local section shows where the act is done, requires in ; 
as, He put his hand upon me, in this room. 

Put, when the local section shows into what something is put, requires 
into ; as, He put the dollar into his pocket. 

Split, when the local section shows where something is split, requires 
in ; as, He split the log in the cellar. 

Split, when the local section shows the division itself of a thing, re- 
quires into ; as, He split the log into two. 

Took, requires in, as a sub ; as, They took the stranger in. 

Took, requires into as a mono ; as, He took the book into his hands. 

Walk, when the local section intimates the leaving of one place for ano- 
ther, requires into ; as, he walked into the house. 

Walk, when the local section shows where the action is done without 
intimating the leaving of one place for another, requires in ; as, 
He walks in his own room. 

Walk, requires in as a sub ; as, Will you walk in, Sir ? 

Key, when the Cormos denotes a part of a thing, requires of; as, This 
is the key of that lock. 

Key, when the thing mentioned is presented as a kind of guide, or 
clue, requires to ; as, This event furnishes a key to all the secrets 
in the case. 

EXERCISES. 

This is the key to that lock. 



414 

This fact is a key of the true cause of this event. 

There are the keys to that musical instrument. 

He put his knife in his pocket. 

He took the book in his own hand. 

They invited him in the house. 

Will you walk in this room ? 

He broke the glass in fifty pieces. 

He cut the stick in two. 

They split the log in two. 

Let them be made in pairs. 



Arrive 

Accuse - 

Abhorrence - 

Acquit 

Adapted 

Agreeable 

Averse 

Bestow - 

Boast 

Brag - 

Broke 

Call 

Confide 

Conversant 

Conformable 

Consonant 

Correspondent 4 

Correspond, §c. £ 

To Correspond, to keep up an intercourse 
or letter, requires with, not to, 

Correspondence, (intercourse 
by letter) 



A TABLE. 




requires 


at, not to. 


- requires 


of, not for, nor with. 


requires 


of, not at. 


requires 


of, not from. 


requires 


to, not for. 


- requires 


to, not with. 


requires 


to, not from. 


- requires 


upon, not on. 


requires 


of, not about. 


requires 


of, not about. 


requires 


into, not in. 


- requires 


on, not upon. 


requires 


in, not to. 


requires 


in, not with. 


requires 


to, not with. 


- requires 


to, not with. 


- requires 


to, not with. 



vith another by writing-, 



requires 



Compliance 

Cut 

Dependent 

Derogation 

Differ (to dispute) 

Differ in opinion 

Dissent 

Diminution 

Disappointed 



with, not to. 

requires with, not to. 
requires into, not in. 
requires upon, not on. 

requires from, not of. 

requires with, not from. 

requires from, not with. 

requires from, not with. 
requires of, not from. 
may have in, or with. 



When we are disappointed in obtaining a thing we use of — but when 
in the quality, or character of a person, or thing, we use in. 



415 

Discouragement, according to the sense, may have of, by, in, or with. 
Glad, may have of, or at, but not on. 

Difference, may have among, between, or betwixt, but rarely of. 
Failed, requires in, or of, according to the sense; as, He failed in his 
business, because he failed of collecting his demands, 

EXERCISES. 

I arrived to Boston on Monday. 

" They have been accused of having aided in this act of 
theft." 

They confide to each other. 

John called upon me for money. 

He brags about his activity. 

James is conversant with Greek. 

He acted conformably with his instruction. 

It corresponds with the sample. 

His compliance to his brother's proposition injured me. 

He will resent any derogation of his good name. 

I dissent with that gentleman's opinion. 

Any diminution from the original sum will displease 
them. 

I was disappointed in money. 

That book is not adapted for beginners. 

He failed in collecting his money, and consequently, 
failed of his business. 

They differ with each other in opinion. 

OBSERVATIONS. 

Co-rami. 

Whether, and either require or; as, he is either good, or bad, it is 
not known whether he is good, or bad. 

Neither requires nor ; as, he would neither do it, nor permit me to 
do it. 

Although, and though require yet, or nevertheless; as, Though the 
house is small ; yet it is very convenient, Although he was rich, yet for 
our sakes he became poor, Though he desires it, nevertheless I cannot 
yield. 

As, in a comparison, requires so; as, As your day is, so it shall be 
unto you. 

As, where it refers to a Duramus in a comparison of equality, re- 
quires as ; as, I think Milton as great a poet as Virgil. 



416 

So, where it refers to a Duramus requires that, or as; as, I was so 
tired that I fell asleep. 

As, and so in these cases are Subs. 

How many of the following sentences are correct. 

Is it possible that he is as tall as I? 
There are no men so excellent as some foibles cannot be 
ascribed to them. 

He thought Bolivar as great a general as Washington. 

RULE XXV. 

The following Cormos ramifies the preceding one by 
affixing the ', and s, or the (') only ; as, John's hat, The 
hoy's book, Ladies' hats. 

Note I. Singular Cormi that have but one 8, and Cor mi, whether 
singular, or plural, having no s in their termination, become Durami 
by affixing an apostrophe and s ; as, 's. 

1. James's glove, 's 

2. John's hat, 's 

3. A lady's ring, 's 

4. A child's tooth, ----'§ 

5. Children's teeth, - - *« 

6. Teeth's position, '5 

7. Charles's hand, 's 

Note II. Singular Cormi terminating in ss, and plural ones termi- 
nating in s, become Durami by affixing an apostrophe (') only ; as, 

1. For holiness' sake, - 

2. For goodness' sake, - - - - 

3. Bliss' book, ' 

4. Ladies' hat, - 

5. Eagles' wings, 

Remark I. When the letter s, used as the sign of possession, will 
coalesce with the Cormos itself, the s is pronounced in the same sylla- 
ble; as, John's hat. 

But when the s does not harmonize, another syllable is added in the 
pronunciation; as, Thomas', Bliss'. 

Pronounced, Thomasis — Blissis. 



417 

Remark II. Where several apostrophic Durami fall in succession, 
it is deemed sufficient by some grammarians, to express the possessive 
sign after the last word only; as, John, Jane, Stephen, and Chester's 
book. 

The possessive sign is understood at John, Jane, and Stephen — but it 
certainly should be expressed after each word ; as, John's, Jane's, Ste - 
phen's and Chester's book. 

This is "Jane books," is not English. 
EXERCISES. 

Pompeys pillar. A mothers tenderness. 

Virtues reward. A fathers care. 

A good mans heart. Natures gifts. 

Helens beauty. Troys destruction. 

RULE XXVI. 

The Subrami which refer to Seramr, and to other Sub- 
rami, should have the ly termination, if the word will take 
it ;* as, They conducted modestly, They write accurately, 
He conducted extremely modest. 

* There are a few exceptions to this rule; for instance, A new 
fashioned hat, He is a high minded man. 

He writes correct. 

Improper — the error lies in the want of the ly inflection of correct 
The impropriety is a violation of Rule XXVI., which says, &c. 
As, He writes correctly. 

EXERCISES. 

She sings sweet. 

Grammarians should speak accurate. 
Sophia dances beautiful. 
The ship moves smooth along. 
The water runs rapid. 
This is written very correct. 
He conducts himself very upright. 
It is remarkable fine weather. 
They conducted agreeable to the rules of decency. 
Go soft, John. 

Considering his station, he conducted himself very un- 
suitable. 



418 

Note I. The ly inflection should not be given to the superior sub 
when the inferior can take it; as, she behaved exceedingly indiscreet. 

But if the inferior cannot take the ly inflection, and the superior 
can, this inflection must be given to the superior; as, she behaves very 
discreetly. 

Note II. — In some few instances the quality is expressed as belong- 
ing to the event, but by inference carried to the thing ; as, The grass 
appears green. 

In such the sub should drop the ly. Green shows how the grass 
appears, not how it is. 

Note III. — There are some subs that represent the certain condi - 
tion, or state which the person, or thing receives from the action 
denoted by the Seramus, which should drop the ly ; as, He sinks deep, 
The purest clay burns white, The pupil should write slowly and exact. 

EXERCISES UNDER NOTES I, II, AND III. 

They behaved exceedingly rudely. 
They write remarkably accurately. 
They behaved astonishing rudely. 
He behaves uncommon badly. 
Drink deeply, or taste not the Pierian spring. 
Heaven opened widely her ever during gates. 
The victory cost them dearly. 
Thickly, and more thickly the steelly circle grows. 
The cakes taste shortly, and crispy. 
John marched straitly up a steep ascent of steps which 
were cut closely, and deeply into the rock. 
It makes the plough go deeply. 
The sun shines brightly. 
The water runs clearly. 
The grass grows straightly. 
He came firstly. 

RULE XXVII. 

Two negative words should not be used in the same 
section, or clause ; as, I have not done nothing. He did not 
see no man come in. He will never do nothing. {Any man, 
any thing.) 

EXERCISES. 

Will you not give me no apples, Stephen ? 
I neither got nothing of John, nor of James. 
He will neither eat nothing, nor drink nothing. 
I can not help him no more. 
He will not give him nothing for his trouble. 

RULE XXVIII. 

Where a mere preventive against the cormos's widest 
application, is all that is desired, a should be used ; as a 
man called on me, and gave me a book. 



419 

.A becomes an before a vowel, or silent h ; as, an age, an hour. 

A is not changed into an before u long. This exception arises from 
the u's having the power of initial ?/, and u ; as in yew, a unit, a use. 
An is used before words beginning with h sounded, when the accent is 
on the second syllable ; as, an historical account. 

RULE XXIX. 

Where identity, either by an expressed, or an implied 
description, is obvious, and totality desirable, the should 
be used ; as, give me the books which you hold in your 
right hand. 

Note I. Where emphasis is desired, that, or this may be used instead 
of the. 

Note II. Where unity is the leading idea, one should be used instead 
of a ; as, there was but one man lost, though many were in great 
danger. 

Note III. The may be repeated to give force, and fulness of expres- 
sion ; as, the good, the w T icked, the young, and the old, &c. 

Note IV. When the same individual is spoken of in reference to 
two, or more of his qualities, or occupations, a should not be repeated; 
as, He is a better writer than reader, This is a better barn than house. 

Note V. When two, or more individuals are spoken of in compari- 
son, a must be repeated ; as, He is a better writer than a reader , 
'I 'his is a better barn than a house , 

Note VI. When two distinct individuals, or two collections are 
meant, the, or a should be repeated. 

1. He purchased the black and the white ox. 

2. I have the red, and the white cloth. 

3. He saw the lad, or the pupil last evening. 

4. The sentensic, and the insentensic cormos. 

Note VII. When but one individual, or but one assemblage is meant, 
the should not be repeated. 

1. The black, and white ox. 

2. The red, and white cloth, or clothes. 

3. He saw the lad, or pupil last evening. 

RULE XXX. 

All Durami which express number must agree with their 
Cormi in number ; as, He lives at the corner of Third, and 
Arch street. This man, Each man, Two men, Either 
man of the two, That man, Those men. 

LI 



420 

Specimen of correcting. 

" It is believed that the tenth, and eleventh editions have 
been greatly improved." — Kirkham's Grammar. 

Improper — the error lies in the plural number of " edition." The 
impropriety is a violation of Rule XXX., which says, &c. 

As, " It is believed that the tenth, and eleventh edition has been 
greatly improved." 

EXERCISES. 

His second, and third daughters live in Philadelphia. 
The third, and fourth classes may go out. 

Note. When the plural form of the subjoined cormos, makes too 
many of the same kind, the subjoined cormos should remain singular, 
and the monoramus should be understood before it; as, He went to 
Arch , and , Market street. 

If it should be — Arch, and Market streets, the expression would be 
inconsistent with truth — for there are not two Arch streets, nor two 
Market streets in the mind of him who speaks. 

REMARKS. 

this, and that, these, and THOSE. 

This should be used in contrast with that, or those ; that, in contrast 
with this, or these; these, in contrast w T ith that, or those : and those, in 
contrast with this, or these ; as, 

Give me this plate, and nor that — give me that plate, 
and not this — give me those plates, and not this — give me 
this, and not those. 

THIS, THAT, THESE, THOSE. 

This, as well as these, refers to what is nearer by, as to time, or 
space : that, as well as those, relates to what is further off either in time, 
or space ; as, 

In the city, we are entertained by the works of man ; 
in the country by the works of God ; this is the presence 
of nature, that of art; these astonish us, those we com* 
prehend. 

such, each, either, and neither. 

Note I. Such should he used in reference to things previously men- 
tioned, only ; as, I have sweet fruit — such you like. 

Note II. Either, and neither, as Durami, refer to one of two; as, I 
will take either , of the two, Neither , of the two, 

suits mc. 

Note III. Each, has respect to two, or more, individually taken ; as, 
Each , of the two; each , of the six. 



421 

Note IV. When the plural form of the subjoined Cormos makes 
too many of the same kind, the subjoined Cormos should remain singu- 
lar, and the first set of rami be limited by the repetition of the, to the 
antecedent Cormos, understood ; as, He teaches the Latin, and the 
Greek language, He found this doctrine in the new, and the old testa- 
ment. 

EXERCISES. 

Who is a professor of the Latin, Greek, and Hebrew 
languages ? 

He has studied the English, and the French languages. 

REMARKS. 

When one thing", or collection is mentioned, the Duramus should 
have the sub indication; as. Red bird, or red birds. 

When two things, or collections are compared, the Duramus should 
have the supersub indication; as, these birds are redder than those; 
this bird is redder than' that. 

When as many as three things, or collections are compared, the Du- 
ramus should have the super indication; as, this is the reddest of the 
four. 

EXERCISES. 

That bird is the reddest of the two. 
Stephen has two sisters, the eldest of whom is the best 
reader. 

Which of these two kites is i\\Q highest ] 

He chose the last of the two. 

This is the better pen of the three. 

John is the better reader of the six. 

Of all other schools this has ths better regulations. 

OBSERVATION I. 

When the radical nontimedex becomes a Cormos, all the subs which 
refer to it must have the same form as though they referred to it in 
its Seramus character ; as, He w T as praised for the drawing of the 
picture accurately. 

OBSERVATION II. 

When a, or the precedes the radical nontimedex, of should gener- 
ally be expressed immediately after it ; as, His station in life is well 
adapted to the acquiring of knowledge, The not making of a will is a 
culpable omission. 

OBSERVATION III. 

When my, his, her, or any other Duramus of a similar import pre- 
cedes the radical nontimedex, of may either be expressed, or under- 



422 

stood ; as, John's buying goods, caused him much trouble, or John's 
buying of the goods caused him much trouble. 

RULE XXXI. 

Every clados must be placed as near its own superior 
section as possible, and on that side of it, which perspi- 
cuity requires ; as, 

Yet would the objector but consider that actions are 
qualities, he would be able to see that a verb is an adjec- 
tive "even by his own definition" of an adjective. 

The section in italics, is properly placed. In the following, however, 
it is so placed as to make the objector say what he does not intend, and 
to leave unexpressed, what he wishes to communicate — 

Yet, would the objector but consider that actions are 
qualities, he would be able to see by his own definition, that 
a verb is an adjective. 

In the first, the idea is that "his own definition" is the means by 
which a verb is made an adjective — 

In the second, the idea is that his own definition is the means by 
which you can see that a verb is an adjective. 

RULE XXXII. 

Every Ramus must be placed as near its own superior 
as possible, and on that side of it, which perspicuity re- 
quires ; as, I will call again, and pay you. 

By a different position of again, the idea now expressed, would be 
lost, and a different one suggested ; as, I will call, and pay you again. 

REMARK. 

Perspicuity should never be rejected for ease, and harmony of expres- 
sion. Sentences may be rendered fuller for the sake of force, and 
beauty of construction, provided the fulness does not obscure the sense 
which the writer means to convey. 

EXAMPLE 

Where the writer means that the beholder can discover nothing but birds. 

John can only see the birds. 
Corrected : — John can see the birds only — or 
John can see, only the birds. 

EXERCISES. 

Samuel will write the letters indeed. 
Sister will arrive peradventure. 
Twice they returned. 
He is here not often. 
William nobly acted. 



423 

" They can not well read unless distinctly they see the 
print." 

" They presented their gifts which being not received 
they became unhappy.'' 

He, and I shall part never. 

SECTION II. 

Syntithody is the second part of Syntithology, and 
teaches how to form verse sentences ; as, 

" Behold the Rose of Sharon here, 
The Lily which the valleys bear; 
Behold the Tree of Life, that gives 
Refreshing fruit, and healing leaves." 



PART IV. 

Consignificatioi^ is that part of Syntax, which respects 
the significant character which words acquire from their 
conjunctive state. (See page 35.) 

Specimen of Graduating under Consignification. 

"The earth smiles with plenty for man." 

" The earth smiles" 

An unbroken truncus, imputive class, ei-con-o-dy order, affirma- 
tive genus, phemic specie?* 

"with 'plenty." 

An inseclados, literal class, plenary order, conjunctive genus, appen- 
dant species, monorelation, sustained by its superior section. Conjec- 
tive reading — " The earth smiles with plenty." 

"for man" 

An inseclados, literal class, plenary order, causative genus, objective 
species, monorelation, sustained by its superior section. Conjective 
reading — " with plenty for man" 

REMARKS. 

The different imports given to sections are an interesting theme to 
one who desires to become thoroughly acquainted with the constructive 
principles of the English language. But to him who has no desire to 
become deeply skilled in this science, these imports are mere colours 
to the blind man. To comprehend the precise signification of sections, 
and the exact manner in which they acquire these significations, de- 
mands a practice induced by a philological affection which nothing but 
close attention to Consignification ca» beget, strengthen, and purify. 
The richness, and variety of this part of Syntax, however, cannot be 
presented in this work. 

L 1 2 



424 

PUNCTUATION. 

Punctuation is the art of dividing a book into its several 
parts, and of expressing, or denying a relation between 
those two parts which stand together on the paper. 

As a house is divided into several rooms, or| compartments, so is a 
book divided into several relative parts. 

The following Characters divide a Book into Parts, and 
express the kind, and degree of Relation, that the parts 
bear to one another : 



Hyphtn 
Comma 
Semicolon 


> 


Index 
Brace 




Colon 
Period 




Ellipsis 
Acute accent 


/ 


Interrogation 
Exclamation 


? 


Grave accent 
Breve 


\ 

o 


Dash 


— 


Diceresis 




Parenthesis 


( ) 


Asterisk 


# 


Caret 


A 


Obelisk 


+ 


Paragraph 
Section 




Double dagger 
Parallel 


t 

II 


Quotation 
Brackets 


44 » 

[ ] 


Asterisks 


* 



1. HYPHEN 

The Hyphen ( - ) intimates that the rest of the word be- 
gins the next line, connects compound words, and oc- 
casionally divides words into monograms ; as, Gram-mar, 
Tea-pot, Con-tem-pla-tion. 

% COMMA. 

Observation I. 

When the words of a section which stand together, are 
not connected in construction, and sense, the want of this 
relation may in all instances, be expressed by a comma ; 
as, " The, good, old man." 

1. The comma is employed to mark the omission of a word, or sec- 
tion. 

2. It is used to deny the relation of one word, or one section to 
another. 

3. It is used to mark some irregularity in the position of a word, or 
a sentence. 

4. It is often used merely to mark a pause. 



425 

As the is added to man, it has no relation with good — hence a com- 
ma may be placed after the. 

As good is added to man, it has no relation with old; hence a com- 
ma may be placed after good. But as old is added to man, a comma 
should not be placed after it. 

Observation II. 

When the nature of the case permits the words of the 
same section to connect themselves contrary to the author's 
intention, the obtrusive relation must be denied by a com- 
ma; as, 

1. I saw the very, old man. 

2. John, James went to church. 

3. A certain man planted a vineyard, and set a hedge, 
and digged a place, and built a tower, and let it out, and 
went. 

As saw is added to 1, a comma must not be put before it, and as 
from the nature of the case, saw, and the can have no relation, there 
is no necessity for a comma between them. Yet a comma may be put 
between these words, for one holds no relation with the other j as 

I saw, the very, good, old man. 

But it may be said that the comma after saw, may cut off saw's 
relation from man. Of this, there can be no danger, for a comma 
exerts no influence beyond the two words, or two sections between 
which it is placed. 

As there is no relation between the, and very, a comma may be put 
after the — but, as the nature of the case is a sure preventive against 
any obtrasive relation between these durami, there is no necessity 
for a comma. As the nature of the «ase favours an obtrusive relation 
between very, and good, a comma must be used as a preventive against 
it. For we have taken it as conceded that the writer's intention is, not 
to increase the goodness by adding very to good, but to point out iden- 
tity by adding very to man; as, 

" I saw the very man whom you saw." 
2. "John James went to church." 

The nature of this case is favourable to an obtrusive relation — for 
nothing is more natural than for the word, John, to cleave to the word, 
James; as, 

John James went to church. 

What James went ? John James. 

The comma, therefore, must be used after John ; or an unintended 
relation obtrudes, and destroys the address which the writer wishes to 
make. 

5. " A certain man planted a vineyard, and set a hedge, 
and digged a place, and built a tower, and let it out, and 
went." 



426 

1. Where the Commas may be put. 

1. A, certain man planted, a vineyard, and set, a hedge, 
and digged, a place, and built, a tower, and let it, out, and 
went. 

2. Where the Commas should be put. 

1. A certain man planted a vineyard, and set a hedge, 
and digged a place, and built a tower, and let it out, and 
went, 

2. Man lives, and grows, and dies, and lives again. 

3. Man lives, and grows old, and dies, and lives again. 

As old refers to grows ; no comma can be admitted between old 
and grows ; but as and, and old have no connection one with the 
other, a comma may be put between them. 

Observation III. 

When the sections of a sentence, which stand together, 
are not connected in sense, and construction, the want of 
this relation may be expressed by a comma ; as, He walk- 
ed with me, with his cane, to the ship, from his house. 

Here the subject is so clear that no comma is necessary — yet as no 
clados refers to another clados, three commas are admissible. But be- 
tween the truncus, and the first clados, a comma can not be used — 
for with me is as closely connected with He walked, as the ear is with 
the head. 

Observation IV. 

When the nature of the case permits the sections of a 
sentence to connect themselves contrary to the writer's 
intention, this obtrusive relation must be denied by a 
comma ; as, 

1. He gave her a piece of an apple, which I have. 

2. Send me twenty men that I have designated, from 
the company. 

3. He began, by parables to speak unto them. 

Now, it is as possible, and as probable that I should have a whole 
apple as it is that I should have a mere part of one. As the nature of 
the case, then, is not a rule of decision, we must resort to other means 
for deciding- whether I h^ve apiece of an apple, or a whole one. And, 
as where neither the nature of the subject, nor the punctuation decides, 
the approximate, or local relation must, it is obvious that unless the 
comma is inserted between the sections, ( of an apple,) and {which I 
have,) I assert, whether I intend to, or not, that I have tho whole apple. — 

1. He gave her a piece of an apple which I have. 

Now, "which I have" is an inferior section, and as where neither 
the sense, nor punctuation prevents, we have a right to presume that 



4 27 

the writer has followed this general, and natural principle, "place every 
inferior member as near its own superior as the nature of the construc- 
tion, and subject will permit" we are justified in saying that the con- 
nective Reading a? "which I have" gives "which I have" a direct 
relation with " of an apple" 

Of an apple which I have. 
But when the nature of the case, or punctuation acts as a preven- 
tive against referring the inferior section to the nearest one as its su- 
perior, the same sections, printed in the same order, may make a very 
different sentence in point of fact; as, 

He gave her a piece of an apple, which I have.^ 
Connective Reading— tie gave me a piece which I ate. 

Observation V. 

When the nature of the case favours a wrong relation, 
contiguous words, or contiguous sections must be separat- 
ed by a comma; as, Send me twenty men that I have 
designated, from the company, Send me twenty men from 
the company, that I have designated, I saw the very, old 
man whom you called. 

The comma in the first example, is used to present an instanta- 
neous connection which the mind might form without it, between the 
sections, " I have designated" and "from the company." This obtrusive 
relation being denied by the comma after designated, the mind refers 
the clados "from the company,' 9 immediately to the truncus. 

[ Send twenty men ] ( from the company.) 

In the second sentence, the comma is put after company, 
to prevent the mind from connecting ( that I have desig- 
nated) with {from the company.) 

EXERCISES ON THE COMMA. 

1. The titles of books which comprise two, or more 
words are cormi. 

2. He gave me a piece of an apple which I ate. 

3. I took this note from the page of his book which 
publishes it to the world. 

4. I took this note from the very page of that book 
which presents it. 

5. I saw the titles of books which he read over. 

6. He gave me the titles of the books which he read to 
my brother, 

QUESTIONS. 

Does the first sentence demand a comma to render the writer's in- 
tention clear? 

Does the second sentence require a comma? 
Does the third ? 



428 

Does the fourth ? 
Does the fifth ? 
Does the sixth ? 
Did he read the books, or the titles ? 

The foundation is vast, and solid — and, though it has 
been hastily laid, it is durable. 

Why is the comma put after and ! 

To show that and has no connection with the intervening sections ; 
And begins a section, which, " though it has been hastily laid 11 inter- 
rupts. 

The" sentence without this interruption would require no comma' 
as, 

The foundation is vast, and solid— and it is durable 
though it has been hastily laid. 

" We have, within ourselves, all the elements of national 
greatness." 

Why are two commas used ? 

For no good reason — -one is sufficient — and neither is absolutely 
necessary. 

1. We have within ourselves, all the elements of national 
greatness. 

2. We have within ourselves all the elements of national 
greatness. 

3. We have all the elements of national greatness with- 
in ourselves. 

Observation I. 

When the inferior section is placed before its superior' 
the comma mmj be used; as, When the child returns, the 
parents will rejoice, He began, by parables to speak unto 
them. 

Observation II. 
Generally, when a word, or section is omitted, the omis- 
sion should be marked by a comma; as, he teaches the 
Latin, and Greek language. 

Observation III. 

Couplets should be separated ; as, Truth is fair, and 
artless^ simple, and sincere, uniform, arid consistent. 

Observation IV. 

Commas may be used to denote a pause ; as Every leaf, 
and every twig, teems with life. 



429 

Preliminary Remarks. 

Before, attempting to say any thing definite upon the 
semicolon, colon, and period, it may be proper to make a 
few remarks upon those relations ivhich these characters 
express. It is not expected, however, that these remarks, 
brief and crude as they are, will do any thing more than 
throw the mind of the pupil into a thoughtful posture upon 
this subject, 

A book is a series of writing, or painting, founded on a mass of 
kindred things. The entire mass is divided into lesser masses, and 
these again into lesser still; and so on until we come down to indivi- 
duals, the constituent parts of the least mass in the grand one. 

The first divisions of the entire mass, are represented by chapters ; 
the second, by paragraphs ; the third, by sentences ; and the fourth, by 
the sections, or clauses of a sentence. 

That part of the entire mass, which forms the subject of this note, 
is the mass of which a sentence is predicated. 

To know what, or how much is comprised in this mass, a little at- 
tention must be given to the relations which connect the individuals 
in it. 

There are three kinds of relation, which bring things into this part 
of the grand mass ; and these relations are the boundaries, or limits 
of a sentence. The relations are the constituent, the incidental, and 
suggestive. 

The constituent. Whatever has a being, either in fancy, or reality, 
exists under the character of grand, major, and minor whole. The 
whole, with all its minute properties, is the grand one ; as, A man. 
The principle, or primary whole in the grand one, is the major ; as, 
The body, or trunk. The secondary wholes are the minors; as, The 
arm, hand, finger. 

The major whole is the basis on which the minor are erected ; 
and the bearing which the major, and minors have on each other, in 
constituting the grand whole, is the constituent relation. This relation 
is close, and deep, and justifies the including of the wholes between 
which it is found, in the same sentences. 

An example. The fingers of the hand of the arm of the 
body of that man, are strong. 

It is next to be shown in what two, or more grand wholes become 
so related that each can be treated of in the same sentence. The 
major, and minor wholes derive their relation from their entering into, 
and constituting the grand whole. And the grand one derives the re- 
lation which it has with the major, and minors, from being constitut- 
ed by them. But the grand wholes are distinct in their creation 
They do not form a part of each other : a man is a grand whole : and 






. 



430 

it is easy to see that the parts, or different wholes of which he is 
made up, have such a relation as requires all the parts, spoken of, to be 
brought within the same sentence. 

But how two grand wholes, (for instance two men) can be included 
in the same sentence is yet to be discused. To treat of two, or more 
grand wholes, in the same sentence, which have no relation, is in no 
way warrantable. The force of this position will be felt from the fol- 
lowing attempt : — 

Ships move John is a pupil I am here JYeiv York market 
is much improved. 

The grand wholes are brought to bear upon each other, through 
the incidents, or circumstances which constantly attend them : such 
as interest, arising in various ways ; location, instrumentality, cause, 
effect, association, &c. 

1 hese bearings are styled incidental ; and the relation which they 
produce, though not so close as the constituent, justifies the including 
of the grand wholes between which it is found, in the same sentence. 

The following sentence comprises four grand wholes, and presents 
three incidents which produce a relation between them. The words, re- 
presenting the wholes, begin with capitals ; those, marking the incidents, 
are in italic. 

The Eagle flew from the Pine, over the Beach, to the 
Oak. 

The suggestive relation is not so close as either of the others. But 
even this is not very often so slight that things between which it is 
found, can be treated of in distinct sentences. 

This relation arises from a variety of causes, and much in the 
way, signified by its name. First, it arises from a known capacity 
in one to supply, or give what the condition of another demands ; 
as, 

lam needy: Howard is benevolent : The lads are cold: 
yonder is a fire. 

Secondly, the suggestive relation is derived from a resemblance, 
either in situation, quality, or disposition ; as, 

As wood is to fire ; so is a contentious man to the pro- 
duction of strife. He is rich ; so am I. 

The third cause of the suggestive relation is a contrary extreme, or 
striking difference ; as, 

They are rich ; but we are poor. He is good ; and al- 
though we have his example, yet we are bad. 

1. A comma should precede and, but, therefore, and for, 
when the secormos is understood ; as, " A certain man 
planted a vineyard, and set a hedge about it." 

2. A semicolon should precede and, but, therefore, and 



431 

for, when the secormos is expressed ; as, " A certain man 
planted a vineyard ; and he set a hedge about it." 

3. No point should precede than ; as, John is taller than 
his brother. 

4. No point should precede as-well-as ; as, John is able 
as well as willing. 

5. No point should precede as in a comparison ; as, John 
is as tall as his brother. 

Note. — These notes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, are not full. 

The next branch of this note treats of the descent of sentences — 

Sentences are productive. This generative, or productive power 
arises from the relations which the things treated of in one sentence 
have with other things. There is a relation ; but it is not so close as 
to justify the including of all in the same sentence. Hence, the first 
sentence gives rise to the second, the second to the third, and third to 
the fourth. The addition of sentences is continued in this manner as 
long as the things which the writer has in view, are direct. But when- 
ever the relation between them becomes indirect ; or in other words, 
whenever the writer turns aside to include something not immediately 
related to what has gone before, the line of decent between sentences 
ceases, and that between paragraphs commences. That is, as soon as 
the relation becomes indirect, one sentence no longer produces another 
sentence; but one paragraph produces another paragraph. 

There are six kinds of relation which should be observed in dividing 
a book, or a discourse into its several parts. Three of the six have al- 
ready been explained ; namely, the constituent, incidental, and sugges- 
tive. 

The others remain for present discussion. They are styled direct, 
partiatly direct, and indirect. 

The direct relation is an immediate bearing, or connection, though 
it may be slight, of all the things in view. 

An example. Samuel Booth is a ship-owner, and re- 
sides near the finest harbour in the world. Of this person, 
my farther purchased that schooner. 

The partially direct is a direct relation between only some of the 
things in view. 

An example. Nathaniel Booth is a ship-owner, and re- 
sides near the finest harbo'.r in the world. 

My father is Samuel Pollard ; and he purchased that 
schooner of Mr. Booth. 

The fact that " Samuel Pollard is my father," has no direct bearing 
on the fact that " Nathaniel Booth is a ship-owner, ond resides near 
the finest harbour in the world." 

But the fact that Samuel Pollard is my father, has a direct bearing 
on the fact that he purchased this schooner of Mr. Booth. 

L L 



432 

This relation is denoted by an indented position of the sentence, 
The partially direct relation is good ground for a new paragraph. 
The first of the following exhibitions of the preceding instances, in- 
cludes both examples in the same paragarph. But the second exhibi- 
tion makes two paragraphs — 

Nathaniel Booth is a ship-owner, and resides near the 
finest harbour in the world. And my father purchased 
that schooner of him. 

Nathaniel Booth is a ship-owner, and resides near the 
finest harbour in the world. 

Samuel Pollard is my father ; and he purchased that 
schooner of Mr. Booth. 

The indirect relation is that which takes place when the things 
treated of, have a remote bearing on those which precede them. 

For instance : Things disconnected in themselves, may receive a 
slight bearing on each other, from relating to the same person. Thus 
a man's deeds in public, and his transactions in private, may have a 
remote relation on the ground that both the public, and private scenes 
relate, not to each other, but to the same person. 

The indirect relation is authority for the commencement of a new 
chapter. Thus end the gradations of the relation, existing between the 
kindred masses which constitute the grand mass, or entire book. - 

3. SEMICOLON, v. 

The semicolon ( ; ) sustains no negative character. It is the pro- 
vince of this point to denote that the relation, existing between the sec- 
tions where it is placed, is one degree in closeness, or depth, less than 
that denied by the comma ( , ). 

The highest, or first degree in relation, is that which precedes from 
a close incidental, or constituent bearing of the things which make the 
foundation of the sentence. 

The second is that which originates from a medium incidental bear- 
ing, or from a close suggestive one ; as, 

The good will be happy ; but the bad will be miserable. 

4. COLON. 

The third is the result of a slight incidental, or suggestive bearing. 
This degree is marked by a colon ; as, 

Nature felt her inability to extricate herself from the con- 
sequences of guilt : the gospel reveals the plan of divine in- 
terposition, and aid. 

5. PERIOD. 

The fourth degree in the closeness of the relation, comes from the 
most slight incidental bearing, existing among the minor masses of the 
entire mass on which the sentence is founded. 



433 

This relation is marked by the period ( . ), or interrogation point 
(?); as, 

Nathaniel Booth is a ship-owner, and resides near the 
finest harbour in the world. And, of his friend, my father 
purchased this schooner. 

The fifth degree comes from a bearing which is but partially direct 
This is dignified by the paragraph (IT), or by an indented position of* 
the next sentence, as, 

IT Nathaniel Booth is a ship-owner, and resides near the 
finest harbour in the world. 

Samuel Pollard is my father, and he purchased this 
schooner of Mr. Booth. 

Observation F. 

The relation between the sections of a sentence, should 

be expressed by the colon, or semicolon- 
Crafty men contemn studies : simple men admire them : 

wise men use them. 

Observation II. 

When the relation is quite slight, the sentence is closed, 
and the Period ( . ) is placed at the end. 

Interrogation (7 ) is used when a question is asked. 

Admiration, or Exclamation (!) is used to express some emotion of 
the mind. 

Dash ( — ) is used to denote abruptness — a significant pause — sus- 
pension of the sense — or that the first clause is common to all the rest. 

Parenthesis ( ) is used to enclose some necessary remark in the 
body of another sentence: — Commas are sometimes used instead of 
Parenthesis. 

Apostrophe ( ' ) is used in place of a letter left out ; as, lov'd for 
loved. 

Caret (a) is used to show that some word is either omitted, or in- 
terlined. 

Paragraph ( IF ) is used at the commencement of a new paragraph. 

Section ( § ) is used to divide a discourse, or chapter into portions. 

Quotation ( " " ) is used to show that a passage is quoted in the 
author's own words. 

Crotchets, or Brackets ( [ ] ) is to enclose a word, or sentence which is 
to be explained in a note, or the explanation itself, or to correct a 
mistake, or supply some deficiency. 



434 

Index (O 3 ) is used to point out any remarkable thing. 

C is used to connect words which have one common term, 
Brace < or three lines in poetry, having- the same rhyme, called a 
( triplet. 

Ellipsis ( ) is used when some letters are omitted; as, K g, 

for king. » 

Accute accent (') is used to denote a short monogram — the grave ( v ) 
long. 

Breve (°) makes a hypergram, or monogram short ; but the dash (-), 
a long. 

Diceresis ( •• ) is used to divide a dispergram into two monograms ; 
as, aerial. 

Asterisk ( * ), Obelisk ( t ), Double dagger ( X ), Parallel ( || ), small 
letters^ and figures refer to some note on the margin, or at the bottom 
of the page. 

(#** ) Two, or three asterisks denote the omission of some letters 
in some bold, or indelicate expression. 

OF CAPITALS. 

1. The first word of every book, or any other piece of writing, must 
begin with a capital letter. 

2. The first word after a period, and the answer to a question, must 
begin with a capital letter. 

3. Individual cormi, that is, names of persons, places, ships, &c. 

4. The cormos I, and O, should be written in capitals. 

5. The first word of every line in poetry. 

6. The appellation of the D^ity ; as, God, Most High, &c. 

7. Durami derived from the individual cormi, as, Grecian, Roman, 
English, &c. 

8. The first word of a quotation, introduced after a colon ; as, Al- 
ways remember this ancient maxim : " Know thyself." 

9. Family cormi, when personified; as, Come, gentle Spring. 



435 



EXTERNAL CONTRAST. 

For the internal Contrast, read the appeal. 
American. British. 



Cormos 



Ramus 



Individual 

Family 

UrmRmitive 



y Cormos. 

i 



Formative 

Auditive ^Indication. 

Sinefunctional J 

Singular 
Plural 



h 



UMERATION. 



Masculine 
Feminine 
Ambi 
Muo 

Secormos 



t 



Gender. 



{Noun. 
Pronoun. 
Interjection. 

fVerb. 

Article. 
I Adjective. 
J Adverb. 
I Conjunction 

I Preposition. 
Interjection. 
(^Participle. 



Proper 1 

Common }>Noun. 
Pro 



First 

Second 

Third 

Singular 
Plural 

Masculine 
Feminine 
Neuter 



} 



Person. 



Number. 



! 



Gender. 



Nominative 
Possessive ^Case. 
Objective J 



id 



Insecormos 

The Possessive ease is a Ramus ; as, John's hat. 

The nominative after a neuter, and after a passive verb, is an insecor- 
mos ; as, I am the teacher, Tom struts a soldier, The child was call- 
ed James, John was made President. 

The nominative independent, and the nominative by apposition, not 
nominative absolute, is an insecormos ; as, John, come here. He himself 
was sick. Though generally the nominative by apposition is formed 
into a distinct section; as, [I (who am Paul,)] &c. 

M m2 



436 



American. 
Seramus 



Edable 
Inedable 
Dicormic 
Secormic 

1. 

2. — 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 



British. 
< Verb. 
{ Participle. 



>Seramus. 



Phemic 

Presynphemic 

Prediphemic 

Presyndiphemic 

Postphemic 

Prepostphemic J 



1. 

2. 

3. 

Radical 
Pediradical 



Duramus 



Sub 

Supersub 

Super 

Subramus 

Sub 

Supersub 

Super 

Monoramus 
Coramus 

1. 

2. 



Regular 
Irregular 
Active trans. 
Active intrans 
Passive 
Neuter 

Indicative 
Potential 
Subjunctive 
Infinitive 

Present 
Perfect 
Imperfect 
'Pluperfect 
First future 
Second future 

First 

Second 

Third 



>Verb. 



;>Mood. 

J 



] 



J>Tense. 



j 

i 



Person. 



i 



Present 

Perfect I Participle. 

Com. perfect. J 

f Article 
J Adjective 
j Possessive case 
(^Possessive pronoun. 

Positive 1 

iNDiCATiON.Comparative v Degree. 
Superlative J 

Adverb. 

Positive 
Indication. Comparative 
Superlative 

Preposition. 
Conjunction. 

Copulative 
Disjunctive 



> Degree. 



Conjunction. 



CONTENTS. 



T paere. 

INTRODUCTION - - - - - - 13 

Glossary ------ 23 

Language - - - - - 31 

Syntax ------ 3i 

Poieology - - ... 31 

Syncratology - - - . . 31 

Syntithology - - - - - - 31 

Consigniflcation - - - - - 31 

Sentence - - - - - - 34 

Cordiction cut ----- 36 

Not a sentence - - - - - - 40 

Graduation of a sentence - - - - 43 

Section - - - - - - -44 

Sectionizing Rules ----- 45 

Classification of Sections - - - - 48 

Relation of Sections - - - - 52 

Division of the Cladi - - - - - 59 

State, and course of Sections - - - 62 

Parts of speech - - - - - 70 

Word conjection - - - - - 71 

Truncus theorem - - - - -11 

Division of Sections H 

Inseclados theorem - - - - - 79 

Exercises on the truncus - - - - 84 

Remarks on the sectional parts of the theorem - 85 

Exercises on the semisection theorem - - 87 

Rank, and relation of rami - - - - 92 

Sentensic, and Insentensic character of words - 99 

The Orb .--.._ 100 

Orbic Cormos, &c. - - - - 1 04 

Subdivision of the orbic rami - - - - 106 

Ramus A in the truncus - 108 

Cor ami - - - - - - - 110 

Ramus A in the inseclados - - - 120 

To 130 

Cormos parts - - - - - 135 

The Demonstrator - - - - - 136 

Specimen of Theorem parsing - - - 137 

Subdivision of the sentensic rami into uni, and ambi 139 



438 



CONTENTS. 



pase, 

The Exception 141 

The true frame work character of a monoramus - 142 

Coramus explained .... 143 

Specimen of theorem parsing - - - - 144 

Syncratic - - - - - - 146 

Hat, chair, &c. - - - - - - 148 

Class, order, genus, species, and variety - - 149 

Distribution of the inferior families - - - 152 
Tenon, knife, &c. - - - - -155 

Sentensic order - - - - 156 

Namitive, family, individual - - - 157 

Unnamitives - - - - - - 157 

Exhibitive, and unexhibitive species - - 159 

Sentensic, and Insentensic variety - - - 160 

Formative, auditive, &c. - - - 161 

Singular, Plural - 161 

Genders - - - - - 162 

Regular, irregular, and ampho - - - 163 

Uni and ambi species - - - - - 164 

Formative, and exformative position - - 164 

Tense - - - - - - 165 

Specimen of syncratic graduation upon the theorem 166 

Observations on articulation - - - 171 

The word, Grammar - - - - 172 

The word, Orthography - - - - 173 

The word, Syllable - - - 173 

Monogram - - - - - 173 

Language, resumed - - - - 179 

Syntax, resumed - - - - - 179 

Poieology ------ 180 

Subdivision of Poieology - 180 

Explanation of terms - - - - 184 

Division, and pronunciation of some new words - 188 

The word, phrenod, explained - - - 189 

Pho-nod :'-.- - - - - 190 

Alphod - 190 

Phrenody, &c. - - - - 190 

Phonepos, alphepos - - - - 190 

Panology. &c. - - - - - -191 

Signology - - - - - - 191 

Figures of Speech ----- 203 

Ei-con-ody, &c. 203 

Me-nyt-o-dy, &c. 204 

Po-sot-o-dy, &c. 204 

lron-o-dy, &c. - - - - - - 205 

Ze-ros-o-dy ----- 205 

Division of sectional signology ... 206 



CONTENTS. 



439 



Alphaology, letters ----- 
Hypergrams, &c. ----- 

Sounds of the letters - - - - - 

Revision of the sounds of the letters 

Specimen of letter parsing - 

Mongrammation, division of the letters of a word 

Specimen of monogrammic parsing - - - 

Division of words in reference to their internal con- 
structive character ------ 

Simple, and compound words 

Synoptical view of all the technical terms which are 
applied to the same word 

Alphaology, (spelling.) - 

Aiphaologic parsing .... 

Syncratology ------ 

Concordance of the cormos 

Cormos terminations - - - - - 

Sentensic cormos - - - 

Insentensic cormos - - - - - 

Secormos, and insecormos concordance - 

Division of the ramus class - - - - 

Seramus, inser amus 

Tensification - - 

Serami which have no tense variation 

An in seramus - 

Subdivision of the inserami 

Duramus ------ 

Monoramus, Subramus - - - 

Co-ramus - - - 

Proving rules ------ 

A full specimen of proving - 

Division of the narratives - 

Division of the unnamitives - - 

Indication, numeration, gender - 

Pluratories ------ 

Gender ------ 

Genepos, negenepos, femepos, malepos - 

Subdivision of the great class of the inserami 

Clinepos, &c. - 

Synclinepos ------ 

Sub, supersub, and super indication 

The timedex of a seramus - - - - 

Diagramic view of the timedexes - - - 

Phemic timedex - - - - - 

Presynphemic ------ 

Prediphemic 

Presyndiphemic - 



page. 

211 

213 
214 
216 

220 
221 

222 



223 

225 

226 
228 
231 
233 
234 
236 
237 
237 
237 
231 
241 
241 
244 
244 
245 
245 
246 
246 
246 
249 
252 
-253 
254 
253 
265 
266 
267 
267 
269 
269 
272 
276 
278 
278 
278 
279 



440 CONTENTS. 

page. 

Post-phemic * 279 

Pre-postphemic ----- 279 

Timedex concordances - 280 — 283 

Remarks on the distinction of regular & irregular verbs 285 
Division of the prediphemic timedex - - 286 

Ed able and inedable serami - 287 

Timedex, and nontimedex forms of serami - - 288 

Radical, and prediradical nontimedex - - 288 

Havable and beable form - - - - 289 

Pansecormic serami - - - - 

May, can, must, might, would, could, should, ought, 
will, and shall - - - - - 

Division of the inedable serami - 
Sine-nontimedex semperphemics 
Bi-prediphemics - - 

Principles ------ 

If I was, &c. - - - - - 

Bisection ------ 

Secormic, and Dicormic serami 

Cdrmic inseramus - - - - - 

Ne-cormic inseramus - 

Duramus ------ 

Duramus concordance - , - 

Monoramus 

Monoramus concordance - 

Above, about - 

Across, after, against - 

Amid, amidst, among, amongst - - - 

Around, as ----- - 

At, athwart, atwixt, at ween - - - 

Before ------- 

Behind, below, beneath - - - - 

Between, betwixt, beyond, but, by - 
Concerning, except, excepting, down 
During, for, from, in - 
Into, of, off, on - - - - 

Over ------- 

Past, round - 

Save ------- 

To 

Toward, towards - 

Through, throughout, under 

Underneath, unto - 

Up, upon ------ 

With, within, without - 

Ne-cormic inserami - 

Subramus ----- 



CONTENTS. 441 

page. 

Subramus concordance - 327 

Coramus - - - - - - 329 330 

Coepos ------- 329 

Coramus concordance - 330 

As, as well as - - - - - - 330 

Again - 331 

Being 333 

But - - - - - - - - 335 

Also, both, but, not only - 336 

Either, except ----- 338 

Flse, for, farther, further, furthermore - - 339 
Hence, thence, however, howsoever, howbeit, if, inas- 
much, likewise ----- 340 

Lest, moreover, nay, nathless - . - 341 

Not only, notwithstanding, no -■. - 341 

Now, neither ----- 342 

Or, otherwise, provided, since, still - - - 343 

Than, then 344 

Therefore, though, unless, whereas, whether, yet - 345 

Verbatories ----- 345 

Cormos verbatories ----- 346 

Seramus verbatories - 347 

Inseramus verbatories - 349 

Specimen of passimation - - - - 349 

Explanation of terms ----- 349 

Transverbation ----- 352 

Cormiflcation ------ 352 

Seramification ----- 352 

Duramification - - - - - 353 

Subramiflcation ----- 353 

Monoramiflcation ----- 353 

Coramiflcation - - - - - 353 

Seramic cormiflers - - - - - 354 

Duramic cormiflers - - - 354 

Cormic seramiflers ----- 355 

Duramic seramiflers - 355 

Prefix seramiflers ----- 355 

Cormic duramifiers - - - - 356 

Duramic subramiflers ... - 357 

Cormos modification - 357 

! Cormos modifiers ----- 358 

Seramus modification ... - 359 

Seramus modifiers ----- 359 

Duramus modification - - - - 359 

Duramus modifiers ----- 359 

j Proving rules ----- 359 

! Passimation ------ 3(50 



> 



442 CONTENTS. 

pag«. 

Scheme of plenary passimation - - - 361 

Scheme for cormos passimation - 361 

Scheme for seramus passimation - 362 

Scheme for inseramus passimation - - 363 

A full specimen of passimation by method I. - 364 

Exercises, and observations on certain words - 367 

Another - - - - - - 367 

As - - - - - - - 368 

Each ------- 369 

One 369 

Other - - 370 

That 371 

This - - - - - - - 372 

Those 372 

These - 373 

What 373 

Which 374 

Second method of passimation - - - 375 

Third method of passimation - 376 

Graduation rules - - - - - 376 

Part III. Syntithology 377 

Critical remarks upon the use of were with /, he; as, 

if I were 378 

Critical reflections of collective nouns, or cormi - 379 
Critical reflections upon the use of are, were, &c., 

where and occurs ; as, He, and she are - 382 

Theorem, secormos springs, &c. - - - 386 

Secormos inflections , 386 

Rules for correcting improprieties in Syntithology 392-424 
Cdnsignification ----- 423 

Punctuation ------ 424 

Hyphen 424 

Comma 424, 430 

Semicolon 429, 432 

Colon - - - - - - 432 

Period, Interrogation, Exclamation, Dash, Parenthesis, 

Apostrophe, Caret, Paragraph, Section, Brackets 433 
Index, Brace, Ellipsis, Acute Accent, Breve, Diae- 
resis, Asterisk, and Capitals - 434 
Contrast between the American, and British System 435 
Recommendations at the close. 



J. BLACKMARR'S 
ENGLISH GRAMMAR INSTITUTION. 



The Subscriber informs the public, that his Institution for teaching 
the American System of English Syntax by James Brown, is removed 
to Bread Street, No. 6, near Arch. 

This Institution is designed to accommodate those who desire to 
acquire the constructive philosophy of the English Language with 
great ease, expedition and accuracy without memorizing opponent defi- 
nitions, conflicting rules, and irrelevant notes. 

The Principal of this Institution has long been in the practice of 
teaching this science by the British System as presented by Mr. Mur- 
ray, and others ; but having taught the American System for the last 
year, he is fully convinced that the former bears no just comparison 
with the latter. The American System does not pretend to be an 
improvement upon any other, but a substitute for all others. Its prin- 
ciples are the frame-work philosophy of the English Language ; its 
nomenclature is legitimate, euphonious, and distinctive ; its definitions 
are sound, short, and graphic ; its rules are clear, few, and brief; and 
the method of teaching being pictorial, and scenic, is attractive, easy, 
and demonstrative. 

To obviate all objections which may be made to the new technicals, 
the pupils in this Institution are made thoroughly acquainted with both 
nomenclatures. 

Particular attention given to punctuation. 

Gentlemen may here be speedily qualified to teach, and thereby 
engage in a laudable, pleasant, useful, and lucrative employment. 

Accommodations are made for any who may come from a distance. 

The Institution is open for visiters, and pupils from 8 A. M. to 
9 P.M. 

Price for Instruction. 

For a course of lessons, to an individual, $20. 00 

To each, in a class of five, 10. 00 

To each, in a class of ten, 5. 00 

To each, in a class of twenty, 3. 00 

J. Blackmarr. 
Philadelphia, March, 1837. 

1 



APPROVERS OF THE SYSTEM. 



Philadelphia. 

Dr. S. B. Wylie, Professor of Languages in Pennsylvania University. 

Rev. S. W. Crawford, Principal of the Academy connected with the 
University. 

C. J. Ingersoll, Roberts Vaux, Wm. Meredith, D. P. Brown, Dr. W 
C Brinckle, Dr. A. Comstock, Thomas A. Taylor, Mr. Slack, Mr. Good- 
fellow, David Maclure, Thomas M. Raser, E. Fouse, S. H. Wilson, 
Mr. Trego, Mr. Depuy, Mr. Ashton, Mr. Anderson, John Saunderson, 
J. M. Duncan, John Erhart, Dr. F. Plummer, &c. &c. 

Pittsburg. — R. N. Smith, John N. M'Nivins, Thomas H. Harris. 

Harrisburg. — James Maginnis, S. Douglass, A. T. Dean, A. L. 
Keagy, J. D. Rupp. 

New York. 

De Witt Clinton, E. Nott, President of Union College ; Professor 
Yates, Union College ; Rev. Samuel B. Blatchford, Rev. John Chester, 
Rev. C. G. Somers, Rev. D. H. Barnes, Rev. C. SchaefFer, Rev. Solomon 
Brown, Rev. D. Parker, C. M. Thayer, Charles Spaulding, L. S. 
Lownsbury. 

Utica. — Charles Barlett, William Barbour, Euridge Whiffen, G. 
Comstock, Wm. Williams, L. Bayley, E. Ames, (teachers.) 

Ithaca — Wm. Irving, George C. Freer, M. Baird, G. D. Beers, Isaac 
Day, A G. Dunning, K. Hulin, Mr. Davis. 

Homer. — Samuel B. Woolworth. 

Cazenovia. — Daniel M'Ewen, Daniel E. Burhans. 

Maryland. 

Rev. John Findlay, James Gould, Mr. Stewart, S. Jones, Mr. Pack- 
ard, J. Dyke, Mr. Mills, Wm. Wickes, E. Bennett, J. V. Berry, D. H. 
Bingham, David C. Rosco, C. Coleman, J. Brown. 

Mount St. Mary's Seminary. — Rev. James Lynch, J. Butler, John 
H. M'Caffery, James Curny, Mathew Taylor, Barnard O. Cavanagh, 
John M'Clasky, Edward Sourin, Edward Collins, Thomas Butler, (all 
professors.) 

District of Columbia. 

Rev. Thomas Wheat, Benjamin Hallowell, John R. Pierpoint, Mr. 
Allison, C. K. Gardner. 

Kentucky. 

S. J. Anderson, James Holton, R. Fleming, James Fleming, B. F 
Reeves. 



RE C OMMEND ATIONS. 

In addition to the recommendation already given by the under- 
signed ; he is much gratified in being able to furnish the following 
testimonials of approbation. 

I have paid some attention to Mr. Brown's "Appeal from the British 
system of English Grammar, to common sense," and cannot help con- 
sidering it a work of deep thought and profound reflection. 

Mr. Brown's Appeal, duly appreciated, and adopted into our schools, 
will soon disenthral the grammar of our language from the shackles 
fastened upon it by the most celebrated grammarians, from the earliest 
period, down to the present day. The crudities, inconsistencies, and 
absurdities of the definitions, and views of Murray's system, whose 
empire, for many years has been the most extensive, will, upon the 
perusal of this Appeal, appear obvious ; and utterly indefensible. 

The mind of the pupil, relieved from the benumbing influence of 
such a course as has heretofore prevailed, will advance with intelligence, 
and, consequently, with pleasure, and make more headway in three 
months, by Mr. Brown's plan, than in four times that period, by the 
common method. 

In attending to the mechanism of the language, he (the pupil) is 
insensibly introduced into the most interesting and useful parts of its 
philology — and his intellectual powers become gradually developed, 
stimulated, and delighted by the recognition of its philosophic principles. 
In short, Mr. Brown's system forms a new epoch in the history of Eng- 
lish Syntax as important in our language, as the steamboat in our waters. 

The new nomenclature employed by Mr. Brown, seems to be the 
most formidable objection to the introduction of his system, into our 
schools. After all, this objection is not so great, as at the first sight, it 
might appear to be. All admit the advantage of having the technicals 
of an art or science, removed out of the reach of the fluctuations in 
meaning, to which the words in common use, are constantly subject. 
Besides, Mr. Brown's cormos, se-ramus, duramus, &c. are just as intel- 
ligible to the juvenile pupil, at the age when the English grammar is 
put into his hands, as noun, verb, adjective, &c. The difficulties of the 
vocabulary, therefore, are more imaginary than real. A very short 
time will render these terms as familiar as those, incomparably less 
appropriate in the common grammars. 

It is true, in many cases, innovation, even of the most useful kind, 
has much opposition to expect from long established habits, and preju- 
dices. The introduction of the Dutch winnowing fan, into a neighbour- 
ing island, created, among some of the good people much uneasiness, 
and was decried as leading to Atheism, involving a distrust in Divine 
providence, as if God would no longer send the west wind through the 
threshing floors of their barns. Prejudices against this system, equally 
unfounded, will soon vanish on its introduction into our schools. 

I consider it the most intellectual system of grammar I have ever 
seen ; and whether it shall succeed, or not, at least it deserves to suc- 
ceed. Samuel B. Wtlie, 

Vice Provost of the University of Pennsylvania. 

Bellvue Place, August 15, 1836. 



Philadelphia, July 6, 1835. 
The examination which I have been able to give James Brown's 
System of English Syntax, has satisfied me of its great superiority in 
almost, if not in every point of view, to the old system ; and that the 
advantages, resulting from its general introduction, would much more 
than compensate for the temporary inconvenience of making the ex- 
change. The system in my opinion, should make a successful appeal 
to every lover of philological truth. Samuel W. Crawford. 

From Mr. C. B. Trego's letter, Principal of an English, French, 
and Classical Academy, Philadelphia. 

This System, from its novelty, and its wide difference from the com- 
mon forms of parsing, will doubtless appear rather strange to superficial 
observers ; but to those who will examine, understand, and test it by 
application to language, the author may confidently appeal for appro- 
bation. 



From John Saunderson's letter, Philadelphia. 

Bitter complaints are made by critics and philosophers in Great 
Britain of the insufficiency of their English grammars. They are 
compilations, says the Edinburgh Review, of silly rules, crowding the 
memory, and debasing the understanding of the pupil — a jargon of 
nick-name definitions, the learning of which is a mere ad captandum 
ceremony, making a parrot of the pupil to delight his grandmother, and 
to give notoriety to his schoolmaster and academy. * * * 

Brown is emphatically a grammarian. He has invaded this province 
of philosophy, and made it his own by conquest 



Albany, June 24, 1822 
I have read with attention a book by Mr. James Brown, on the sub- 
ject of English grammar. The work evinces acuteness of mind, and 
originality of thought. The defects of the old system are clearly and 
forcibly exposed ; and the one which he proposes as a substitute, 
although not presented as a finished work, evinces a long and familiar 
acquaintance with the subject ; and in practice, is so readily compre- 
hended even by young children, that I cannot but consider it well 
worthy of public adoption. I have examined children, both singly and 
in classes, with but a short course in this, whose progress was truly 
astonishing. The author of this work is a man of great personal 
modesty, and possesses native talent for philological investigation: I 
hope that he may receive the encouragement which his work so justly 
merits, that the efforts of his long application may at length be amply 
rewarded. De Witt Clinton. 



The following is from the letter of the Rev. Mr. Findlay, Baltimore. 

No one can read the criticisms of Mr. Brown without feeling ashamed 
at once of his own subjection to authority, and gratified with the 
author's ingenuity and correctness. Brown is a philosopher : he has 



founded his system of grammar upon the basis of the mind ; he has 
succeeded in redeeming the grammar of our language from every thing 
arbitrary. The learner is treated as a thinking being ; instead of, as 
Lindley Murray says, or cs the rule says, there will be a fitness in the 
thing itself, which will commend itself to the judgment and taste of the 
learner. The day is at hand when a complete revolution is to be ac- 
complished, when the bonds of irrational prejudice must be broken off, 
and the mind of the rising generation, in the first stages of scientific 
attainments, taught to assert its native dignity and independence. But 
what can patience and genius do in these unobtrusive walks of science, 
without the aid of the influential in society 1 Let the system have a 
fair trial and investigation ; if found to be the system of truths why not 
adopt it ] 



Recommendation by Mr. Duncan, 

I have examined Mr. Brown's "American Grammar,'' and from a 
thorough conviction of its utility, have introduced it into my school. 

It is unnecessary for me to particularize the merits of this work. 
Several eminent teachers have already, in a brief, yet comprehensive 
manner, anticipated much of w T hat I would say ; and their testimony 
is before the public. 

To call it the best system of " English Grammar," would be merely 
repeating what has been said of almost every new publication. All, 
who give it a fair unprejudiced examination, must unite with me in 
calling it " the only true system." It contains a triumphant appeal 
from the memory to the judgment, and enables the pupil to acquire, 
with comparatively little exertion, a correct grammatical knowledge 
of the English language. 

It is hoped that a generous public will not neglect one, who has 
spent upwards of fourteen years in loneliness and toil, that we and our 
posterity might reap the fruits of his valuable labours. 

Joseph M. Duncan. 



I have been much gratified in the examination of a work, entitled, 
" The American Grammar." And I am well satisfied that it possesses 
a superiority over the popular system, which should entitle it to the 
first attention of an enlightened community. 

The true philosophy and the striking simplicity of its principles, 
and the judicious arrangement of all its parts, must convince every 
unprejudiced mind of the ultimate success of this system. The Ame- 
rican system seems to me to be the only Grammar suited to the genius 
of our language, to the ease of the teacher, and to the capacity of youth. 

This work, I am happy to say, prostrates all the difficulties which 
have hitherto existed in English philology — difficulties which have 
defeated both teacher and pupil! In a work, entitled, "Brown's 
Appeal from the British System," &c. the public will find those 
numerous points which have been the fruitful cause of the many phi- 
lological controversies, brought into complete accordance with the 
nature of the language, and the common sense of man ! 

1* 



6 

The author of this American production has performed a double 
task ; he has demolished the old edifice, and erected a new one ; and 
to say the least of his labours, I do consider them a gigantic step in the 
march of intellectual improvement. 

I sincerely hope they may receive that attention which they so justly 
merit from the American people. 

Harrisburg, February 20, 1829. A. L. Keagy. 



The American Grammar. — It is beyond all doubt with me that the 
American system of English Grammar, by James Brown, is worthy 
of that country's patronage and adoption, in reference to which the 
work is named. It is now nearly two years since I commenced the 
examination of this book, and so strong is my conviction of the great 
superiority of this production, that I have recently introduced it into 
my academy. 

Far be it from me, however, to deride the old system of Grammar, or 
to abandon that work in disgust ; for the good the learned Mr. Murray 
has done to society, I hold his memory in high veneration. I consider 
his work on philology a star in the firmament of science. But while I 
look upon several modern authors as opaque bodies in this firmament, 
I view the American Grammar as the sun himself. 

I have read, examined, and compared; and have at last yielded to 
the omnipotence of truth. 

I am fully sensible that the enterprise undertaken by this soldier, in 
the war of innovation, is a momentous event. It is a new and impor- 
tant sera in the science of language. This innovation in itself is an 
attempt to tumble into ruins one of the fairest fabrics upon the hill of 
science. And should it succeed, of which, I have no doubt, in its con- 
sequences, it must detract from the fame of one of the first scholars of 
the last age. 

But the world are no strangers to the overthrow of system, and the 
revolution of science. These are events in which genius and philoso- 
phy have amazed, while they have advanced the world to its present 
state of excellence. Where truth has sustained the innovation, the 
world has ever adopted it, and applauded the innovator. What one 
age hath built up, another hath torn down. And in this way some 
of the arts and sciences have been brought within the reach of reason ; 
hence, placed beyond the power of criticism itself. I have long desired 
to see English philology brought up to this elevated condition ; and 
unless I am blind while I think I see, James Brown is justly entitled to 
the credit, and America to the honour of giving English philology, once 
a theme of Johnson's pen, this exalted station. 

I would invite all who feel interested in the subject, to the perusal 
of a work by James Brown, called " An Appeal from the British System 
of English Grammar to Common Sense." 

Wm. Miels, Teacher, Baltimore, 



Harrisburg, Dec, 29, 1829. 
Having examined Brown's American Grammar with attention, I feel 
myself constrained by the force of conviction to pronounce it the only 



system of Grammar legitimately adapted to the genius of the English 
language. My respect for the author, and, above all, the pleasing 
anticipation of the proud eminence on which the language of this 
mighty Republic, will, at some period not very distant, pre-eminently 
stand, and overlook, with commanding dignity, all the other languages 
of the world, induce me most sincerely to wish for the general adoption 
of the American Grammar. James Magin^es. 



In a letter of recommendation given by ten of the Professors of 
Mount St. Mary's Seminary, at Emmittsburg, it is said, — 

" Having perused his work, and heard him lecture upon the subject, 
we believe ourselves warranted in saying, that Mr. Brown has devoted 
the powers of a strong mind, and much care to an investigation of the 
principles of our language, and that his labours are calculated to throw 
great light upon this science. In his ' Appeal/ he has successfully 
pointed out the defects of the old system — and in his own Grammar, 
he has divested the science of many useless technicalities, and substi- 
tuted concise definitions for the vague descriptions generally given. 
He has, too, in his own Grammar, introduced a plan of initiating youth 
into the constructive principles of the language, which, on account of 
its originality, and the great advantages that must result from it, reflects 
credit upon its inventor. We allude to his system of Word Connection, 
and Sectional Graduation — it is a plan calculated to give useful exer- 
cise to the mind, and to prepare it for a thorough investigation of our 
language." 

Recommendation from J. Dyke. 

Having carefully examined the " American Grammar," adopted it in 
my school, and had some experience in the use of it, I consider this 
work a most happy, timely, and judicious innovation upon the best 
system of philology the English tongue had to boast. I say happy, 
because of the masterly manner of its execution, — timely, because there 
were certain pettifoggers in grammar, who, for the honour of science, 
wanted crushing, — and judicious, because its author has saved every 
item that was worth preserving from the unavoidable wreck of our old 
friend Murray. 

No English scholar, however learned, will feel himself independent 
of this book. Grammarians who have been made such, by the instruc- 
tions of Murray, will be amply repaid for resuming the subject, if they 
look well into the renovated system now presented. They, especially, 
will find the task both easy and delightful ; they will acknowledge the 
development of superior light, confess the removal of difficulties, and 
see innumerable obscurities chased from science. 

How much the pupil has accomplished, when able to dissect a sen- 
tence, and transpose its members, every teacher knows. Without a 
great deal of this mechanical practice, a grammarian cannot be made ; 
but for its correct performance, no method ever existed so efficient, so 
true, and so practicable, as that which the American Grammar now 
furnishes. Its parsing plan, I mean the whole of Word Conjection, 
and Sectional Graduation, must certainly prove of incalculable utility. 



In short, its improvements are radical — exposing and abandoning the 
fundamental errors of the British system. Its definitions are correct, 
lucid, and elegant, challenging the keenest criticism, and doing honour 
to American pretensions. Its arrangement looks like SCIENCE. The 
style of the book is the style which philosophy loves — truth and sim 
plicity are its striking characteristics. And to say the whole in few 
words ; the American Grammar, by James Brown, seems to possess a 
complete fitness for that only legitimate purpose, and ultimate end of 
all grammar — namely, to help us transcribe upon our neighbour's mind, 
a true and faithful copy of the picture on our own. Success to all 
similar " innovations." J. DYKE, Teacher, 

Baltimore, December 9, 1827 



Sir, — Since last June, when I first saw something of your Word 
Conjection and Sectional Graduation system, I have felt considerable 
interest in your Grammar. This, however, has been much increased 
from using the work in my school. I now freely confess that I con 
sider your book, so far as regards the science of Grammar, invaluable. 
It calls the intellect of the scholar into use continually, and grounds 
him in the relation of words with each other. 

The definitions in your work are clear, and the only correct ones 
which I have ever seen. 

Your Word Conjection and Sectional Graduation system has assisted 
my boys in parsing so much, that they have now little difficulty in ana- 
lyzing the language. 

Your Syntactical rules embrace, and fully embrace, the relations of 
the different parts of speech. I rejoice that there is a prospect of doing 
away the old system of English philology ; a system which requires so 
much time and study ; a system by which the truth can never be ac- 
quired even by the vast body of notes and exceptions which have been 
introduced to prop up, and support its defective rules and false princi- 
ples. The labour of the teacher is now comparatively little ; and the 
long journey of the pupil very much shortened. I see new beauties in 
the work every day. You have my best wishes for the prosperity of 
your system. Richard R. Fenner, 

Teacher, Baltimore, Old Town. 



I have examined Brown's " American English Grammar," and think 
it deserves the attention of every friend to the best interests of youth. 
The author has simplified the art by discarding many unnecessary dis 
tinctions, which serve only to perplex the learner; and in the arrange- 
ment of the different parts, has admirably adapted his work to the pur- 
pose of juvenile instruction. At the commencement of the study, the 
pupil is called to exercise his judgment in making distinctions founded 
in the nature of language ; each preparing his mind for that which shall 
carry him nearer to the attainment of his object. From a conviction 
of the superior merits of his work, I have introduced it into my school, 
and have recommended it to my patrons, as decidedly preferable to our 
present popular system. John Ob ear. 

Washington, D. C. ApHl 3, 1826. 



Baltimore, January 8, 1828. 
From a comparison of the " American Grammar" with other systems 
which I have used, its superior excellence has induced me to adopt it 
in preference to any other. David C. Rosco. 

Frederick, February 17, 1827. 

Dear Sir, — Permit me to introduce to your acquaintance and friendly 
attention Mr. James Browx, author of the American Grammar. From 
the superior excellence of Mr. B.'s system of English philology, I have 
been induced to introduce it into my school. It has, I believe, been 
introduced into all the principal schools of this place ; and will event- 
ually, in my opinion, supersede the use of all other systems. Any 
assistance you can render Mr. Brown, by promoting the object of his 
visit to your town, will be duly acknowledged by, dear sir, your obe- 
dient and humble servant, D. H. Bingham, 

Principal of Fredericldown Military Academy. 

Mr. G. Day, Carlisle, Penn. 



American Grammar. — I have examined Brown's American Eng- 
lish Grammar, and introduced it into my school. The principles upon 
which it is founded are correct, simple, clear, and important. The 
Sectional Graduation alone, is sufficient to recommend its introduction, 
into all seminaries of learning. James V Berry, 

Teacher, Glade Academy, Frederick Co. Md. 



I think that the British system of English Grammar is too defective 
to enable one to acquire a correct knowledge of the grammar of our 
language — and as I consider the American System abundantly com- 
petent for this purpose, I have introduced it into my school, and hope 
others will introduce it into theirs. C. Coleman. 

Hagerstown, January 8, 1827. 

From the Rev. Mr. Morrison. 

Baltimore, July, 1827. 
I have attentively perused Mr. James Brown's American English 
Grammar, and in stating my opinion of it, I must say that it possesses 
much merit. Even to the student who has been through Murray's 
system, I consider the American Grammar an invaluable work. I shall 
put it into the hands of my pupils. 



Boonsborough, January 19, 1827. 
The American Grammar is a work with which I am much pleased, 
and have already introduced it into my school. Jas. Brown. 



From Benjamin Hallowell. 
It is a fact generally admitted by those who have given attention to 
the subject, that nearly all of the many recent publications on English 
Grammar, have contained very little or nothing new. They have con- 
sisted merely of different modifications of the same definitions, and of 
the same rules — and they have been swelled by the same errors, that 



10 

are contained in the works preceding them. The effect of this upon 
the public mind, has been to make it distrustful of all works on the 
same subject ; hence it is, that a work, even of real merit, must find 
considerable difficulty in commanding sufficient attention to make its 
merits known. Under these circumstances, having fully satisfied my- 
self that the system of Grammar, now offered by James Brown, is en- 
tirely different from those which have preceded it — that it is a work of 
real merit, and the only one, so far as I have seen, that contains correct 
definitions of the parts of speech, and exhibits a correct view of the 
grammar of our language, I am induced to solicit those who feel inte- 
rested in the subject, to give this work an examination. One of the 
features in which it is strikingly different from other works on this sub- 
ject, is, that it exercises the judgment together with the memory of the 
pupil. Benjamin Halloweii, 

Alexandria Boarding School, 2d mo. 22d, 1826. 

From the Rev. Mr. Barnes, Principal of the High School, City of 
New York. 
Mr. James Brown, — Dear Sir : Your system of Grammar ought 
not, in my opinion, to be compared with any thing that has been pre- 
viously published. Its principles are new, and highly beautiful and 
interesting ; they are calculated to display the full force of our language, 
to correct mistakes and misapprehensions, and to settle, with admirable 
precision, the meaning of a sentence. I have been gratified and in- 
structed by attending to this new Philosophic Grammar : and I most 
heartily wish you may receive that encouragement which you so justly 
deserve. Most cordially yours, D. H. Barnes. 



From the Rev. Mr. Brown, City of New York. 
Mr. Brown, — Sir : As I have long felt the radical defects of the 
Old system of English Grammar — a system which nothing but the 
prejudice of education can render even tolerable, I am prepared to hail 
the advent of Light and Truth upon this important subject with pecu- 
liar pleasure. You need not be informed that I have examined your 
system with some degree of attention ; and permit me to say, sir, that 
the examination has been attended with no ordinary degree of pleasure ! 
If ignorance is not preferable to knowledge — falsehood to truth — and 
darkness to light, you will, no doubt, discover, ere long, the fruits of. 
your assiduous labours, disclosing themselves in an abundant harvest 
of good to our common country. I remain, &c. 

Solyman Brown, 
Principal of the Classical 4* Belles-hettres Academy, N. York. 



From Mr. Jones, of Baltimore. 
Having given the American Grammar a thorough examination, I am 
ready to say, that in my opinion, it excels the present popular system 
of English Grammar, as far as truth excels error, or simplicity com- 
plexity. It does not, like the old system, abound in rules and defini- 
tions, which, when applied, are at war with each other ! The rules 
and definitions given in the " American System," are consistent with 



11 

the genius of the language of which it treats. These were my impres- 
sions from a mere examination of this work— and now, having acted 
under these impressions, introduced it into my Academy, and seen the 
many new beauties, which, upon an application of its principles, have 
presented themselves, I most heartily hope that it may receive a general 
and speedy adoption. 

Will the fact of this system's being an innovation cause it to b? 
rejected 1 By those who have taken it upon themselves to support 
some favourite author, innovation may be regarded with a jealous eye. 
But what true American will persist in the use of a British system of 
English philology, so little analogous to the nature of our vernacular 
tongue, as is the system by Mr. Murray, to the exclusion of the Ame- 
rican system, which is founded in truth, and sustained by philosophy 
itself? 

Some may say that it is difficult to teach by the American Grammar. 
It is not so, however. True, no teacher who is ignorant of the science, 
can teach by this system, for the pupil, in this system, has not merely 
to commit to memory, and prate his lessons like a parrot — but he must 
apply the definitions and rules by the aid of his thinking faculties. 
Hence, the pupil learns to think, which relieves the teacher, and greatly 
diminishes his labour. I would invite teachers and parents to a candid 
perusal of a work, called— 1 ' An Appeal from the British System of 
English Grammar to Common Se?ise," by James Brown. 

This will satisfy all who may read it, even those who have learned 
Murray *s Grammar, that they will do well to give close attention to the 
American system, by J. Brown. W. B. Jojves, Teacher 

Baltimore, August 1, 1827. 



The America?! English Grammar. 

When I first obtained this excellent production, I very candidly 
expressed to its author, my strong partiality for the Grammar of Mr. 
Murray. I remarked to Mr. Brown, that the continued attempts at 
improvement upon Mr. Murray's system, had, in my opinion, com- 
pletely failed. 

The novelty of the American Grammar soon excited my attention ; 
and a perusal has convinced me that it is an important acquisition to 
English philology. In this work, I think that the world has obtained 
the long desired desideratum ; namely, the means of harmonizing in 
every case, the sense of all correct writers, with grammatical rules and 
definitions. 

As a book for the school student, I think the American Grammar is 
entitled to the highest commendation. From the commencement, it is 
attended with less trouble to the teacher, and less difficulty to the pupil 
than any former system, while it imparts more useful knowledge of the 
language than any other system of grammar from which I have ever 
given instruction. 

I think the arrangement of the work is admirable — it is calculated 
to interest the learner, and to relieve the teacher. The advancement 
of the pupil is gradual — and from understanding what he undertakes 
to learn, he is encouraged to look forward to ultimate success. 



12 

The design of the writer of these brief remarks, is simply to give the 
result of his own investigation of this book, — and he thinks that he 
hazards nothing in saying that a candid examination of the work must 
produce entire and high approbation. 

With these views, he candidly unites with the many recommenda- 
tions of the work, given by more competent judges, in wishing to the 
learned author complete success. Wm, Wickes, Teacher. 

Baltimore, August 6, 1828. 



The Rev. Thomas Wheat, of Baltimore, concludes his observations 
upon the works of Mr. Brown, in the following manner : — 

" Having been long accustomed to test every position of grammatical 
inquiry by Murray's rules, as an infallible standard, I was predisposed 
to regard as highly presumptuous, any innovator. I have risen, how- 
ever, from an examination of the works before me, no less mortified at 
my long subjection to the falsehood of arbitrary dogmas, than delighted 
with the new and satisfactory truths advocated by our able author. 
With the aid of this common sense system, I shall hereafter be intel- 
ligible to my pupils, and not disgust and tire them by attempting to 
justify the application of definitions and rules, the inconsistency of 
which may be made evident even to their feeble powers. Finally, 
whether we consider the genius of our language, the narrowness of 
youthful capacity, the pleasure of the learner, the ease of the teacher, 
or the expense of the parent, the American Grammar ranks far above 
all others." 



Mr. Pierpont, of Alexandria, upon Mr, Brown's Grammar, con- 
cludes thus, — 

"A system has been formed, a revolution is taking place, under 
which the patience of the teacher will not be exhausted in explaining 
absurd principles, nor youth be disgusted by being taught to prate about 
what they cannot understand. 

" After these remarks, it is almost superfluous to add, that the Ame- 
rican system will soon be introduced into my school. 

" J. R. Pierpont." 



•a Xi 






«HO* 



Ho* 




.1 /^> 

Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
^ Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: Oct. 2006 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township. PA 16066 
(724) 779-21 1 1 




dobd: 3ROS. 

LIBRARY BINOING 






ST. AUGUSTINE ^ v V t^ttf&W*.. ^ V*- » Vs 



'W 




LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 



003 238 433 A 



I 



i 



